AQ-C215

Capacitor bank protection IED

Instruction manual
AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

Table of contents
1. Manual rreevision nonottes
es..................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................. 6
1.1. Version 2 revision notes ........................................................................................................ 6
2. A
Abbr
bbreevia
viations
tions .............................................................................................................................. 7
3. General ....................................................................................................................................... 9
4. IED user int
interface
erface......................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................... 10
4.1. Panel structure ................................................................................................................... 10
4.1.1. Local panel structure ................................................................................................ 10
4.2. Mimic and main menu......................................................................................................... 11
4.2.1. Basic configuration ................................................................................................... 11
4.2.2. Navigation in the main configuration menus .............................................................. 12
4.3. General menu..................................................................................................................... 12
4.4. Protection menu ................................................................................................................. 15
4.5. Control menu...................................................................................................................... 22
4.6. Communication menu......................................................................................................... 37
4.7. Measurement menu............................................................................................................ 40
4.8. Monitoring menu................................................................................................................. 46
4.9. Configuring user levels and their passwords........................................................................ 49
5. F
Functions
unctions .................................................................................................................................. 52
5.1. Functions included in AQ-C215 .......................................................................................... 52
5.2. Measurements.................................................................................................................... 53
5.2.1. Current measurement and scaling ............................................................................ 53
5.2.2. Voltage measurement and scaling ............................................................................ 67
5.2.3. Power and energy calculation ................................................................................... 77
5.2.4. Frequency tracking and scaling ................................................................................ 84
5.3. Protection functions ............................................................................................................ 87
5.3.1. General properties of a protection function ............................................................... 87
5.3.2. Capacitor bank module .......................................................................................... 100
5.3.2.1. Capacitor bank overload protection (Icol>; 49OL) ...................................... 103
5.3.2.2. Capacitor bank current unbalance protection (Iuc>; 46C) .......................... 108
5.3.3. Non-directional overcurrent protection (I>; 50/51)................................................... 111
5.3.4. Non-directional earth fault protection (I0>; 50N/51N) .............................................. 116
5.3.5. Negative sequence overcurrent/ phase current reversal/ current unbalance protection
(I2>; 46/46R/46L) ............................................................................................................. 121
5.3.6. Harmonic overcurrent protection (Ih>; 50H/51H/68H)............................................. 126
5.3.7. Overvoltage protection (U>; 59) ............................................................................. 132
5.3.8. Undervoltage protection (U<; 27) ........................................................................... 139
5.3.9. Neutral overvoltage protection (U0>; 59N).............................................................. 146
5.3.10. Sequence voltage protection (U1/U2>/<; 47/27P/59PN) ....................................... 152
5.3.11. Non-directional undercurrent protection (I<; 37) ................................................... 158
5.3.12. Line thermal overload protection (TF>; 49F).......................................................... 162
5.3.13. Voltage memory ................................................................................................... 182
5.3.14. Arc fault protection (IArc>/I0Arc>; 50Arc/50NArc) ................................................ 185
5.3.15. Programmable stage (PGx>/<; 99) ....................................................................... 192
5.4. Control functions .............................................................................................................. 207
5.4.1. Setting group selection ........................................................................................... 207
5.4.2. Object control and monitoring................................................................................. 214
5.4.3. Switch-on-to-fault (SOTF) ....................................................................................... 224
5.4.4. Milliampere output control ...................................................................................... 225
5.4.5. Programmable control switch ................................................................................. 230
5.5. Monitoring functions ......................................................................................................... 231
5.5.1. Current transformer supervision ............................................................................. 231
5.5.2. Voltage transformer supervision (60) ...................................................................... 239
5.5.3. Disturbance recorder (DR) ..................................................................................... 242
5.5.4. Measurement recorder ........................................................................................... 253
5.5.5. Total harmonic distortion (THD) .............................................................................. 257

1 © Arcteq Relays Ltd

 AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

5.5.6. Measurement value recorder .................................................................................. 262

6. S
Syyst
stem
em int
integra
egration
tion...................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................... 265
6.1. Communication protocols ................................................................................................. 265
6.1.1. NTP........................................................................................................................ 265
6.1.2. Modbus/TCP and Modbus/RTU .............................................................................. 266
6.1.3. Modbus I/O ............................................................................................................ 267
6.1.4. IEC 61850 .............................................................................................................. 267
6.1.5. GOOSE.................................................................................................................. 271
6.1.6. IEC 103 .................................................................................................................. 273
6.1.7. DNP3 ..................................................................................................................... 274
6.1.8. IEC 101/104 ........................................................................................................... 276
6.1.9. SPA........................................................................................................................ 278
6.2. Analog fault registers ........................................................................................................ 278
6.3. Real time measurements to communication ...................................................................... 278
7. Connections and applic applica ation examples
examples....................................................................................
.................................................................................... 281
7.1. Connections of AQ-C215 ................................................................................................. 281
7.2. Application example and its connections........................................................................... 283
7.3. Two-phase, three-wire ARON input connection ................................................................. 284
7.4. Trip circuit supervision (95) ............................................................................................... 285
8. Construction and installa
installation
tion ................................................................................................... 290
8.1. Construction..................................................................................................................... 290
8.2. CPU module ..................................................................................................................... 293
8.3. Current measurement module .......................................................................................... 295
8.4. Voltage measurement module........................................................................................... 296
8.5. Digital input module (optional)........................................................................................... 297
8.6. Digital output module (optional) ........................................................................................ 299
8.7. Arc protection module (optional) ....................................................................................... 300
8.8. RTD & mA input module (optional) .................................................................................... 301
8.9. Serial RS-232 communication module (optional) ............................................................... 303
8.10. LC 100 Mbps Ethernet communication module (optional)................................................ 304
8.11. Double ST 100 Mbps Ethernet communication module (optional) .................................... 305
8.12. Double RJ-45 10/100 Mbps Ethernet communication module (optional) .......................... 307
8.13. Milliampere (mA) I/O module (optional) ........................................................................... 309
8.14. Dimensions and installation............................................................................................. 309
9. T
Technic
echnicalal da
data
ta ......................................................................................................................... 313
9.1. Hardware.......................................................................................................................... 313
9.1.1. Measurements ....................................................................................................... 313
9.1.1.1. Current measurement................................................................................ 313
9.1.1.2. Voltage measurement ................................................................................ 314
9.1.1.3. Power and energy measurement................................................................ 315
9.1.1.4. Frequency measurement ........................................................................... 316
9.1.2. CPU & Power supply .............................................................................................. 316
9.1.2.1. Auxiliary voltage......................................................................................... 316
9.1.2.2. CPU communication ports......................................................................... 317
9.1.2.3. CPU digital inputs ...................................................................................... 318
9.1.2.4. CPU digital outputs.................................................................................... 318
9.1.3. Option cards .......................................................................................................... 319
9.1.3.1. Digital input module ................................................................................... 319
9.1.3.2. Digital output module................................................................................. 320
9.1.3.3. Arc protection module ............................................................................... 320
9.1.3.4. Milliampere module (mA out & mA in) ........................................................ 321
9.1.3.5. RTD & mA input module ............................................................................ 322
9.1.3.6. RS-232 & serial fiber communication module............................................. 322
9.1.3.7. Double LC 100 Mbps Ethernet communication module .............................. 322
9.1.4. Display ................................................................................................................... 322
9.2. Functions.......................................................................................................................... 323
9.2.1. Protection functions................................................................................................ 323
9.2.1.1. Non-directional overcurrent protection (I>; 50/51)...................................... 323
9.2.1.2. Non-directional earth fault protection (I0>; 50N/51N) ................................. 324

© Arcteq Relays Ltd 2

AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

9.2.1.3. Negative sequence overcurrent/ phase current reversal/ current unbalance

protection (I2>; 46/46R/46L)................................................................................... 325
9.2.1.4. Harmonic overcurrent protection (Ih>; 50H/51H/68H) ................................ 325
9.2.1.5. Overvoltage protection (U>; 59) ................................................................ 326
9.2.1.6. Undervoltage protection (U<; 27) .............................................................. 327
9.2.1.7. Neutral overvoltage protection (U0>; 59N)................................................. 328
9.2.1.8. Sequence voltage protection (U1/U2>/<; 47/27P/59NP) ............................ 329
9.2.1.9. Line thermal overload protection (TF>; 49F)............................................... 330
9.2.1.10. Non-directional undercurrent protection (I<; 37)....................................... 330
9.2.1.11. Arc fault protection (IArc>/I0Arc>; 50Arc/50NArc) (optional) .................... 331
9.2.2. Control functions .................................................................................................... 331
9.2.2.1. Setting group selection .............................................................................. 331
9.2.2.2. Object control and monitoring.................................................................... 332
9.2.2.3. Switch-on-to-fault (SOTF) .......................................................................... 332
9.2.3. Monitoring functions ............................................................................................... 332
9.2.3.1. Current transformer supervision ................................................................ 332
9.2.3.2. Voltage transformer supervision (60) ......................................................... 333
9.2.3.3. Disturbance recorder................................................................................. 334
9.2.3.4. Circuit breaker wear monitoring ................................................................. 334
9.2.3.5. Total harmonic distortion............................................................................ 334
9.2.3.6. Voltage memory ........................................................................................ 335
9.3. Tests and environmental ................................................................................................... 335
10. Or
Ordering
dering inf
informa
ormation
tion ............................................................................................................. 338
11. Contact and rre efer
erence
ence inf
informa
ormationtion.........................................................................................
......................................................................................... 340

3 © Arcteq Relays Ltd

 AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

Disclaimer
Please read these instructions carefully before using the equipment or taking any other actions with
respect to the equipment. Only trained and qualified persons are allowed to perform installation,
operation, service or maintenance of the equipment. Such qualified persons have the responsibility to
take all appropriate measures, including e.g. use of authentication, encryption, anti-virus programs,
safe switching programs etc. necessary to ensure a safe and secure environment and usability of the
equipment. The warranty granted to the equipment remains in force only provided that the instructions
contained in this document have been strictly complied with.

Nothing contained in this document shall increase the liability or extend the warranty obligations of the
manufacturer Arcteq Relays Ltd. The manufacturer expressly disclaims any and all liability for any
damages and/or losses caused due to a failure to comply with the instructions contained herein or
caused by persons who do not fulfil the aforementioned requirements. Furthermore, the manufacturer
shall not be liable for possible errors in this document.

Please note that you must always comply with applicable local legislation and regulations. The
manufacturer gives no warranties that the content of this document is in all respects in line with local
laws and regulations and assumes no liability for such possible deviations.

You are advised to notify the manufacturer in case you become aware of any errors in this document or
of defects in the equipment.

The manufacturer reserves the right to update or amend this document at any time.

© Arcteq Relays Ltd 4

AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

Copyright
Copyright © Arcteq Relays Ltd. 2020. All rights reserved.

5 © Arcteq Relays Ltd

 AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

1. Manual revision notes

1.1. Version 2 revision notes
Revision 2.00

Date 6.6.2019

- New more consistent look.

- Improved descriptions generally in many chapters.

Changes - Improved readability of a lot of drawings and images.

- Updated protection functions included in every IED manual.

- Every protection IED type now has connection drawing, application example drawing with function block diagram
and application example with wiring.

Revision 2.01

Date 6.11.2019

- First revision of AQ-C215.

- Added description for LED test and button test.

- Complete rewrite of every chapter.

Changes
- Improvements to many drawings and formula images.

- Order codes revised.

- Added double ST 100 Mbps Ethernet communication module and Double RJ45 10/100 Mbps Ethernet
communication module descriptions

Revision
2.02

Date 7.7.2020

- Added chapters for "Capacitor bank module" and Icol> & Cnu> functions.
Changes
- Added the modded steps for the non-directional earth fault protection function (NEF1 and NEF2).

Revision 2.03

Date 27.8.2020

- C215 order code updated to include the option for conformal coating.
Changes
- Icol> function's Operating time settings updated.

© Arcteq Relays Ltd 6

AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

2. Abbreviations
AI – Analog input

AR – Auto-recloser

ASDU – Application service data unit

AVR – Automatic voltage regulator

BCD – Binary-coded decimal

CB – Circuit breaker

CBFP – Circuit breaker failure protection

CLPU – Cold load pick-up

CPU – Central processing unit

CT – Current transformer

CTM – Current transformer module

CTS – Current transformer supervision

DG – Distributed generation

DHCP – Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol

DI – Digital input

DO – Digital output

DOL – Direct-on-line

DR – Disturbance recorder

DT – Definite time

FF – Fundamental frequency

FFT – Fast Fourier transform

FTP – File Transfer Protocol

GI – General interrogation

HMI – Human-machine interface

HR – Holding register

HV – High voltage

HW – Hardware

IDMT– Inverse definite minimum time

IED – Intelligent electronic device

7 © Arcteq Relays Ltd
 AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

IGBT – Insulated-gate bipolar transistor

I/O – Input and output

IRIG-B – Inter-range instruction group, timecode B

LCD – Liquid-crystal display

LED – Light emitting diode

LV – Low voltage

NC – Normally closed

NO – Normally open

NTP – Network Time Protocol

RPM – Railway protection module

RMS – Root mean square

RSTP – Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol

RTD – Resistance temperature detector

RTU – Remote terminal unit

SCADA – Supervisory control and data acquisition

SG – Setting group

SOTF – Switch-on-to-fault

SW – Software

THD – Total harmonic distortion

TRMS – True root mean square

VT – Voltage transformer

VTM – Voltage transformer module

VTS – Voltage transformer supervision

© Arcteq Relays Ltd 8

AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

3. General
The AQ-C215 capacitor bank protection relay is a member of the AQ-200 product line. The hardware
and software are modular: the hardware modules are assembled and configured according to the
application's I/O requirements, and the software determines the available functions. Up to three (3)
optional I/O or communication cards are available for extensive monitoring and control applications.
This manual describes the specific application of the AQ-C215 capacitor bank protection relay. For
other AQ-200 series products please consult their respective device manuals.

9 © Arcteq Relays Ltd

 AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

4. IED user interface

4.1. Panel structure
The user interface section of an AQ-200 series device is divided into two user interface sections: one
for the hardware and the other for the software. You can access the software interface either through
the front panel or through the AQtivate freeware software suite.

4.1.1. Local panel structure

The front panel of AQ-200 series devices have multiple LEDs, control buttons and a local RJ-45
Ethernet port for configuration. Each unit is also equipped with an RS-485 serial interface and an RJ-45
Ethernet interface on the back of the device. See the image and list below.

Figure. 4.1.1. - 1. Local panel structure.

1. Four (4) default LEDs: "Power", "Error", "Start" (configurable) and "Trip" (configurable).
2. Sixteen (16) freely configurable LEDs with programmable legend texts.
3. Three (3) object control buttons: Choose the controllable object with the Ctrl button and the
control breaker with the I and O buttons.
4. The L/R button switches between the local and the remote control modes.
5. Eight (8) buttons for IED local programming: the four navigation arrows and the Ent nter
er button
in the middle, as well as the Home
Home, the Back and the password activation buttons.
6. One (1) RJ-45 Ethernet port for IED configuration.

When the unit is powered on, the green "Power" LED is lit. When the red "Error" LED is lit, the relay has
an internal (hardware or software) error that affects the operation of the unit. The activation of the
yellow "Start" LED and the red "Trip" LED are based on the setting the user has put in place in the
software.

© Arcteq Relays Ltd 10

AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

The sixteen freely configurable LEDs are located on the right side of the display. Their activation and
color (green or yellow) are based on the settings the user has put in place in the software.

Holding the I (object control) button down for five seconds brings up the button test menu. It displays
all the physical buttons on the front panel. Pressing any of the listed buttons marks them as tested.
When all buttons are marked as having been tested, you can press the Back button to close the button
test menu.

4.2. Mimic and main menu

4.2.1. Basic configuration

The user interface is divided into seven (7) quick displays: "Events", "Favorites", "Measurements",
"Mimic", "LEDs", "Clock" and "Fault register". The default quick display (as presented in the image
below) is the mimic view; you can move through these menus by pressing the left and right arrow
buttons. Please note that the available quick display carousel view might be different if you have
changed the view with AQtivate's Carousel Designer tool.

Figure. 4.2.1. - 2. Basic navigation (general).

The Home button switches between the quick display carousel and the main display with the six (6)
main configuration menus (General, Protection, Control, Communication, Measurements and
Monitoring) Note that the available menus vary depending on the device type. You can select one of
the menus by using the four navigation arrows and pressing Ent nter
er in the middle. The Back button takes
you back one step. If you hold it down for three seconds, it takes you back to the General menu. You
can also use it to reset the alarm LEDs you have set. The password activation button (with the padlock
icon ) takes you to the password menu where you can enter the passwords for the various user levels
(User, Operator, Configurator, and Super-user).

11 © Arcteq Relays Ltd

 AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

4.2.2. Navigation in the main configuration menus

All the settings in this device have been divided into the following six (6) main configuration menus:

• General
• Protection
• Control
• Communication
• Measurement
• Monitoring.

They are presented in the image below. The available menus vary according to the device type.

Figure. 4.2.2. - 3. Main configuration menus.

4.3. General menu

The General main menu is divided into two submenus: the Device info tab presents the information of
the device, while the Function comments tab allows you to view all comments you have added to the
functions.

Figure. 4.3. - 4. General menu structure

© Arcteq Relays Ltd 12

AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

Device info
Figure. 4.3. - 5. Device info.

Table. 4.3. - 1. Parameters and indications in the General menu.

Name Range Step Default Description

Device name - - Unitname

The file name uses these fields when loading the .aqs configuration
file from the AQ-200 unit.
Device location - - Unitlocation

Displays the unit's unique serial number. The serial number is also
Serial number - - -
printed on the sticker located on the side of the unit.

Displays the software version (firmware) used by the unit.

SW version - - -
Upgradable by the user if a newer version is available.

Displays the hardware configuration of the unit. The hardware

HW conf. - - - configuration is also printed on the sticker located on the side of the
unit.

0: Internal
1: External If an external clock time synchronization source is available, the type
NTP is defined with this parameter. In the internal mode there is no
Timesync. source - 0: Internal
2: External external Timesync source. IRIG-B requires a serial fiber
Serial communication option card.
3: IRIG-B

When this parameter is enabled it is possible for the user to force the
Enable stage 0: Disabled protection, control and monitoring functions to different statuses like
- 0: Disabled
forcing 1: Enabled START and TRIP. This is done in the function’s Info page with the
Status force to parameter.

System phase 0: A-B-C Allows the user to switch the expected order in which the phase
- 0: A-B-C
rotating order 1: A-C-B measurements are wired to the unit.

13 © Arcteq Relays Ltd

 AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

Name Range Step Default Description

0: User
defined
1: English Changes the language of the parameter descriptions in the HMI. If
Language 2: Suomi - 1: English the language has been set to "Other" in the settings of the AQtivate
3: Svenska setting tool, AQtivate follows the value set into this parameter.
4: Español
5. Français

Displays the UTC time used by the unit without time zone
UTC time - - -
corrections.

0: -
Clear events - 0: - Clears the event history recorded in the AQ-200 device.
1: Clear

LCD Contrast 0…255 1 120 Changes the contrast of the LCD display.

If the user navigates to a menu and gives no input after a period of

Return to default
0…3600 s 10 s 0s time defined with this parameter, the unit automatically returns to the
view
default view. If set to 0 s, this feature is not in use.

0: - When activated, all LEDs are lit up. LEDs with multiple possible
LED test - 0: -
1: Activated colors blink each color.

0: - Resets the latched signals in the logic and the matrix. When a reset
Reset latches - 0: -
1: Reset command is given, the parameter automatically returns back to "-".

Measurement 0: Disabled Enables the measurement recorder tool, further configured in

- 0: Disabled
recorder 1: Enabled Tools → Misc → Measurement recorder.

0: -
Mimic reconfigure 1: - 0: - Reloads the mimic to the unit.
Reconfigure

Reset last fault Activation of input selected here resets the values in "Fault registers"
- - -
registers view in carousel.

Protection/
Control/Monitor - - - Displays the status of all enabled functions.
profile

Function comments
Function comments displays notes of each function that has been activated in the Protection, Control
and Monitoring menu. Function notes can be edited by the user.

© Arcteq Relays Ltd 14

AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

Figure. 4.3. - 6. Function comments.

4.4. Protection menu

General

Figure. 4.4. - 7.

The Protection main menu includes the Stage selection submenu as well as the submenus for all the
various protection functions, categorized under the following modules: "Arc protection", "Current",
"Voltage", "Frequency", "Sequence" and "Supporting" (see the image below). The available functions
depend on the device type in use.

15 © Arcteq Relays Ltd

 AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

Figure. 4.4. - 8. Protection menu view.

Stage activation
You can activate the various protection stages in the Stage selection submenu (see the images below).
Each protection stage and supporting function is disabled by default. When you activate one of the
stages, its activated menu appears in the stage-specific submenu. For example, the I> (overcurrent)
protection stage can be found in the "Current" module, whereas the U< (undervoltage) protection stage
can be found in the "Voltage" module.

Figure. 4.4. - 9. Submenus for Stage selection.

© Arcteq Relays Ltd 16

AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

Example of a protection stage and its use

Once a protection stage has been activated in the Stage selection submenu, you can open its own
submenu. In the image series below, the user has activated three current stages. The user accesses
the list of activated current stages through the "Current" module, and selects the I> stage for further
inspection.

Figure. 4.4. - 10. Accessing the submenu of an individual activated stage.

Each protection stage and supporting function has five sections in their stage submenus: "Info",
"Settings", "Registers", "I/O" and "Events".

17 © Arcteq Relays Ltd

 AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

Figure. 4.4. - 11. Info.

The "Info" section offers many details concerning the function and its status:

• Function condition: indicates the stage's condition which can be Normal, Start, Trip, or
Blocked.
• Expected operating time: Expected time delay from detecting a fault to tripping the breaker.
This value can vary during a fault if an inverse curve time delay (IDMT) is used.
• Time remaining to trip: When a fault is detected this value counts down towards zero. When
zero is reached, the function will trip.
• Imeas/Iset at the moment: Displays the ratio between the measured value and the pick-up
level.
• Measured magnitude: In some functions it is possible to choose the monitored magnitude
between Peak-to-peak, TRMS, or RMS (the default is RMS; the available magnitudes depend
on the function).
• Characteristics graphs: opens graphs related to the protection function.
• Statistics: indicates the number of function starts, trips and blocks (can be cleared through
"Clear statistics" → "Clear").
• Measurements: displays the measurements carried out by the function.
• Active settings: displays the setting group that is currently in use and its settings (other
setting groups can be set in the "Settings" section).

While the function is activated and disabled in the Stage selection submenu, you can disable the
function through the "Info" section ("Function mode" at the top of the section).

© Arcteq Relays Ltd 18

AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

Figure. 4.4. - 12. Settings.

The stage settings vary depending on which protection function they are a part of. By default only one
setting group of the eight available setting groups is activated. You can enable more groups in the
Control → Setting groups menu, although they are set here in the "Settings" section.

Most protection functions follow the same structure:

• Pick-up setting: Defines the fault magnitude. Most functions pick-up value is in relation to the
current transformer or voltage transformer nominal, but some functions use kW, ohm, Hz and
other units. Voltage and current transformers nominal values can be set at Measurement →
Transformers.
• Delay type and operating time delay settings are described in detail in chapter General
properties of a protection function.

19 © Arcteq Relays Ltd

 AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

Figure. 4.4. - 13. Registers.

Register menu content is not available in the HMI. It can only be accessed with AQtivate setting tool.
Stored in the "Registers" section you can find both "Operation event register" and "General event
register".

"Operation event register" stores the function's specific fault data. There are twelve (12) registers, and
each of them includes data like the pre-fault value, the fault value, the time stamp and the active group
during the trigger. Data included in the register depend on the protection function. You can clear the
the operation register by choosing "Clear registers" → "Clear".

"General event register" stores the event generated by the stage. These general event registers cannot
be cleared.

© Arcteq Relays Ltd 20

AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

Figure. 4.4. - 14. I/O.

The "I/O" section is divided into two subsections: "Direct output control" and "Blocking input control".

In "Direct output control" you can connect the stage's signals to physical outputs, either to an output
relay or an LED (START or TRIP LEDs or one of the 16 user configurable LEDs). If the stage is blocked
internally (DI or another signal), you can configure an output to indicate the stage that is blocked. A
connection to an output can be either latched ("|x|") or non-latched ("x").

"Blocking input control" allows you to block stages. The blocking can be done by using any of the
following:

• digital inputs
• logical inputs or outputs
• the START, TRIP or BLOCKED information of another protection stage
• object status information.

21 © Arcteq Relays Ltd

 AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

Figure. 4.4. - 15. Events.

You can mask on and mask off the protection stage related events in "Event mask". By default events
are masked off. You can activate the desired events by masking them ("x"). Remember to save your
maskings by confirming the changes with the check mark icon. If you want to cancel the changes,
select the strike-through circle to do so. Only masked events are recorded to event history (which can
be accessed in the "Events" view in the user view section).

4.5. Control menu

Main menu

The Control main menu includes submenus (see the image below) for enabling the various control
functions and objects (Controls enabled), enabling and controlling the setting groups (Setting groups),
configuring the objects (Objects), setting the various control functions (Control functions) and
configuring the inputs and outputs (Device I/O). The available control functions depend on the model of
the device in use.

© Arcteq Relays Ltd 22

AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

Controls enabled
Figure. 4.5. - 16. Controls enabled submenu.

You can activate the selected control functions in the Controls enabled submenu. By default all the
control functions are disabled. All activated functions can be viewed in the Control functions submenu
(see the section "Control functions" below for more information).

In this submenu you can also activate and disable the controllable objects. As with control functions, all
objects are disabled by default. All activated objects can be viewed in the Objects submenu (see the
section "Objects" below for more information).

Setting groups
Figure. 4.5. - 17. Setting groups submenu.

The Setting groups submenu displays all the information related to setting group changing, such as the
following:

23 © Arcteq Relays Ltd

 AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

• Active setting group: displays the current active setting group (SG1…SG8).
• Force SG change: this setting allows the activation of a setting group at will (please note that
Force SG change enable must be "Enabled").
• Used setting groups: this setting allows the activation of setting groups SG1...SG8 (only one
group is active by default).
• SG local select: selects the local control for the different setting groups (can use digital
inputs, logical inputs or outputs, RTDs, object status information as well as stage starts, trips
or blocks).
• Remote SG change: When enabled it is possible to change the setting group manually
through SCADA.
• SG events: event masking for setting groups (masks are OFF by default; please note that only
masked events are recorded into the event history).

Setting group 1 (SG1) has the highest priority, while Setting group 8 (SG8) has the lowest priority.
Setting groups can be controlled with pulses or with both pulses and static signals (see the image
below).

Figure. 4.5. - 18. Example of setting group (SG) changing.

Objects
Figure. 4.5. - 19. Objects submenu.

Each activated object is visible in the Objects submenu. By default all objects are disabled unless
specifically activated in the Controls → Controls enabled submenu. Each active object has four
sections in their submenus: "Settings", "Application control" ("App contr"), "Registers" and "Events".

© Arcteq Relays Ltd 24

AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

Figure. 4.5. - 20. Settings section.

Ob
Object
ject se
sett and sta
stattus

• Local/Remote status: control access may be set to Local or Remote (Local by default; please
note that when local control is enabled, the object cannot be controlled through the bus and
vice versa).
• Object name: the name of the object (objects are named "ObjectX" by default).
• Object type: selects the type of the object from Grounding disconnector, Motor-controlled
disconnector, Circuit breaker and Withdrawable circuit breaker (Circuit breaker by default).
• Object x status: the status can be Bad, Closed, Open and Intermediate. The status
"Intermediate" is the phase between "Open" and "Closed" where both status inputs are 0. The
status "Bad" occurs when both status inputs of the object/cart are 1.
• Additional status information: gives feedback from the object on whether the opening and
closing are allowed or blocked, whether the object is ready, and whether the synchronization
status is ok.
• Use Synchrocheck & Use Object ready: closing the object is forbidden when the sides are
not synchronized or when the object is not ready to be closed.
• Open and close requests: displays the statistics, i.e. the number of Open and Close requests.
• Open and close request fails: displays the statistics of open and close request failures.
Request is considered failed if object doesn't change status from that request.
• Clear statistics: statistics can be cleared by choosing "Clear statistics" and then "Clear".

25 © Arcteq Relays Ltd

 AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

I/O

• An object has Open and Close inputs which are used for indicating the status of the breaker
on the HMI and in SCADA. Status can be indicated by any of the following: digital inputs,
logical inputs or outputs.
• A withdrawable object has In and Out inputs. Status can be indicated by any of the following:
digital inputs, logical inputs or outputs.
• Both "Object Ready" and "Synchrocheck" have status inputs. If synchrocheck or object ready
is used these inputs need to be active for the relay to be able to give object closing
command.
• Object Open and Close signals define which digital output is controlled

Opera
Operation
tion se
setttings

• Breaker traverse time: How long gap there can be between open and close status change
before intermittent status is reported by the function.
• Max close and open pulse length: Defines the maximum length of open and close
commands. If status has changed before max pulse length has elapsed, the pulse is cut
short.
• Control termination timeout: If status of the object does not change during this time, open or
close fail event is recorded.
• After the set delay, if the controlled object does not respond accordingly, the procedure is
terminated and a fail message is issued.

Contr
Control
ol se
setttings (Applic
(Applicaation)

• Object application close and open: Signal set to these points can be used to open and close
the object. Controlling the object through this point does not follow local/remote status of the
relay.

Contr
Control
ol se
setttings (DI)

• Access level for Mimic control: determines the access level required to control Mimic (each
level has its own password). By default, the access level is set to "Configurator".
• You can use digital inputs to control the object locally or remotely. Remote controlling via the
bus is configured in the protocol level.

© Arcteq Relays Ltd 26

AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

Figure. 4.5. - 21. Application control section.

You can connect object statuses directly to physical outputs in the "Signal connections"
subsection (Control → Application control). They can be connected to output relays, as well as to user-
configurable LEDs. A connection to an output can be either latched ("|x|") or non-latched ("x").

Object blocking is done in the "Blocking input control" subsection. It can be done by any of the
following: digital inputs, logical inputs or outputs, object status information as well as stage starts, trips
or blocks.

27 © Arcteq Relays Ltd

 AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

Figure. 4.5. - 22. Registers section.

Register menu content is not available in the HMI. It can only be accessed with AQtivate setting tool.

Register stores the function's specific fault data. There are twelve (12) registers, and each of them
includes data like opening and closing time, command type and request failures. Data included in the
register depend on the protection function. You can clear the the operation register by choosing "Clear
registers" → "Clear".

Figure. 4.5. - 23. Events section.

You can mask on and mask off the object stage related events in "Event mask". By default events are
masked off. You can activate the desired events by masking them ("x"). Remember to save your
maskings by confirming the changes with the check mark icon. If you want to cancel the changes,
select the strike-through circle to do so. Only masked events are recorded to event history (which can
be accessed in the "Events" view in the user view section).

Control functions
Once a control function has been activated in the Controls → Controls enabled submenu, you can
open its own submenu. In the image series below, the user has activated three control functions . The
user accesses the list of activated control stages through the "Control functions" module, and selects
the control function for further inspection.

© Arcteq Relays Ltd 28

AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

Figure. 4.5. - 24. Control functions submenu.

Each control function that has been activated is listed in the Control functions submenu (see the middle
image above). Control functions include "Info", "Settings", "Registers", "I/O" and "Events"

Figure. 4.5. - 25. Info section.

The "Info" section offers many details concerning the function and its status:

• Function condition: indicates the stage's condition which can be Normal, Start, Trip, or
Blocked.
• Measured magnitude: In some functions it is possible to choose the monitored magnitude
between Peak-to-peak, TRMS, or RMS (the default is RMS; the available magnitudes depend
on the function).
• Statistics: indicates the number of function starts, trips and blocks (can be cleared through
"Clear statistics" → "Clear").
• Measurements: displays the measurements carried out by the function.
• Active settings: displays the setting group that is currently in use and its settings (other
setting groups can be set in the "Settings" section).

While the function is activated and disabled in the Control → Controls enabled submenu, you can
disable the function through the "Info" section ("Function mode" at the top of the section).
29 © Arcteq Relays Ltd
 AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

Figure. 4.5. - 26. Settings section.

The stage settings vary depending on which control function they are a part of. By default only one
setting group of the eight available setting groups is activated. You can enable more groups in the
Control → Setting groups menu, although they are set here in the "Settings" section.

Figure. 4.5. - 27. Register section

Register menu content is not available in the HMI. It can only be accessed with AQtivate setting tool.
Stored in the "Registers" section you can find both "Operation event register" and "General event
register".
© Arcteq Relays Ltd 30
AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

"Operation event register" stores the function's specific operation data. There are twelve (12) registers,
and each of them includes data like the pre-fault value, the fault value, the time stamp and the active
group during the trigger. Data included in the register depend on the control function. You can clear the
the operation register by choosing "Clear registers" → "Clear".

"General event register" stores the event generated by the stage. These general event registers cannot
be cleared.

I/O

Figure. 4.5. - 28. I/O section.

The "I/O" section is divided into two subsections: "Direct output control" and "Blocking input control".

In "Direct output control" you can connect the stage's signals to physical outputs, either to an output
relay or an LED (START or TRIP LEDs or one of the 16 user configurable LEDs). If the stage is blocked
internally (DI or another signal), you can configure an output to indicate the stage that is blocked. A
connection to an output can be either latched ("|x|") or non-latched ("x").

"Blocking input control" allows you to block stages. The blocking can be done by using any of the
following:

• digital inputs
• logical inputs or outputs
• the START, TRIP or BLOCKED information of another protection stage
• object status information.

31 © Arcteq Relays Ltd

 AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

Figure. 4.5. - 29. Events section.

You can mask on and mask off the control stage related events in "Event mask". By default events are
masked off. You can activate the desired events by masking them ("x"). Remember to save your
maskings by confirming the changes with the check mark icon. If you want to cancel the changes,
select the strike-through circle to do so. Only masked events are recorded to event history (which can
be accessed in the "Events" view in the user view section).

Device I/O
Figure. 4.5. - 30. Device I/O submenu.

The Device I/O submenu is divided into nine sections titled "Digital inputs", "Digital outputs", "mA
Outputs", "LED settings", "Device I/O matrix", "Programmable control switch", "Programmable Mimic
Indicator", "Logic signals" and "GOOSE matrix". Please note that digital inputs, logic outputs, protection
stage status signals (START, TRIP, BLOCKED, etc.) as well as object status signals can be connected
to an output relay or to LEDs in the Device I/O matrix.

© Arcteq Relays Ltd 32

AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

Figure. 4.5. - 31. Digital input settings.

All settings related to digital inputs can be found in the "Digital inputs" section.

The "Digital inputs settings" subsection includes various settings for the inputs: the polarity selection
determines whether the input is Normally Open (NO) or Normally Closed (NC) as well as the activation
threshold voltage (16…200 VAC/DC, step 0.1 V) and release threshold voltage (10…200 VAC/DC, step
0.1 V) for each available input. There is also a setting to determine the wanted activation and release
delay (0…1800 s, step 1 ms). Digital input activation and release threshold follow the measured peak
value. The activation time of an input is 5…10 ms. The release time with DC is 5…10 ms, while with
the AC it is less than 25 ms. First three digital inputs don't have activation and release threshold voltage
settings as these are defined when ordering the unit.

Digital input statuses can be checked from the corresponding subsection ("Digital input status"). The
"Digital input descriptions" subsection displays the texts the user has written for each digital input. In
the "Event masks" subsection you can determine which events are masked –and therefore recorded
into the event history– and which are not.

Figure. 4.5. - 32. Digital outputs subsection.

All settings related to digital outputs can be found in the "Digital outputs" section.

33 © Arcteq Relays Ltd

 AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

The "Digital outputs settings" subsection lets you select the polarity for each output; they can be either
Normally Open (NO) or Normally Closed (NC). The default polarity is Normally Open. The operational
delay of an output contact is approximately 5 ms. You can view the digital output statuses in the
corresponding subsection ("Digital output status"). The "Digital output descriptions" allows you to
configure the description text of each output. All name changes affect the matrices as well as
input–output selection lists.

NO
NOTE!
TE!

An NC signal goes to the default position (NO) if the relay loses the auxiliary voltage or if the
system is fully reset. However, an NC signal does not open during voltage or during System
full reset. An NC output signal does not open during a Communication or Protection reset.

Figure. 4.5. - 33. LED settings subsection.

The "LED settings" subsection allows you to modify the individual label text attached to an LED ("LED
description settings"); that label is visible in the LED quick displays and the matrices. You can also
modify the color of the LED ("LED color settings") between green and yellow; by default all LEDs are
green.

© Arcteq Relays Ltd 34

AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

Figure. 4.5. - 34. Device I/O matrix subsection.

Through the Device I/O matrix subsection you can connect digital inputs, logical outputs, protection
stage status signals (START, TRIP, BLOCKED, etc.), object status signals and many other binary
signals to output relays, or to LEDs configured by the used. A connection can be latched ("|x|") or non-
latched ("x"). Please note that a non-latched output is deactivated immediately when the triggering
signal is disabled, while a latched signal stays active until the triggering signal deactivates and the
latched function is manually cleared.

You can clear latched signals by entering the mimic display and the pressing the Back button on the
panel.

Figure. 4.5. - 35. Programmable control switch subsection.

Programmable control switches (PCSs) are switches that can be used to control signals while in the
mimic view. These signals can be used in a variety of situations, such as for controlling the logic
program, for function blocking, etc. You can name each switch and set the access level to determine
who can control the switch.

35 © Arcteq Relays Ltd

 AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

Figure. 4.5. - 36. Programmable mimic indicators subsection

Programmable mimic indicators can be placed into the mimic to display a text based on the status of
given binary signal (digital input, logical signal, status of function start/tripped/blocked signals etc.).
When configuring mimic with AQtivate setting tool it is possible to set a text which is shown when input
signal is ON and separate text for when the signal is OFF.

Figure. 4.5. - 37. Logical signals subsection.

AQ-200 series units have three different types of logical signals:

• 32 logical inputs signal status bits. Status is either 0 or 1.

• 32 logical output signal status bits. Status is either 0 or 1.
• 64 GOOSE input signal status bits. Status is either 0 or 1.
• 64 quality bits of GOOSE input signals. Status is either 0 or 1. 1 stands for bad/invalid quality.

Logical input signals can be used when building logic with the AQtivate setting tool. Logical input signal
status can be changed either from the mimic or through SCADA. By default logical inputs use "Hold"
mode in which the status changes from 0 to 1 and from 1 to 0 only by user input. The mode of each
input can be changed to "Pulse" in which logical inputs status changes from 0 to 1 by user input and
then immediately back to 0.

© Arcteq Relays Ltd 36

AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

Logical output signals can be used as the end result of logic that has been built in the AQtivate setting
tool. The end result can then be connected to a digital output or a LED in the matrix, block functions
and much more.

GOOSE inputs are mainly used for controlling purposes through the IEC 61850. There are 64 GOOSE
inputs signal status bits, and their status can be either 0 or 1. "GOOSE IN quality" checks the quality of
a GOOSE input message. There are 64 GOOSE input quality signals, and their status can be either 0
("Good" or "Valid") or 1 ("Bad" or "Invalid"). Logical outputs can be used when building a programmable
logic. Activating a logic gate does not create an event but when a logical output is connected to a logic
gate it is possible to create an event of the gate's activation. Logical inputs and outputs have ON and
OFF events that can be masked on (they are masked off by default).

NO
NOTE!
TE!

Please refer to the "System integration" chapter for a more detailed description of the use of
logical signals.

4.6. Communication menu

The Communication main menu includes four submenus: Connections, Protocols, General IO and
Realtime signals to Comm. All devices can be configured through the Ethernet connection in the back
panel with the AQtivate setting tool software. Connecting to the AQtivate software requires knowing
the IP address of your device (can be found in the Communication →Connections submenu). As a
standard, the devices support the following communication protocols: NTP, IEC 61850, Modbus/TCP,
Modbus/RTU, IEC 103, IEC 101/104, SPA, DNP3 and Modbus/IO.

37 © Arcteq Relays Ltd

 AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

Connections
Figure. 4.6. - 38. View of the Connections submenu.

The Connections submenu offers the following bits of information and settings:

ETHERNET

This section defines the IP settings for the ethernet port in the back panel of the unit.

• IP address: the IP address of the device which can be set by the user (the default IP address
depends on the device).
• Network: the network subnet mask is entered here.
• Gateway: the gateway is configured only when communicating with the devices in a separate
subnet.
• MAC-Address: Unique MAC address of the device. Not configurable by user.

SERIAL COM

This section defines the basic settings of RS-485 port in the back panel of the unit.

• Bitrate: displays the bitrate of the RS-485 serial communication interface (9600 bps as
standard, although can be changed to 19 200 bps or 38 400 bps if an external device
supports the faster speed).
• Databits, Parity and Stopbits: these can be set according the connected external devices.
• Protocol: by default the device does not have any serial protocol activated, although IEC
103, Modbus I/O and Modbus/RTU can be used for communication.

NO
NOTE!
TE!

When communicating with a device through a front Ethernet port connection, the IP address
is always 192.168.66.9.

SERIAL COM1 & COM2

SERIAL COM1 and SERIAL COM2 are reserved for serial communication option cards. They have the
same settings as RS-485 port.

© Arcteq Relays Ltd 38

AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

Protocols
Figure. 4.6. - 39. View of the Protocols submenu.

The Protocols submenu offers access to the various communication protocol configuration menus.
Some of the communication protocols use serial communication and some use Ethernet
communication. Serial communication protocols can be used either with the RS-485 port that is always
equipped in AQ-200 series units or with serial communication option card. Ethernet communication
protocols can be used either with the RJ-45 port in the back of the unit or with an ethernet
communication option card.

The communication protocols are:

• NTP: this protocol is used for time synchronization over Ethernet, and can be used
simultaneously with the ethernet based communication protocols.
• IEC 61850: Ethernet based communication protocol.
• Modbus/TCP: Ethernet communication protocol.
• Modbus/RTU: Serial communication protocol.
• IEC103: Serial communication protocol.
• IEC101/104: The standards IEC 60870-5-101 and IEC 60870-5-104 are closely related. On
the physical layer the IEC 101 protocol uses serial communication whereas the IEC 104
protocol uses Ethernet communication.
• SPA: Serial communication protocol.
• DNP3: Supports serial and Ethernet communication.
• ModbusIO: Used for connecting external devices like ADAM RTD measurement units.

NO
NOTE!
TE!

Please refer to the "System integration" chapter for a more detailed text on the various
communication options.

39 © Arcteq Relays Ltd

 AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

4.7. Measurement menu

Figure. 4.7. - 40. Measurement section.

The Measurement menu includes the following submenus: Transformers, Frequency, Current
measurement, Voltage measurement, Power and energy measurement, Impedance calculations, and
Phasors. The available measurement submenus depends on the type of IED in use. The ratio used by
the current and voltage transformers is defined in the Transformers submenu, while the system nominal
frequency is specified in the Frequency submenu. Other submenus are mainly for monitoring purposes.

Transformers
Figure. 4.7. - 41. Transformers section.

Transformers menu is used for setting up the measurement settings of available current transformer
modules or voltage transformer modules. Some unit types have more than one CT or VT module.
Some unit types like AQ-S214 do not have current or voltage transformers at all.

© Arcteq Relays Ltd 40

AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

CT module
Figure. 4.7. - 42. CT module section.

The three main sections ("Phase CT scaling", "Residual I01 CT scaling" and "Residual I02 CT scaling")
determine the ratio of the used transformers. Additionally, the nominal values are also determined in
the CT module submenu. Sometimes a mistake in the wiring can cause the polarity to be changed; in
such cases, you can invert the polarity of each phase current individually. The CT module submenu
also displays additional information such as CT scaling factors and per-unit scaling factors.

VT module
Figure. 4.7. - 43. VT module section.

41 © Arcteq Relays Ltd

 AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

Voltage transformer settings include voltage measurement mode selection, voltage transformer
nominal settings and voltage channel polarity switching. Voltage transformer setting defines what kind
of voltages are connected to the VT module card. The voltages are: three line-to-line voltages, three
line-to-neutral voltages, two line-to-line voltages leaving the third one free as additional voltage channel
for neutral voltage or synchrochecking. U4 channel can be set to work as residual voltage mode or
"SS" (system set) mode, which can be used for synchrochecking, synchronizing and other uses.

VT primary and secondary voltages must match with the connected voltage transformer in addition to
the voltage measurement mode. These settings are then used for scaling the voltage channel input
voltages to primary and per unit values as well as power and energy measurement values if current
measurements are also available.

Frequency
Figure. 4.7. - 44. Frequency submenu.

Frequency measurements use the fixed sampling mode as the default, and "System nominal
frequency" should be set to the desired level. When "Sampling mode" is set to "Tracking", the device
uses the measured frequency value as the system nominal frequency. There are three frequency
reference channels: f Ref1, fRef2 and fRef3. With these parameters it is possible to set up three voltage
or current channels to be used for frequency sampling. Parameter "f.meas in use" indicates which of
the three channels are used for sampling if any.

© Arcteq Relays Ltd 42

AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

Current measurement
Figure. 4.7. - 45. Current measurement submenu.

Current measurement submenu includes various individual measurements for each phase or phase-to-
phase measurement.

The Current measurement submenu has been divided into four sections: "Phase currents", "Residual
currents", "Sequence currents", and "Harmonics".

• "Phase currents" and "Residual currents" have been further divided into four subsections
("Per-unit currents", "Primary currents", "Secondary currents" and "Phase angle"), and they
display the RMS, TRMS and peak-to-peak values, amplitude and power THD values as well
as the angle of each measured component.
• "Sequence currents" has also been further divided into the four above-mentioned sections,
and it calculates the positive, negative and neutral sequence currents.
• "Harmonics" displays current harmonics up to the 31st harmonic for the three phase
current (IL1, IL2, IL3) as well as the two residual currents (I01, I02); each component can be
displayed as absolute or percentage values, and as primary or secondary amperages or in
per-unit values.

43 © Arcteq Relays Ltd

 AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

Voltage measurement
Figure. 4.7. - 46. Voltage measurement submenu and System Voltages menu.

Voltage measurement submenu includes various individual measurements for each phase or phase-to-
phase measurement.

The Voltage measurement submenu has been also divided into four sections: "Voltage inputs",
"Sequence voltages", "System voltages", and "Harmonics".

• "Voltage inputs" displays the values of per-unit and secondary voltages as well as phase
angles.
• "Sequence voltages" displays the per-unit, primary and secondary voltages as well as phase
angles, and it calculates the positive, negative and neutral sequence voltages.
• "System voltages" displays primary voltage magnitudes and primary voltage angles.
• "Harmonics" displays harmonics up to the 31st harmonic for all four voltages (U1, U2, U3,
U4); each component can be displayed as absolute or percentage values, and as primary or
secondary voltages or in per-unit values.

© Arcteq Relays Ltd 44

AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

Power and energy measurement

Figure. 4.7. - 47. Power and Energy measurement submenu.

The Power and energy measurement submenu includes three sections: "Power and energy
measurement settings", "Power measurements" and "Energy measurements". As the name suggests,
the first section determines the settings by which the power and energy calculations are made. In the
settings you can also activate (and then set the parameters) for the Energy dose counter mode. "Power
measurements" displays all three-phase powers as well as the powers of individual phases. "Energy
measurements" displays the three-phase energy as well as the energies of the individual phases.

Impedance calculations
Figure. 4.7. - 48. Impedance calculations submenu.

45 © Arcteq Relays Ltd

 AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

The Impedance calculations submenu is divided into four sections: "Impedance calculation settings",
"Phase-to-phase impedances", "Phase-to-earth impedances" and "Positive sequence impedance". You
can activate impedance calculations in the first section. "Phase-to-phase impedances" display the
resistances and reactances of the three phase-to-phase connections, both primary and secondary, as
well as the primary and secondary impedances and impedance angles. "Phase-to-earth impedances"
displays the resistances and reactances of the three phases as well the primary and secondary
impedances and impedance angles. "Positive sequence impedance" displays the resistances and
reactances (both primary and secondary) of the positive sequence as well as its primary and
secondary impedances and the impedance angle.

Phasors
Figure. 4.7. - 49. Phasors submenu.

The Phasors submenu holds the vector displays for voltages and currents, as well as the various
calculated components the IED may have (e.g. power, impedance). Phasors are helpful when solving
incorrect wiring issues.

4.8. Monitoring menu

The Monitoring main menu includes submenus (see the image below) for enabling the various
monitoring functions (Monitors enabled), setting the various monitoring functions (Monitor functions),
controlling the disturbance recorder (Disturbance REC) and accessing the device diagnostics (Device
diagnostics). The available monitoring functions depend on the type of the device in use.

Figure. 4.8. - 50. Monitoring menu view.

© Arcteq Relays Ltd 46

AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

Monitors enabled
Figure. 4.8. - 51. Monitors enabled submenu.

You can activate the selected monitor functions in the Monitors enabled submenu. By default all the
control functions are disabled. All activated functions can be viewed in the Monitor functions submenu
(see the section "Monitor functions" below for more information).

Monitor functions
Figure. 4.8. - 52. Monitor function view.

Configuring monitor functions is very similar to configuring protection and control stages. They, too,
have the five sections that display information ("Info"), set the parameters ("Settings"), show the inputs
and outputs ("I/O") and present the events and registers ("Events" and "Registers").

47 © Arcteq Relays Ltd

 AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

Disturbance recorder
Figure. 4.8. - 53. Disturbance recorder settings.

The Disturbance recorder submenu has the following settings:

• "Recorder enabled" enables or disables the recorder.

• "Recorder status" indicates the status of the recorder.
• "Clear record" records the chosen record in the memory.
• "Manual trigger" triggers the recorder when set to "Clear". Goes back to "-" when afterwards.
• "Clear all records", "Clear newest record" and "Clear oldest record" allows the clearing of all,
the latest, or the oldest recording.
• "Max. amount of recordings" displays the maximum number of recordings; depends on the
number of channels, the sample rate and the legnth of the file.
• "Max. length of recording" displays the maximum length of a single recording; depends on the
number of chosen channels and the sample rate.
• "Recordings in memory" displays the number of recordings currently in the disturbance
recorder's memory.
• "Recorder trigger" shows which signals or other states has been selected to trigger the
recording (digital input, logical input or output, signals of a stage, object position, etc.); by
default nothing triggers the recorder.
• "Recording length" displays the length of a single recording and can be set
between 0.1…1800 seconds.
• "Recording mode" can be selected to replace the oldest recording ("FIFO") or to keep the old
recordings ("FILO").
• "Analog channel samples" determines the sample rate of analog channels, and it can be
selected to be 8/16/32/62 samples per cycle.
• "Digital channel sample" displays the sample rate in a digital channel; this is a fixed 5 ms.
• "Pre-triggering time" can be selected between 0.1…15.0 s.
© Arcteq Relays Ltd 48
AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

• The IED can record up to 20 (20) analog channels that can be selected from the twenty (20)
available channels. Every measured current or voltage signal can be selected to be recorded.
• Enabling "Auto. get recordings" allows the device to automatically upload recordings to the
designated FTP folder (which, in turn, allows any FTP client to read the recordings from the
IED's memory).
• "Rec. digital channels" is a long list of the possible digital channels that can be recorded
(including primary and secondary amplitudes and currents, calculated signals, TRMS values,
sequence components, inputs and outputs, etc.).

Device diagnostics
Figure. 4.8. - 54. Device diagnostics submenu.

The Device Diagnostics submenu gives a detailed feedback of the device's current condition. It also
shows whether option cards have been installed correctly without problems. If you see something out
of the ordinary in the Device diagnostics submenu and cannot reset it, please contact the closest
representative of the manufacturer or the manufacturer of the device itself.

4.9. Configuring user levels and their passwords

As a factory default, no user level is locked with a password in an IED. In order to activate the different
user levels, click the Lock button in the device's HMI and set the desired passwords for the different
user levels.

49 © Arcteq Relays Ltd

 AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

NO
NOTE!
TE!

Passwords can only be set locally in an HMI.

A number of stars are displayed in the upper right corner of the HMI; these indicate the current user
level. The different user levels and their star indicators are as follows (also, see the image below for the
HMI view):

• Super user (***)

• Configurator (**)
• Operator (*)
• User ( - )

You can set a new password for a user level by selecting the key icon next to the user level's name.
After this you can lock the user level by pressing the Return key while the lock is selected. If you need
to change the password, you can select the key icon again and give a new password. Please note that
in order to do this the user level whose password is being changed must be unlocked.

© Arcteq Relays Ltd 50

AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

As mentioned above, the access level of the different user levels is indicated by the number of stars.
The required access level to change a parameter is indicated with a star (*) symbol if such is required.
As a general rule the access levels are divided as follows:

• User: Can view any menus and settings but cannot change any settings, nor operate
breakers or other equipment.
• Operator: Can view any menus and settings but cannot change any settings BUT can
operate breakers and other equipment.
• Configurator: Can change most settings such as basic protection pick-up levels or time
delays, breaker control functions, signal descriptions etc. and can operate breakers
and other equipment.
• Super user: Can change any setting and can operate breakers and other equipment.

NO
NOTE!
TE!

Any user level with a password automatically locks itself after half an hour (30 minutes) of
inactivity.

51 © Arcteq Relays Ltd

 AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

5. Functions
5.1. Functions included in AQ-C215
The AQ-C215 capacitor bank protection IED includes the following functions as well as the number of
stages for those functions.

Table. 5.1. - 2. Protection functions of AQ-C215.

Name
(number of IEC ANSI Description
stages)

CBP (1) - - Capacitor bank protection module

COL (1) Icol> 49OL Capacitor bank overload protection

UCP (1) Iuc> 46C Capacitor bank unbalance protection

I>
I>>
NOC (4) 50/51 Non-directional overcurrent protection
I>>>
I>>>>

I0>
I0>> 50N/
NEF (4) Non-directional earth fault protection
I0>>> 51N
I0>>>>

I2>
46/ Negative sequence overcurrent/
I2>>
CUB (4) 46R/ phase current reversal/
I2>>>
46L current unbalance protection
I2>>>>

Ih> Harmonic overcurrent protection

50H/
Ih>>
HOC (4) 51H/
Ih>>> The detection and blocking or tripping based on a selectable harmonic. The
68H
Ih>>>> phase currents and the residual currents have separate stages.

NUC (1) I< 37 Undercurrent protection

TOLF (1) TF> 49F Line thermal overload protection

U>
U>>
OV (4) 59 Overvoltage protection
U>>>
U>>>>

U<
U<<
UV (4) 27 Undervoltage protection
U<<<
U<<<<

U0>
U0>>
NOV (4) 59N Neutral overvoltage protection
U0>>>
U0>>>>

U1/U2>/<
U1/U2>>/<<
U1/ 59P/
VUB (4) Sequence voltage protection
U2>>>/<<< 27P/47
U1/
U2>>>>/<<<<

PGS (1) PSx>/< 99 Programmable stage

VMEM (1) - - Voltage memory

© Arcteq Relays Ltd 52

AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

Name
(number of IEC ANSI Description
stages)

50Arc/
ARC (1) Iarc>/I0arc> Arc fault protection (optional)
50NArc

Table. 5.1. - 3. Control functions of AQ-C215.

Name IEC ANSI Description

SGS - - Setting group selection

OBJ - - Object control and monitoring (5 objects available)

SOTF SOTF - Switch-on-to-fault

Table. 5.1. - 4. Monitoring functions of AQ-C215.

Name IEC ANSI Description

CTS - - Current transformer supervision

VTS - 60 Voltage transformer supervision

DR - - Disturbance recorder

THD - - Total harmonic distortion

VREC - - Measurement value recorder

5.2. Measurements

5.2.1. Current measurement and scaling

The current measurement module (CT module, or CTM) is used for measuring the currents from
current transformers. The measured values are processed into the measurement database and they
are used by measurement and protection functions. It is essential to understand the concept of current
measurements to be able to get correct measurements.

53 © Arcteq Relays Ltd

 AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

Figure. 5.2.1. - 55. Current measurement terminology

PRI: The primary current, i.e. the current which flows in the primary circuit and through the primary side
of the current transformer.

SEC: The secondary current, i.e. the current which the current transformer transforms according to its
ratios. This current is measured by the protection relay.

NOM: The nominal primary current of the protected object.

For the measurements to be correct the user needs to ensure that the measurement signals are
connected to the correct inputs, that the current direction is connected to the correct polarity, and that
the scaling is set according to the nominal values of the current transformer.

The relay calculates the scaling factors based on the set values of the CT primary, the CT secondary
and the nominal current settings. The relay measures the secondary current, the current output from
the current transformer installed into application's primary circuit. The rated primary and secondary
currents of the CT need to be set for the relay to "know" the primary and per-unit values. With motors
and other specific electrical apparatus protections, the motor's nominal current should be set for the
values to be in per unit with regards to the apparatus nominal instead of the CT nominal. This is not
always mandatory as some relays still require manual calculations for the correct settings; however,
setting the motors nominal current makes motor protection much easier and more straightforward. In
modern protection devices this scaling calculation is done internally after the current transformer's
primary current, secondary current and motor nominal current are set.

© Arcteq Relays Ltd 54

AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

Normally, the primary current ratings for phase current transformers are 10 A, 12.5 A, 15 A, 20 A, 25
A, 30 A, 40 A, 50 A, 60 A and 75 A as well as their decimal multiples, while the secondary current
ratings are 1 A and 5 A. Other, non-standard ratings can be directly connected as the scaling settings
are flexible and have large ranges. For example, the ring core current transformer ratings may vary.
Ring core current transformers are commonly used for sensitive earth fault protection and their rated
secondary current may be as low as 0.2 A in some cases.

The following chapter is an example on how to set the scaling of the current measurements for the
selected current transformer and system load.

Example of CT scaling
The following figure presents how CTs are connected to the relay's measurement inputs. It also shows
example CT ratings and nominal current of the load.

Figure. 5.2.1. - 56. Connections.

The following table presents the initial data of the connection.

Table. 5.2.1. - 5. Initial data.

Pha
hase
se curr
current
ent C
CTT Ring cor
coreeC
CTT in Input I02
Load ((nominal)
nominal)
- CT primary: 100 A - I0CT primary: 10 A
36 A
- CT secondary: 5 A - I0CT secondary: 1 A

- the phase currents are connected to the I01 residual via a Holmgren connection

- the starpoint of the phase current CT's secondary current is towards the line

Phase CT scaling

Next, to scale the current to per-unit values, we have to select whether the basis of the phase CT
scaling is the protected object's nominal current or the CT primary value.

If the CT values are chosen to be the basis for the per-unit scaling, the option "CT nom. p.u." is selected
for the "Scale meas to In" setting (see the image below).

55 © Arcteq Relays Ltd

 AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

Figure. 5.2.1. - 57. Setting the phase current transformer scalings to CT nominal.

Once the setting have been sent to the device, relay calculates the scaling factors and displays them
for the user. The "CT scaling factor P/S" describes the ratio between the primary current and the
secondary current. The per-unit scaling factors ("Ipu scaling") for both primary and secondary
values are also displayed (in this case they are the set primary and secondary currents of the CT).

If the protected object's nominal current is chosen to be the basis for the per-unit scaling, the option
"Object in p.u." is selected for the "Scale meas to In" setting (see the image below).

Figure. 5.2.1. - 58. Setting the phase current transformer scalings to the protected object's nominal current.

Once the measurement scaling is tied to the protected object's nominal current, the user must set the
appropriate input for the "Nominal current In" setting. One can now see the differences between
the two scaling options (CT nominal vs. object nominal). The "CT scaling factor P/S" is the direct ratio
between the set CT current values, and the "CT scaling factor NOM" is now the ratio between the set
CT primary and the nominal current. The "Ipu scaling primary" is now equal to the set nominal current,
and the "Ipu scaling secondary" is the ratio between the nominal current and the "CT scaling factor P/
S".

Residual I0 CT scaling

Next, we set the residual IO CT scalings according to how the phase current CTs and the ring core CT
are connected to the module (see the Connections image at the beginning of this chapter).

The phase current CTs are connected to the module via a Holmgren (summing) connection, which
requires the use of coarse residual current measurement settings: the "I01 CT" settings are set
according to the phase current CTs' ratings (100/5 A).

© Arcteq Relays Ltd 56

AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

Figure. 5.2.1. - 59. Residual I01 CT scaling (coarse).

The ring core CT is connected to the CTM directly, which requires the use of sensitive residual current
measurement settings: the "I02 CT" settings are set according to the ring core CT's ratings (10/1 A).

Figure. 5.2.1. - 60. Residual I02 CT scaling (sensitive).

Displaying the scaling

Depending on whether the scaling was done based on the CT primary values or the protected object's
nominal current, the measurements are displayed slightly differently. The first of the two images shows
how the measurements are displayed when the CT primary values are the basis for the scaling; the
second shows them when the protected object's nominal current is the basis for the scaling.

Figure. 5.2.1. - 61. Scalings display (based on the CT nominal).

57 © Arcteq Relays Ltd

 AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

Figure. 5.2.1. - 62. Scalings display (based on the protected object's nominal current).

As the images above show, the scaling selection does not affect how primary and secondary currents
are displayed (as actual values). The only effect is that the per-unit system in the relay is scaled either
to the CT nominal or to the object nominal, making the settings input straightforward.

Example of zero sequence CT scaling

Zero sequence CT scaling (ZCT scaling) is done when a zero sequence CT instead of a ring core CT is
part of the measurement connection. In such a case the zero sequence CT should be connected to the
I02 channel which has lower CT scaling ranges (see the image below).

Figure. 5.2.1. - 63. Connections of ZCT scaling.

Troubleshooting
When the measured current values differ from the expected current values, the following table offers
possible solutions for the problems.

© Arcteq Relays Ltd 58

AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

NO
NOTE!
TE!

If you work with energized CTs, extreme caution needs to be taken when checking the
connections! An opened CT secondary circuit may generate dangerously high voltages. A
"buzzing" sound from the connector can indicate an open circuit.

Problem Solution

The measured current The scaling settings may be wrong, check that the settings match with the connected current
amplitude in all phases transformer (Measurement → Transformers → Phase CT scaling). Also check that the "Scale meas.
does not match the to In" is set accordingly. If possible, check the actual CTs and their ratings as there may have been a
injected current. need to change the original plan.

The measured current

amplitude does not
match one of the
measured phases./
Check the wiring connections between the injection device or the CTs and the relay.
The calculated I0 is
measured even though
it should not.

The phase currents are connected to the measurement module but the order or polarity of one or all
phases is incorrect. In relay settings, go to Measurement → Phasors and check the "Phase current
vectors" diagram. When all connections are correct, the diagram (symmetric feeding) should look
The measured current like this:
amplitudes are OK but
the angles are strange./

The phase unbalance

protection trips
immediately after
activation./

The earth fault

protection trips
immediately after
activation.

See the following tables for the most common problems with phase polarity and network rotation
(mixed phases).

The following table presents the most common problems with phase polarity. Problems with phase
polarity are easy to find because the vector diagram points towards the opposite polarity when a phase
has been incorrectly connected.

59 © Arcteq Relays Ltd

 AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

Table. 5.2.1. - 6. Common phase polarity problems.

The polarity of Phase L1 (A) is incorrect.

Phase currents
IL1: 1.00 × In / 0.00 deg
IL2: 1.00 × In / 60.00 deg
IL3: 1.00 × In / 300.00 deg

Sequence currents
I1: 0.33 × In / 180.00 deg
I2: 0.67 × In / 0.00 deg
I0Calc: 0.67 × In / 0.00 deg

Solution options:
- switch the wires between the connectors 1 and 2 in the CT module
- invert the polarity of IL1 (Measurement → Transformers → Phase CT scaling)

The polarity of Phase L2 (B) is incorrect.

Phase currents
IL1: 1.00 × In / 0.00 deg
IL2: 1.00 × In / 60.00 deg
IL3: 1.00 × In / 120.00 deg

Sequence currents
I1: 0.33 × In / 0.00 deg
I2: 0.67 × In / -60.00 deg
I0Calc: 0.67 × In / 60.00 deg

Solution options:
- switch the wires between the connectors 3 and 4 in the CT module
- invert the polarity of IL2 (Measurement → Transformers → Phase CT scaling)

© Arcteq Relays Ltd 60

AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

The polarity of Phase L3 (C) is incorrect.

Phase currents:
IL1: 1.00 × In / 0.00 deg
IL2: 1.00 × In / 240.00 deg
IL3: 1.00 × In / 300.00 deg

Sequence currents:
I1: 0.33 × In / 0.00 deg
I2: 0.67 × In / 60.00 deg
I0Calc: 0.67 × In / -60.00 deg

Solution options:
- switch the wires between the connectors 5 and 6 in the CT module
- invert the polarity of IL1 (Measurement → Transformers → Phase CT scaling)

The following table presents the most common problems with network rotation (mix phases). These
problems can be difficult to find because the measurement result is always the same in the relay. If two
phases are mixed together, the network rotation always follows the pattern IL1-IL3-IL2 and the
measured negative sequence current is therefore always 1.00 (in. p.u.).

Table. 5.2.1. - 7. Common network rotation (mixed phases) problems.

Phases L1 (A) and L2 (B) have switched places (network rotation wrong).

Phase currents:
IL1: 1.00 × In / 0.00 deg
IL2: 1.00 × In / 120.00 deg
IL3: 1.00 × In / 240.00 deg

Sequence currents:
I1: 0.00 × In / 0.00 deg
I2: 1.00 × In / 0.00 deg
I0Calc: 0.00 × In / 0.00 deg

Solution:
- switch the wires between the connectors 1 and 3 in the CT module

61 © Arcteq Relays Ltd

 AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

Phases L2 (B) and L3 (C) have switched places (network rotation wrong).

Phase currents
IL1: 1.00 × In / 0.00 deg
IL2: 1.00 × In / 120.00 deg
IL3: 1.00 × In / 240.00 deg

Sequence currents
I1: 0.00 × In / 0.00 deg
I2: 1.00 × In / 0.00 deg
I0Calc: 0.00 × In / 0.00 deg

Resolution:
- switch the wires between the connectors 3 and 5 in the CT module

Phases L3 (C) and L1 (A) have switched places (network rotation wrong).

Phase currents
IL1: 1.00 × In / 0.00 deg
IL2: 1.00 × In / 120.00 deg
IL3: 1.00 × In / 240.00 deg

Sequence currents
I1: 0.00 × In / 0.00 deg
I2: 1.00 × In / 0.00 deg
I0Calc: 0.00 × In / 0.00 deg

Resolution:
- switch the wires between the connectors 1 and 5 in the CT module

Settings
Table. 5.2.1. - 8. Settings of the Phase CT scaling.

Name Range Step Default Description

Scale 0: CT nom p.u. 0: CT The selection of the reference used in the relay's per-unit system scaling.
meas. to 1: Object In - nom Either the set phase current CT primary or the protected object's nominal
In p.u. p.u. current.

Phase CT 1…25 000.000 0.001 100.000

The rated primary current of the current transformer.
primary A A A

Phase CT 0.200…10.000 0.001

5.000 A The rated secondary current of the current transformer.
secondary A A

Nominal 1…25 000.000 0.001 100.000 The nominal current of the protected object. This setting is only visible if the
current In A A A option "Object In p.u." has been selected in the "Scale meas. to In" setting.

The selection of the first current measurement channel's (IL1) polarity

IL1 0: - (direction). The default setting is for the positive current to flow from
- 0: -
Polarity 1: Invert connector 1 to connector 2, with the secondary currents' starpoint pointing
towards the line.

© Arcteq Relays Ltd 62

AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

Name Range Step Default Description

The selection of the second current measurement channel's (IL2) polarity

IL2 0: - (direction). The default setting is for the positive current to flow from
- 0: -
Polarity 1: Invert connector 3 to connector 4, with the secondary currents' starpoint pointing
towards the line.

The selection of the third current measurement channel's (IL3) polarity

IL3 0: - (direction). The default setting is for the positive current to flow from
- 0: -
Polarity 1: Invert connector 5 to connector 6, with the secondary currents' starpoint pointing
towards the line.

CT
A relay feedback value; the calculated scaling factor that is the ratio
scaling - - -
between the primary current and the secondary current.
factor P/S

CT
scaling A relay feedback value; the calculated scaling factor that is the ratio
- - -
factor between the set primary current and the set nominal current.
NOM

Ipu
A relay feedback value; the scaling factor for the primary current's per-
scaling - - -
unit value.
primary

Ipu
A relay feedback value; the scaling factor for the secondary current's per-
scaling - - -
unit value.
secondary

Table. 5.2.1. - 9. Settings of the Residual I01 CT scaling.

Name Range Step Default Description

I01 CT 0.2…25 0.000

100.0 A The rated primary current of the current transformer.
primary 000.000 A 01 A

I01 CT 0.000
0.1…10.000 A 5.0 A The rated secondary current of the current transformer.
secondary 01 A

The selection of the coarse residual measurement channel's (I01) polarity

I01 0: -
- 0: - (direction). The default setting is for the positive current to flow from
Polarity 1: Invert
connector 7 to connector 8.

CT
A relay feedback value; the calculated scaling factor that is the ratio between
scaling - - -
the primary current and the secondary current.
factor P/S

Table. 5.2.1. - 10. Settings of the Residual I02 CT scaling.

Name Range Step Default Description

I02 CT 0.2…25 0.000

100.0 A The rated primary current of the current transformer.
primary 000.0 A 01 A

I02 CT 0.000
0.001…10.0A 5.0 A The rated secondary current of the current transformer.
secondary 01 A

The selection of the sensitive residual measurement channel's (I02) polarity

I02 0: -
- 0: - (direction). The default setting is for the positive current to flow from
Polarity 1: Invert
connector 9 to connector 10.

CT
A relay feedback value; the calculated scaling factor that is the ratio between
scaling - - -
the primary current and the secondary current.
factor P/S

Measurements
The following measurements are available in the measured current channels.

63 © Arcteq Relays Ltd

 AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

Table. 5.2.1. - 11. Per-unit phase current measurements.

Name Range Step Description

Phase current
0.00…1250.0 × 0.01 The RMS current measurement (in p.u.) from each of the phase current
ILx
In × In channels.
("Pha.curr.ILx")

Phase current
ILx TRMS 0.00…1250.0 × 0.01 The TRMS current (inc. harmonics up to 31st) measurement (in p.u.) from each
("Pha.curr.ILx In × In of the phase current channels.
TRMS")

Peak-to-peak
0.00…500.0 × 0.01 The peak-to-peak current measurement (in p.u.) from each of the phase
current ILx
In × In current channels.
("P-P curr.ILx")

Table. 5.2.1. - 12. Primary phase current measurements.

Name Range Step Description

Primary phase current

0.00…1 000 0.01 The primary RMS current measurement from each of the phase current
ILx
000.0 A A channels.
("Pri.Pha.curr.ILx")

Primary phase current

ILx TRMS 0.00…1 000 0.01 The primary TRMS current (inc. harmonics up to 31st) measurement
("Pha.curr.ILx TRMS 000.0 A A from each of the phase current channels.
Pri")

Table. 5.2.1. - 13. Secondary phase current measurements.

Name Range Step Description

Secondary phase
0.00…300.0 0.01 The primary RMS current measurement from each of the phase current
current ILx
A A channels.
("Sec.Pha.curr.ILx")

Secondary phase
current ILx TRMS 0.00…300.0 0.01 The primary TRMS current (inc. harmonics up to 31st) measurement
("Pha.curr.ILx TRMS A A from each of the phase current channels.
Sec")

Table. 5.2.1. - 14. Phase angle measurements.

Name Range Step Description

Phase angle ILx

0.00…360.00 0.01 The phase angle measurement from each of the three phase current
("Pha.angle
deg deg inputs.
ILx")

Table. 5.2.1. - 15. Per-unit residual current measurements.

Name Range Step Description

Residual current I0x 0.00…1250.0 0.01 The RMS current measurement (in p.u.) from the residual current channel I01
("Res.curr.I0x") × In × In or I02.

Calculated I0
0.00…1250.0 0.01 The RMS current measurement (in p.u.) from the calculated I0 current
× In × In channel.
("calc.I0")

Phase current
I0x TRMS
0.00…1250.0 0.01 The TRMS current (inc. harmonics up to 31st) measurement (in p.u.) from the
× In × In residual current channel I01 or I02.
("Res.curr.I0x TRMS")

Peak-to-peak current
0.00…500.0 0.01 The peak-to-peak current measurement (in p.u.) from the residual current
I0x
× In × In channel I01 or I02.
("P-P curr.I0x")

© Arcteq Relays Ltd 64

AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

Table. 5.2.1. - 16. Primary residual current measurements.

Name Range Step Description

Primary residual
0.00…1 000 0.01 The primary RMS current measurement from the residual current channel
current I0x
000.0 A A I01 or I02.
("Pri.Res.curr.I0x")

Primary calculated I0 0.00…1 000 0.01 The primary RMS current measurement from the calculated current channel
("Pri.calc.I0") 000.0 A A I0.

Primary residual
current I0x TRMS 0.00…1 000 0.01 The TRMS current (inc. harmonics up to 31st) measurement from the
("Res.curr.I0x TRMS 000.0 A A primary residual current channel I01 or I02.
Pri")

Table. 5.2.1. - 17. Secondary residual current measurements.

Name Range Step Description

Secondary residual
0.00…300.0 0.01 The secondary RMS current measurement from the residual current channel
current I0x
A A I01 or I02.
("Sec.Res.curr.I0x")

Secondary calculated
0.00…300.0 0.01 The secondary RMS current measurement from the calculated current
I0
A A channel I0.
("Sec.calc.I0")

Secondary residual
current I0x TRMS 0.00…300.0 0.01 The secondary TRMS current (inc. harmonics up to 31st) measurement from
(Res.curr.I0x TRMS A A the secondary residual current channel I01 or I02.
Sec")

Table. 5.2.1. - 18. Residual phase angle measurements.

Name Range Step Description

Residual current angle

0.00…360.00 0.01 The residual current angle measurement from the I01 or I02 current
I0x
deg deg input.
("Res.curr.angle I0x")

Calculated I0 phase
0.00…360.00 0.01
angle The calculated residual current angle measurement.
deg deg
("calc.I0 Pha.angle")

Table. 5.2.1. - 19. Per-unit sequence current measurements.

Name Range Step Description

Positive sequence
0.00…1250.0 × 0.01 × The measurement (in p.u.) from the calculated positive sequence
current
In In current.
("Pos.seq.curr.")

Negative sequence
0.00…1250.0 × 0.01 × The measurement (in p.u.) from the calculated negative sequence
current
In In current.
("Neg.seq.curr.")

Zero sequence current 0.00…1250.0 × 0.01 × The measurement (in p.u.) from the calculated zero sequence
("Zero seq.curr.") In In current.

Table. 5.2.1. - 20. Primary sequence current measurements.

Name Range Step Description

Primary positive sequence

0.00…1 000 0.01 The primary measurement from the calculated positive
current
000.0 A A sequence current.
("Pri.Pos.seq.curr.")

65 © Arcteq Relays Ltd

 AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

Name Range Step Description

Primary negative sequence

0.00…1 000 0.01 The primary measurement from the calculated negative
current
000.0 A A sequence current.
("Pri.Neg.seq.curr.")

Primary zero sequence

0.00…1 000 0.01 The primary measurement from the calculated zero sequence
current
000.0 A A current.
("Pri.Zero seq.curr.")

Table. 5.2.1. - 21. Secondary sequence current measurements.

Name Range Step Description

Secondary positive sequence

0.00…300.0 0.01 The secondary measurement from the calculated positive
current
A A sequence current.
("Sec.Pos.seq.curr.")

Secondary negative sequence

0.00…300.0 0.01 The secondary measurement from the calculated negative
current
A A sequence current.
("Sec.Neg.seq.curr")

Secondary zero sequence

0.00…300.0 0.01 The secondary measurement from the calculated zero sequence
current
A A current.
("Sec.Zero seq.curr.")

Table. 5.2.1. - 22. Sequence phase angle measurements.

Name Range Step Description

Positive sequence current angle

0.00…360.0 deg 0.01 deg The calculated positive sequence current angle.
("Pos.seq.curr.angle")

Negative sequence current angle

0.00…360.0 deg 0.01 deg The calculated negative sequence current angle.
("Neg.seq.curr.angle")

Zero sequence current angle

0.00…360.0 deg 0.01 deg The calculated zero sequence current angle.
("Zero seq.curr.angle")

Table. 5.2.1. - 23. Harmonic current measurements.

Name Range Step Default Description

Harmonics
calculation values 0: Percent 0: Defines whether the harmonics are calculated as percentage or
-
("Harm Abs.or 1: Absolute Percent absolute values.
Perc.")

0: Per unit
1: Primary
A 0: Per Defines how the harmonics are displayed: in p.u values, as primary
Harmonics display -
2: unit current values, or as secondary current values.
Secondary
A

Maximum harmonics
0.00...100 0.01 Displays the maximum harmonics value of the selected current input
value -
000.00 A A ILx or I0x.
("IxxMaxH")

Fundamental 0.01
0.00...100 Displays the current value of the fundamental frequency (RMS) from
frequency A -
000.00 A the selected current input ILx or I0x.
("Ixx Fund")

Ixx harmonics 0.00…100 0.01

- Displays the selected harmonic from the current input ILx or I0x.
(2nd...31st harmonic) 000.00 A A

© Arcteq Relays Ltd 66

AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

5.2.2. Voltage measurement and scaling

The voltage measurement module (VT module, or VTM) is used for measuring the voltages from
voltage transformers. The measured values are processed into the measurement database and they
are used by measurement and protection functions (the protection function availability depends of the
relay type). It is essential to understand the concept of voltage measurements to be able to get correct
measurements.

Figure. 5.2.2. - 64. Voltage measurement terminology

PRI: The primary voltage, i.e. the voltage in the primary circuit which is connected to the primary side of
the voltage transformer.

SEC: The secondary voltage, i.e. the voltage which the voltage transformer transforms according to the
ratio. This voltage is measured by the protection relay.

For the measurements to be correct the user needs to ensure that the measurement signals are
connected to the correct inputs, that the voltage direction correct, and that the scaling is set correctly.

The relay calculates the scaling factors based on the set VT primary, and secondary voltage values.
The relay measures secondary voltages, which are the voltage outputs from the VT installed into the
application's primary circuit. The voltage can be measured directly from the system (up to 400 V) as
well. The rated primary and secondary voltages of the VT need to be set for the relay to "know"
the primary and per-unit values. In modern protection devices this scaling calculation is done internally
after the voltage transformer's primary and secondary voltages are set.

Normally, the primary line-to-line voltage rating for VTs is 400 V...60 kV, while the secondary voltage
ratings are 100 V...210 V. Non-standard ratings can also be directly connected as the scaling settings
are flexible and have large ranges.

Example of VT scaling
The following figure presents how VTs are connected to the relay's measurement inputs. It also shows
the VT ratings. In the figure below, three line-to-neutral voltages are connected along with the zero
sequence voltage; therefore, the 3LN+U4 mode must be selected and the U4 channel must be set as
U0. Other possible connections are presented later in this chapter.

67 © Arcteq Relays Ltd

 AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

Figure. 5.2.2. - 65. Connections.

The following table presents the initial data of the connection.

Table. 5.2.2. - 24. Initial data.

Pha
hase
se vvolta
oltage
ge V
VTT Zer
eroo sequence vvolta
oltage
ge V
VTT

- VT primary: 20 000 V - U4 VT primary: 20 000 V

- VT secondary: 100 V - U4 VT secondary: 100 V

- the zero sequence voltage is connected similarly to line-to-neutral voltages (+U0).

- in case wiring is incorrect, all polarities can be individually switched by 180 degrees in the relay.

If the protection is voltage-based, the supervised voltage can be based either on line-to-line voltages or
on line-to-earth voltages. This selection is defined in the "Measured magnitude" of each protection
stage menu separately (Protection → Voltage → [protection stage menu] → INFO; see the image
below). The number of available protection functions depends on the relay type.

Figure. 5.2.2. - 66. Selecting the measured magnitude.

© Arcteq Relays Ltd 68

AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

Voltage protection itself is based on the nominal voltage. A 20 000 V nominal voltage equals a 100 %
setting in voltage-based protection functions. A 120 % trip setting in the overvoltage stage equals to
24 000 V on the primary level (in this case a 20 % increase equals 4000 V).

Once the settings have been sent to the device, relay calculates the scaling factors and displays them
for the user. The "VT scaling factor P/S" describes the ratio between the primary voltage and the
secondary voltage. The per-unit scaling factors ("VT scaling factor p.u.") for both primary and
secondary values are also displayed.

The triggering of a voltage protection stage can be based on one, two, or three voltages (the "Pick-up
terms" setting at Protection → Voltage → [protection stage menu] → Settings). Fault loops are either
line-to-line or line-to-neutral according to the "Measured magnitude" setting. As a default, the activation
of any one voltage trips the voltage protection stage.

Figure. 5.2.2. - 67. Selecting the operating mode.

There are several different ways to use all four voltage channels. The voltage measurement modes are
the following:

• 3LN+U4 (three line-to-neutral voltages and U4 can be used for either zero sequence voltage
or synchrochecking)
• 3LL+U4 (three line-to-line voltages and U4 can be used either for zero sequence voltage or
synchrochecking)
• 2LL+U3+U4 (two line-to-line voltages and the U3 and the U4 channels can be used for
synchrochecking, zero sequence voltage, or for both)

The 3LN+U0 is the most common voltage measurement mode. See below for example connections of
voltage line-to-line measurement (3LL on the left, 2LL on the right).

69 © Arcteq Relays Ltd

 AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

Figure. 5.2.2. - 68. Example connections for voltage line-to-line measurement.

If only two line-to-line voltages are measured, the third one (UL31) is calculated based on the UL12 and
UL23 vectors. When measuring line-to-line voltages, the line-to-neutral voltages can also be calculated
as long as the value of U0 is measured and known.

The voltage measurement channel U4 can also be used to measure either the zero sequence voltage
(U0) or the side 2 voltage of the circuit breaker (Synchrocheck). If the 2LL+U3+U4 mode is selected,
the third channel (U3) can be used for this purpose. Please note that U0 can only be measured by
using a single channel.

In the image below is an example of 2LL+U0+SS, that is, two line-to-line measurements with the zero
sequence voltage and voltage from side 2 for Synchrocheck. Since U0 is available, line-to-neutral
voltages can be calculated.

Figure. 5.2.2. - 69. 2LL+U0+SS settings and connections.

The image collection below presents the relay's behavior when nominal voltage is injected into the relay
via secondary test equipment. The measurement mode is 3LN+U4 which means that the relay is
measuring line-to-neutral voltages. The VT scaling has been set to 20 000 : 100 V. The U4 channel
measures the zero sequence voltage which has the same ratio (20 000 : 100 V).

© Arcteq Relays Ltd 70

AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

Figure. 5.2.2. - 70. Relay behavior when nominal voltage injected.

The image collection below presents the relay's behavior when voltage is injected into the relay via
secondary test equipment during an earth fault. The measurement mode is 3LN+U4 which means that
the relay is measuring line-to-neutral voltages. The VT scaling has been set to 20 000 : 100 V. The U4
channel measures the zero sequence voltage which has the same ratio (20 000 : 100 V).

Figure. 5.2.2. - 71. Relay behavior when voltage injected during an earth fault.

Troubleshooting
When the measured voltage values differ from the expected voltage values, the following table offers
possible solutions for the problems.

Problem Check / Resolution

The measured
voltage amplitude in all The scaling settings or the voltage measurement mode may be wrong, check that the settings
phases does not match match with the connected voltage transformer (Measurement → Transformers → VT Module).
the injected voltage.

The measured
voltage amplitude does
not match one of the
measured phases./
Check the wiring connections between the injection device or the VTs and the relay.
The calculated U0 is
measured even though it
should not.

71 © Arcteq Relays Ltd

 AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

Problem Check / Resolution

The voltages are connected to the measurement module but the order or polarity of one or all
phases is incorrect. In relay settings, go to Measurement → Phasors and check the "System
The measured voltage vectors" diagram. When all connections are correct, the diagram (symmetric feeding)
voltage amplitudes are OK should look like this:
but the angles are
strange./

The voltage unbalance

protection trips
immediately after
activation./

The earth fault protection

trips immediately after it is
activated and voltage
calculated.

Settings
Table. 5.2.2. - 25. Settings of the VT scaling.

Name Range Step Default Description

Voltage
0: 3LN+U4
measurement
1: 3LL+U4 0: The relay's voltage wiring method. The voltages are scaled according the
mode -
2: 3LN+U4 set voltage measurement mode.
("Voltage
2LL+U3+U4
meas mode")

The voltage channel U3 can be used to measure zero sequence voltage

0: Not Used 0: Not
U3 mode U0 (U0) or the Synchrocheck voltage (SS). If neither is needed, the (default)
1: U0 - Used
or SS option "Not Used" should be active. This setting is only valid if the
2: SS
"2LL+U3+U4" mode is selected.

0: Broken
Delta Defines how the secondary voltage is scaled to the primary. Does not
U0 (U3) 0:
1: Neutral affect how protection operates, it only affects the displayed primary
Measured - Broken
point voltages. This parameter is visible when the "U3 mode U0 or SS" has been
from delta
2: Open set to the "U0" mode.
delta

0: Not Used 0: Not The voltage channel U4 can be used to measure zero sequence voltage
U4 mode U0
1: U0 - Used (U0) or the Synchrocheck voltage (SS). If neither is needed, the (default)
or SS
2: SS option "Not Used" should be active.

0: Broken
Delta Defines how the secondary voltage is scaled to the primary. Does not
U0 (U4) 0:
1: Neutral affect how protection operates, it only affects the displayed primary
Measured - Broken
point voltages. This parameter is visible when the "U4 mode U0 or SS" has been
from delta
2: Open set to the "U0" mode.
delta

Voltage 0: Disabled 0: Activates the voltage memory. The "Voltage memory" chapter describes
-
memory 1: Activated Disabled the function in more detail.

0: No P-E
voltages
available
Indicates whether or not phase-to-earth voltages are available. Also
1: P-E
P-E Voltage indicates whether P-E voltages are measured from the voltage channels
Voltages - -
measurements directly or if they are calculated from measured line-to-line and zero
calculated
sequence voltages.
2: P-E
Voltages
measured

1…1 000 20
VT primary 0.1 V The rated primary voltage of the voltage transformer.
000.0 V 000.0 V

© Arcteq Relays Ltd 72

AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

Name Range Step Default Description

0.2…400.0
VT secondary 0.1 V 100.0 V The rated secondary voltage of the voltage transformer.
V

U3 Res/SS VT 1…1 000 20 The primary nominal voltage of the connected U0 or SS VT. This setting is
0.1 V
primary 000 V 000.0V only valid if the "2LL+U3+U4" mode is selected.

U3 Res/SS VT The secondary nominal voltage of the connected U0 or SS VT. This setting
0.2…400 V 0.1 V 100.0 V
secondary is only valid if the "2LL+U3+U4" mode is selected.

U4 Res/SS VT 1…1 000 20

0.1 V The primary nominal voltage of the connected U0 or SS VT.
primary 000 V 000.0 V

U4 Res/SS VT
0.2…400 V 0.1 V 100.0 V The secondary nominal voltage of the connected U0 or SS VT.
secondary

The selection of the first voltage measurement channel's (U1) polarity

0: - (direction). The default setting is for the positive voltage to flow from
U1 Polarity - 0: -
1: Invert connector 1 to connector 2, with the secondary voltage's starpoint pointing
towards the line.

The selection of the second voltage measurement channel's (U2) polarity

0: - (direction). The default setting is for the positive voltage to flow from
U2 Polarity - 0: -
1: Invert connector 1 to connector 2, with the secondary voltage's starpoint pointing
towards the line.

The selection of the third voltage measurement channel's (U3) polarity

0: - (direction). The default setting is for the positive voltage to flow from
U3 Polarity - 0: -
1: Invert connector 1 to connector 2, with the secondary voltage's starpoint pointing
towards the line.

The selection of the fourth voltage measurement channel's (U4) polarity

0: - (direction). The default setting is for the positive voltage to flow from
U4 Polarity - 0: -
1: Invert connector 1 to connector 2, with the secondary voltage's starpoint pointing
towards the line.

VT scaling A relay feedback value; the calculated scaling factor that is the ratio
- - -
factor P/S between the primary voltage and the secondary voltage.

VT scaling A relay feedback value; the scaling factor for the primary voltage's per-
- - -
factor p.u. Pri unit value.

VT scaling A relay feedback value; the scaling factor for the secondary voltage's per-
- - -
factor p.u. Sec unit value.

U3 VT scaling A relay feedback value; the scaling factor that is the ratio between the U3
factor P/S U0/ - - - channel's primary and secondary voltages. This setting is only valid if the
SS "2LL+U3+U4" mode is selected.

A relay feedback value for channel U3; the scaling factor for the primary
U3 scaling
- - - voltage's per-unit value. This setting is only valid if the "2LL+U3+U4" mode
factor p.u. Pri
is selected.

A relay feedback value for channel U3; the scaling factor for the secondary
U3 scaling
- - - voltage's per-unit value. This setting is only valid if the "2LL+U3+U4" mode
factor p.u. Sec
is selected.

U4 VT scaling A relay feedback value; the scaling factor that is the ration between the U4
factor P/S U0/ - - - channel's primary and secondary voltages. This setting is only valid is the
SS "2LL+U3+U4" mode is selected.

A relay feedback value for channel U4; the scaling factor for the primary
U4 scaling
- - - voltage's per-unit value. This setting is only valid if the "2LL+U3+U4" mode
factor p.u. Pri
is selected.

A relay feedback value for channel U4; the scaling factor for the secondary
U4 scaling
- - - voltage's per-unit value. This setting is only valid if the "2LL+U3+U4" mode
factor p.u. Sec
is selected.

Measurements
The following measurements are available in the measured voltage channels.

73 © Arcteq Relays Ltd

 AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

Table. 5.2.2. - 26. Per-unit voltage measurements.

Name Range Step Description

Voltage Ux 0.00…500.0 × 0.01 ×

The RMS voltage measurement (in p.u.) from each of the voltage channels.
("UxVolt p.u.") Un Un

Voltage Ux
TRMS 0.00…500.0 × 0.01 × The TRMS voltage (inc. harmonics up to 31st) measurement (in p.u.) from each
("UxVolt TRMS Un Un of the voltage channels.
p.u.")

Table. 5.2.2. - 27. Secondary voltage measurements.

Name Range Step Description

Secondary voltage
0.00…500.0 × 0.01
Ux The secondary RMS voltage measurement from each of the voltage channels.
V V
("Ux Volt sec")

Secondary voltage
Ux TRMS
0.00…500.0 × 0.01 The secondary TRMS voltage (inc. harmonics up to 31st) measurement
V V from each of the voltage channels.
("UxVolt TRMS sec")

Table. 5.2.2. - 28. Voltage phase angle measurements.

Name Range Step Description

Ux Angle 0.00…360.00 deg 0.01 deg The phase angle measurement from each of the four voltage inputs.

Table. 5.2.2. - 29. Per-unit sequence voltage measurements.

Name Range Step Description

Positive sequence
0.00…500.0 × 0.01 × The measurement (in p.u.) from the calculated positive sequence
voltage
Un Un voltage.
("Pos.seq.Volt.p.u.")

Negative sequence
0.00…500.0 × 0.01 × The measurement (in p.u.) from the calculated negative sequence
voltage
Un Un voltage.
("Neg.seq.Volt.p.u.")

Zero sequence voltage 0.00…500.0 × 0.01 × The measurement (in p.u.) from the calculated zero sequence
("Zero.seq.Volt.p.u.") Un Un voltage.

Table. 5.2.2. - 30. Primary sequence voltage measurements.

Name Range Step Description

Primary positive sequence

0.00…1 000 0.01 The primary measurement from the calculated positive
voltage
000.00 × V V sequence voltage.
("Pos.seq.Volt.pri")

Primary negative sequence

0.00…1 000 0.01 The primary measurement from the calculated negative
voltage
000.00 × V V sequence voltage.
("Neg.seq.Volt.pri")

Primary zero sequence

0.00…1 000 0.01 The primary measurement from the calculated zero sequence
voltage
000.00 × V V voltage.
("Zero.seq.Volt.pri")

Table. 5.2.2. - 31. Secondary sequence voltage measurements.

Name Range Step Description

Secondary positive sequence

0.00…4800.0 0.01 The secondary measurement from the calculated positive
voltage
V V sequence voltage.
("Pos.seq.Volt.sec")

© Arcteq Relays Ltd 74

AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

Name Range Step Description

Secondary negative sequence

0.00…4800.0 0.01 The secondary measurement from the calculated negative
voltage
V V sequence voltage.
("Neg.seq.Volt.sec")

Secondary zero sequence

0.00…4800.0 0.01 The secondary measurement from the calculated zero sequence
voltage
V V voltage.
("Zero.seq.Volt.sec")

Table. 5.2.2. - 32. Sequence voltage angle measurements.

Name Range Step Description

Positive sequence voltage angle

0.00…360.0 deg 0.01 deg The calculated positive sequence voltage angle.
("Pos.seq.Volt.Angle")

Negative sequence voltage angle

0.00…360.0 deg 0.01 deg The calculated negative sequence voltage angle.
("Neg.seq.Volt.Angle")

Zero sequence voltage angle

0.00…360.0 deg 0.01 deg The calculated zero sequence voltage angle.
("Zero.seq.Volt.Angle")

Table. 5.2.2. - 33. System primary voltage measurements.

Name Range Step Description

System
voltage
0.00…1
magnitude
000 0.01 The primary RMS line-to-line UL12 voltage (measured or calculated). You can also select the
UL12
000.00 V row where the unit for this is kV.
("System
V
volt UL12
mag")

System
voltage
0.00…1
magnitude
000 0.01 The primary RMS line-to-line UL23 voltage (measured or calculated). You can also select the
UL23
000.00 V row where the unit for this is kV.
("System
V
volt UL23
mag")

System
voltage
0.00…1
magnitude
000 0.01 The primary RMS line-to-line UL31 voltage (measured or calculated). You can also select the
UL31
000.00 V row where the unit for this is kV.
("System
V
volt UL31
mag")

System
voltage
0.00…1
magnitude
000 0.01 The primary RMS line-to-neutral UL1 voltage (measured or calculated). You can also select
UL1
000.00 V the row where the unit for this is kV.
("System
V
volt UL1
mag")

System
voltage
0.00…1
magnitude
000 0.01 The primary RMS line-to-neutral UL2 voltage (measured or calculated). You can also select
UL2
000.00 V the row where the unit for this is kV.
("System
V
volt UL2
mag")

75 © Arcteq Relays Ltd

 AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

Name Range Step Description

System
voltage
0.00…1
magnitude
000 0.01 The primary RMS line-to-neutral UL3 voltage (measured or calculated). You can also select
UL3
000.00 V the row where the unit for this is kV.
("System
V
volt UL3
mag")

System
voltage
0.00…1
magnitude
000 0.01 The primary RMS zero sequence U0 voltage (measured or calculated). You can also select
U0
000.00 V the row where the unit for this is kV. There is also a row where the unit is %.
("System
V
volt U0
mag")

System
voltage
0.00…1
magnitude The primary measured RMS Synchrocheck voltage (SS). This magnitude is displayed only
000 0.01
U3 when the "2LL+U3+U4" mode is selected and both U3 and U4 are in use. You can also
000.00 V
("System select the row where the unit for this is kV.
V
volt U3
mag")

System
voltage
0.00…1
magnitude The primary measured RMS Synchrocheck voltage (SS). This magnitude is displayed only
000 0.01
U4 when the "2LL+U3+U4" mode is selected and both U3 and U4 are in use. You can also
000.00 V
("System select the row where the unit for this is kV.
V
volt U4
mag")

Table. 5.2.2. - 34. Primary system voltage angles.

Name Range Step Description

System
voltage angle
0.00…360.0 0.01
UL12 The primary line-to-line angle UL12 (measured or calculated).
deg deg
("System volt
UL12 ang")

System
voltage angle
0.00…360.0 0.01
UL23 The primary line-to-line angle UL23 (measured or calculated).
deg deg
("System volt
UL23 ang")

System
voltage angle
0.00…360.0 0.01
UL31 The primary line-to-line angle UL23 (measured or calculated).
deg deg
("System volt
UL31 ang")

System
voltage angle
0.00…360.0 0.01
UL1 The primary line-to-neutral angle UL1 (measured or calculated).
deg deg
("System volt
UL1 ang")

System
voltage angle
0.00…360.0 0.01
UL2 The primary line-to-neutral angle UL2 (measured or calculated).
deg deg
("System volt
UL2 ang")

System
voltage angle
0.00…360.0 0.01
UL3 The primary line-to-neutral angle UL3 (measured or calculated).
deg deg
("System volt
UL3 ang")

© Arcteq Relays Ltd 76

AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

Name Range Step Description

System
voltage angle
0.00…360.0 0.01
U0 The primary zero sequence angle U0 (measured or calculated).
deg deg
("System volt
U0 ang")

System
voltage angle
0.00…360.0 0.01 The primary measured Synchrocheck angle SS. This magnitude is only valid when the
U3
deg deg "2LL+U3+U4" mode is selected and both U3 and U4 are in use.
("System volt
U3 ang")

System
voltage angle
0.00…360.0 0.01 The primary measured Synchrocheck angle SS. This magnitude is displayed only
U4
deg deg when the "2LL+U3+U4" mode is selected and both U3 and U4 are in use.
("System volt
U4 ang")

Table. 5.2.2. - 35. Harmonic voltage measurements.

Name Range Step Default Description

Harmonics
calculation values 0: Percent 0: Defines whether the harmonics are calculated as percentages or
-
("Harm Abs.or 1: Absolute Percent absolute values.
Perc.")

0: Per unit
1: Primary
V 0: Per Defines how the harmonics are displayed: in p.u. values, as primary
Harmonics display -
2: unit voltage values, or as secondary voltage values.
Secondary
V

Maximum harmonics
0.00…100 0.01 Displays the maximum harmonics value of the selected voltage input
value -
000.00 V V Ux.
("UxMaxH")

Fundamental
0.00…100 0.01 Displays the voltage value of the fundamental frequency value (RMS)
frequency -
000.00 V V of the selected voltage input Ux.
("Ux Fund")

Ux harmonics
0.00...100 0.01
(2nd...31st 000.00 V V
- Displays the selected harmonic from the voltage input Ux.
harmonic)

5.2.3. Power and energy calculation

The relays that are equipped with both a voltage and a current measurement card can calculate power,
and can therefore have power-based protection and monitoring functions (the number of available
functions depends of the relay type). In addition to power calculations, energy magnitudes are also
calculated.

Power is divided into three magnitudes: apparent power (S), active power (P) and reactive power (Q).
Energy measurement calculates magnitudes for active and reactive energy. Energy can flow to the
forward direction (exported) or to the reverse direction (imported).

If a unit has more than one CT measurement module, the user can choose which module's current
measurement is used by the power calculation.

Line
Line-t
-to-ne
o-neutral
utral vvolta
oltages
ges a
avvailable

77 © Arcteq Relays Ltd

 AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

Power is calculated from line-to-neutral voltages and phase currents. If line-to-line voltages are
connected, the relay can calculate line-to-neutral voltages based on the measured zero sequence
voltage. The following equations apply for power calculations with the line-to-neutral mode and the line-
to-line voltage mode (with U0 connected and measured):

Figure. 5.2.3. - 72. Three-phase power (S) calculation.

Figure. 5.2.3. - 73. Three-phase active power (P) calculation.

In these equations, phi (φ) is the angle difference between voltage and current.

Figure. 5.2.3. - 74. Three-phase reactive power (Q) calculation.

Active power can be to the forward or the reverse direction. The direction of active power can be
indicated with the power factor (Cos (φ), or Cosine phi), which is calculated according the following
formula:

The direction of reactive power is divided into four quadrants. Reactive power may be inductive or
capacitive on both forward and reverse directions. Reactive power quadrant can be indicated with Tan
(φ) (tangent phi), which is calculated according the following formula:

© Arcteq Relays Ltd 78

AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

Power factor calculation is done similarly to the Cosine phi calculation but the polarity is defined by the
reactive power direction. Therefore, the power factor is calculated with the following formula:

Onl
Onlyy line
line-t
-to-line
o-line vvolta
oltages
ges a
avvailable

If the line-to-line voltages are measured but the zero sequence voltage is not measured or is not
otherwise known, the three-phase power calculation is based on Aron’s theorem:

Both cos(φ) and tan(φ) are calculated in the same way as in the line-to-neutral mode.

Troubleshooting
Check the "Troubleshooting" section in chapters “Current measurement and scaling” and “Voltage
measurement and scaling” for more information. Most power and energy measurement problems are
usually related to the same issues (i.e. wiring errors, wrong measurement modes, faulty frequency
settings, etc.).

Settings
Table. 5.2.3. - 36. Power and energy measurement settings

Name Range Step Default Description

0:
Three-phase active
Disabled
energy measurement - 0: Disabled Enables/disables the active energy measurement.
1:
("EP meas 3ph")
Enabled

79 © Arcteq Relays Ltd

 AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

Name Range Step Default Description

0:
Three-phase reactive
Disabled
energy measurement - 0: Disabled Enables/disables the reactive energy measurement.
1:
("EQ meas 3ph")
Enabled

Three-phase energy
0: Mega 0: Mega Defines whether energy is measured with the prefix 'kilo' (103) or
prefix -
1: Kilo 'mega' (106).
("E 3ph M or k")

0:
Undefined
1: Q1
Fwd Ind
2: Q2 Rev 0:
PQ Quadrant - Indicates what the power PQ quadrant is at that moment.
Cap Undefined
3: Q3 Rev
Ind
4: Q4
Fwd Cap

0:
Undefined
1: Q1
Fwd
Cap AV
2: Q2 Rev
VA Quadrant - 0:Undefined Indicates what the power VA quadrant is at that moment.
Ind AV
3: Q3 Rev
Cap VA
4: Q4
Fwd Ind
VA

Reset energy
calculators 0: - 0: - Resets the memory of the three-phase energy calculators. Goes
-
("Reset 3ph 1: Reset automatically back to the "-" state after the reset is finished.
Energies")

EP per phase 0:
measurement Disabled 0: Disabled
- Enables/disables the active energy per phase measurement.
("EP meas per 1:
phase") Enabled

EQ per phase 0:
measurement Disabled 0: Disabled
- Enables/disables the reactive energy per phase measurement.
("EQ meas per 1:
phase") Enabled

Per phase energy Defines whether energy (per phase) is measured with the
0: Mega 0: Mega
prefix -
("E phs M or k")
1: Kilo prefix 'kilo' (103) or 'mega' (106).

Reset energy
calculators (per 0: - 0: - Resets the memory of the indivisual phase energy calculator. Goes
-
phase) 1: Reset automatically back to the "-" state after the reset is finished.
("Reset E per phase")

Table. 5.2.3. - 37. Energy Dose Counter 1 settings

Name Range Step Default Description

Energy
dose 0: Disabled 0: Disabled
- Enables/disables energy dose counters generally.
counter 1: Activated
mode

DC 1…4 0: Disabled 0: Disabled Enables/disables the energy dose counter 1…4

-
enable 1: Enabled individually.

© Arcteq Relays Ltd 80

AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

Name Range Step Default Description

0: 3PH.Fwd.Act.EP
1: 3PH.Rev.Avt.EP
DC 1…4 2:
0: Selects whether the energy is active or reactive, whether
Input 3PH.Fwd.React.EQ.CAP
- 3PH.Fwd.Act.EP the direction of the energy is forward of reverse, and
signal 3: 3PH.Fwd.React.EQ.IND
whether reactive energy is inductive or capacitive.
select 4:
3PH.Rev.React.EQ.CAP
5: 3PH.Rev.React.EQ.IND

DC 1…4
Input -1 × 106…1 × 106 0.01 - The total amount of energy consumed.
signal

DC 1…4 0.005
The set pulse size. An energy pulse is given every time
Pulse 0…1800 kW/var kW/ 1 kW/Var
the set magnitude is exceeded.
magnitude var

DC 1…4
0.005
Pulse 0…1800 s 1s The total length of a control pulse.
s
length

DC1…4
Pulses 0…4 294 967 295 1 - Indicates the total number of pulses sent.
sent

Table. 5.2.3. - 38. DC 1…4 Pulse out settings

Name Range Step Default Description

None selected
DC 1…4 Pulse out OUT1…OUTx - The selection of the controlled physical outputs.

Power measurements
The following power calculations are available when the voltage and the current cards are available.

Table. 5.2.3. - 39. Three-phase power calculations.

Name Range Step Description

3PH Apparent power (S) -1x106…1x106 kVA 0.01 kVA The total three-phase apparent power in kilo-volt-ampere

3PH Active power (P) -1x106…1x106 kW 0.01 kW The total three-phase active power in kilowatts

3PH Reactive power (Q) -1x106…1x106 kVar 0.01 kVar The total three-phase reactive power in kilovars

3PH Apparent power (S MVA) -1x105…1x105 MVA 0.01 MVA The total three-phase apparent power in megawatts

3PH Active power (P MW) -1x105…1x105 MW 0.01 MW The total three-phase active power in mewatts

3PH Reactive power (QMVar) -1x105…1x105 MVar 0.01 MVar The total three-phase active power in megavars

3PH Tan(phi) -1x106…1x106 0.01 The direction of three-phase active power

3PH Cos(phi) -1x106…1x106 0.01 The direction of three-phase reactive power

3PH PF -1x106…1x106 0.0001 The three-phase power factor

Table. 5.2.3. - 40. Single-phase power calculations (L1...L3).

Name Range Step Description

Lx Apparent power (S) -1x106…1x106 kVA 0.01 kVA The apparent power of Phase Lx in kilo-volt-amperes

Lx Active power (P) -1x106…1x106 kW 0.01 kW The active power of Phase Lx in kilowatts

81 © Arcteq Relays Ltd

 AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

Name Range Step Description

Lx Reactive power (Q) -1x106…1x106 kVar 0.01 kVar The reactive power of Phase Lx kilovars

Lx Tan(phi) -1x106…1x106 0.01 The direction of Phase Lx's active power

Lx Cos(phi) -1x106…1x106 0.01 The direction of Phase Lx's reactive power

Lx PF -1x106…1x106 0.0001 The power factor of Phase Lx

Energy measurements
The following energy calculations are available when the voltage and the current cards are available.
Please note that the unit prefix is determined by the user's selection between 'kilo' and 'mega' in "Three-
phase energy prefix ("E 3ph M or k")" under the general "Power and energy measurement settings".

Table. 5.2.3. - 41. Three-phase energy calculations.

Name Range Step Description

Exp.Active Energy (kWh or -999 999 995 904.00…999 999

0.01 The total amount of exported active energy.
MWh) 995 904.00

Imp.Active Energy (kWh or -999 999 995 904.00…999 999

0.01 The total amount of imported active energy.
MWh) 995 904.00

Exp/Imp.Act.E balance (kWh or -999 999 995 904.00…999 999 The sum of imported and exported active
0.01
MWh) 995 904.00 energy.

Exp.React.Cap.E. (kVarh or -999 999 995 904.00…999 999 The total amount of exported reactive
0.01
MVarh) 995 904.00 capacitive energy.

Imp.React.Cap.E. (kVarh or -999 999 995 904.00…999 999 The total amount of imported reactive
0.01
MVarh) 995 904.00 capacitive energy.

Exp/Imp
-999 999 995 904.00…999 999 The sum of imported and exported reactive
React.Cap.E.bal. (kVarh or 0.01
995 904.00 capacitive energy.
MVarh)

Exp.React.Ind.E. (kVarh or -999 999 995 904.00…999 999 The total amount of exported reactive
0.01
MVarh) 995 904.00 inductive energy.

Imp.React.Ind.E. (kVarh or -999 999 995 904.00…999 999 The total amount of imported reactive
0.01
MVarh) 995 904.00 inductive energy.

Exp/Imp React.Ind.E.bal. (kVarh -999 999 995 904.00…999 999 The sum of imported and exported reactive
0.01
or MVarh) 995 904.00 inductive energy.

Table. 5.2.3. - 42. Single-phase energy calculations (L1...L3).

Name Range Step Description

Lx Exp.Active Energy (kWh or MWh) -1x109…1x109 0.01 The exported active energy of the phase.

Lx Imp.Active Energy (kWh or MWh) -1x109…1x109 0.01 The imported active energy of the phase.

Lx Exp/Imp.Act.E balance (kWh or The sum of the phase's imported and exported active
MWh) -1x109…1x109 0.01
energy.

Lx Exp.React.Cap.E. (kVarh or
MVarh) -1x109…1x109 0.01 The exported reactive capacitive energy of the phase.

Lx Imp.React.Cap.E. (kVarh or
MVarh) -1x109…1x109 0.01 The imported reactive capacitive energy of the phase.

Lx Exp/Imp React.Cap.E.bal. (kVarh The sum of the phase's imported and exported reactive
or MVarh) -1x109…1x109 0.01
capacitive energy.

Lx Exp.React.Ind.E. (kVarh or MVarh) -1x109…1x109 0.01 The exported reactive inductive energy of the phase.

© Arcteq Relays Ltd 82

AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

Name Range Step Description

Lx Imp.React.Ind.E. (kVarh or MVarh) -1x109…1x109 0.01 The imported reactive inductive energy of the phase.

Lx Exp/Imp React.Ind.E.bal. (kVarh or The sum of the phase's imported and exported reactive
MVarh) -1x109…1x109 0.01
inductive energy.

Calculation examples
Here is an example of power calculation. Both wiring methods (line-to-line and line-to-neutral) are
checked with the same signal injection. The voltage scaling is set to 20 000 : 100 V and the current
scaling is set to 1000 : 5 A.

Voltages (line-to-neutral): Currents:

UL1 = 40.825 V, 45.00° IL1 = 2.5 A, 0.00°

UL2 = 61.481 V, -159.90° IL2 = 2.5 A, -120.00°

UL3 = 97.742 V, 126.21° IL3 = 2.5 A, 120.00°

Name Value Name Value Name Value Name Value

L1 (S) 4.08 MVA L2 (S) 6.15 MVA L3 (S) 9.77 MVA 3P

3PHH (S) 20.00 MVA

L1 (P) 2.89 MW L2 (P) 4.72 MW L3 (P) 9.71 MW 3P

3PHH (P) 17.32 MW

L1 (Q) 2.89 Mvar L2 (Q) -3.94 Mvar L3 (Q) 1.06 Mvar 3P

3PHH (Q) 0.01 Mvar

L1 T
Tan
an 1.00 L2 T
Tan
an -0.83 L3 T
Tan
an 0.11 3P
3PHHT
Tan
an 0.00

L1 Cos 0.71 L2 Cos 0.77 L3 Cos 0.99 3P

3PHH Cos 0.87

Voltages (line-to-line): Currents:

UL12 = 100.00 V, 30.00° IL1 = 2.5 A, 0.00°

UL23 = 100.00 V, -90.00° IL2 = 2.5 A, -120.00°

IL3= 2.5 A, 120.00°

83 © Arcteq Relays Ltd

 AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

Name Values

3PH (S) 20.00 MVA

3PH (P) 17.32 MW

3PH (Q) 0.00 Mvar

3PH Tan 0.00

3PH Cos 0.87

5.2.4. Frequency tracking and scaling

Measurement sampling can be set to the frequency tracking mode or to the fixed user-
defined frequency sampling mode. The benefit of frequency tracking is that the measurements are
within a pre-defined accuracy range even when the fundamental frequency of the power system
changes.

Table. 5.2.4. - 43. Frequency tracking effect (FF changes from 6 Hz to 75 Hz).

© Arcteq Relays Ltd 84

AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

The measurement error with a fixed 50 Hz sampling frequency The measurement error with frequency tracking when the
when the frequency changes. The constant current is 5 A, the frequency changes. The constant current is 5 A, the
frequency sweep is from 6 Hz to 75 Hz. frequency sweep is from 6 Hz to 75 Hz.

As the figures above show, the sampling frequency has a major effect on the relay's measurement
accuracy. If the sampling is not tracked to the system frequency, for example a 10 Hz difference
between the measured and the set system frequency can give a measurement error of over 5 %. The
figures also show that when the frequency is tracked and the sampling is adjusted according to the
detected system frequency, the measurement accuracy has an approximate error of 0.1...- 0.2 % error
in the whole frequency range.

AQ-2xx series devices have a measurement accuracy that is independent of the system frequency.
This has been achieved by adjusting the sample rate of the measurement channels according to the
measured system frequency; this way the FFT calculation always has a whole power cycle in the buffer.
The measurement accuracy is further improved by Arcteq's patented calibration algorithms
that calibrate the analog channels against eight (8) system frequency points for both magnitude and
angle. This frequency-dependent correction compensates the frequency dependencies in the used,
non-linear measurement hardware and improves the measurement accuracy significantly. Combined,
these two methods give an accurate measurement result that is independent of the system frequency.

Troubleshooting
When the measured current, voltage or frequency values differ from the expected values, the following
table offers possible solutions for the problems.

Problem Check / Resolution

The measured current or

voltage amplitude is lower
The set system frequency may be wrong. Please check that the frequency settings match the
than it should be./
local system frequency, or change the measurement mode to "Tracking" (Measurement →
The values are
Frequency → "Smpl mode") so the relay adjusts the frequency itself.
"jumping" and are not
stable.

In Tracking mode the relay may interpret the frequency incorrectly if no current is injected into the
The frequency readings
CT (or voltage into the VT). Please check the frequency measurement settings (Measurement →
are wrong.
Frequency).

Settings
Table. 5.2.4. - 44. Settings of the frequency tracking.

Name Range Step Default Description

Defines which measurement sampling mode is in use:

Sampling mode 0: Fixed
- 0: Fixed the fixed user-defined frequency, or the tracked system
("Smpl mode") 1: Tracking
frequency.

System nominal The user-defined system nominal frequency that is used

7.000…75.000
frequency 0.001 Hz 50 Hz when the "Sampling mode" setting has been set to
Hz
("Sys.nom.f") "Fixed".

Tracked system
0.000…75.000 -
frequency 0.001 Hz Displays the rough measured system frequency.
Hz
("Track.sys.f")

Sampling frequency in
0.000…75.000 Displays the tracking frequency that is in use at
use 0.001 Hz -
Hz that moment.
("Sampl.f used")

0: None
1: CT1IL1
Frequency reference 1
2: CT2IL1 - 1: CT1IL1 The first reference source for frequency tracking.
("f Ref1")
3: VT1U1
4: VT2U1

85 © Arcteq Relays Ltd

 AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

Name Range Step Default Description

0: None
1: CT1IL2
Frequency reference 2
2: CT2IL2 - 1: CT1IL2 The second reference source for frequency tracking.
("f Ref2")
3: VT1U2
4: VT2U2

0: None
1: CT1IL3
Frequency reference 3
2: CT2IL3 - 1: CT1IL3 The third reference source for frequency tracking.
("f Ref3")
3: VT1U3
4: VT2U3

0: No
trackable
channels
1: Reference 1
trackable
2: Reference 2
trackable
Defines the frequency tracker quality. If the measured
3: References
Frequency tracker current (or voltage) amplitude is below the threshold,
1 & 2 trackable
quality - - the channel tracking quality is 0 and cannot be used for
4: Reference 3
("f.tr qual") frequency tracking. If all channels' magnitudes are below
trackable
the threshold, there are no trackable channels.
5: Reference 1
& 3 trackable
6: References
2 & 3 trackable
7: All
references
trackable

0: No track ch
Frequency
1: Ref1 Indicates which reference is used at the moment for
measurement in use - -
2: Ref2 frequency tracking.
("f.meas in use")
3: Ref3

0: Start
Defines the how the tracking starts. Tracking can start
tracking 0: Start
immediately, or there can be a set delay time between
Start behavior immediately - tracking
the receiving of the first trackable channel and the start
1: First nominal immediately
of the tracking.
or tracked

0: Use track
0: Use Defines the start of the sampling. Sampling can begin
Start sampling with frequency
- track with a previously tracked frequency, or with a user-set
("Start smpl with") 1: Use nom
frequency nominal frequency.
frequency

Defines how long the nominal frequency is used after the

Use
tracking has started. This setting is only valid when the
nominal frequency until 0…1800.000s 0.005s 0.100s
"Sampling mode" setting is set to "Tracking" and when
("Use nom freq until")
the "Start behavior" is set to "First nominal or tracked".

Channel A tracked
0.000…75.000 Displays the rough value of the tracked frequency in
frequency 0.001 Hz 50 Hz
Hz Channel A.
("Tracked f CHA")

Channel B tracked
0.000…75.000 Displays the rough value of the tracked frequency in
frequency 0.001 Hz 50 Hz
Hz Channel B.
("Tracked f CHB")

Channel C tracked
0.000…75.000 Displays the rough value of the tracked frequency in
frequency 0.001 Hz 50 Hz
Hz Channel C.
("Tracked f CHC")

© Arcteq Relays Ltd 86

AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

5.3. Protection functions

5.3.1. General properties of a protection function

The following flowchart describes the basic structure of any protection function. The basic structure is
composed of analog measurement values being compared to the pick-up values and operating time
characteristics.

The protection function is run in a completely digital environment with a protection CPU
microprocessor which also processes the analog signals transformed into the digital form.

87 © Arcteq Relays Ltd

 AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

Figure. 5.3.1. - 75. Principle diagram of the protection relay platform.

In the following chapters the common functionalities of protection functions are described. If a
protection function deviates from this basic structure, the difference is described in the corresponding
chapter of the manual.

Pick-up
The Xset parameter defines the pick-up level of the function, and this in turn defines the maximum or
minimum allowed measured magnitude (in per unit, absolute or percentage value) before the function
takes action. The function constantly calculates the ratio between the pick-up parameter set by the
user and the measured magnitude (Xm). The reset ratio of 97 % is built into the function and is always
relative to the Xset value. If a function's pick-up characteristics vary from this description, they
are defined in the function section in the manual.

Figure. 5.3.1. - 76. Pick up and reset.

The pick-up activation of the function is not directly equal to the START signal generation of the
function. The START signal is allowed if a blocking condition is not active.

© Arcteq Relays Ltd 88

AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

Figure. 5.3.1. - 77. Measurement range in relation to the nominal current.

The In magnitude refers to the user set nominal current which can range from 0.2…10 A, typically 0.2
A, 1A or 5 A. With its own current measurement card, the IED will measure secondary currents from
0.001 A up to 250 A. To this relation the pick-up setting in secondary amperes will vary.

Function blocking
The blocking signals are checked in the beginning of each program cycle. A blocking signal is received
from the blocking matrix for the function dedicated input. If the blocking signal is not activated when
the pick-up element activates, a START signal is generated and the function proceeds to the time
characteristics calculation.

If the blocking signal is active when pick-up element activates, a BLOCKED signal is generated and the
function will not process the situation further. If the START function has been activated before the
blocking signal, it resets and the release time characteristics are processed similarly to when the pick-
up signal is reset.

The blocking of the function causes an HMI display event and a time stamped blocking event with
information of the startup current values and its fault type to be issued.

The blocking signal can also be tested in the commissioning phase by a software switch signal when
the relay's common and global testing mode is activated.

The variables users can set are binary signals from the system. The blocking signal needs to reach the
IED minimum of 5 ms before the set operating delay has passed in order for the blocking to activate in
time.

Operating time characteristics for trip and reset

The operating timers’ behavior during a function can be set for trip signal and for the release of the
function in case the pick-up element is reset before the trip time has been reached. There are three
basic operating modes available for the function:

• Instant operation: activates the trip signal with no additional time delay simultaneously with
the start signal.
• Definite time operation (DT): activates the trip signal after a user-defined time
delay regardless of the measured current as long as the current is above or below the Xset
value and thus the pick-up element is active (independent time characteristics).

89 © Arcteq Relays Ltd

 AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

• Inverse definite minimum time (IDMT): activates the trip signal after a time which is in relation
to the set pick-up value Xset and the measured value Xm (dependent time characteristics).

Both IEC and IEEE/ANSI standard characteristics as well as user settable parameters are available for
the IDMT operation. Please note that in the IDMT mode Definite (Min) operating time delay is also
determines the minimum time for protection tripping (see the figure below). If this function is not desired
the parameter should be set to 0 seconds.

Figure. 5.3.1. - 78. Operating time delay: Definite (Min) and the minimum for tripping.

Table. 5.3.1. - 45. Operating time characteristics setting parameters (general).

Name Range Step Default Description

0: DT Selects the delay type for the time counter. The selection is made
Delay type - 0: DT
1: IDMT between dependent (IDMT) and independent (DT) characteristics.

When the "Delay type" parameter is set to "DT", this parameter acts
as the expected operating time for the protection function.

When set to 0 s, the stage operates instantaneously without any

Definite (Min) additional delay. When the parameter is set to 0.005...1800 s, the
0.000…1800.000
operating time 0.005s 0.040 s stage operates as independent delayed.
s
delay
When the "Delay type" parameter has been set to "IDMT", this
parameter can be used to determine the minimum operating time
for the protection function. Example of this is presented in the
figure above.

Selects whether the delay curve series for an IDMT operation

follows either IEC or IEEE/ANSI standard defined characteristics.
Delay curve 0: IEC
- 0: IEC
series 1: IEEE
This setting is active and visible when the "Delay type" parameter is
set to "IDMT".

© Arcteq Relays Ltd 90

AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

Name Range Step Default Description

Selects the IEC standard delay characteristics.

The options include the following: Normally Inverse ("NI"),

0: NI Extremely Inverse ("EI"), Very Inverse ("VI") and Long Time Inverse
Delay 1: EI ("LTI") characteristics. Additionally, the "Param" option allows the
characteristics 2: VI - 0: NI tuning of the constants A and B which then allows the setting of
IEC 3: LTI characteristics following the same formula as the IEC curves
4: Param mentioned here.

This setting is active and visible when the "Delay type" parameter is
set to "IDMT" and the "Delay curve series" parameter is set to "IEC".

Selects the IEEE and ANSI standard delay characteristics.

The options for ANSI include the following: Normal Inverse ("ANSI
0: ANSI NI NI"), Very Inverse ("ANSI VI"), Extremely inverse ("ANSI EI"), Long
1: ANSI VI time inverse ("ANSI LTI") characteristics. IEEE: Moderately Inverse
2: ANSI EI ("IEEE MI"), Very Inverse ("IEEE VI"), Extremely Inverse ("IEEE EI")
Delay
3: ANSI LTI 0: ANSI characteristics. Additionally, the "Param" option allows the tuning of
characteristics -
4: IEEE MI NI the constants A, B and C which then allows the setting of
IEEE
5: IEEE VI characteristics following the same formula as the IEEE curves
6: IEEE EI mentioned here.
7: Param
This setting is active and visible when the "Delay type" parameter is
set to "IDMT" and the "Delay curve series" parameter is set to
"IEEE".

Defines the time dial/multiplier setting for IDMT characteristics.

Time dial
0.01…25.00 s 0.01 s 0.05 s
setting k This setting is active and visible when the "Delay type" parameter is
set to "IDMT".

Defines the Constant A for IEC/IEEE characteristics.

A 0.0000…250.0000 0.0001 0.0860 This setting is active and visible when the "Delay type" parameter is
set to "IDMT" and the "Delay characteristic" parameter is set to
"Param".

Defines the Constant B for IEC/IEEE characteristics.

B 0.0000…5.0000 0.0001 0.1850 This setting is active and visible when the "Delay type" parameter is
set to "IDMT" and the "Delay characteristic" parameter is set to
"Param".

Defines the Constant C for IEEE characteristics.

C 0.0000…250.0000 0.0001 0.0200 This setting is active and visible when the "Delay type" parameter is
set to "IDMT" and the "Delay characteristic" parameter is set to
"Param".

91 © Arcteq Relays Ltd

 AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

Figure. 5.3.1. - 79. Inverse operating time formulas for IEC and IEEE standards.

Figure. 5.3.1. - 80. Definite time (DT) operating characteristics.

© Arcteq Relays Ltd 92

AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

Figure. 5.3.1. - 81. IEC predefined characteristics NI, VI, LTI and EI

93 © Arcteq Relays Ltd

 AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

Figure. 5.3.1. - 82. IEEE/ANSI predefined characteristics EI, LTI, NI and VI

© Arcteq Relays Ltd 94

AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

Figure. 5.3.1. - 83. IEEE predefined characteristics EI, MI and VI

95 © Arcteq Relays Ltd

 AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

Figure. 5.3.1. - 84. The effect of parameters A, B and C on the characteristics.

Non-standard delay characteristics

In addition to the previously mentioned delay characteristics, some functions also have delay
characteristics that deviate from the IEC or IEEE standards. These functions are the following:

• overcurrent stages
• residual overcurrent stages
• directional overcurrent stages
• directional residual overcurrent stages.

© Arcteq Relays Ltd 96

AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

The setting parameters and their ranges are documented in the chapters of the respective function
blocks.

Table. 5.3.1. - 46. Inverse operating time formulas for nonstandard characteristics.

RI-type RD-type

Used to get time grading with Mostly used in earth fault protection which grants selective tripping even in non-
mechanical relays directional protection

t = Operating delay (s) t = Operating delay (s)

k = Time dial setting k = Time dial setting

Im = Measured maximum current Im = Measured maximum current

Iset = Pick-up setting Iset = Pick-up setting

Table. 5.3.1. - 47. Setting parameters for reset time characteristics.

Name Range St
Step
ep De
Defa
fault
ult Descrip
Description
tion

Resetting time. The time allowed between pick-ups if the pick-up has not
led into a trip operation.
Release 0.000…150.000 0.005
0.06 s
time delay s s
If the "Delayed pick-up release" setting is active, the START signal is held on
for the duration of the timer.

Delayed Resetting characteristics selection (either time-delayed or instant) after the

0: No 1: Yes
pick-up - pick-up element is released. If activated, the START signal is reset after a
1: Yes
release set release time delay.

Time
Operating timer resetting characteristics selection. When active, the
calculation
0: No operating time counter is reset after a set release time if the pick-up
reset after - 1: Yes
1: Yes element is not activated during this time. When disabled, the operating time
release
counter is reset directly after the pick-up element is reset.
time

Continue
time
Time calculation characteristics selection. If activated, the operating time
calculation 0: No
- 0: No counter continues until a set release time even if the pick-up element is
during 1: Yes
reset.
release
time

The behavior of the stages with different release time configurations are presented in the figures below.

97 © Arcteq Relays Ltd

 AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

Figure. 5.3.1. - 85. No delayed pick-up release.

Figure. 5.3.1. - 86. Delayed pick-up release, delay counter is reset at signal drop-off.

© Arcteq Relays Ltd 98

AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

Figure. 5.3.1. - 87. Delayed pick-up release, delay counter value is held during the release time.

Figure. 5.3.1. - 88. Delayed pick-up release, delay counter value is decreasing during the release time.

The resetting characteristics can be set according to the application. The default setting is delayed 60
ms and the time calculation is held during the release time.

99 © Arcteq Relays Ltd

 AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

When using the release delay option where the operating time counter is calculating the operating time
during the release time, the function will not trip if the input signal is not activated again during the
release time counting.

Stage forcing
It is possible to test the logic, event processing and the operation of the relay's protection system by
controlling the state of the protection functions manually without injecting any current into the relay with
stage forcing. To enable Stage forcing set the Enable stage forcing to ENABLED in the General menu.
After this it is possible to control the status of a protection function (Normal, Start, Trip, Blocked etc.) in
the Info page of the function.

NO
NOTE!
TE!

When Stage forcing is enabled protection functions will also change state through user input.
Injected currents/voltages also affect the behavior of the relay. Regardless, it is
recommended to disable Stage Forcing after testing has ended.

5.3.2. Capacitor bank module

Capacitor banks are commonly used to improve the quality of the electrical supply and the efficient
operation of the power system. The main purpose of the installation is to provide capacitive
compensations and power factor corrections.

A capacitor unit is built up of individual capacitor elements connected in parallel, and arranged in
groups that are connected in series. The capacitor unit also has an internal discharge resistor that
reduces the unit's residual voltage. Capacitor banks are common in medium-voltage networks and
their size can be up to 1 Mvar.

Figure. 5.3.2. - 89. The capacitor unit.

Capacitor units should be suitable for continuous operation at up to 135 % of the rated reactive power
caused by the combined effects of:

© Arcteq Relays Ltd 100

AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

• Voltage that is higher than the name plate rating at the fundamental frequency, but not over
110 % of the rated RMS voltage.
• Harmonic voltages that are superimposed on the fundamental frequency.
• Reactive power manufacturing tolerance that is up to 115 % of the rated reactive power.

Capacitor bank protection

The use of fuses for protecting the capacitor unit is an important subject in the design of capacitor
banks. The fuse design affects the unit's failure mode and influences the design of the bank protection.
The capacitor unit can be externally or internally fused. An external fuse protects each capacitor unit,
whereas an internal fuse protects each individual capacitor element inside the capacitor unit. When a
capacitor element failure occurs in an internally fused capacitor bank, the fuse only removes the
affected element. The other elements, connected in parallel in the same group, remain in service but
with a slightly higher voltage across them.

Wye -connect
-connected
ed banks

Wye capacitor banks are composed of capacitor units connected in series and in parallel per phase.
When the wye is earthed, it provides a low-impedance path to earth.

An earthed, wye-connected capacitor bank has the following advantages:

• A low-impedance path to earth provides inherent self-protection against lightning surge

currents and give some protection against surge voltages.
• It offers a low-impedance path for high-frequency currents, and therefore the bank can be
used as a filter in systems with a high harmonic content.
• Reduced transient recovery voltages for circuit breakers and other switching equipment.

There are, however, some drawbacks to earthed, wye-connected capacitor banks. The circulation of
inrush currents and harmonics may cause a misoperation in the protective relay and the fuses.
Unearthed wye banks do not allow zero sequence currents, third harmonic currents or large capacitor
discharge currents during system earth faults to flow.

Figure. 5.3.2. - 90. Earthed wye shunt capacitor banks.

When a capacitor bank becomes too large, the bank can be split into two wye sections. With two
earthed, wye-connected banks the failure of an element appears as an unbalance in the neutral.
Residual current measurement with a cable core transformer in the wye section provides a more
sensitive and accurate protection than a voltage-based protection.

Delta and H-connect

H-connected
ed banks

Delta-connected banks are generally used only at distribution voltages and are configured with a single
series group of capacitors rated at line-to-line voltage. With only one series group of units unbalance
detection is not required for protection.
101 © Arcteq Relays Ltd
 AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

Some larger banks use an H configuration in each phase, with a current transformer connecting the
two legs to compare the current down each leg. When a capacitor fuse operates, some current flows
through the current transformer. This arrangement is used in large banks with many capacitor units
vonnected in parallel.

Relaying
A capacitor bank is normally protected with unbalance protection to provide an alarm or a trip during
individual fuse failures as well as to protect the bank against overcurrent. Removing a failed capacitor
element or unit by its fuse results in an increased voltage across the remaining elements or units, which
causes an unbalance within the bank. A continuous overvoltage (= above 1.1 p.u.) on any unit
is prevented by protection relays that trip the bank.

Unbalance protection normally provides the primary protection against arcing faults within a capacitor
bank as well as against other abnormalities that may damage the capacitor elements or units. Arcing
faults can cause substantial damage in a small fraction of a second. Unbalance protection should have
a minimum intentional delay to minimize the amount of damage done to the bank in the event of
external arcing.

Figure. 5.3.2. - 91. Unbalance measurement and natural unbalance compensation.

Na
Nattural unbalance compensa
compensation
tion

In practice, the unbalance seen by an unbalance relay is the result of losing individual capacitor units
(or elements) and of the inherent system and bank unbalances. The primary unbalance, which exists
on all capacitor bank installations (with or without fuses), is due to the system voltage unbalance and to
capacitor manufacturing tolerances. Secondary unbalance errors are introduced by sensing device
tolerances and variation as well as by relative changes in capacitance due to the difference in capacitor
unit temperatures in the bank. If the inherent unbalance error approaches 50 % of the alarm setting,
there needs to be compensation so that the relay alarms as specified when a unit or an element fails.

Please note that harmonic voltages and currents can influence the operation of the unbalance relay
unless a power frequency band-pass or other appropriate filtering is provided.

About the rrela

elayy opera
operating
ting time

© Arcteq Relays Ltd 102

AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

The time delay of the unbalance relay trip should be minimized to reduce damage from an arcing fault
within the bank's structure as well as to prevent the remaining capacitor units' exposure to overvoltage
conditions beyond their permissible limits.

The unbalance trip relay should have enough time delay to avoid false operations due to inrush, to
system earth faults, to switching of nearby equipment, and to non-simultaneous pole operation of the
energizing switch. For most applications, 0.1 s should be adequate. For unbalance relaying systems
that would operate on a system voltage unbalance, a delay slightly longer than the upstream protection
fault clearing time is required to avoid tripping due to a system fault. Longer delays increase the
probability of bank failures.

5.3.2.1. Capacitor bank overload protection (Icol>; 49OL)

Capacitor bank overload protection is used for overload alarming and capacitor bank protection. The
main difference to the overcurrent protection function is the possibility to freely program the capacitor
overload curve to the function by giving the current or time points to the function or the IDMT formula
coefficients. The operating decisions are based on the phase current magnitude, which is constantly
measured by the function. The phase current magnitudes available are equal to the RMS values, to
TRMS values (including harmonics up to 32nd), or to peak-to-peak values. The blocking signal and the
setting group selection control the operating characteristics of the function during normal operation,
i.e. the user or user-defined logic can change the function parameters while the function is running.

The outputs of the function are the START, TRIP and BLOCKED signals. The capacitor bank overload
function uses a total of eight (8) separate setting groups which can be selected from one common
source.

The function can operate on instant or time-delayed mode. In time-delayed mode the operation can be
selected between definite time (DT) mode and inverse definite minimum time (IDMT) mode. The IDMT
operation supports both IEC and ANSI standard time delays as well as custom parameters. The
function includes CT saturation checking which allows the function to start and operate accurately
during CT saturation.

The operational logic consists of the following:

• input magnitude selection

• input magnitude processing
• saturation check
• threshold comparator
• block signal check
• time delay characteristics
• output processing.

The basic design of the protection function is the three-pole operation.

The inputs for the function are the following:

• operating mode selections

• setting parameters
• digital inputs and logic signals
• measured and pre-processed current magnitudes.

The function outputs the START, TRIP and BLOCKED signals which can be used for direct I/O
controlling and user logic programming. The function generates general time-stamped ON/OFF events
to the common event buffer from each of the three (3) output signals. In the instant operating mode the
function outputs START and TRIP events simultaneously with an equivalent time stamp. The time stamp
resolution is 1 ms. The function also provides a resettable cumulative counter for the START, TRIP and
BLOCKED events.

103 © Arcteq Relays Ltd

 AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

The following figure presents a simplified function block diagram of the capacitor bank overload
function.

Figure. 5.3.2.1. - 92. Simplified function block diagram of the Icol> function.

Measured input
The function block uses analog current measurement values. However, when the peak-to-peak mode is
selected for the function's "Measured magnitude" setting, the values are taken directly from the
samples. The user can select the monitored magnitude to be equal either to RMS values, to TRMS
values from the whole harmonic specter of 32 components, or to peak-to-peak values. A -20ms
averaged value of the selected magnitude is used for pre-fault data registering.

Table. 5.3.2.1. - 48. Measurement inputs of the Icol> function.

Signal Description Time base

IL1PP Peak-to-peak measurement of phase L1 (A) current 5 ms

IL2PP Peak-to-peak measurement of phase L2 (B) current 5 ms

IL3PP Peak-to-peak measurement of phase L3 (C) current 5 ms

IL1RMS RMS measurement of phase L1 (A) current 5 ms

IL2RMS RMS measurement of phase L2 (B) current 5 ms

IL3RMS RMS measurement of phase L3 (C) current 5 ms

IL1TRMS TRMS measurement of phase L1 (A) current 5 ms

IL2TRMS TRMS measurement of phase L2 (B) current 5 ms

IL3TRMS TRMS measurement of phase L3 (C) current 5 ms

The selection of the used AI channel is made with a setting parameter. In all possible input channel
variations the pre-fault condition is presented with a 20 ms averaged history value from -20 ms from
START or TRIP event.

General settings
The following general settings define the general behavior of the function. These settings are static i.e.
it is not possible to change them by editing the setting group.

© Arcteq Relays Ltd 104

AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

Table. 5.3.2.1. - 49. General settings of Icol> function.

Name Range Step Default Description

1: RMS

Measured 2: TRMS Defines which available measured magnitude is used by the

- 1: RMS
magnitude function.
3: Peak-to-
peak

Pick-up
The Iset setting parameter controls the pick-up of the Icol> function. This defines the maximum allowed
measured current before action from the function. The function constantly calculates the ratio between
the Iset and the measured magnitude (Im) for each of the three phases. The reset ratio of 97 % is built
into the function and is always relative to the Iset value. The setting value is common for all measured
phases, and when the Im exceeds the Iset value (in single, dual or all phases) it triggers the pick-up
operation of the function.

Table. 5.3.2.1. - 50. Pick-up settings.

Name Description Range Step Default

Iset Pick-up setting 0.10…50.00 × In 0.01 × In 1.20 × In

The pick-up activation of the function is not directly equal to the START signal generation of the
function. The START signal is allowed if the blocking condition is not active.

Function blocking
The block signal is checked in the beginning of each program cycle. The blocking signal is received
from the blocking matrix in the function's dedicated input. Additionally, the capacitor bank overload
function includes an internal inrush harmonic blocking option which is applied according to the
parameters set by the user. If the blocking signal is not activated when the pick-up element activates, a
START signal is generated and the function proceeds to the time characteristics calculation.

Table. 5.3.2.1. - 51. Internal inrush harmonic blocking settings.

Name Range Step Default Description

Inrush harmonic blocking (internal- 0: No

- 0: No Enables and disables the 2nd harmonic
only trip) 1: Yes blocking.

0.10…50.00 0.01 0.01 Defines the limit of the 2nd harmonic

2nd harmonic block limit (Iharm/Ifund) %Ifund %Ifund %Ifund blocking.

If the blocking signal is active when the pick-up element activates, a BLOCKED signal is generated and
the function does not process the situation further. If the START function has been activated before the
blocking signal, it resets and the release time characteristics are processed similarly to when the pick-
up signal is reset.

The blocking of the function causes an HMI display event and a-time stamped blocking event with
information of the startup current values and its fault type to be issued.

The blocking signal can also be tested in the commissioning phase by a software switch signal when
the relay's testing mode "Enable stage forcing" is activated (General → Device).

The variables the user can set are binary signals from the system. The blocking signal needs to reach
the deviceminimum of 5 ms before the set operating delay has passed in order for the blocking to
activate in time.
105 © Arcteq Relays Ltd
 AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

Operating time characteristics for trip and reset

This function supports definite time delay (DT) and inverse definite minimum time delay (IDMT) with
user-programmable characteristics.

Table. 5.3.2.1. - 52. Icol> operating time setting.

Name Range Step Default Description

Im/Iset / t Defines the programmable measured current or the set current

2...10 1 2
curvepoints versus the expected operating time points.

0: Two point
Point 1(9) steps 0: Two
– 2(10) 1: Two point - point Defines the operating time calculation between the set current points.
characteristics interpolate steps
2: IDMT curve

Imeas / Iset 0.01 1.00 x

1.00...40.00 x In Defines the first current point of the curve.
point 1...10 x In In

Time point 0.005...3600.000 0.01

1.00 s Defines the first time point of the curve.
1...10 s s

Time dial Defines the time multiplier setting for the IDMT curve. Note that this
setting k 1(9) 0.01...25.00 0.01 1.00 setting is only visible when the "Point 1(9)–2(10) characteristics"
– 2(10) setting is set to "Two point steps" or "Two point interpolate".

Defines the IDMT constant A. Note that this setting is only visible when
IDMT Const A
0.01...25.00 0.01 1.00 the "Point 1(9)–2(10) characteristics" setting is set to "Two point steps"
1(9) – 2(10)
or "Two point interpolate".

Defines the IDMT constant B. Note that this setting is only visible when
IDMT Const B
0.01...25.00 0.01 1.00 the "Point 1(9)–2(10) characteristics" setting is set to "Two point steps"
1(9) – 2(10)
or "Two point interpolate".

Defines the IDMT constant C. Note that this setting is only visible when
IDMT Const C
0.01...25.00 0.01 1.00 the "Point 1(9)–2(10) characteristics" setting is set to "Two point steps"
1(9) – 2(10)
or "Two point interpolate".

Operating
Allows the testing of the expected operating time with the given
curve test 1.00...40.00 0.01 1.00
Imeas/Iset value with an online relay.
(online)

The IDMT curve formula used to calculate the segment timing behaviour is shown below:

Below is an example of the programmable curve settings with three separate operating time segments.

1. RED: Imeas/Iset = 1.0…2.0, IDMT IEC-NI, time dial k = 0.05, IDMT constant A = 0.14, IDMT
constant B = 0.02, IDMT constant C = 0.0001.
2. BLUE: Imeas/Iset = 2.0…3.0, two point interpolate, time point = 3
3. YELLOW: Imeas/Iset = 3.0…5.0, definite time step, the set 3.0 s is held until the Imeas/Iset ratio
reaches 5.0, and after that the time point = 4 is used with the time setting 0.1 s.

© Arcteq Relays Ltd 106

AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

The programmable operating curve allows the user to freely program the timing behaviour of the
protection stage with current or time points, either with step or two-point interpolated time calculation.
When the modelled curve formula is known, it is advisable to use the curve parameters to achieve
maximum accuracy.

Events and registers

The capacitor bank overload function (abbreviated "COL" in event block names) generates events and
registers from the status changes in START, TRIP and BLOCKED. The user can select which event
messages are stored in the main event buffer: ON, OFF, or both. The function offers one (1)
independent stage.

The events triggered by the function are recorded with a time stamp and with process data values.

Table. 5.3.2.1. - 53. Event codes.

Event number Event channel Event block name Event code Description

12736 199 COL1 0 Start On

12737 199 COL1 1 Start OFF

12738 199 COL1 2 Trip ON

12739 199 COL1 3 Trip OFF

12740 199 COL1 4 Block ON

12741 199 COL1 5 Block OFF

The function registers its operation into the last twelve (12) time-stamped registers; this information is
available for all provided instances separately. The register of the function records the ON event
process data for START, TRIP or BLOCKED. The table below presents the structure of the function's
register content.

107 © Arcteq Relays Ltd

 AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

Table. 5.3.2.1. - 54. Register content.

Date and Trigger Fault Pre-fault Trip time

Event code Fault type Used SG
time current current current remaining

Start Trip -20 Start -200 Setting

dd.mm.yyyy
12736-12805 Descr. L1-E…L1-L2-L3 average ms ms 0…1800 s group 1...8
hh:mm:ss.mss
current averages averages active

5.3.2.2. Capacitor bank current unbalance protection (Iuc>; 46C)

The capacitor bank current unbalance protection is used in protecting the capacitor bank with a double
wye configuration. The operating decisions are based on phase current magnitudes which the function
constantly measures. The monitored phase current magnitudes are equal to RMS values. The blocking
signal and the setting group selection control the operating characteristics of the function during
normal operation, i.e. the user or user-defined logic can change function parameters while the function
is running.

The outputs of the function are the ALARM START, ALARM, START, TRIP, and BLOCKED signals. The
capacitor bank current unbalance function uses a total of eight (8) separate setting groups which can
be selected from one common source.

The function can operate on instant or time-delayed mode. The function includes CT saturation
checking which allows the function to start and operate accurately during CT saturation.

The operational logic consists of the following:

• input magnitude selection

• input magnitude processing
• saturation check
• threshold comparator
• block signal check
• time delay characteristics
• output processing.

The inputs for the function are the following:

• operating mode selections

• setting parameters
• digital inputs and logic signals
• measured and pre-processed current magnitudes.

The function outputs the ALARM START, ALARM, START, TRIP and BLOCKED signals which can be
used for direct I/O controlling and user logic programming. The function generates general time-
stamped ON/OFF events to the common event buffer from each of the five (5) output signals. In the
instant operating mode the function outputs START and TRIP events simultaneously with an equivalent
time stamp. The time stamp resolution is 1 ms. The function also provides a resettable cumulative
counter for the ALARM START, ALARM, START, TRIP and BLOCKED events.

Measured input
The function block uses analog current measurement values. The monitored magnitude is equal
to RMS values. A -20 ms averaged value of the selected magnitude is used for pre-fault data
registering.

© Arcteq Relays Ltd 108

AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

Table. 5.3.2.2. - 55. Measurement inputs of the Iuc> function.

Signal Description Time base

IL1RMS RMS measurement of phase L1 (A) current 5 ms

IL2RMS RMS measurement of phase L2 (B) current 5 ms

IL3RMS RMS measurement of phase L3 (C) current 5 ms

Pick-up
Figure. 5.3.2.2. - 93. Measurement connection of the Iuc> function.

The protection function uses a formula which takes the highest measured value of the phase's
current, then subtracts from this value the lowest measured value of the phase's current, and finally
divides the result with the mean of all phases. This value is then compared to the Iset Alarm and
the Iset Trip parameters. The function constantly calculates the ratio between the Iset and the
calculated magnitude (Iunb). The reset ratio of 97 % is built into the function and is always relative to
the Iset value.

Table. 5.3.2.2. - 56. Pick-up settings.

Name Range Step Default Description

Iset Alarm 0.10…50.00 × In 0.01 × In 1.20 × In Defines the pick-up setting for the alarm.

Iset Trip 0.10…50.00 × In 0.01 × In 1.20 × In Defines the pick-up setting for the trip.

Definite time delay alarm 0.000…1 800.00 s 0.005 s 0.04 s Defines the definite time delay for the ALARM signal.

Definite time delay trip 0.000…1 800.00 s 0.005 s 0.04 s Defines the definite time delay for the TRIP signal.

The pick-up activation of the function is not directly equal to the START signal generation of the
function. The START signal is allowed if the blocking condition is not active.

109 © Arcteq Relays Ltd

 AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

Function blocking
The block signal is checked in the beginning of each program cycle. The blocking signal is received
from the blocking matrix in the function's dedicated input. Additionally, the function includes an internal
inrush harmonic blocking option which is applied according to the parameters set by the user. If the
blocking signal is not activated when the pick-up element activates, a START signal is generated and
the function proceeds to the time characteristics calculation.

Table. 5.3.2.2. - 57. Internal inrush harmonic blocking settings.

Name Range Step Default Description

Inrush harmonic blocking (internal- 0: No

- 0: No Enables and disables the 2nd harmonic
only trip) 1: Yes blocking.

2nd harmonic block limit (Iharm/ 0.10…50.00 %Ifund

0.01 0.01 Defines the limit for the 2nd harmonic
Ifund) %Ifund %Ifund blocking.

If the blocking signal is active when the pick-up element activates, a BLOCKED signal will be generated
and the function does not process the situation further. If the START function has been activated before
the blocking signal, it resets and the release time characteristics are processed similarly to when the
pick-up signal is reset.

The blocking of the function causes an HMI display event and a time stamped blocking event with
information of the startup current values and its fault type to be issued.

The blocking signal can also be tested in the commissioning phase by a software switch signal when
the relay's testing mode "Enable stage forcing" is activated (General → Device).

The variables the user can set are binary signals from the system. The blocking signal needs to reach
the device minimum of 5 ms before the set operating delay has passed in order for the blocking to
activate in time.

Events and registers

The capacitor bank current unbalance protection function (abbreviated "UCP" in event block names)
generates events and registers from the status changes in ALARM START, ALARM, START, TRIP,
BLOCKED and HARMONIC BLOCK. The user can select which event messages are stored in the main
event buffer: ON, OFF, or both. The function offers one (1) independent stage.

The events triggered by the function are recorded with a time stamp and with process data values.

Table. 5.3.2.2. - 58. Event codes.

Event number Event channel Event block name Event code Description

10112 158 UCP1 0 Alarm Start ON

10113 158 UCP1 1 Alarm Start OFF

10114 158 UCP1 2 Alarm ON

10115 158 UCP1 3 Alarm OFF

10116 158 UCP1 4 Start ON

10117 158 UCP1 5 Start OFF

10118 158 UCP1 6 Trip ON

10119 158 UCP1 7 Trip OFF

10120 158 UCP1 8 Block ON

© Arcteq Relays Ltd 110

AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

Event number Event channel Event block name Event code Description

10121 158 UCP1 9 Block OFF

10122 158 UCP1 10 Harmonic block ON

10123 158 UCP1 11 Harmonic block OFF

The function registers its operation into the last twelve (12) time-stamped registers. The register of the
function records the ON event process data for START, TRIP or BLOCKED. The table below
presents the structure of the function's register content.

Table. 5.3.2.2. - 59. Register content.

Date and Trigger Fault Prefault Meas TR/ Trip time

Event code Meas/AL set Used SG
time current current current set remaining

The ratio The ratio of

Start between the the 0 Setting
dd.mm.yyyy 10112-10123 Trip -20 Start
average measurement & measurement ms...1800 group 1...8
hh:mm:ss.mss Descr. ms -200 ms
current the alarm & the trip s active
setting setting

5.3.3. Non-directional overcurrent protection (I>; 50/51)

The non-directional overcurrent function is used for instant and time-delayed overcurrent and short-
circuit protection. The number of stages in the function depends on the relay model. The operating
decisions are based on phase current magnitude, constantly measured by the function. The available
phase current magnitudes are equal to RMS values, to TRMS values (including harmonics up to 32nd),
or to peak-to-peak values. The blocking signal and the setting group selection control the operating
characteristics of the function during normal operation, i.e. the user or user-defined logic can change
function parameters while the function is running.

The outputs of the function are the START, TRIP and BLOCKED signals. The non-
directional overcurrent function uses a total of eight (8) separate setting groups which can be selected
from one common source.

The function can operate on instant or time-delayed mode. In time-delayed mode the operation can be
selected between definite time (DT) mode and inverse definite minimum time (IDMT) mode. The IDMT
operation supports both IEC and ANSI standard time delays as well as custom parameters. The
function includes CT saturation checking which allows the function to start and operate accurately
during CT saturation.

The operational logic consists of the following:

• input magnitude selection

• input magnitude processing
• saturation check
• threshold comparator
• block signal check
• time delay characteristics
• output processing.

The basic design of the protection function is the three-pole operation.

The inputs for the function are the following:

• operating mode selections

• setting parameters
• digital inputs and logic signals
111 © Arcteq Relays Ltd
 AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

• measured and pre-processed current magnitudes.

The function outputs the START, TRIP and BLOCKED signals which can be used for direct I/O
controlling and user logic programming. The function generates general time-stamped ON/OFF events
to the common event buffer from each of the three (3) output signals. In the instant operating mode the
function outputs START and TRIP events simultaneously with an equivalent time stamp. The time stamp
resolution is 1 ms. The function also provides a resettable cumulative counter for the START, TRIP and
BLOCKED events.

The following figure presents a simplified function block diagram of the non-directional
overcurrent function.

Figure. 5.3.3. - 94. Simplified function block diagram of the I> function.

Measured input
The function block uses analog current measurement values. However, when the peak-to-peak mode is
selected for the function's "Measured magnitude" setting , the values are taken directly from the
samples. The user can select the monitored magnitude to be equal either to RMS values, to TRMS
values from the whole harmonic specter of 32 components, or to peak-to-peak values. A -20ms
averaged value of the selected magnitude is used for pre-fault data registering.

Table. 5.3.3. - 60. Measurement inputs of the I> function.

Signal Description Time base

IL1PP Peak-to-peak measurement of phase L1 (A) current 5 ms

IL2PP Peak-to-peak measurement of phase L2 (B) current 5 ms

IL3PP Peak-to-peak measurement of phase L3 (C) current 5 ms

IL1RMS RMS measurement of phase L1 (A) current 5 ms

IL2RMS RMS measurement of phase L2 (B) current 5 ms

IL3RMS RMS measurement of phase L3 (C) current 5 ms

IL1TRMS TRMS measurement of phase L1 (A) current 5 ms

IL2TRMS TRMS measurement of phase L2 (B) current 5 ms

IL3TRMS TRMS measurement of phase L3 (C) current 5 ms

The selection of the used AI channel is made with a setting parameter. In all possible input channel
variations the pre-fault condition is presented with a 20 ms averaged history value from -20 ms
from START or TRIP event.

© Arcteq Relays Ltd 112

AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

General settings
The following general settings define the general behavior of the function. These settings are static i.e.
it is not possible to change them by editing the setting group.

Table. 5.3.3. - 61. General settings of the function.

Name Range Step Default Description

1:
Setting control from Disabled 1: Activating this parameter allows changing the pick-up level of the
-
comm bus Disabled protection stage via SCADA.
2: Allowed

1: RMS

2: TRMS
Measured magnitude - 1: RMS Defines which available measured magnitude is used by the function.
3: Peak-to-
peak

Pick-up
The Iset setting parameter controls the pick-up of the I> function. This defines the maximum allowed
measured current before action from the function. The function constantly calculates the ratio
between the Iset and the measured magnitude (Im) for each of the three phases. The reset ratio of 97 %
is built into the function and is always relative to the Iset value. The setting value is common for all
measured phases, and when the Im exceeds the Iset value (in single, dual or all phases) it triggers the
pick-up operation of the function.

Table. 5.3.3. - 62. Pick-up settings.

Name Description Range Step Default

Iset Pick-up setting 0.10…50.00 × In 0.01 × In 1.20 × In

The pick-up activation of the function is not directly equal to the START signal generation of the
function. The START signal is allowed if the blocking condition is not active.

Function blocking
The block signal is checked in the beginning of each program cycle. The blocking signal is received
from the blocking matrix in the function's dedicated input. Additionally, the non-directional overcurrent
function includes an internal inrush harmonic blocking option which is applied according to the
parameters set by the user. If the blocking signal is not activated when the pick-up element activates, a
START signal is generated and the function proceeds to the time characteristics calculation.

Table. 5.3.3. - 63. Internal inrush harmonic blocking settings.

Name Range Step Default Description

Inrush harmonic blocking (internal- 0: No

- 0: No Enables and disables the 2nd harmonic
only trip) 1: Yes blocking.

0.10…50.00 0.01 0.01 Defines the limit of the 2nd harmonic

2nd harmonic block limit (Iharm/Ifund) %Ifund %Ifund %Ifund blocking.

If the blocking signal is active when the pick-up element activates, a BLOCKED signal is generated and
the function does not process the situation further. If the START function has been activated before the
blocking signal, it resets and the release time characteristics are processed similarly to when the pick-
up signal is reset.

113 © Arcteq Relays Ltd

 AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

The blocking of the function causes an HMI display event and a-time stamped blocking event with
information of the startup current values and its fault type to be issued.

The blocking signal can also be tested in the commissioning phase by a software switch signal when
the relay's testing mode "Enable stage forcing" is activated (General → Device).

The variables the user can set are binary signals from the system. The blocking signal needs to reach
the device minimum of 5 ms before the set operating delay has passed in order for the blocking to
activate in time.

Operating time characteristics for trip and reset

This function supports definite time delay (DT) and inverse definite minimum time delay (IDMT). For
detailed information on these delay types please refer to the chapter "General properties of a protection
function" and its section "Operating time characteristics for trip and reset".

Events and registers

The non-directional overcurrent function (abbreviated "NOC" in event block names) generates events
and registers from the status changes in START, TRIP and BLOCKED. The user can select which event
messages are stored in the main event buffer: ON, OFF, or both. The function offers four (4)
independent stages; the events are segregated for each stage operation.

The events triggered by the function are recorded with a time stamp and with process data values.

Table. 5.3.3. - 64. Event codes.

Event number Event channel Event block name Event code Description

1280 20 NOC1 0 Start ON

1281 20 NOC1 1 Start OFF

1282 20 NOC1 2 Trip ON

1283 20 NOC1 3 Trip OFF

1284 20 NOC1 4 Block ON

1285 20 NOC1 5 Block OFF

1286 20 NOC1 6 Phase A Start ON

1287 20 NOC1 7 Phase A Start OFF

1288 20 NOC1 8 Phase B Start ON

1289 20 NOC1 9 Phase B Start OFF

1290 20 NOC1 10 Phase C Start ON

1291 20 NOC1 11 Phase C Start OFF

1292 20 NOC1 12 Phase A Trip ON

1293 20 NOC1 13 Phase A Trip OFF

1294 20 NOC1 14 Phase B Trip ON

1295 20 NOC1 15 Phase B Trip OFF

1296 20 NOC1 16 Phase C Trip ON

1297 20 NOC1 17 Phase C Trip OFF

1344 21 NOC2 0 Start ON

1345 21 NOC2 1 Start OFF

© Arcteq Relays Ltd 114

AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

Event number Event channel Event block name Event code Description

1346 21 NOC2 2 Trip ON

1347 21 NOC2 3 Trip OFF

1348 21 NOC2 4 Block ON

1349 21 NOC2 5 Block OFF

1350 21 NOC2 6 Phase A Start ON

1351 21 NOC2 7 Phase A Start OFF

1352 21 NOC2 8 Phase B Start ON

1353 21 NOC2 9 Phase B Start OFF

1354 21 NOC2 10 Phase C Start ON

1355 21 NOC2 11 Phase C Start OFF

1356 21 NOC2 12 Phase A Trip ON

1357 21 NOC2 13 Phase A Trip OFF

1358 21 NOC2 14 Phase B Trip ON

1359 21 NOC2 15 Phase B Trip OFF

1360 21 NOC2 16 Phase C Trip ON

1361 21 NOC2 17 Phase C Trip OFF

1408 22 NOC3 0 Start ON

1409 22 NOC3 1 Start OFF

1410 22 NOC3 2 Trip ON

1411 22 NOC3 3 Trip OFF

1412 22 NOC3 4 Block ON

1413 22 NOC3 5 Block OFF

1414 22 NOC3 6 Phase A Start ON

1415 22 NOC3 7 Phase A Start OFF

1416 22 NOC3 8 Phase B Start ON

1417 22 NOC3 9 Phase B Start OFF

1418 22 NOC3 10 Phase C Start ON

1419 22 NOC3 11 Phase C Start OFF

1420 22 NOC3 12 Phase A Trip ON

1421 22 NOC3 13 Phase A Trip OFF

1422 22 NOC3 14 Phase B Trip ON

1423 22 NOC3 15 Phase B Trip OFF

1424 22 NOC3 16 Phase C Trip ON

1425 22 NOC3 17 Phase C Trip OFF

1472 23 NOC4 0 Start ON

1473 23 NOC4 1 Start OFF

1474 23 NOC4 2 Trip ON

1475 23 NOC4 3 Trip OFF

115 © Arcteq Relays Ltd

 AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

Event number Event channel Event block name Event code Description

1476 23 NOC4 4 Block ON

1477 23 NOC4 5 Block OFF

1478 23 NOC4 6 Phase A Start ON

1479 23 NOC4 7 Phase A Start OFF

1480 23 NOC4 8 Phase B Start ON

1481 23 NOC4 9 Phase B Start OFF

1482 23 NOC4 10 Phase C Start ON

1483 23 NOC4 11 Phase C Start OFF

1484 23 NOC4 12 Phase A Trip ON

1485 23 NOC4 13 Phase A Trip OFF

1486 23 NOC4 14 Phase B Trip ON

1487 23 NOC4 15 Phase B Trip OFF

1488 23 NOC4 16 Phase C Trip ON

1489 23 NOC4 17 Phase C Trip OFF

The function registers its operation into the last twelve (12) time-stamped registers; this information is
available for all provided instances separately. The register of the function records the ON event
process data for START, TRIP or BLOCKED. The table below presents the structure of the function's
register content.

Table. 5.3.3. - 65. Register content.

Date and Event Trigger Fault Pre-fault Trip time

Fault type Used SG
time code current current current remaining

Start
dd.mm.yyyy 1280-1489 Trip -20 ms Start -200 0 ms...1800 Setting group
L1-E…L1-L2-L3 average
hh:mm:ss.mss Descr. averages ms averages s 1...8 active
current

5.3.4. Non-directional earth fault protection (I0>; 50N/51N)

The non-directional earth fault function is used for instant and time-delayed earth fault protection. The
number of stages in the function depend on the device model. The operating characteristics are based
on the selected neutral current magnitudes which the function measures constantly. The available
analog measurement channels are I01 and I02 (residual current measurement) and I0Calc (residual
current calculated from phase current). The user can select these channels to use RMS values, TRMS
values (including harmonics up to 32nd), or peak-to-peak values. The blocking signal and the setting
group selection control the operating characteristics of the function during normal operation, i.e. the
user or user-defined logic can change function parameters while the function is running.

The outputs of the function are the START, TRIP and BLOCKED signals. The non-directional earth fault
function uses a total of eight (8) separate setting groups which can be selected from one common
source.

The function can operate on instant or time-delayed mode. In the time-delayed mode the operation can
be selected for definite time (DT) or for inverse definite minimum time (IDMT); the IDMT operation
supports both IEC and ANSI standard time delays as well as custom parameters. The function includes
the checking of CT saturation which allows the function to start and operate accurately even during CT
saturation.

The operational logic consists of the following:

© Arcteq Relays Ltd 116

AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

• input magnitude selection

• input magnitude processing
• saturation check
• threshold comparator
• block signal check
• time delay characteristics
• output processing.

The inputs for the function are the following:

• operating mode selections

• setting parameters
• digital inputs and logic signals
• measured and pre-processed current magnitudes.

The function outputs the START, TRIP and BLOCKED signals which can be used for direct I/O
controlling and user logic programming. The function generates general time-stamped ON/OFF events
to the common event buffer from each of the three (3) output signals. In the instant operating mode the
function outputs START and TRIP events simultaneously with an equivalent time stamp. The time stamp
resolution is 1 ms. The function also provides a resettable cumulative counter for the START, TRIP and
BLOCKED events.

The following figure presents a simplified function block diagram of the non-directional earth fault
function.

Figure. 5.3.4. - 95. Simplified function block diagram of the I0> fucntion.

Measured input
The function block uses analog current measurement values. The user can select the monitored
magnitude to be equal either to RMS values, to TRMS values, or to peak-to-peak values. TRMS mode
uses values from the whole harmonic spectrum of 32 components. Peak-to-peak mode picks
measurement values directly from the samples. A -20 ms averaged value of the selected magnitude is
used for pre-fault data registering.

Table. 5.3.4. - 66. Measurement inputs of the I0> function.

Signal Description Time base

I01PP Peak-to-peak measurement of coarse residual current measurement input I01 5 ms

I01RMS RMS measurement of coarse residual current measurement input I01 5 ms

I01TRMS TRMS measurement of coarse residual current measurement input I01 5 ms

117 © Arcteq Relays Ltd

 AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

Signal Description Time base

I02PP Peak-to-peak measurement of sensitive residual current measurement input I02 5 ms

I02RMS RMS measurement of sensitive residual current measurement input I02 5 ms

I02TRMS TRMS measurement of coarse sensitive current measurement input I02 5 ms

I0Calc RMS value of the calculated zero sequence current from the three phase currents 5 ms

The selection of the used AI channel is made with a setting parameter. In all possible input channel
variations the pre-fault condition is presented with a 20 ms averaged history value from -20 ms from
a START or TRIP event.

General settings
The following general settings define the general behavior of the function. These settings are static i.e.
it is not possible to change them by editing the setting group.

Table. 5.3.4. - 67. General settings of the function.

Name Description Range Default

Setting control from Activating this parameter permits changing the pick-up level of the 1: Disabled 1:
comm bus protection stage via SCADA. 2: Allowed Disabled

1: RMS
2: TRMS
Measured magnitude Defines which available measured magnitude is used by the function. 1: RMS
3: Peak-to-
peak

1: I01
Input selection Defines which measured residual current is used by the function. 2: I02 1: I01
3: I0Calc

In the AQ-C215 relay the first (NEF1) and second (NEF2) instances of non-directional earth fault
function include the capacitor bank neutral unbalance protection functionality with natural unbalance
compensation. The following settings in the General settings are for the NEF1 and NEF2 instances, and
they control the function's behavior in the capacitor bank neutral unbalance protection application.

Table. 5.3.4. - 68. General settings for the function's NEF1 and NEF2 instances.

Name Range Default Description

0: Earth fault
0: Earth
protection Selects the functionality for the NEF1 and NEF2 stages in capacitor protection
Functionality fault
1: Capacitor relays.
protection
unbalance

Selects whether the natural unbalance compensation is in use. When the

Natural compensation is in use, you can give the function more sensitive settings. When
0: Not used 0: Not
unbalance the compensation is not in use, the natural unbalance can cause the function to
1: In use used
compensation operate either too sensitively or too coarsely (depends on which side of the
capacitor bank has more natural unbalance).

Defines a triggering parameter which is activated during the function's

Compensat 0: -
commissioning on the energized capacitor bank. The parameter is self-resetting
natural 1: 0: -
and it returns to "0: -" after user input and natural unbalance compensations are
unbalance Compensate
made.

© Arcteq Relays Ltd 118

AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

Pick-up
The I0set setting parameter controls the the pick-up of the I0> function. This defines the maximum
allowed measured current before action from the function. The function constantly calculates the ratio
between the I0set and the measured magnitude (Im) for each of the three phases. The reset ratio of 97
% is built into the function and is always relative to the I0set value. The setting value is common for all
measured phases. When the Im exceeds the I0set value (in single, dual or all phases) it triggers the
pick-up operation of the function.

Table. 5.3.4. - 69. Pick-up settings.

Name Description Range Step Default

I0set Pick-up setting 0.0001…40.00 × In 0.0001 × In 1.20 × In

The pick-up activation of the function is not directly equal to the START signal generation of the
function. The START signal is allowed if the blocking condition is not active.

Function blocking
The block signal is checked in the beginning of each program cycle. The blocking signal is received
from the blocking matrix in the function's dedicated input. Additionally, non-directional earth fault
protection includes an internal inrush harmonic blocking option which is applied according to the
parameters set by the user. If the blocking signal is not activated when the pick-up element activates, a
START signal is generated and the function proceeds to the time characteristics calculation.

Table. 5.3.4. - 70. Internal inrush harmonic blocking settings.

Name Description Range Step Default

Inrush harmonic blocking (internal-only 2nd harmonic blocking enable/ 0: No

- 0: No
trip) disable 1: Yes

0.10…50.00 0.01 0.01

2nd harmonic block limit (Iharm/Ifund) 2nd harmonic blocking limit %Ifund %Ifund %Ifund

If the blocking signal is active when the pick-up element activates, a BLOCKED signal is generated and
the function does not process the situation further. If the START function has been activated before the
blocking signal, it resets and processes the release time characteristics similarly to when the pick-up
signal is reset.

The blocking of the function causes an HMI display event and a time-stamped blocking event with
information of the startup current values and its fault type to be issued.

The blocking signal can also be tested in the commissioning phase by a software switch signal when
the relay's testing mode "Enable stage forcing" is activated (General → Device).

The variables the user can set are binary signals from the system. The blocking signal needs to reach
the device minimum of 5 ms before the set operating delay has passed in order for the blocking to
activate in time.

Operating time characteristics for trip and reset

This function supports definite time delay (DT) and inverse definite minimum time delay (IDMT). For
detailed information on these delay types please refer to the chapter "General properties of a protection
function" and its section "Operating time characteristics for trip and reset".

119 © Arcteq Relays Ltd

 AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

Events and registers

The non-directional earth fault function (abbreviated "NEF" in event block names) generates events and
registers from the status changes in START, TRIP and BLOCKED. The user can select which event
messages are stored in the main event buffer: ON, OFF, or both. The function offers four (4)
independent stages; the events are segregated for each stage operation.

The events triggered by the function are recorded with a time stamp and with process data values.

Table. 5.3.4. - 71. Event codes.

Event number Event channel Event block name Event code Description

1664 26 NEF1 0 Start ON

1665 26 NEF1 1 Start OFF

1666 26 NEF1 2 Trip ON

1667 26 NEF1 3 Trip OFF

1668 26 NEF1 4 Block ON

1669 26 NEF1 5 Block OFF

1728 27 NEF2 0 Start ON

1729 27 NEF2 1 Start OFF

1730 27 NEF2 2 Trip ON

1731 27 NEF2 3 Trip OFF

1732 27 NEF2 4 Block ON

1733 27 NEF2 5 Block OFF

1792 28 NEF3 0 Start ON

1793 28 NEF3 1 Start OFF

1794 28 NEF3 2 Trip ON

1795 28 NEF3 3 Trip OFF

1796 28 NEF3 4 Block ON

1797 28 NEF3 5 Block OFF

1856 29 NEF4 0 Start ON

1857 29 NEF4 1 Start OFF

1858 29 NEF4 2 Trip ON

1859 29 NEF4 3 Trip OFF

1860 29 NEF4 4 Block ON

1861 29 NEF4 5 Block OFF

The function registers its operation into the last twelve (12) time-stamped registers. The register of the
function records the ON event process data for START, TRIP or BLOCKED. The table below
presents the structure of the function's register content.

© Arcteq Relays Ltd 120

AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

Table. 5.3.4. - 72. Register content.

Event Fault Trigger Fault Pre-fault Trip time

Date and time Used SG
code type current current current remaining

A-G- Start Setting

dd.mm.yyyy 1664-1861 Trip -20 ms Start -200 ms
R…C-G- average 0 ms...1800 s group 1...8
hh:mm:ss.mss Descr. averages averages
F current active

5.3.5. Negative sequence overcurrent/ phase current reversal/ current unbalance

protection (I2>; 46/46R/46L)
The current unbalance function is used for instant and time-delayed unbalanced network protection
and for detecting broken conductors. The number of stages in the function depends on the
relay model. The operating decisions are based on negative and positive sequence current magnitudes
which the function constantly measures. In the broken conductor mode (I2/I1) the minimum allowed
loading current is also monitored in the phase current magnitudes.

There are two possible operating modes available: the I2 mode monitors the negative sequence
current, while the I2/I1 mode monitors the ratio between the negative sequence current and the
positive sequence current. The relay calculates the symmetrical component magnitudes in use from
the phase current inputs IL1, IL2 and IL3. The zero sequence current is also recorded into the registers
as well as the angles of the positive, negative and zero sequence currents in order to better verify any
fault cases. The blocking signal and the setting group selection control the operating characteristics of
the function during normal operation, i.e. the user or user-defined logic can change function
parameters while the function is running.

The outputs of the function are the START, TRIP and BLOCKED signals. The current unbalance
function uses a total of eight (8) separate setting groups which can be selected from one common
source.

The function can operate on instant or time-delayed mode. In time-delayed mode the operation can be
selected between definite time (DT) or inverse definite minimum time (IDMT). The IDMT operation
supports both IEC and ANSI standard time delays as well as custom parameters.

The operational logic consists of the following:

• input magnitude selelction

• input magnitude processing
• threshold comparator
• block signal check
• time delay characteristics
• output processing.

The inputs for the function are the following:

• operating mode selections

• setting parameters
• digital inputs and logic signals
• measured and pre-processed current magnitudes.

The function outputs START, TRIP and BLOCKED signals which can be used for direct I/O controlling
and user logic programming. The function generates general time-stamped ON/OFF events to the
common event buffer from each of the three (3) output signals. In instant operating mode the function
outputs START and TRIP events simultaneously with an equivalent time stamp. The time stamp
resolution is 1 ms. The function also provides a resettable cumulative counter for the START, TRIP and
BLOCKED events.

121 © Arcteq Relays Ltd

 AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

The following figure presents a simplified function block diagram of the current unbalance function.

Figure. 5.3.5. - 96. Simplified function block diagram of the I2> function.

Measured input
The function block uses analog current measurement values and always uses calculated positive and
negative sequence currents. In the broken conductor mode (I2/I1) the function also uses the RMS
values of all phase currents to check the minimum current. Zero sequence and component sequence
angles are used for fault registering and for fault analysis processing. A -20 ms averaged value of the
selected magnitude is used for pre-fault data registering.

Table. 5.3.5. - 73. Measurement inputs of the I2> function.

Signal Description Time base

I1 Positive sequence current magnitude 5 ms

I2 Negative sequence current magnitude 5 ms

IZ Zero sequence current magnitude 5 ms

I1 ANG Positive sequence current angle 5 ms

I2 ANG Negative sequence current angle 5 ms

IZ ANG Zero sequence current angle 5 ms

IL1RMS Phase L1 (A) measured RMS current 5 ms

IL2RMS Phase L2 (B) measured RMS current 5 ms

IL3RMS Phase L3 (C) measured RMS current 5 ms

General settings
The following general settings define the general behavior of the function. These settings are static i.e.
it is not possible to change them by editing the setting group.

Name Description Range Step Default

Defines whether the ratio between the positive and the negative sequence currents
Measured 1: I2pu
are supervised or whether only the negative sequence is used in detecting - 1: I2pu
magnitude 2: I2/I1
unbalance.

© Arcteq Relays Ltd 122

AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

Pick-up
The setting parameters I2set and I2/I1set control the the pick-up of the I2> function. They define the
maximum allowed measured negative sequence current or the negative/positive sequence current ratio
before action from the function. The function constantly calculates the ratio between the Iset and the
measured magnitude (Im). The reset ratio of 97 % is built into the function and is always relative to the
Ixset value. The reset ratio is the same for both modes.

Table. 5.3.5. - 74. Pick-up settings.

Name Description Range Step Default

I2set Pick-up setting for I2 mode. 0.01…40.00 × In 0.01 × In 0.2 × In

I2/I1set Pick-up setting for I2/I1 mode 1…200 % 0.01 % 20 %

The pick-up activation of the function is not directly equal to the START signal generation of the
function. The START signal is allowed if the blocking condition is not active.

Function blocking
The block signal is checked in the beginning of each program cycle. The blocking signal is received
from the blocking matrix in the function's dedicated input. If the blocking signal is not activated when
the pick-up element activates, a START signal is generated and the function proceeds to the time
characteristics calculation.

If the blocking signal is active when the pick-up element activates, a BLOCKED signal is generated and
the function does not process the situation further. If the START function has been activated before the
blocking signal, it resets and processes the release time characteristics similarly to when the pick-up
signal is reset.

The blocking of the function causes an HMI display event and a time-stamped blocking event with
information of the startup current values and its fault type to be issued.

The blocking signal can also be tested in the commissioning phase by a software switch signal when
the relay's testing mode "Enable stage forcing" is activated (General → Device).

The variables the user can set are binary signals from the system. The blocking signal needs to reach
the device minimum of 5 ms before the set operating delay has passed in order for the blocking to
activate in time.

Operating time characteristics for trip and reset

The operating timers’ behavior during a function can be set for TRIP signal and also for the release of
the function in case the pick-up element is reset before the trip time has been reached. There are three
basic operating modes available for the function:

• Instant operation: gives the TRIP signal with no additional time delay simultaneously with the
start signal.
• Definite time operation (DT): gives the TRIP signal after a user-defined time delay regardless
of the measured current as long as the current is above or below the iset value and thus the
pick-up element is active (independent time characteristics).
• Inverse definite minimum time (IDMT): gives the TRIP signal after a time which is in relation
to the set pick-up value Iset and the measured current Im (dependent time characteristics).

Both IEC and IEEE/ANSI standard characteristics as well as user settable parameters are available for
the IDMT operation.

123 © Arcteq Relays Ltd

 AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

Unique to the current unbalance protection is the availability of the “Curve2” delay which follows the
formula below:

• t = Operating time
• I2meas = Calculated negative sequence
• k = Constant k value (user settable delay multiplier)
• Iset= Pick-up setting of the function

Figure. 5.3.5. - 97. Operation characteristics curve for I2> Curve2.

For a more detailed description on the time characteristics and their setting parameters, please refer to
the "General properties of a protection function" chapter and its "Operating time characteristics for trip
and reset" section.

© Arcteq Relays Ltd 124

AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

The user can reset characteristics through the application. The default setting is a 60 ms delay; the
time calculation is held during the release time.

In the release delay option the operating time counter calculates the operating time during the release.
When using this option the function does not trip if the input signal is not re-activated while the release
time count is on-going.

Events and registers

The current unbalance function (abbreviated "CUB" in event block names) generates events and
registers from the status changes in START, TRIP, and BLOCKED. The user can select the status ON or
OFF for messages in the main event buffer. The function offers four (4) independent stages; the events
are segregated for each stage operation.

The triggering event of the function (START, TRIP or BLOCKED) is recorded with a time stamp and with
process data values.

Table. 5.3.5. - 75. Event codes.

Event Number Event channel Event block name Event Code Description

2048 32 CUB1 0 Start ON

2049 32 CUB1 1 Start OFF

2050 32 CUB1 2 Trip ON

2051 32 CUB1 3 Trip OFF

2052 32 CUB1 4 Block ON

2053 32 CUB1 5 Block OFF

2112 33 CUB2 0 Start ON

2113 33 CUB2 1 Start OFF

2114 33 CUB2 2 Trip ON

2115 33 CUB2 3 Trip OFF

2116 33 CUB2 4 Block ON

2117 33 CUB2 5 Block OFF

2176 34 CUB3 0 Start ON

2177 34 CUB3 1 Start OFF

2178 34 CUB3 2 Trip ON

2179 34 CUB3 3 Trip OFF

2180 34 CUB3 4 Block ON

2181 34 CUB3 5 Block OFF

2240 35 CUB4 0 Start ON

2241 35 CUB4 1 Start OFF

2242 35 CUB4 2 Trip ON

2243 35 CUB4 3 Trip OFF

2244 35 CUB4 4 Block ON

2245 35 CUB4 5 Block OFF

125 © Arcteq Relays Ltd

 AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

The function registers its operation into the last twelve (12) time-stamped registers. The register of the
function records the ON event process data for START, TRIP or BLOCKED. The table below
presents the structure of the function's register content.

Table. 5.3.5. - 76. Register content.

Date and Event Fault Trigger Fault Pre-fault Fault Trip time
Used SG
time code type current current current currents remaining

Start Trip -20 Start -200 I1, I2, IZ 0 Setting

dd.mm.yyyy 2048-2245
Unbalance average ms ms mag. and ms...1800 group 1...8
hh:mm:ss.mss Descr.
current averages averages ang. s active

5.3.6. Harmonic overcurrent protection (Ih>; 50H/51H/68H)

The harmonic overcurrent function is used for non-directional instant and time-delayed overcurrent
detection and clearing. The number of stages in the function depends on the relay model. The function
constantly measures the selected harmonic component of the selected measurement channels, the
value being either absolute value or relative to the RMS value. The blocking signal and the setting
group selection control the operating characteristics of the function during normal operation, i.e. the
user or user-defined logic can change function parameters while the function is running.

The outputs of the function are the START, TRIP and BLOCKED signals. The non-directional
harmonic overcurrent function uses a total of eight (8) separate setting groups which can be selected
from one common source.

The function can operate on instant or time-delayed mode. Either START or TRIP signal can be used
when the instant mode is selected to block other protection stages. In time-delayed mode the
operation can be selected between definite time (DT) mode and inverse definite minimum time (IDMT)
mode. The START signal can be used to block other stages; if the situation lasts longer, the TRIP signal
can be used on other actions as time-delayed.The IDMT operation supports both IEC and ANSI
standard time delays as well as custom parameters.

The operational logic consists of the following:

• input magnitude selection

• input magnitude processing
• saturation check
• threshold comparator
• block signal check
• time delay characteristics
• output processing.

The basic design of the protection function is the three-pole operation.

The inputs of the function are the following:

• operating mode selections

• setting parameters
• digital inputs and logic signals
• measured and pre-processed current magnitudes.

The function outputs the START, TRIP and BLOCKED signals which can be used for direct I/O
controlling and user logic programming. The function generates general time-stamped ON/OFF events
to the common event buffer from each of the three (3) output signals. In the instant operating mode the
function outputs START and TRIP events simultaneously with an equivalent time stamp. The time stamp
resolution is 1 ms. The function also provides a resettable cumulative counter for the START, TRIP and
BLOCKED events.

© Arcteq Relays Ltd 126

AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

The following figure presents a simplified function block diagram of the non-directional harmonic
overcurrent function.

Figure. 5.3.6. - 98. Simplified function block diagram of the Ih> function.

Measured input
The function block uses analog current measurement values from phase or residual currents. Each
measurement input of the function block uses RMS values and harmonic components of the selected
current input. The user can select the monitored magnitude to be equal to the per-unit RMS values of
the harmonic component, or to the harmonic component percentage content compared to the RMS
values. A -20 ms averaged value of the selected magnitude is used for pre-fault data registering.

Table. 5.3.6. - 77. Measurement inputs of the Ih> function.

Signal Description Time base

The magnitudes (RMS) of phase L1 (A) current components:

- Fundamental
- 2nd harmonic
- 3rd harmonic
- 4th harmonic
- 5th harmonic
IL1FFT - 6th harmonic 5 ms
- 7th harmonic
- 9th harmonic
- 11th harmonic
- 13th harmonic
- 15th harmonic
- 17th harmonic
- 19th harmonic.

127 © Arcteq Relays Ltd

 AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

Signal Description Time base

The magnitudes (RMS) of phase L2 (B) current components:

- Fundamental
- 2nd harmonic
- 3rd harmonic
- 4th harmonic
- 5th harmonic
IL2FFT - 6th harmonic 5 ms
- 7th harmonic
- 9th harmonic
- 11th harmonic
- 13th harmonic
- 15th harmonic
- 17th harmonic
- 19th harmonic.

The magnitudes (RMS) of phase L3 (C) current components:

- Fundamental
- 2nd harmonic
- 3rd harmonic
- 4th harmonic
- 5th harmonic
IL3FFT - 6th harmonic 5 ms
- 7th harmonic
- 9th harmonic
- 11th harmonic
- 13th harmonic
- 15th harmonic
- 17th harmonic
- 19th harmonic.

The magnitudes (RMS) of residual I01 current components:

- Fundamental
- 2nd harmonic
- 3rd harmonic
- 4th harmonic
- 5th harmonic
I01FFT - 6th harmonic 5 ms
- 7th harmonic
- 9th harmonic
- 11th harmonic
- 13th harmonic
- 15th harmonic
- 17th harmonic
- 19th harmonic.

© Arcteq Relays Ltd 128

AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

Signal Description Time base

The magnitudes (RMS) of residual I02 current components:

- Fundamental
- 2nd harmonic
- 3rd harmonic
- 4th harmonic
- 5th harmonic
I02FFT - 6th harmonic 5 ms
- 7th harmonic
- 9th harmonic
- 11th harmonic
- 13th harmonic
- 15th harmonic
- 17th harmonic
- 19th harmonic.

The selection of the used AI channel, the monitored harmonic, and the monitoring type (per unit or
percentage of fundamental frequency) are made with setting parameters. In all possible input channel
variations the pre-fault condition is presented with a 20 ms averaged history value from -20 ms
from START or TRIP event.

General settings
The function can be set to monitor the ratio between the measured harmonic and either the measured
fundamental component or the per unit value of the harmonic current. The user must select the correct
measurement input.

Table. 5.3.6. - 78. Operating mode selection settings.

Name Range Step Default Description

2nd
harmonic
3rd
harmonic
4th
harmonic
5th
harmonic
6th
harmonic
7th
Harmonic harmonic
- 2nd Selection of the monitored harmonic component.
selection 9 th harmonic
harmonic
11th
harmonic
13th
harmonic
15th
harmonic
17th
harmonic
19th
harmonic

Per unit or × In Selection of the monitored harmonic mode. Either directly per unit x In or in
- × In
relative Ih/IL relation to the fundamental frequency magnitude.

129 © Arcteq Relays Ltd

 AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

Name Range Step Default Description

IL1/IL2/
Measurement IL3 IL1/IL2/
- Selection of the measurement input (either phase current or residual current).
input I01 IL3
I02

Each function stage provides these same settings. Multiple stages of the function can be set to operate
independently of each other.

Pick-up
The setting parameter Ihset per unit or Ih/IL (depending on the selected operating mode) controls the
pick-up of the Ih> function. This defines the maximum allowed measured current before action from the
function. The function constantly calculates the ratio between the Ihset per unitor Ih/IL and the
measured magnitude (Im) for each of the three phases. The reset ratio of 97 % is built into the function
and is always relative to the Ihset per unit or Ih/ILvalue. The setting value is common for all measured
phases, and when the Im exceeds the Iset value (in single, dual or all phases) it triggers the pick-up
operation of the function.

Table. 5.3.6. - 79. Pick-up settings.

Name Range Step Default Description

Pick-up setting
Ihset pu 0.05…2.00 × In 0.01 × In 0.20 × In
(per unit monitoring)

Pick-up setting
Ih/IL 5.00…200.00 % 0.01 % 20.00 %
(percentage monitoring)

The pick-up activation of the function is not directly equal to the START signal generation of the
function. The START signal is allowed if the blocking condition is not active.

Function blocking
The block signal is checked in the beginning of each program cycle. The blocking signal is received
from the blocking matrix in the function's dedicated input. If the blocking signal is not activated when
the pick-up element activates, a START signal is generated and the function proceeds to the time
characteristics calculation.

If the blocking signal is active when the pick-up element activates, a BLOCKED signal is generated and
the function does not process the situation further. If the START function has been activated before the
blocking signal, it resets and the release time characteristics are processed similarly to when the pick-
up signal is reset.

The blocking of the function causes an HMI display event and a time-stamped blocking event with
information of the startup current values and its fault type to be issued.

The blocking signal can also be tested in the commissioning phase by a software switch signal when
the relay's testing mode "Enable stage forcing" is activated (General → Device).

The variables the user can set are binary signals from the system. The blocking signal needs to reach
the device minimum of 5 ms before the set operating delay has passed in order for the blocking to
activate in time.

Operating time characteristics for trip and reset

This function supports definite time delay (DT) and inverse definite minimum time delay (IDMT). For
detailed information on these delay types please refer to the chapter "General properties of a protection
function" and its section "Operating time characteristics for trip and reset".
© Arcteq Relays Ltd 130
AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

Events and registers

The harmonic overcurrent function (abbreviated "HOC" in event block names) generates events and
registers from the status changes in START, TRIP and BLOCKED. The user can select which event
messages are stored in the main event buffer: ON, OFF, or both. The function offers four (4)
independent stages; the events are segregated for each stage operation.

The events triggered by the function are recorded with a time stamp and with process data values.

Table. 5.3.6. - 80. Event codes.

Event number Event channel Event block name Event code Description

2368 37 HOC1 0 Start ON

2369 37 HOC1 1 Start OFF

2370 37 HOC1 2 Trip ON

2371 37 HOC1 3 Trip OFF

2372 37 HOC1 4 Block ON

2373 37 HOC1 5 Block OFF

2432 38 HOC2 0 Start ON

2433 38 HOC2 1 Start OFF

2434 38 HOC2 2 Trip ON

2435 38 HOC2 3 Trip OFF

2436 38 HOC2 4 Block ON

2437 38 HOC2 5 Block OFF

2496 39 HOC3 0 Start ON

2497 39 HOC3 1 Start OFF

2498 39 HOC3 2 Trip ON

2499 39 HOC3 3 Trip OFF

2500 39 HOC3 4 Block ON

2501 39 HOC3 5 Block OFF

2560 40 HOC4 0 Start ON

2561 40 HOC4 1 Start OFF

2562 40 HOC4 2 Trip ON

2563 40 HOC4 3 Trip OFF

2564 40 HOC4 4 Block ON

2565 40 HOC4 5 Block OFF

The function registers its operation into the last twelve (12) time-stamped registers. The register of the
function records the ON event process data for START, TRIP or BLOCKED. The table below
presents the structure of the function's register content.

131 © Arcteq Relays Ltd

 AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

Table. 5.3.6. - 81. Register content.

Date and
Event Trigger Fault Pre-fault Trip time
time Fault type Used SG
code current current current remaining

Start Setting
dd.mm.yyyy 2368-2565 Trip -20 ms Start -200 0 ms...1800
L1-G…L1-L2-L3 average group 1...8
hh:mm:ss.mss Descr. averages ms averages s
current active

5.3.7. Overvoltage protection (U>; 59)

The overvoltage function is used for instant and time-delayed overvoltage protection. Each device with
a voltage protection module has four (4) available stages of the function (U>, U>>, U>>>, U>>>>). The
function constantly measures phase voltage magnitudes or line-to-line magnitudes. Overvoltage
protection is based on line-to-line RMS measurement or to line-to-neutral RMS measurement (as the
user selects). If the protection is based on line-to-line voltage, overvoltage protection is not affected by
earth faults in isolated or compensated networks. The blocking signal and the setting group selection
control the operating characteristics of the function during normal operation, i.e. the user or user-
defined logic can change function parameters while the function is running.

The outputs of the function are the START, TRIP and BLOCKED signals. The overvoltage function
uses a total of eight (8) separate setting groups which can be selected from one common source.

The function can operate on instant or time-delayed mode. In time-delayed mode the operation can be
selected between definite time (DT) mode and inverse definite minimum time (IDMT).

The operational logic consists of the following:

• input magnitude selection

• input magnitude processing
• threshold comparator
• block signal check
• time delay characteristics
• output processing.

The inputs for the function are the following:

• operating mode selections

• setting parameters
• digital inputs and logic signals
• measured and pre-processed voltage magnitudes.

The function outputs the START, TRIP and BLOCKED signals which can be used for direct I/O
controlling and user logic programming. The function generates general time-stamped ON/OFF events
to the common event buffer from each of the three (3) output signals. In the instant operating mode the
function outputs START and TRIP events simultaneously with an equivalent time stamp. The time stamp
resolution is 1 ms. The function also provides a resettable cumulative counter for the START, TRIP and
BLOCKED events.

The following figure presents a simplified function block diagram of the overvoltage function.

© Arcteq Relays Ltd 132

AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

Figure. 5.3.7. - 99. Simplified function block diagram of the U> function.

Measured input
The function block uses analog voltage measurement values. The monitored magnitudes are equal to
RMS values. A -20 ms averaged value of the selected magnitude is used for pre-fault data registering.

Table. 5.3.7. - 82. Measurement input of the U> function.

Signal Description Time base

UL12RMS RMS measurement of voltage UL12/V 5 ms

UL23RMS RMS measurement of voltage UL23/V 5 ms

UL31RMS RMS measurement of voltage UL31/V 5 ms

UL1RMS RMS measurement of voltage UL1/V 5 ms

UL2RMS RMS measurement of voltage UL2/V 5 ms

UL3RMS RMS measurement of voltage UL3/V 5 ms

Table. 5.3.7. - 83. Measured magnitude selection settings.

Name Description Range Step Default

0: P-P
voltages
1: P-E
0: P-P
Measured Selection of phase-to-phase or phase-to-earth voltages. Additionally, the U3 or voltages
- voltages
magnitude U4 input can be assigned as the voltage channel to be supervised. 2: U3 input
(2LL-U3SS)
3: U4 input
(SS)

The selection of the AI channel in use is made with a setting parameter. In all possible input channel
variations the pre-fault condition is presented with a 20 ms averaged history value from -20 ms from
START or TRIP event.

133 © Arcteq Relays Ltd

 AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

Figure. 5.3.7. - 100. Selectable measurement magnitudes with 3LN+U4 VT connection.

Figure. 5.3.7. - 101. Selectable measurement magnitudes with 3LL+U4 VT connection (P-E voltages not available without
residual voltage).

© Arcteq Relays Ltd 134

AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

Figure. 5.3.7. - 102. Selectable measurement magnitudes with 2LL+U3+U4 VT connection (P-E voltages not available without
residual voltage).

P-P Voltages and P-E Voltages selections follow phase-to-neutral or phase-to-phase voltages in the
first three voltage channels (or two first voltage channels in the 2LL+U3+U4 mode). U4 input selection
follows the voltage in Channel 4. U3Input selection only follows the voltage in Channel 3 if the
2LL+U3+U4 mode is in use.

Pick-up
The Uset setting parameter controls the pick-up of the U> function. This defines the maximum allowed
measured voltage before action from the function. The function constantly calculates the ratio
between the Uset and the measured magnitude (Um) for each of the three voltages. The reset ratio of
97 % is built into the function and is always relative to the Uset value. The setting value is common for
all measured amplitudes, and when the Um exceeds the Uset value (in single, dual or all voltages) it
triggers the pick-up operation of the function.

Table. 5.3.7. - 84. Pick-up settings.

Name Description Range Step Default

0: 1 voltage
Operation mode Pick-up criteria selection 1: 2 voltages - 0: 1 voltage
2: 3 voltages

Uset Pick-up setting 50.00…150.00 %Un 0.01 %Un 105 %Un

The pick-up activation of the function is not directly equal to the START signal generation of the
function. The START signal is allowed if the blocking condition is not active.

Real-time information displayed by the function

The relay's Info page displays useful, real-time information on the state of the protection function. It is
accessed either through the relay's HMI display, or through the setting tool software when it is
connected to the relay and its Live Edit mode is active.

Table. 5.3.7. - 85. Information displayed by the function.

Name Unit Description

U< pick- The primary voltage required for tripping. The displayed pick-up voltage level depends on the pick-up
V
up setting setting and the voltage transformer settings.

135 © Arcteq Relays Ltd

 AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

Name Unit Description

Expected Displays the expected operating time when a fault occurs. When IDMT mode is used, the expected
operating s operating time depends on the measured voltage value. If the measured voltage changes during a
time fault, the expected operating time changes accordingly.

Time
When the function has detected a fault and counts down time towards a trip, this displays how much
remaining s
time is left before tripping occurs.
to trip

Umeas/Uset
at the Um/Uset The ratio between the measured voltage and the pick-up value.
moment

Function blocking
The block signal is checked in the beginning of each program cycle. The blocking signal is received
from the blocking matrix in the function's dedicated input. If the blocking signal is not activated when
the pick-up element activates, a START signal is generated and the function proceeds to the time
characteristics calculation.

If the blocking signal is active when the pick-up element activates, a BLOCKED signal is generated and
the function does not process the situation further. If the START function has been activated before the
blocking signal, it resets and the release time characteristics are processed similarly to when the pick-
up signal is reset.

The blocking of the function causes an HMI display event and a time-stamped blocking event with
information of the startup voltage values and its fault type to be issued.

The blocking signal can also be tested in the commissioning phase by a software switch signal when
the relay's testing mode "Enable stage forcing" is activated (General → Device).

The variables the user can set are binary signals from the system. The blocking signal needs to reach
the device minimum of 5 ms before the set operating delay has passed in order for the blocking to
activate in time.

Operating time characteristics for trip and reset

The operating timers’ behavior during a function can be set for TRIP signal and also for the release of
the function in case the pick-up element is reset before the trip time has been reached. There are three
basic operating modes available for the function:

• Instant operation: gives the TRIP signal with no additional time delay simultaneously with the
START signal.
• Definite time operation (DT): gives the TRIP signal after a user-defined time delay regardless
of the measured voltage as long as the voltage is above the Uset value and thus the pick-up
element is active (independent time characteristics).
• Inverse definite minimum time (IDMT): gives the TRIP signal after a time which is in relation
to the set pick-up voltage Uset and the measured voltage Um (dependent time
characteristics).

The IDMT function follows this formula:

© Arcteq Relays Ltd 136

AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

Where:

• t = operating time
• k = time dial setting
• Um = measured voltage
• Us = pick-up setting
• a = IDMT Multiplier setting

The following table presents the setting parameters for the function's time characteristics.

Table. 5.3.7. - 86. Setting parameters for operating time characteristics.

Name Range Step Default Description

Selection of the delay type time counter. The selection possibilities are
1: DT
Delay type - 1: DT dependent (IDMT, Inverse Definite Minimum Time) and independent (DT,
2: IDMT
Definite Time) characteristics.

Definite time operating delay. The setting is active and visible when DT is
the selected delay type.
Definite
0.000…800.000 0.005
operating 0.040 s
s s When set to 0.000 s, the stage operates as instant stage without added
time delay
delay. When the parameter is set to 0.005...1800 s, the stage operates as
independent delayed.

This setting is active and visible when IDMT is the selected delay type.
Time dial 0.01
0.01…60.00 s 0.05 s
setting k s
Time dial/multiplier setting for IDMT characteristics.

This setting is active and visible when IDMT is the selected delay type.
IDMT 0.01
0.01…25.00 s 1.00 s
Multiplier s
IDMT time multiplier in the Um/Uset power.

Table. 5.3.7. - 87. Setting parameters for reset time characteristics.

Name Range Step Default Description

Resetting time. The time allowed between pick-ups if the pick-up has not
Release 0.000…150.000 0.005
0.06 s led to a trip operation. During this time the START signal is held on for the
time delay s s
timers if the delayed pick-up release is active.

Delayed Resetting characteristics selection either as time-delayed or as instant

1: No 1: Yes
pick-up - after the pick-up element is released. If activated the START signal is reset
2: Yes
release after the set release time delay.

Time calc Operating timer resetting characteristics selection. When active, the
reset after 1: No operating time counter is reset after a set release time if the pick-up
- 2: Yes
release 2: Yes element is not activated during this time. When disabled, the operating
time time counter is reset directly after the pick-up element is reset.

Continue
time
Time calculation characteristics selection. If activated, the operating time
calculation 1: No
- 1: No counter is continuing until a set release time has passed even if the pick-
during 2: Yes
up element is reset.
release
time

The user can reset characteristics through the application. The default setting is a 60 ms delay; the
time calculation is held during the release time.

In the release delay option the operating time counter calculates the operating time during the release.
When using this option the function does not trip if the input signal is not re-activated while the release
time count is on-going.

137 © Arcteq Relays Ltd

 AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

Events and registers

The overvoltage function (abbreviated "OV" in event block names) generates events and registers from
the status changes in START, TRIP, and BLOCKED. The user can select which event messages are
stored in the main event buffer: ON, OFF, or both. The function offers four (4) independent stages;
the events are segregated for each stage operation.

The events triggered by the function are recorded with a time stamp and with process data values.

Table. 5.3.7. - 88. Event codes.

Event number Event channel Event block name Event code Description

5440 85 OV1 0 Start ON

5441 85 OV1 1 Start OFF

5442 85 OV1 2 Trip ON

5443 85 OV1 3 Trip OFF

5444 85 OV1 4 Block ON

5445 85 OV1 5 Block OFF

5504 86 OV2 0 Start ON

5505 86 OV2 1 Start OFF

5506 86 OV2 2 Trip ON

5507 86 OV2 3 Trip OFF

5508 86 OV2 4 Block ON

5509 86 OV2 5 Block OFF

5568 87 OV3 0 Start ON

5569 87 OV3 1 Start OFF

5570 87 OV3 2 Trip ON

5571 87 OV3 3 Trip OFF

5572 87 OV3 4 Block ON

5573 87 OV3 5 Block OFF

5632 88 OV4 0 Start ON

5633 88 OV4 1 Start OFF

5634 88 OV4 2 Trip ON

5635 88 OV4 3 Trip OFF

5636 88 OV4 4 Block ON

5637 88 OV4 5 Block OFF

The function registers its operation into the last twelve (12) time-stamped registers; this information is
available for all provided instances separately. The register of the function records the ON event
process data for START, TRIP or BLOCKED. The table below presents the structure of the function's
register content.

© Arcteq Relays Ltd 138

AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

Table. 5.3.7. - 89. Register content.

Event Fault Trigger Fault Pre-fault Trip time

Date and time Used SG
code type voltage voltage voltage remaining

Start Setting
dd.mm.yyyy 5440-5637 L1-E… Trip -20 ms Start -200 ms
average 0 s...1800 s group 1...8
hh:mm:ss.mss Descr. L1-L2-L3 averages averages
voltage active

5.3.8. Undervoltage protection (U<; 27)

The undervoltage function is used for instant and time-delayed undervoltage protection. Each
device with a voltage protection module has four (4) available stages of the function (U>, U>>, U>>>,
U>>>>). The function constantly measures phase voltage magnitudes or line-to-line voltage
magnitudes. Undervoltage protection is based on line-to-line voltages or to line-to-neutral voltages (as
the user selects). If the protection is based on line-to-line voltage, undervoltage protection is not
affected by earth faults in isolated or compensated networks. Undervoltage protection has two
blocking stages: internal blocking (based on voltage measurement and low voltage), or external
blocking (e.g. during voltage transformer fuse failure). The blocking signal and the setting group
selection control the operating characteristics of the function during normal operation, i.e. the user or
user-defined logic can change function parameters while the function is running.

The outputs of the function are the START, TRIP and BLOCKED signals. The undervoltage function
uses a total of eight (8) separate setting groups which can be selected from one common source.

The function can operate on instant or time-delayed mode. In time-delayed mode the operation can be
selected between definite time (DT) mode and inverse definite minimum time (IDMT).

The operational logic consists of the following:

• input magnitude selection

• input magnitude processing
• threshold comparator
• block signal check
• time delay characteristics
• output processing.

The inputs for the function are the following:

• operating mode selections

• setting parameters
• digital inputs and logic signals
• measured and pre-processed voltage magnitudes.

The function outputs the START, TRIP and BLOCKED signals which can be used for direct I/O
controlling and user logic programming. The function generates general time-stamped ON/OFF events
to the common event buffer from each of the three (3) output signals. In the instant operating mode the
function outputs START and TRIP events simultaneously with an equivalent time stamp. The time stamp
resolution is 1 ms. The function also provides a resettable cumulative counter for the START, TRIP and
BLOCKED events.

The following figure presents a simplified function block diagram of the undervoltage function.

139 © Arcteq Relays Ltd

 AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

Figure. 5.3.8. - 103. Simplified function block diagram of the U< function.

Measured input
The function block uses analog voltage measurement values. The monitored voltage magnitudes
are equal to RMS values. A -20 ms averaged value of the selected magnitude is used for pre-fault data
registering.

Table. 5.3.8. - 90. Measurement inputs of the U< function.

Signal Description Time base

UL12RMS RMS measurement of voltage UL12/V 5 ms

UL23RMS RMS measurement of voltage UL23/V 5 ms

UL31RMS RMS measurement of voltage UL31/V 5 ms

UL1RMS RMS measurement of voltage UL1/V 5 ms

UL2RMS RMS measurement of voltage UL2/V 5 ms

UL3RMS RMS measurement of voltage UL3/V 5 ms

Table. 5.3.8. - 91. Measured magnitude selection settings.

Name Description Range Step Default

0: P-P
voltages
1: P-E
0: P-P
Measured Selection of P-P or P-E voltages. Additionally, the U3 or U4 input can be voltages
- voltages
magnitude assigned as the voltage channel to be supervised. 2: U3 input
(2LL-U3SS)
3: U4 input
(SS)

The selection of the AI channel in use is made with a setting parameter. In all possible input channel
variations the pre-fault condition is presented with a 20 ms averaged history value from -20 ms from
START or TRIP event.

© Arcteq Relays Ltd 140

AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

Figure. 5.3.8. - 104. Selectable measurement magnitudes with 3LN+U4 VT connection.

Figure. 5.3.8. - 105. Selectable measurement magnitudes with 3LL+U4 VT connection (P-E voltages not available without
residual voltage).

Figure. 5.3.8. - 106. Selectable measurement magnitudes with 2LL+U4 VT connection (P-E voltages not available without
residual voltage).

141 © Arcteq Relays Ltd

 AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

P-P Voltages and P-E Voltages selections follow phase-to-neutral or phase-to-phase voltages in the
first three voltage channels (or two first voltage channels in the 2LL+U3+U4 mode). U4 input selection
follows the voltage in Channel 4. U3Input selection only follows the voltage in Channel 3 if the
2LL+U3+U4 mode is in use.

Pick-up
The Uset setting parameter controls the pick-up of the U< function. This defines the minimum allowed
measured voltage before action from the function. The function constantly calculates the ratio
between the Uset and the measured magnitude (Um) for each of the three voltages. The reset ratio of
103 % is built into the function and is always relative to the Uset value. The setting value is common for
all measured amplitudes, and when the Um exceeds the Uset value (in single, dual or all voltages) it
triggers the pick-up operation of the function.

Table. 5.3.8. - 92. Pick-up settings.

Name Description Range Step Default

0.00…120.00 0.01
Uset Pick-up setting 60 %Un
%Un %Un

U Block Block setting. If set to zero, blocking is not in use. The operation is 0.00…100.00 0.01
10 %Un
setting explained in the next chapter. %Un %Un

The pick-up activation of the function is not directly equal to the START signal generation of the
function. The START signal is allowed if the blocking condition is not active.

Using Block setting to prevent nuisance trips

It is recommended to use the Block setting parameter to prevent the relay from tripping in a situation
where the network is de-energized. When the measured voltage drops below the set value, the relay
does not give a tripping signal. If the measured voltage has dropped below the Block setting
parameter, the blocking continues until all of the line voltages have increased above the U< pick-up
setting. Please see the image below for a visualization of this function. If the block level is set to zero
(0), blocking is not in use.

Figure. 5.3.8. - 107. Example of the block setting operation.

Real-time information displayed by the function

The relay's Info page displays useful, real-time information on the state of the protection function. It is
accessed either through the relay's HMI display, or through the setting tool software when it is
connected to the relay and its Live Edit mode is active.

© Arcteq Relays Ltd 142

AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

Table. 5.3.8. - 93. Information displayed by the function.

Name Unit Description

U< pick- The primary voltage required for tripping. The displayed pick-up voltage level depends on the pick-up
V
up setting setting and the voltage transformer settings.

The primary voltage level required for trip blocking. If the measured voltage is below this value, the
U< block
V network is considered de-energized and the function will not trip. To deactivate the blocking the
setting
measured voltage must exceed the pick-up setting value.

Expected Displays the expected operating time when a fault occurs. When IDMT mode is used, the expected
operating s operating time depends on the measured voltage value. If the measured voltage changes during a
time fault, the expected operating time changes accordingly.

Time
When the function has detected a fault and counts down time towards a trip, this displays how much
remaining s
time is left before tripping occurs.
to trip

Umeas/Uset
at the Um/Uset The ratio between the measured voltage and the pick-up value.
moment

Function blocking
The block signal is checked in the beginning of each program cycle. The blocking signal is received
from the blocking matrix in the function's dedicated input. If the blocking signal is not activated when
the pick-up element activates, a START signal is generated and the function proceeds to the time
characteristics calculation.

If the blocking signal is active when the pick-up element activates, a BLOCKED signal is generated and
the function does not process the situation further. If the START function has been activated before the
blocking signal, it resets and the release time characteristics are processed similarly to when the pick-
up signal is reset.

The blocking of the function causes an HMI display event and a time-stamped blocking event with
information of the startup voltage values and its fault type to be issued.

The blocking signal can also be tested in the commissioning phase by a software switch signal when
the relay's testing mode "Enable stage forcing" is activated (General → Device).

The variables the user can set are binary signals from the system. The blocking signal needs to reach
the device minimum of 5 ms before the set operating delay has passed in order for the blocking to
activate in time.

Operating time characteristics for trip and reset

The operating timers’ behavior during a function can be set for TRIP signal and also for the release of
the function in case the pick-up element is reset before the trip time has been reached. There are three
basic operating modes available for the function:

• Instant operation: gives the TRIP signal with no additional time delay simultaneously with the
START signal.
• Definite time operation (DT): gives the TRIP signal after a user-defined time delay regardless
of the measured voltage as long as the voltage is above the Uset value and thus the pick-up
element is active (independent time characteristics).
• Inverse definite minimum time (IDMT): gives the TRIP signal after a time which is in relation
to the set pick-up voltage Uset and the measured voltage Um (dependent time
characteristics).

The IDMT function follows this formula:

143 © Arcteq Relays Ltd

 AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

Where:

• t = operating time
• k = time dial setting
• Um = measured voltage
• Us = pick-up setting
• a = IDMT multiplier setting

The following table presents the setting parameters for the function's time characteristics.

Table. 5.3.8. - 94. Setting parameters for operating time characteristics.

Name Range Step Default Description

Selection of the delay type time counter. The selection possibilities are
1: DT
Delay type - 1: DT dependent (IDMT, Inverse Definite Minimum Time) and independent (DT,
2: IDMT
Definite Time) characteristics.

Definite time operating delay. This setting is active and visible when DT is
the selected delay type.
Definite
0.000…1800.000 0.005
operating 0.040 s
s s When set to 0.000 s, the stage operates as instant stage without added
time delay
delay. When the parameter is set to 0.005...1800 s, the stage operates
as independent delayed.

This setting is active and visible when IDMT is the selected delay type.
Time dial 0.01
0.01…60.00 s 0.05 s
setting k s
Time dial/multiplier setting for IDMT characteristics.

This setting is active and visible when IDMT is the selected delay type.
IDMT 0.01
0.01…25.00 s 1.00 s
Multiplier s
IDMT time multiplier in the Um/Uset power.

Table. 5.3.8. - 95. Setting parameters for reset time characteristics.

Name Range Step Default Description

Resetting time. The time allowed between pick-ups if the pick-up has not
Release 0.000…150.000 0.005
0.06 s led to a trip operation. During this time the START signal is held on for the
time delay s s
timers if the delayed pick-up release is active.

Delayed Resetting characteristics selection, either time-delayed or instant after the

1: No 2: Yes
pick-up - pick-up element is released. If activated, the START signal is reset after a
2: Yes
release set release time delay.

Time calc Operating timer resetting characteristics selection. When actived, the
reset after 1: No operating time counter is reset after a set release time if the pick-up
- 2: Yes
release 2: Yes element is not activated during this time. When disabled, the operating
time time counter is reset directly after the pick-up element reset.

Continue
time
Time calculation characteristics selection. If activated, the operating time
calculation 1: No
- 1: No counter continues until a set release time even when the pick-up element
during 2: Yes
is reset.
release
time

The user can reset characteristics through the application. The default setting is a 60 ms delay; the
time calculation is held during the release time.

© Arcteq Relays Ltd 144

AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

In the release delay option the operating time counter calculates the operating time during the release.
When using this option the function does not trip if the input signal is not re-activated while the release
time count is on-going.

Events and registers

The undervoltage function (abbreviated "UV" in event block names) generates events and registers
from the status changes in START, TRIP, and BLOCKED. The user can select which event messages
are stored in the main event buffer: ON, OFF, or both. The function offers four (4) independent stages;
the events are segregated for each stage operation.

The events triggered by the function are recorded with a time stamp and with process data values.

Table. 5.3.8. - 96. Event codes.

Event number Event channel Event block name Event code Description

5696 89 UV1 0 Start ON

5697 89 UV1 1 Start OFF

5698 89 UV1 2 Trip ON

5699 89 UV1 3 Trip OFF

5700 89 UV1 4 Block ON

5701 89 UV1 5 Block OFF

5702 89 UV1 6 Undervoltage Block ON

5703 89 UV1 7 Undervoltage Block OFF

5760 90 UV2 0 Start ON

5761 90 UV2 1 Start OFF

5762 90 UV2 2 Trip ON

5763 90 UV2 3 Trip OFF

5764 90 UV2 4 Block ON

5765 90 UV2 5 Block OFF

5766 90 UV2 6 Undervoltage Block ON

5767 90 UV2 7 Undervoltage Block OFF

5824 91 UV3 0 Start ON

5825 91 UV3 1 Start OFF

5826 91 UV3 2 Trip ON

5827 91 UV3 3 Trip OFF

5828 91 UV3 4 Block ON

5829 91 UV3 5 Block OFF

5830 91 UV3 6 Undervoltage Block ON

5831 91 UV3 7 Undervoltage Block OFF

5888 92 UV4 0 Start ON

5889 92 UV4 1 Start OFF

5890 92 UV4 2 Trip ON

5891 92 UV4 3 Trip OFF

145 © Arcteq Relays Ltd

 AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

Event number Event channel Event block name Event code Description

5892 92 UV4 4 Block ON

5893 92 UV4 5 Block OFF

5894 92 UV4 6 Undervoltage Block ON

5895 92 UV4 7 Undervoltage Block OFF

The function registers its operation into the last twelve (12) time-stamped registers; this information is
available for all provided instances separately. The register of the function records the ON event
process data for START, TRIP or BLOCKED. The table below presents the structure of the function's
register content.

Table. 5.3.8. - 97. Register content.

Event Fault Pre-trig Fault Pre-fault Trip time

Date and time Used SG
code type voltage voltage voltage remaining

A…A- Setting
dd.mm.yyyy 5696-5895 Start average Trip -20 ms Start -200 ms
B-C 0 ms...1800 s group 1...8
hh:mm:ss.mss Descr. voltage averages averages
active

5.3.9. Neutral overvoltage protection (U0>; 59N)

The neutral overvoltage function is used for non-directional instant and time-delayed earth fault
protection. Each device with a voltage protection module has four (4) available stages of the
function (U0>, U0>>, U0>>>, U0>>>>). The function constantly measures phase-to-earth voltage
magnitudes and calculates the zero sequence component. Neutral overvoltage protection is scaled
to line-to-line RMS level. When the line-to-line voltage of a system is 100 V in the secondary side, the
earth fault is 100 % of the Un and the calculated zero sequence voltage reaches 100/√3 V = 57.74 V.

Below is the formula for symmetric component calculation (and therefore to zero sequence voltage
calculation).

Below are some examples of zero sequence calculation.

Figure. 5.3.9. - 108. Normal situation.

© Arcteq Relays Ltd 146

AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

Figure. 5.3.9. - 109. Earth fault in isolated network.

Figure. 5.3.9. - 110. Close-distance short-circuit between phases 1 and 3.

The monitored voltage magnitudes are equal to RMS values. The blocking signal and the setting group
selection control the operating characteristics of the function during normal operation, i.e. the user or
user-defined logic can change function parameters while the function is running.

The outputs of the function are the START, TRIP and BLOCKED signals. The neutral overvoltage
function uses a total of eight (8) separate setting groups which can be selected from one common
source.

The function can operate on instant or time-delayed mode. In the time-delayed mode the operation can
be selected for definite time (DT) or for inverse definite minimum time (IDMT); the IDMT operation
supports both IEC and ANSI standard time delays as well as custom parameters.

The operational logic consists of the following:

• input magnitude selection

• input magnitude processing
• threshold comparator
• block signal check
• time delay characteristics
• output processing.

The inputs for the function are the following:

• operating mode selections

• setting parameters
• digital inputs and logic signals
• measured and pre-processed voltage magnitudes.

The function outputs the START, TRIP and BLOCKED signals which can be used for direct I/O
controlling and user logic programming. The function generates general time-stamped ON/OFF events
to the common event buffer from each of the three (3) output signals. In the instant operating mode the
function outputs START and TRIP events simultaneously with an equivalent time stamp. The time stamp
resolution is 1 ms. The function also provides a cumulative counter for the START, TRIP and BLOCKED
events.

The following figure presents a simplified function block diagram of the neutral overvoltage function.
147 © Arcteq Relays Ltd
 AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

Figure. 5.3.9. - 111. Simplified function block diagram of the U0> function.

Measured input
The function block uses analog voltage measurement values. The function block uses RMS values. A
-20 ms averaged value of the selected magnitude is used for pre-fault data registering.

Table. 5.3.9. - 98. Measurement inputs of the U0> function.

Signal Description Time base

U0RMS RMS measurement of voltage U0/V 5 ms

UL1RMS RMS measurement of voltage UL1/V 5 ms

UL2RMS RMS measurement of voltage UL2/V 5 ms

UL3RMS RMS measurement of voltage UL3/V 5 ms

The selection of the AI channel currently in use is made with a setting parameter. In all possible input
channel variations the pre-fault condition is presented with a 20 ms averaged history value from -20 ms
from a START or TRIP event.

Real-time information displayed by the function

The relay's Info page displays useful, real-time information on the state of the protection function. It is
accessed either through the relay's HMI display, or through the setting tool software when it is
connected to the relay and its Live Edit mode is active.

Name Range Step Default Description

U0> Meas 0: Select

0: Defines which available measured residual voltage is used by the
input 1: U0Calc -
Select function.
select 2: U4 input

Primary voltage required for tripping. The displayed pick-up voltage level
U0> Pick- 0.0...1 000 000.0
0.1 V - depends on the chosen U0 measurement input selection, on the pick-up
up setting V
settings and on the voltage transformer settings.

Displays the expected operating time when a fault occurs. When IDMT
Expected
0.000...1800.000 0.005 mode is used, the expected operating time depends on the measured
operating -
s s voltage value. If the measured voltage changes during a fault, the
time
expected operating time changes accordingly.

Time
0.000...1800.000 0.005 When the function has detected a fault and counts down time towards a
remaining -
s s trip, this displays how much time is left before tripping occurs.
to trip

© Arcteq Relays Ltd 148

AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

Name Range Step Default Description

Umeas/Uset
The ratio between the measured or calculated neutral voltage and the
at the 0.00...1250.00 0.01 -
pick-up value.
moment

Pick-up
The Uset setting parameter controls the pick-up of the U0> function. This defines the maximum allowed
measured voltage before action from the function. The function constantly calculates the ratio
between the Uset and the measured magnitude (Um) for neutral voltage. The reset ratio of 97 % is built
into the function and is always relative to the Uset value. The setting value is common for all measured
amplitudes, and when the Um exceeds the Uset value it triggers the pick-up operation of the function.

Table. 5.3.9. - 99. Pick-up settings.

Name Description Range Step Default

0.01 %Un 20.00 %Un

Pick-up setting U0set> Pick-up setting 1.00…99.00 %Un

The pick-up activation of the function is not directly equal to the START signal generation of the
function. The START signal is allowed if the blocking condition is not active.

Function blocking
The block signal is checked in the beginning of each program cycle. The blocking signal is received
from the blocking matrix in the function's dedicated input. If the blocking signal is not activated when
the pick-up element activates, a START signal is generated and the function proceeds to the time
characteristics calculation.

If the blocking signal is active when the pick-up element activates, a BLOCKED signal is generated and
the function does not process the situation further. If the START function has been activated before the
blocking signal, it resets and the release time characteristics are processed similarly to when the pick-
up signal is reset.

The blocking of the function causes an HMI display event and a time-stamped blocking event with
information of the startup voltage values and its fault type to be issued.

The blocking signal can also be tested in the commissioning phase by a software switch signal when
the relay's testing mode "Enable stage forcing" is activated (General → Device).

The variables the user can set are binary signals from the system. The blocking signal needs to reach
the device minimum of 5 ms before the set operating delay has passed in order for the blocking to
activate in time.

Operating time characteristics for trip and reset

The operating timers’ behavior during a function can be set for TRIP signal and also for the release of
the function in case the pick-up element is reset before the trip time has been reached. There are three
basic operating modes available for the function:

• Instant operation: gives the TRIP signal with no additional time delay simultaneously with the
START signal.
• Definite time operation (DT): gives the TRIP signal after a user-defined time delay regardless
of the measured or calculated voltage as long as the voltage is above the Uset value and
thus the pick-up element is active (independent time characteristics).

149 © Arcteq Relays Ltd

 AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

• Inverse definite minimum time (IDMT): gives the TRIP signal after a time which is in relation
to the set pick-up voltage Uset and the measured voltage Um (dependent time
characteristics).

The IDMT function follows this formula:

Where:

• t = operating time
• k = time dial setting
• Um = measured voltage
• Us = pick-up setting
• a = IDMT multiplier setting

The following table presents the setting parameters for the function's time characteristics.

Table. 5.3.9. - 100. Setting parameters for operating time characteristics.

Name Range Step Default Description

Selection of the delay type time counter. The selection possibilities are
1: DT
Delay type - 1: DT dependent (IDMT, Inverse Definite Minimum Time) and independent (DT,
2: IDMT
Definite Time) characteristics.

Definite time operating delay. The setting is active and visible when DT is
the selected delay type.
Definite
0.000…1800.000 0.005
operating 0.040 s
s s When set to 0.000 s, the stage operates as instant without added delay.
time delay
When the parameter is set to 0.005...1800 s, the stage operates as
independent delayed.

The setting is active and visible when IDMT is the selected delay type.
Time dial 0.01
0.01…60.00 s 0.05 s
setting k s
Time dial/multiplier setting for IDMT characteristics.

The setting is active and visible when IDMT is the selected delay type.
IDMT 0.01
0.01…25.00 s 1.00 s
Multiplier s
IDMT time multiplier in the Um/Uset power.

Table. 5.3.9. - 101. Setting parameters for reset time characteristics.

Name Range Step Default Description

Resetting time. Time allowed between pick-ups if the pick-up has not led
Release 0.000…150.000 0.005
0.06 s to a trip operation. During this time the START signal is held on for the
time delay s s
timers if the delayed pick-up release is active.

Delayed Resetting characteristics selection either as time-delayed or as instant

1: No 2: Yes
pick-up - after the pick-up element is released. If activated, the START signal is reset
2: Yes
release after a set release time delay.

Time calc Operating timer resetting characteristics selection. When active, the
reset after 1: No operating time counter is reset after a set release time if the pick-up
- 2: Yes
release 2: Yes element is not activated during this time. When disabled, the operating
time time counter is reset directly after the pick-up element reset.

© Arcteq Relays Ltd 150

AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

Name Range Step Default Description

Continue
time
Time calculation characteristics selection. If activated, the operating time
calculation 1: No
- 1: No counter continues until a set release time has passed even if the pick-up
during 2: Yes
element is reset.
release
time

The user can reset characteristics through the application. The default setting is a 60 ms delay; the
time calculation is held during the release time.

In the release delay option the operating time counter calculates the operating time during the release.
When using this option the function does not trip if the input signal is not re-activated while the release
time count is on-going.

Events and registers

The neutral overvoltage function (abbreviated "NOV" in event block names) generates events and
registers from the status changes in START, TRIP, and BLOCKED. The user can select which event
messages are stored in the main event buffer: ON, OFF, or both. The function offers four (4)
independent stages; the events are segregated for each stage operation.

The events triggered by the function are recorded with a time stamp and with process data values.

Table. 5.3.9. - 102. Event codes.

Event number Event channel Event block name Event code Description

5952 93 NOV1 0 Start ON

5953 93 NOV1 1 Start OFF

5954 93 NOV1 2 Trip ON

5955 93 NOV1 3 Trip OFF

5956 93 NOV1 4 Block ON

5957 93 NOV1 5 Block OFF

6016 94 NOV2 0 Start ON

6017 94 NOV2 1 Start OFF

6018 94 NOV2 2 Trip ON

6019 94 NOV2 3 Trip OFF

6020 94 NOV2 4 Block ON

6021 94 NOV2 5 Block OFF

6080 95 NOV3 0 Start ON

6081 95 NOV3 1 Start OFF

6082 95 NOV3 2 Trip ON

6083 95 NOV3 3 Trip OFF

6084 95 NOV3 4 Block ON

6085 95 NOV3 5 Block OFF

6144 96 NOV4 0 Start ON

6145 96 NOV4 1 Start OFF

6146 96 NOV4 2 Trip ON

151 © Arcteq Relays Ltd

 AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

Event number Event channel Event block name Event code Description

6147 96 NOV4 3 Trip OFF

6148 96 NOV4 4 Block ON

6149 96 NOV4 5 Block OFF

The function registers its operation into the last twelve (12) time-stamped registers; this information is
available for all provided instances separately. The register of the function records the ON event
process data for START, TRIP or BLOCKED. The table below presents the structure of the function's
register content.

Table. 5.3.9. - 103. Register content.

Date and Event Trigger Fault Pre-fault Trip time

Fault type Used SG
time code voltage voltage voltage remaining

Start Setting
dd.mm.yyyy 5952-6149 Trip -20 ms Start -200 0 ms...1800
L1-G…L1-L2-L3 average group 1...8
hh:mm:ss.mss Descr. averages ms averages s
voltage active

5.3.10. Sequence voltage protection (U1/U2>/<; 47/27P/59PN)

The sequence voltage function is used for instant and time-delayed voltage protection. It has positive
and negative sequence protection for both overvoltage and undervoltage (the user selects the needed
function). Each device with a voltage protection module has four (4) available stages of the function.
The function constantly measures the RMS value of phase-to-earth voltage magnitudes, or line-to-line
and neutral voltage magnitudes to calculate the positive or negative sequence voltage. The user can
select the voltage used. Sequence voltage is based on the system's line-to-line voltage level. Protection
stages can be set to protect against both undervoltage and overvoltage. The blocking signal and the
setting group selection control the operating characteristics of the function during normal operation,
i.e. the user or user-defined logic can change function parameters while the function is running.

Positive sequence voltage calculation

Below is the formula for symmetric component calculation (and therefore to positive sequence voltage
calculation).

In what follows are three examples of positive sequence calculation (positive sequence component
vector).

Figure. 5.3.10. - 112. Normal situation.

© Arcteq Relays Ltd 152

AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

Figure. 5.3.10. - 113. Earth fault in an isolated network.

Figure. 5.3.10. - 114. Close-distance short-circuit between phases 1 and 3.

Negative sequence voltage calculation

Below is the formula for symmetric component calculation (and therefore to negative sequence voltage
calculation).

In what follows are three examples of negative sequence calculation (negative sequence component
vector).

Figure. 5.3.10. - 115. Normal situation.

153 © Arcteq Relays Ltd

 AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

Figure. 5.3.10. - 116. Earth fault in isolated network.

Figure. 5.3.10. - 117. Close-distance short-circuit between phases 1 and 3.

The sequence voltage function uses a total of eight (8) separate setting groups which can be selected
from one common source.

The function can operate on instant or time-delayed mode. In time-delayed mode the operation can be
selected between definite time (DT) mode and inverse definite minimum time (IDMT).

The operational logic consists of the following:

• input magnitude selection

• input magnitude processing
• threshold comparator
• block signal check
• time delay characteristics
• output processing.

The inputs for the function are the following:

• operating mode selections

• setting parameters
• digital inputs and logic signals
• measured and pre-processed voltage magnitudes.

The function outputs the START, TRIP and BLOCKED signals which can be used for direct I/O
controlling and user logic programming. The function generates general time-stamped ON/OFF events
to the common event buffer from each of the three (3) output signal. In the instant operating mode the
function outputs START and TRIP events simultaneously with an equivalent time stamp. The time stamp
resolution is 1 ms. The function also a resettable cumulative counter for the START, TRIP and
BLOCKED events.

© Arcteq Relays Ltd 154

AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

The following figure presents a simplified function block diagram of the sequence voltage function.

Figure. 5.3.10. - 118. Simplified function block diagram of the U1/U2>/< function.

Measured input
The function block uses analog voltage measurement values and always uses RMS values. A -20 ms
averaged value of the selected magnitude is used for pre-fault data registering.

Table. 5.3.10. - 104. Measurement inputs of the U1/U2>/< function.

Signal Description Time base

U1RMS RMS measurement of voltage U1/V 5 ms

U2RMS RMS measurement of voltage U2/V 5 ms

U3RMS RMS measurement of voltage U3/V 5 ms

Table. 5.3.10. - 105. Measured magnitude selection.

Name Description Range Default

1: U1 Positive sequence
Measured Selects which calculated voltage is voltage 1: U1 Positive
magnitude supervised. 2: U2 Negative sequence sequence voltage
voltage

In RMS values the pre-fault condition is presented with 20 ms averaged history value from -20 ms of
START or TRIP event.

Pick-up
The Uset setting parameter controls the pick-up of the U1/U2>/< function. This defines the maximum or
minimum allowed calculated U1 or U2 voltage before action from the function. The function constantly
calculates the ratio between the Uset and the calculated U1 or U2 magnitude (Uc). The monitored
voltage is chosen in the Info page with the parameter Measured magnitude. The reset ratio of 97 % in
overvoltage applications is built into the function and is always relative to the Uset value. The reset ratio
of 103 % in undervoltage applications is built into the function and is always relative to the Uset value.
When the Uc goes above or below the Uset value it triggers the pick-up operation of the function.

Table. 5.3.10. - 106. Pick-up settings.

Name Description Range Step Default

Pick-up Selects whether the function picks-up when the monitored voltage is under or Over >
- Over>
terms over the set pick-up value. Under<

155 © Arcteq Relays Ltd

 AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

Name Description Range Step Default

5.00…150.00 0.01 105

Uset Pick-up setting
%Un %Un %Un

0.00…80.00 0.01
Ublk Undervoltage blocking (visible when the pick-up term is Under<) 5 %Un
%Un %Un

The pick-up activation of the function is not directly equal to the START signal generation of the
function. The START signal is allowed if the blocking condition is not active.

Using Block setting to prevent nuisance trips

It is recommended to use the Under block setting Ublk parameter when Under< is the chosen tripping
condition to prevent the relay from tripping in a situation where the network is de-energized. When the
measured voltage drops below the set value, the relay does not give a tripping signal. If the measured
voltage has dropped below the Under block setting Ublk parameter, the blocking continues until all of
the line voltages have increased above the U< pick-up setting. Please see the image below for a
visualization of this function. If the block level is set to zero (0), blocking is not in use.

Figure. 5.3.10. - 119. Example of the block setting operation.

Real-time information displayed by the function

The relay's Info page displays useful, real-time information on the state of the protection function. It is
accessed either through the relay's HMI display, or through the setting tool software when it is
connected to the relay and its Live Edit mode is active.

Table. 5.3.10. - 107. Information displayed by the function.

Name Unit Description

U1/2 >/<
The primary voltage required for tripping. The displayed pick-up voltage level depends on the pick-up
Pick-up V
setting and the voltage transformer settings.
setting

Expected Displays the expected operating time when a fault occurs. When IDMT mode is used, the expected
operating s operating time depends on the measured voltage value. If the measured voltage changes during a
time fault, the expected operating time changes accordingly.

Time
When the function has detected a fault and counts down time towards a trip, this displays how much
remaining s
time is left before tripping occurs.
to trip

Umeas/Uset
at the Um/Uset The ratio between the measured voltage and the pick-up value.
moment

© Arcteq Relays Ltd 156

AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

Function blocking
The block signal is checked in the beginning of each program cycle. The blocking signal is received
from the blocking matrix in the function's dedicated input. If the blocking signal is not activated when
the pick-up element activates, a START signal is generated and the function proceeds to the time
characteristics calculation.

If the blocking signal is active when the pick-up element activates, a BLOCKED signal is generated and
the function does not process the situation further. If the START function has been activated before the
blocking signal, it resets and the release time characteristics are processed similarly to when the pick-
up signal is reset.

The blocking of the function causes an HMI display event and a time-stamped blocking event with
information of the startup voltage values and its fault type to be issued.

The blocking signal can also be tested in the commissioning phase by a software switch signal when
the relay's testing mode "Enable stage forcing" is activated (General → Device).

The variables the user can set are binary signals from the system. The blocking signal needs to reach
the device minimum of 5 ms before the set operating delay has passed in order for the blocking to
activate in time.

Operating time characteristics for trip and reset

This function supports definite time delay (DT) and inverse definite minimum time delay (IDMT). For
detailed information on these delay types please refer to the chapter "General properties of a protection
function" and its section "Operating time characteristics for trip and reset".

Events and registers

The sequence voltage function (abbreviated "VUB" in event block names) generates events and
registers from the status changes in START, TRIP and BLOCKED. The user can select which event
messages are stored in the main event buffer: ON, OFF, or both. The function offers four (4)
independent stages; the events are segregated for each stage operation.

The events triggered by the function are recorded with a time stamp and with process data values.

Table. 5.3.10. - 108. Event codes.

Event number Event channel Event block name Event code Description

8320 130 VUB1 0 Start ON

8321 130 VUB1 1 Start OFF

8322 130 VUB1 2 Trip ON

8323 130 VUB1 3 Trip OFF

8324 130 VUB1 4 Block ON

8325 130 VUB1 5 Block OFF

8384 131 VUB2 0 Start ON

8385 131 VUB2 1 Start OFF

8386 131 VUB2 2 Trip ON

8387 131 VUB2 3 Trip OFF

8388 131 VUB2 4 Block ON

8389 131 VUB2 5 Block OFF

157 © Arcteq Relays Ltd

 AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

Event number Event channel Event block name Event code Description

8448 132 VUB3 0 Start ON

8449 132 VUB3 1 Start OFF

8450 132 VUB3 2 Trip ON

8451 132 VUB3 3 Trip OFF

8452 132 VUB3 4 Block ON

8453 132 VUB3 5 Block OFF

8512 133 VUB4 0 Start ON

8513 133 VUB4 1 Start OFF

8514 133 VUB4 2 Trip ON

8515 133 VUB4 3 Trip OFF

8516 133 VUB4 4 Block ON

8517 133 VUB4 5 Block OFF

The function registers its operation into the last twelve (12) time-stamped registers; this information is
available for all provided instances separately. The register of the function records the ON event
process data for START, TRIP or BLOCKED. The table below presents the structure of the function's
register content.

Table. 5.3.10. - 109. Register content.

Trigger Fault Pre-fault Trip time

Date and time Event code Used SG
voltage voltage voltage remaining

dd.mm.yyyy 8320 - Start average Trip -20 ms Start -200 ms Setting

0 ms...1800 s
hh:mm:ss.mss 8517 Descr. voltage averages averages group 1...8 active

5.3.11. Non-directional undercurrent protection (I<; 37)

The non-directional undercurrent function is used for monitoring motor loading especially in conveyor-
type of applications. A sudden loss in the motor load indicates problems in the actual load rather than
in the motor itself. In a conveyor application this may indicate a broken belt and the motor should be
turned off immediately to avoid further problems. The cause may also be a mechanical breakdown of
the apparatus the motor uses. In some cases this undercurrent function's output may be also used in
an automation system to indicate that the device has finished its work load and is ready for a next task.
In order to operate this function requires motor running status signal to be active. Motor running is
connected internally from Motor status monitoring function. The operation of undercurrent protection is
blocked when the motor is not running.

The outputs of the function are the START, TRIP and BLOCKED signals. The undercurrent function
uses a total of eight (8) separate setting groups which can be selected from one common source.

The function can operate on instant or time-delayed mode. In the time-delayed mode the operation can
be set to operate on definite time (DT) delay.

The inputs for the function are the following:

• setting parameters
• digital inputs and logic signals
• measured and pre-processed current magnitudes.

© Arcteq Relays Ltd 158

AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

The function outputs the START, TRIP and BLOCKED signals which can be used for direct I/O
controlling and user logic programming. The function generates general time-stamped ON/OFF events
to the common event buffer from each of the three (3) output signals. In the instant operating mode the
function outputs START and TRIP events simultaneously with an equivalent time stamp. The time stamp
resolution is 1 ms. The function also provides a resettable cumulative counter for the START, TRIP and
BLOCKED events.

The following figure presents a simplified function block diagram of the undercurrent function.

Figure. 5.3.11. - 120. Simplified function block diagram of the I< function.

Measured input
The function block uses analog current measurement values and uses RMS phase
current measurements. A -20 ms averaged value of the selected magnitude is used for pre-fault data
registering.

Table. 5.3.11. - 110. Measurement inputs of the I< function.

Signal Description Time base

IL1RMS RMS measurement of phase L1 (A) current 5 ms

IL2RMS RMS measurement of phase L2 (B) current 5 ms

IL3RMS RMS measurement of phase L3 (C) current 5 ms

In all possible input channel variations the pre-fault condition is presented with a 20 ms averaged
history value from -20 ms from a START or TRIP event.

Pick-up
The Iset setting parameter controls the the pick-up of the I< function. This defines the minimum allowed
measured current before action from the function. The function constantly calculates the ratio
between the Iset and the measured magnitude (Im) for each of the three phases. The reset ratio of
103 % is built into the function and is always relative to the Iset value. The setting value is common for
all measured phases. When the Im exceeds the Iset value (in single, dual or all phases) it triggers the
pick-up operation of the function.

159 © Arcteq Relays Ltd

 AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

Table. 5.3.11. - 111. Motor data settings.

Protection
Name Range Step Default Description
functions

- Motor status
monitoring
- Machine
thermal
overload
protection
(Tm>; 49M)
The motor's nominal current scaled to per unit. If the user selects
Motor In 0.1... 40.0 0.1 x - Motor
- Object In in the CT settings, this value should be 1.00. If scaled to
Scaled x In In starting
the CT nominal, this value may vary.
monitoring
(Ist>; 48)
- Undercurrent
(I<; 37)
- Load jam
protection
(Im>; 51M)

- Motor status
monitoring
- Machine
thermal
overload
protection
(Tm>; 49M)
Motor In 0.1...5,000 - Motor
0.1 A - The motor's nominal current in amperes.
A A starting
monitoring
(Ist>; 48)
- Undercurrent
(I<; 37)
- Load jam
protection
(Im>; 51M)

- Motor status
monitoring
- Machine
The motor's no load current. This setting defines the "Stopped"
thermal
No load 0.1…40.0 0.1 x condition when the current is below this setting value. Also, when
0.2 x In overload
current< x In In the current is below this value, the undercurrent protection stage
protection
is locked.
(Tm>; 49M)
- Undercurrent
(I<; 37)

- Motor status
monitoring
- Machine
No load thermal
0.1...5 000
current< 0.1 A - overload The motor's no load current in amperes.
A
A protection
(Tm>; 49M)
- Undercurrent
(I<; 37)

Table. 5.3.11. - 112. Pick-up settings.

Name Description Range Step Default

Iset Pick-up setting 0.10…40.00 x In 0.01 x In 0.5 x In

The pick-up activation of the function is not directly equal to the START signal generation of the
function. The START signal is allowed if the blocking condition is not active.

© Arcteq Relays Ltd 160

AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

Operating time characteristics for trip and reset

This function supports definite time delay (DT). For detailed information on these delay types please
refer to the chapter "General properties of a protection function" and its section "Operating time
characteristics for trip and reset".

Function blocking
The block signal is checked in the beginning of each program cycle. The blocking signal is received
from the blocking matrix in the function's dedicated input. If the blocking signal is not activated when
the pick-up element activates, a START signal is generated and the function proceeds to the time
characteristics calculation.

If the blocking signal is active when the pick-up element activates, a BLOCKED signal is generated and
the function does not process the situation further. If the START function has been activated before the
blocking signal, it resets and the release time characteristics are processed similarly to when the pick-
up signal is reset.

The blocking of the function causes an HMI display event and a time-stamped blocking event with
information of the startup current values and its fault type to be issued.

The blocking signal can also be tested in the commissioning phase by a software switch signal when
the relay's testing mode "Enable stage forcing" is activated (General → Device).

The variables the user can set are binary signals from the system. The blocking signal needs to reach
the device minimum of 5 ms before the set operating delay has passed in order for the blocking to
activate in time.

Events and registers

The undercurrent function (abbreviated "NUC" in event block names) generates events and registers
from the status changes in START, TRIP and BLOCKED. The user can select which event messages
are stored in the main event buffer: ON, OFF, or both.

The events triggered by the function are recorded with a time stamp and with process data values.

Table. 5.3.11. - 113. Event codes.

Event number Event channel Event block name Event code Description

3840 60 NUC1 0 Start ON

3841 60 NUC1 1 Start OFF

3842 60 NUC1 2 Trip ON

3843 60 NUC1 3 Trip OFF

3844 60 NUC1 4 Block ON

3845 60 NUC1 5 Block OFF

The function registers its operation into the last twelve (12) time-stamped registers. The register of the
function records the ON event process data for START, TRIP or BLOCKED. The table below
presents the structure of the function's register content.

161 © Arcteq Relays Ltd

 AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

Table. 5.3.11. - 114. Register content.

Date and Event Trigger Fault Prefault Trip time

Fault type Used SG
time code current current current remaining

Start
dd.mm.yyyy 3840-3845 Trip -20 ms Start -200 0 ms...1800 Setting group
L1-G…L1-L2-L3 average
hh:mm:ss.mss Descr. averages ms averages s 1...8 active
current

5.3.12. Line thermal overload protection (TF>; 49F)

The line thermal overload function is used for the thermal capacity monitoring and protection of cables
and overhead lines. This function can also be used for any single time constant application like inductor
chokes, certain types of transformers and any other static units which do not have active cooling apart
from the cables and overhead lines.

The function constantly monitors the instant values of phase TRMS currents (including harmonics up to
31st) and calculates the set thermal replica status in 5 ms cycles. The function includes a total memory
function of the load current conditions according to IEC 60255-8.

The function is based on a thermal replica which represents the protected object's or cable's thermal
loading in relation to the current going through the object. The thermal replica includes the calculated
thermal capacity that the "memory" uses; it is an integral function which tells this function apart from a
normal overcurrent function and its operating principle for overload protection applications.

The thermal image for the function is calculated according to the equation described below:

Where:

• θt% = Thermal image status in percentages of the maximum thermal capacity available
• θt-1 = Thermal image status in a previous calculation cycle (the memory of the function)
• Imax = Measured maximum of the three TRMS phase currents
• In = Current for the 100 % thermal capacity to be used (the pick-up current in p.u., tmax
achieved in τ x 5)
• kSF = Loading factor (service factor), the maximum allowed load current in p.u.,
dependent on the protected object or the cable/line installation
• kamb = Temperature correction factor, either from a linear approximation or from a settable
ten-point thermal capacity curve
• e = Euler’s number
• t = Calculation time step in seconds (0.005 s)
• τ = Thermal time constant of the protected object (in minutes)

The basic operating principle of the thermal replica is based on the nominal temperature rise, which is
achieved when the protected object is loaded with a nominal load in a nominal ambient temperature.
When the object is loaded with a nominal load for a time equal to its heating constant tau (τ), 63% of
the nominal thermal capacity is used. When the loading continues until five times this given constant,
the used thermal capacity approaches 100 % indefinitely but never exceeds it. With a single time
constant model the cooling of the object follows this same behavior, the reverse of the heating when
the current feeding is zero.

© Arcteq Relays Ltd 162

AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

Figure. 5.3.12. - 121. Example of thermal image calculation with nominal conditions.

The described behavior is based on the assumption that the monitored object (whether a cable, a line
or an electrical device) has a homogenous body which generates and dissipates heat with a rate
proportional to the temperature rise caused by the current squared. This is usually the case with cables
and other objects while the heat dissipation of overhead lines is dependent on the weather conditions.
Weather conditions considering the prevailing conditions in the thermal replica are compensated with
the ambient temperature coefficient which is constantly calculated and changing when using RTD
sensor for the measurement. When the ambient temperature of the protected object is stable it can be
set manually (e.g. underground cables).

The ambient temperature compensation takes into account the set minimum and maximum
temperatures and the load capacity of the protected object as well as the measured or set ambient
temperature. The calculated coefficient is a linear correction factor, as the following formula shows:

163 © Arcteq Relays Ltd

 AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

Where:

• tamb = Measured (or set) ambient temperature (can be set in ̊C or in ̊F)

• tmax = Maximum temperature (can be set in ̊C or in ̊F) for the protected object
• kmax = Ambient temperature correction factor for the maximum temperature
• tmin = Minimum temperature (can be set in ̊C or in ̊F) for the protected object
• kmin = Ambient temperature correction factor for the minimum temperature
• tref = Ambient temperature reference (can be set in ̊C or in ̊F, the temperature in which the
manufacturer's temperature presumptions apply, the temperature correction factor is 1.0)

Figure. 5.3.12. - 122. Ambient temperature coefficient calculation (a three-point linear approximation and a settable correction
curve).

© Arcteq Relays Ltd 164

AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

As can be seen in the diagram above, the ambient temperature coefficient is relative to the nominal
temperature reference. By default the temperature reference is +15 °C (underground cables) which
gives the correction factor value of 1.00 for the thermal replica.

A settable thermal capacity curve uses the linear interpolation for ambient temperature correction with
a maximum of ten (10) pairs of temperature–correction factor pairs.

Figure. 5.3.12. - 123. Example of the relationship between ground temperature and correction factor.

The temperature coefficient may be informed in a similar manner to the figure above in a datasheet
provided by the manufacturer.

Figure. 5.3.12. - 124. Settings of the function's ambient temperature coefficient curve.

The temperature and correction factor pairs are set to the function's settable curve.

165 © Arcteq Relays Ltd

 AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

Figure. 5.3.12. - 125. Set correction curve for ambient temperature.

The correction curve for ambient temperature is shown in the figure above. The reference temperature
for underground cables is usually +15 ̊C which gives a correction factor of 1.00 (in this case also the
nominal temerature). The curve does not need to use as all the available points. The minimum setting is
two pairs, resulting in a straight line.

For cables the ambient temperature correction is just one correction factor. The kSF correction factor is
used for non-changing corrections; its calculation is explained later in this manual. Calculating
correction factors for a cable or overhead installation requires the consulting of the datasheet for the
technical specifications of the used cable. This information is usually provided by the cable
manufacturer. For example, cable data may be presented as in the figures below (an example from a
Prysmian Group cable datasheet) which show the cable's temperature characteristics and voltage
ratings (1st image) with different installations and copper or aluminum conductors (2nd and 3rd
image).

© Arcteq Relays Ltd 166

AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

Figure. 5.3.12. - 126. Example of a high-voltage cable datasheet.

The datasheet shows the currents which in a combination with a specific installation and a specific
construction method achieve a specific conductor temperature in give standard conditions (e.g. a
copper conductor reaches a temperature of 90 °C when, for example, it has a continuous current-
carrying capacity of 815 A, an open screen circuit, and is laid in a trefoil formation in soil whose
temperature is 15 °C).

The most important parameters for setting a working thermal image are the cable's current and the
installation place. In addition to the above-mentioned current-carrying capacity table, the manufacturer
should also provide data to allow for fine-tuning the thermal image. Equally important to the
ampere–temperature values are the presumptive conditions under which the given continuous current-
carrying capacity values can be expected to apply. The following figure is an example of these general
presumption as presented in a Prysmian Group cable datasheet.

167 © Arcteq Relays Ltd

 AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

Figure. 5.3.12. - 127. General presumptions of high-voltage cables.

If the installation conditions vary from the presumed conditions manufacturers may give additional
information on how to correct the the current-carrying capacity to match the changed conditions.
Below is an example of the correction factors provided a manufacturer (Prysmian) for correcting the
current-carrying capacity.

© Arcteq Relays Ltd 168

AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

Figure. 5.3.12. - 128. Example of correction factors for the current-carrying capacity as given by a manufacturer.

169 © Arcteq Relays Ltd

 AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

To demonstrate the importance of the kSF (service factor, current-carrying capacity), let us calculate a
cable installation with the correct k factor but without setting it to correct value.

First we read the initial data for the setup of the thermal image:

A 66 kV copper cable with a cross-section of 500 mm2 is installed into ground. Its 1 s permissible
short-circuit current is 71.4 kA and its insulation is XLPE. The cable's screen circuit is open and the
laying formation is flat. Its current-carrying capacity is 575 A in 65 ̊C and 680 A in 90 ̊C. The
reference temperature for ground installation is 15 ̊C.

Let us calculate an estimation of the time constant τ based on the known one-second short-circuit
current related to In. If the manufacturer has not provided the time constant, it can be estimated from
the maximum permissable short-circuit current (usually a one second value). The function uses this
same method to estimate the heating time constant.

The rest of the settings are in the initial data text above:

• In = 680 A
• Tmax = 90 ̊C
• Tamb = 15 ̊C
• Tref = 15 ̊C
• kSF = 1.0.

© Arcteq Relays Ltd 170

AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

Figure. 5.3.12. - 129. Thermal image response with nominal load (installation according to presumptions).

As the results show, the end temperature of 68.39 ̊C is reached when the cable is loaded with a stable
current for time equalling five times the time constant τ. This uses approximately 71 % of the thermal
capacity. According to the datasheet, this current should set the temperature around 65 ̊C; therefore,
the model overprotects by three degrees.

171 © Arcteq Relays Ltd

 AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

Figure. 5.3.12. - 130. Thermal image response with maximum load (installation according presumptions).

The maximum allowed load results in the end temperature of 89.68 ̊C which means that 99.57 % of
the thermal capacity is used. This result matches the expectations of the thermal image perfectly. The
user can now securely set the cable's overheating alarm.

When comparing the result to the fully-tuned model in the application, let us include all of the
installation correction factors to the image.

A 66 kV copper cable with a cross-section of 500 mm2 is installed with no adjacent cables (k=1) into a
ground consisting of dry gravel and clay (k=0.85) and into the depth of 1.5 meters (k=0.95). The
cable's 1 s permissible short-circuit current is 71.4 kA and its insulation is XLPE. The cable's screen
circuit is open and the laying formation is flat. Its current-carrying capacity is 575 A in 65 ̊C and 680 A
in 90 ̊C. The reference temperature for ground installation is 15 ̊C. The cable's thermal time constant
is 183.8 min.

From this initial data one can calculate the kSF correction factor according to the following formula (k
factor related information in italics):

© Arcteq Relays Ltd 172

AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

Therefore, the settings are as follows:

• In = 680 A
• Tmax = 90 ̊C
• Tamb = 15 ̊C
• Tref = 15 ̊C
• τ = 183.8 min
• kSF = 0.81.

Figure. 5.3.12. - 131. Thermal image response with nominal currents and fine-tuned kSF correction factor.

When trying to load the cable with the nominal current one can see the actual current-carrying
capacity of the cable is much lower than in the presumptive conditions. A normal loading current can
now warm up the cable too much and threaten its withstandability. If the kSF had not been set, the
thermal image would show a temperature of appr. 68 ̊C instead of the real temperature of 96 ̊C.

173 © Arcteq Relays Ltd

 AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

Figure. 5.3.12. - 132. Thermal response with kSF factor correctly set.

When the installation conditions vary from the presumptive conditions, the cable's current-carrying
capacity can be reduced so that the temperature of 90 ̊C is achieved with a 550 A current instead of
the 680 A current given in the initial data.

Estimating trip time

Calcula
Calculatted e
effffectiv
ectivee nominal curr
current:
ent:

IN=kSF × tambfact × INom

Where:

• IN = calculated effective nominal current

• kSF = the service factor
• kamb = the ambient temperature factor
• INom = the nominal current of the protected device

Calcula
Calculatted end hea
heating:
ting:

© Arcteq Relays Ltd 174

AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

θEnd= (Imeas/IN )2

Where:

• Imeas = the measured current

• IN = the calculated effective nominal current

Calcula
Calculatted time constant:

τ=e(-0.005[s]×(Tc[min]×60)[s])

Where:

• e = Euler's number
• τc = the time constant set by the user
• 0.005s is the program cycle time

Calcula
Calculatted activ
activee thermal sta
stattus
us::

θCalc = ((θ-1 - θEnd )×τ) + θEnd

Where:

• θ-1 = previous cycle calculation result (integrating function needs the memory to operate)
• θEnd = the calculated end heating (dependent on the measured current)
• τ = the calculated time constant

The tripping time can be calculated based on these previous calculations according to the following
formula (the result in seconds). With this base information the tripping time can be calculated with the
formula above (in seconds) when replacing the θCalc with the value of the thermal level which from the
tripping time is wanted to be calculated (in per-unit value).

Function inputs and outputs

The blocking signal and the setting group selection control the operating characteristics of the function
during normal operation, i.e. the user or user-defined logic can change function parameters while the
function is running.

The outputs of the function are the TRIP and BLOCKED signals. The overvoltage function uses a total
of eight (8) separate setting groups which can be selected from one common source. Additionally, the
function's operating mode can be changed via the setting group selection.

The operational logic consists of the following:

• input magnitude processing

• thermal replica
• block signal check
• output processing.

The inputs for the function are the following:

175 © Arcteq Relays Ltd

 AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

• setting parameters
• measured and pre-processed current magnitudes.

The function's output signals can be used for direct I/O controlling and user logic programming. The
function generates general time-stamped ON/OFF events to the common event buffer from each of the
two (2) output signal. The time stamp resolution is 1 ms. The function also provides a resettable
cumulative counter for the TRIP, ALARM 1, ALARM 2, INHIBIT and BLOCKED events.

The following figure presents a simplified function block diagram of the line thermal overload
protection function.

Figure. 5.3.12. - 133. Simplified function block diagram of the TF> function.

Measured input
The function block uses analog phase current measurement values. The function block uses TRMS
values from the whole harmonic specter of 32 components.

Table. 5.3.12. - 115. Measurement inputs of the TF> function.

Signal Description Time base

IL1 TRMS TRMS measurement of phase L1 (A) current 5 ms

IL2 TRMS TRMS measurement of phase L2 (B) current 5 ms

IL3 TRMS TRMS measurement of phase L3 (C) current 5 ms

RTD Temperature measurement for the ambient correction 5 ms

Table. 5.3.12. - 116. General settings (not selectable under setting groups)

Name Range Step Default Description

0:
TF> Disabled 0: The selection of the function is activated or disabled in the configuration. By default
-
mode 1: Disabled it is not in use.
Activated

Temp C 0: C The selection of whether the temperature values of the thermal image and RTD
- 0: C
or F deg 1: F compensation are shown in Celsius or in Fahrenheit.

© Arcteq Relays Ltd 176

AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

Table. 5.3.12. - 117. Settings for thermal replica.

Name Range Step Default Description

IN thermal 0.01
0.10…40.00 1.00 x In The current for the 100 % thermal capacity to be used (the pick-up current in
cap x In
x In p.u., with tmax achieved in time τ x 5).
current

Set or
The selection of the time constant setting. If "Set" is selected, the Tau (t const)
Estimate 0: Set
- 0: Set setting is available and the time constant to be used can be set there. If
tau (t 1: Estimate
"Estimate" is selected, the cable's initial data parameters are visible.
const)

The time constant setting. This time constant is used for heating and cooling
Tau (t 0.1…500.0 0.1 10.0
of the protected object. This setting is visible if the "Set" is selected for
const) min min min
the "Set or Estimate tau" setting.

Max. perm.
OC. The maximum-rated short-circuit current of the protected object (cable).
1…1 000 75 000
current 1A Usually this value is presented as a one second value. This setting is visible if
000 A A
(norm "Estimate" is selected for the "Set or Estimate tau" setting.
**ik**1s)

Max. OC. The time of the maximum-rated short-circuit current of the protected object
time (norm 0.1…5 s 0.1 s 1.0 s (usually 1 s). This setting is visible if "Estimate" is selected for the "Set or
1 s) Estimate tau" setting.

The rated nominal current in the primary value of the protected object
Nominal 1…1 000
1A 700 A under nominal-rated conditions. This setting is visible if "Estimate" is selected
current 000 A
for the "Set or Estimate tau" setting.

191.3 The estimated result which is used for the thermal replica's time constant.
Estimated 0…1800 0.005 min After the previous three required parameters are set the IED will calculate this
tau min min (from value. This setting is visible if "Estimate" is selected for the "Set or Estimate
defaults) tau" setting.

kSF The service factor which corrects the value of the maximum allowed current
(service 0.01…5.00 0.01 1.00 according to installation and other conditions varying from the
factor) presumptive conditions.

The thermal image status in the restart of the function/ IED. The value is given
Cold reset in percentages of the used thermal capacity of the protected object. It is also
default 0.0…150.0 0.1 possible to reset the thermal element.
60.0 %
theta % %
This parameter can be used when testing the function to manually set the
current thermal cap to any value.

Table. 5.3.12. - 118. Environmental settings

Name Range Step Default Description

Object
max. 1 The maximum allowed temperature for the protected object. The default suits
0…500 deg 90 deg
temp. (tmax deg for Celsius range and for PEX-insulated cables.
= 100%)

0: Manual 0:
Ambient The selection of whether fixed or measured ambient temperature is used for
set - Manual
temp. sel. the thermal image biasing.
1: RTD set

The manual fixed ambient temperature setting for the thermal image biasing.
Man. amb. 1
0…500 deg 15 deg Underground cables usually use 15 °C. This setting is visible if "Manual set" is
temp. set. deg
selected for the "Ambient temp. sel." setting.

RTD amb.
1 The RTD ambient temperature reading for the thermal image biasing. This
temp. 0…500 deg 15 deg
deg setting is visible if "RTD" is selected for the "Ambient temp. sel." setting.
read.

The selection of how to correct the ambient temperature, either by internally

Ambient 0:
0: Linear est. calculated compensation based on end temperatures or by a user-settable
lin. or - Linear
1: Set curve curve. The default setting is "0: Linear est." which means the internally
curve est.
calculated correction for ambient temperature.

177 © Arcteq Relays Ltd

 AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

Name Range Step Default Description

The temperature reference setting. The manufacturer's temperature

Temp. presumptions apply and the thermal correction factor is 1.00 (rated
reference -60…500 1 temperature). For underground cables the set value for this is usually 15 ̊C
15 deg
(tref) deg deg and for cables in the air it is usually 25 ̊C.
kamb=1.0
This setting is visible if "Ambient lin. or curve" is set to "Linear est."

The maximum ambient temperature setting. If the measured temperature is

Max.
1 more than the maximum set temperature, the set correction factor for the
ambient 0…500 deg 45 deg
deg maximum temperature is used. This setting is visible if "Ambient lin. or curve"
temp.
is set to "Linear est."

k at max.
0.01…5.00 x 0.01 1.00 x The temperature correction factor for the maximum ambient temperature
amb.
In x In In setting. This setting is visible if "Ambient lin. or curve" is set to "Linear est."
temp.

The minimum ambient temperature setting. If the measured temperature is

Min.
-60…500 1 below the minimum set temperature, the set correction factor for minimum
ambient 0 deg
deg deg temperature is used. This setting is visible if "Ambient lin. or curve" is set to
temp.
"Linear est."

k at min.
0.01…5.00 x 0.01 1.00 x The temperature correction factor for the minimum ambient temperature
amb.
In x In In setting. This setting is visible if "Ambient lin. or curve" is set to "Linear est."
temp.

Amb. The temperature reference points for the user-settable ambient temperature
-50.0…500.0 0.1
temp. ref. 15 deg coefficient curve. This setting is visible if "Ambient lin. or curve" is set to "Set
deg deg
1...10 curve".

Amb. The coefficient value for the temperature reference point. The coefficient and
temp. 0.01…5.00 1.00 0.01 temperature reference points must be set as pairs. This setting is visible if
k1...k10 "Ambient lin. or curve" is set to "Set curve".

The selection of whether or not the curve temperature/coefficient pair is in

use. The minimum number to be set for the temperature/coefficient curve is
Add two pairs and the maximum is ten pairs. If the measured temperature is below
0: Not used 0: Not
curvepoint - the set minimum temperature reference or above the maximum set
1: Used used
3…10 temperature reference, the used temperature coefficient is the first or last
value in the set curve. This setting is visible if "Ambient lin. or curve" is set to
"Set curve".

Operation characteristics
The operating characteristics of the machine thermal overload protection function are completely
controlled by the thermal image. The thermal capacity value calculated from the thermal image can set
the I/O controls with ALARM 1, ALARM 2, INHIBIT and TRIP signals.

Table. 5.3.12. - 119. Pick-up settings.

Name Range Step Default Description

Enable 0:
0: Disabled
TF> - Disabled Enabling/disabling the ALARM 1 signal and the I/O.
1: Enabled
Alarm 1

TF>
0.1
Alarm 1 0.0…150.0 % 40 % ALARM 1 activation threshold.
%
level

Enable 0:
0: Disabled
TF> - Disabled Enabling/disabling the ALARM 2 signal and the I/O.
1: Enabled
Alarm 2

TF>
0.1
Alarm 2 0.0…150.0 % 40 % ALARM 2 activation threshold.
%
level

© Arcteq Relays Ltd 178

AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

Name Range Step Default Description

Enable
0:
TF> 0: Disabled
- Disabled Enabling/disabling the ALARM 1 signal and the I/O.
Rest 1: Enabled
Inhibit

TF>
0.1
Inhibit 0.0…150.0 % 80 % INHIBIT activation threshold.
%
level

0:
Enable 0: Disabled
- Disabled Enabling/disabling the ALARM 1 signal and the I/O.
TF> Trip 1: Enabled

TF> Trip 0.1

0.0…150.0 % 100 % TRIP activation threshold.
level %

The trip signal's additional delay. This delay delays the trip signal generation
TF> Trip 0.000…3600.000 0.005
0.000 s by a set time. The default setting is 0.000 s which does not give an added
delay s s
time delay for the trip signal.

The pick-up activation of the function is direct for all other signals except the TRIP signal which also
has a blocking check before the signal is generated.

Function blocking
The block signal is checked in the beginning of each program cycle. The blocking signal is received
from the blocking matrix in the function's dedicated input. If the blocking signal is not activated when
the pick-up element activates, a START signal is generated and the function proceeds to the time
characteristics calculation.

If the blocking signal is active when the pick-up element activates, a BLOCKED signal is generated and
the function does not process the situation further. If the START function has been activated before the
blocking signal, it resets and processes the release time characteristics similarly to when the pick-up
signal is reset.

The blocking of the function causes an HMI display event and a time-stamped blocking event with
information of the startup current values and its fault type to be issued.

The blocking signal can also be tested in the commissioning phase by a software switch signal when
the relay's testing mode "Enable stage forcing" is activated (General → Device).

The variables the user can set are binary signals from the system. The blocking signal needs to reach
the device minimum of 5 ms before the set operating delay has passed in order for the blocking to
activate in time.

Measurements and indications

The function outputs measured process data from the following magnitudes:

Table. 5.3.12. - 120. General status codes.

Name Range Description

0: Normal
1: Alarm 1
ON
2: Alarm 2
TF> The function's operating condition at the moment considering binary IO signal status. No outputs
ON
Condition are controlled when the status is "Normal".
3: Inhibit
ON
4: Trip ON
5: Blocked

179 © Arcteq Relays Ltd

 AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

Name Range Description

0: Light /
No load
The function's thermal image status. When the measured current is below 1 % of the nominal
1: High
current, the status "Light/No load" is shown. When the measured current is below the trip limit,
Thermal overload
the status "Load normal" is shown. When the measured current is above the pick-up limit but below
status 2:
2 x In , the status "Overloading" is shown. When the measured current is above 2 x In, the status
Overloading
"High overload" is shown.
3: Load
normal

0: SF
setting ok
TF> 1: Service
Indicates if SF setting has been set wrong and the actually used setting is 1.0. Visible only when
Setting factor set
there is a setting fault.
alarm fault.
Override to
1.0

0: Ambient
setting ok
TF>
1: Ambient Indicates if ambient temperature settings have been set wrong and actually used setting is 1.0.
Setting
t set fault. Visible only when there is a setting fault.
alarm
Override to
1.0

0: Nominal
current calc
ok
TF>
1: Nominal Indicates if nominal current calculation is set wrong and actually used setting is 1.0. Visible only
Setting
current set when there is a setting fault.
alarm
fault.
Override to
1.0

0: Ambient
setting ok
TF>
1:
Setting Indicates if ambient k setting has been set wrong. Visible only when there is a setting fault.
Inconsistent
alarm
setting of
ambient k

Table. 5.3.12. - 121. Measurements.

Name Range Description/values

0: Primary A
The active phase current measurement from IL1 (A), IL2 (B) and IL3 (C) phases in given
Currents 1: Secondary A
scalings.
2: Per unit

- TF> Trip expect mode: No trip expected/Trip expected

- TF> Time to 100 % theta: Time to reach the 100 % thermal cap
- TF> Rreference T curr.: reference/pick-up value (IEQ)
0: Thermal image
- TF> Active meas. curr.: the measured maximum TRMS current at a given moment
calc.
- TF> T est. with act. curr.: estimation of the used thermal capacity including the current at
a given moment
Thermal - TF> T at a given moment: the thermal capacity used at that moment
image
- TF> Used k for amb. temp: the ambient correction factor at a givenmoment
- TF> Max. temp. rise all.: the maximum allowed temperature rise
- TF> Temp. rise atm: the calculated temperature rise at a given moment
1: Temp. estimates
- TF> Hot spot estimate: the estimated hot spot temperature including the ambient
temperature
- TF> Hot spot max. all.: the maximum allowed temperature for the object

© Arcteq Relays Ltd 180

AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

Name Range Description/values

- TF> Trip delay remaining: the time to reach 100% theta

- TF> Trip time to rel.: the time to reach theta while staying below the trip limit during
cooling
- TF> Alarm 1 time to rel.: the time to reach theta while staying below the Alarm 1 limit
2: Timing status during cooling
- TF> Alarm 2 time to rel.: the time to reach theta while staying below the Alarm 2 limit
during cooling
- TF> Inhibit time to rel.: the time to reach theta while staying below the Inhibit limit during
cooling

Table. 5.3.12. - 122. Counters.

Name Description / values

Alarm1 inits The number of times the function has activated the Alarm 1 output

Alarm2 inits The number of times the function has activated the Alarm 2 output

Restart inhibits The number of times the function has activated the Restart inhibit output

Trips The number of times the function has tripped

Trips Blocked The number of times the function trips has been blocked

Events and registers

The line thermal overload protection function (abbreviated "TOLF" in event block names) generates
events and registers from the status changes in TRIP and BLOCKED signals. The user can select
which event messages are stored in the main event buffer: ON, OFF, or both.

The events triggered by the function are recorded with a time stamp and with process data values.

Table. 5.3.12. - 123. Event codes.

Event number Event channel Event block name Event code Description

4288 67 TOLF1 0 Alarm1 ON

4289 67 TOLF1 1 Alarm1 OFF

4290 67 TOLF1 2 Alarm2 ON

4291 67 TOLF1 3 Alarm2 OFF

4292 67 TOLF1 4 Inhibit ON

4293 67 TOLF1 5 Inhibit OFF

4294 67 TOLF1 6 Trip ON

4295 67 TOLF1 7 Trip OFF

4296 67 TOLF1 8 Block ON

4297 67 TOLF1 9 Block OFF

The function registers its operation into the last twelve (12) time-stamped registers. The register of the
function records the ON event process data for TRIP or BLOCKED. The table below presents the
structure of the function's register content.

Table. 5.3.12. - 124. Register content.

Name Description

Date and time dd.mm.yyyy hh:mm:ss.mss

181 © Arcteq Relays Ltd

 AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

Name Description

Event code 4288-4297 Descr.

Time to reach 100 % theta seconds

Ref. T current x In

Active meas. current x In

T at a given moment %

Max. temp. rise allowed degrees

Temp. rise at a given moment degrees

Hot spot estimate degrees

Hot spot maximum allowed degrees

Trip delay rem. seconds

Used SG Setting group 1...8 active

5.3.13. Voltage memory

Certain protection functions (such as impedance or directional overcurrent) use the relay's measured
current and voltage to determine whether the electrical network fault appears to be inside the
protected area. The determination is made by comparing the angle between the operating quantity
(zone/tripping area) and the actual measured quantity. The function then produces an output when the
required terms are met.

In close-in faults the system voltage on the secondary side may fall down to a few volts or close to
nothing. In such cases, when the measured voltage is absent, the fault direction cannot be solved. As
backup, non-directional protection can be used for tripping, but in such cases the selectivity of the
network will reduce. However, an angle memory for voltage can be used to prevent this from
happening. An adjustable voltage level with pre-fault voltage angles can be used as a reference for
fault direction and/or distance. The reference can be set manually for duration. Thanks to the
configurable voltage memory even time-delayed backup tripping can be initiated.

The user can activate voltage memory (and find all related settings) by following this path in relay
settings: Measurement → Transformers → VT Module (3U/4U) 1 → Voltage memory
("Activated"/"Disabled").

The activation of voltage memory depends of following criteria:

1. All used line-to-line or line-to-neutral voltages need to be below the set value for the "VMEM
activation voltage" parameter.
2. At least one phase current must be above the set value for the "Measured current condition
3I>" parameter. This setting limit is optional.

© Arcteq Relays Ltd 182

AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

Figure. 5.3.13. - 134. Distance protection characteristics and directional overcurrent.

Voltage memory activates when the above-mentioned criteria are met. Voltage memory uses
the "VMEM activation voltage" parameter as voltage amplitude even when the actual measured voltage
has decreased below it or close to zero. The angle used by this function is the one captured
the moment before the fault occurred and voltage memory was activated. When voltage memory is
activate, the output "Voltage memory on" signal is activated. This signal can be found in the device's I/O
matrix.

While voltage memory is active, voltages are absent and therefore angle measurement is not possible.
Healthy state angles (before a fault) are used during a fault. This is why a drift between the assumed
voltage angle and the actual measured phase current angle takes place. While voltage memory is
used, the angle of phase currents drifts approximately one degree for each passing second (see the
graph below).

Figure. 5.3.13. - 135. Voltage angle drift.

The blocking signal for voltage memory can be found among other stage-related settings in the tab VT
Module (3U/4U) 1. The blocking signal is checked in the beginning of each program cycle.

183 © Arcteq Relays Ltd

 AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

Measured input
The function block uses analog voltage and current measurements' RMS values.

Table. 5.3.13. - 125. Measurement inputs of the voltage memory function.

Signal Description Time base

IL1RMS RMS measurement of phase L1 (A) current 5 ms

IL2RMS RMS measurement of phase L2 (B) current 5 ms

IL3RMS RMS measurement of phase L3 (C) current 5 ms

U1RMS RMS measurement of voltage U1/V 5 ms

U2RMS RMS measurement of voltage U2/V 5 ms

U3RMS RMS measurement of voltage U3/V 5 ms

U4RMS RMS measurement of voltage U4/V 5 ms

Voltage measurement modes 3LN and 3LL use three voltage inputs: channels UA, UB and UC. When
the voltage mode is set to 2LL, only two channels (UA and UB) are in use, and the memory is based on
the line-to-line voltages U12 and U32. When the mode 2LL+U0 is used, the memory is based on
calculated phase-to-neutral voltages.

Pick-up
VMEM activ
activaation vvolta
oltage
ge and Mea
Measur
sured
ed curr
current
ent condition 3I>

When the voltage memory function is enabled, it activates when all line voltages drop below the "VMEM
activation voltage" threshold limit. This limit can be set to be anything between 2...50 V AC. When
"Measured current condition 3I>" is used, activation cannot be based on just the voltage. Therefore, at
least one of the three-phase currents must also rise above the set current pick-up setting.

VMEM ma
maxx activ
activee time

Voltage memory can be active for a specific period of time, set in "VMAX active time". It can be
anything between 0.02...50.00 seconds. The function supports the definite time (DT) delay type. It
depends on the application for how long the memory should be used. During massive bolted faults, the
fault should be cleared and the breaker opened as soon as possible; therefore, a short operating time
for voltage memory is usually applied. A typical delay for voltage memory is between 0.5...1.0 s. When
the operating time passes and voltage memory is no longer used, directional overcurrent and/or
distance protection goes to the unidirectional mode to secure a safe tripping. The memory uses longer
operating times when a backup protection is applied (e.g. in distance-protection zones are
farther away).

For
orced
ced C
CTT f track
tracking
ing on VMEM

While fixed frequency tracking is used, all protection stage-based sampling (apart from frequency
protection) is based on a set fixed frequency such as 50 Hz or 60 Hz. When the frequency drops
massively during a fault while angle memory is in use, it is also possible that the frequency of the
system starts to fluctuate. In such cases, if current sampling of used protection stages is based on 50/
60 Hz, there could be an error in current magnitude and in angle measurement. To minimize these
errors, it is recommended that the frequency is measured and protection-based sampling from the
current is performed while voltages are gone.

When the "Forced CT f tracking" parameter is activated and voltages are gone, the frequency from the
selected current-based reference channel 3 (the current from IL3) is used for current sampling. This
eliminates any possible measurement errors in the fixed frequency mode.

© Arcteq Relays Ltd 184

AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

Figure. 5.3.13. - 136. Frequency reference channels.

For example, let us say a 500 A current is measured on the primary side while the fixed frequency is set
to 50 Hz. This results in the frequency dropping to 46 Hz, while the actual current measurement would
be 460 A. Therefore, the system would have an error of 40 A.

Events
The voltage memory function (abbreviated "M1VT" in event block names) generates events from the
status changes in various activities. The user can select which event messages are stored in the main
event buffer: ON, OFF, or both.

Table. 5.3.13. - 126. Event codes.

Event number Event channel Event block name Event code Description

12160 190 M1VT1 0 Voltage memory enabled

12161 190 M1VT1 1 Voltage memory disabled

12162 190 M1VT1 2 Voltage low detected ON

12163 190 M1VT1 3 Voltage low detected OFF

12164 190 M1VT1 4 Current high detected ON

12165 190 M1VT1 5 Current high detected OFF

12166 190 M1VT1 6 Frequency tracked from CT ON

12167 190 M1VT1 7 Frequency tracked from CT OFF

12168 190 M1VT1 8 Using Voltage memory ON

12169 190 M1VT1 9 Using Voltage memory OFF

12170 190 M1VT1 10 Voltage memory blocked ON

12171 190 M1VT1 11 Voltage memory blocked OFF

5.3.14. Arc fault protection (IArc>/I0Arc>; 50Arc/50NArc)

Arc faults occur for a multitude of reasons: e.g. insulation failure, incorrect operation of the protected
device, corrosion, overvoltage, dirt, moisture, incorrect wiring, or even because of aging caused by
electric load. It is important to detect the arc as fast as possible in order to minimize its effects. Using
arc sensors to detect arc faults is much faster than merely measuring currents and voltages. In busbar
protection IEDs with normal protection can be too slow to disconnect arcs within a safe time frame. For
example, it may be necessary to delay operation time for hundreds of milliseconds when setting up an
overcurrent protection relay to control the feeder breakers to achieve selectivity. This delay can be
avoided by using arc protection. The arc protection card has a high-speed output to trip signals faster
as well as to extend the speed of arc protection.

185 © Arcteq Relays Ltd

 AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

Figure. 5.3.14. - 137. IED equipped with arc protection.

The arc protection card has four (4) sensor channels, and up to three (3) arc point sensors can be
connected to each channel. The sensor channels support Arcteq AQ-01 (light sensing) and
AQ-02 (pressure and light sensing) units. Optionally, the protection function can also be applied with a
phase current or a residual current condition: the function trips only if the light and overcurrent
conditions are met.

The outputs of the function are the following:

• Light In
• Pressure In
• Arc binary input signal status
• Zone trip
• Zone blocked
• Sensor fault signals.

The arc protection function uses a total of eight (8) separate setting groups which can be selected from
one common source.

Table. 5.3.14. - 127. Output signals of the IArc>/I0Arc> function.

Outputs Activation condition

Channel 1 Light In
Channel 2 Light In
The arc protection card's sensor channel detects light.
Channel 3 Light In
Channel 4 Light In

Channel 1 Pressure In
Channel 2 Pressure In
The arc protection card's sensor channel detects pressure.
Channel 3 Pressure In
Channel 4 Pressure In

ARC Binary input signal The arc protection card's binary input is energized.

© Arcteq Relays Ltd 186

AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

Outputs Activation condition

I/I0 Arc> Ph. curr.

START
The measured phase current or the residual current is over the set limit.
I/I0 Arc> Res. curr.
START

I/I0 Arc> Ph. curr.

BLOCKED
The phase current or the residual current measurement is blocked by an input.
I/I0 Arc> Res. curr.
BLOCKED

I/I0 Arc> Zone 1 TRIP

I/I0 Arc> Zone 2 TRIP
All required conditions for tripping the zone are met (light OR light and current).
I/I0 Arc> Zone 3 TRIP
I/I0 Arc> Zone 4 TRIP

I/I0 Arc> Zone 1

BLOCKED
I/I0 Arc> Zone 2
BLOCKED All required conditions for tripping the zone are met (light OR light and current) but the tripping is
I/I0 Arc> Zone 3 blocked by an input.
BLOCKED
I/I0 Arc> Zone 4
BLOCKED

I/I0 Arc> S1 Sensor fault

I/I0 Arc> S2 Sensor fault
The detected number of sensors in the channel does not match the settings.
I/I0 Arc> S3 Sensor fault
I/I0 Arc> S4 Sensor fault

The number of connected AQ-100 series units does not match the number of units set in the
I/I0 Arc> IO unit fault
settings.

The operational logic consists of the following:

• input magnitude selection

• input magnitude processing
• threshold comparator
• two block signal checks
• output processing.

The inputs for the function are the following:

• operating mode selections

• setting parameters
• digital inputs and logic signals
• measured and pre-processed current magnitudes.

The function outputs the TRIP, BLOCKED, light sensing etc. signals which can be used for direct I/O
controlling and user logic programming. The function generates general time-stamped ON/OFF events
to the common event buffer from each of the 26 output signals. The time stamp resolution is 1 ms. The
function also a resettable cumulative counter for the TRIP and BLOCKED events for each zone.

Example of scheme setting

The following examples helps the user better understand how the arc protection function is set. In the
examples AQ-101 models are used to extend the protection of Zone 2 and to protect each outgoing
feeder (Zone 3).

Scheme IA1 is a single-line diagram with AQ-2xx series relays and with AQ-101 arc protection relays.
The settings are for an incomer AQ-200 relay.

187 © Arcteq Relays Ltd

 AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

Figure. 5.3.14. - 138. Scheme IA1 (with AQ-101 arc protection relays).

To set the zones for the AQ-2xx models sensor channels start by enabling the protected zones (in this
case, Zones 1 and 2). Then define which sensor channels are sensing which zones (in this case,
sensor channels S1 and S2 are protecting Zone 1). Enable Light 1 of Zone 1 as well as Light 2 of Zone
2. The sensor channel S3 deals with Zone 2. Enable Light 3 of Zone 2. The high-speed output contacts
HSO1 and HSO2 have been set to send overcurrent and master trip signals to the AQ-101 arc
protection relays. The AQ-100 series units send out test pulses in specific intervals to check the health
of the wiring between the AQ-100 series units. The parameter I/I0 Arc> Self supervision test pulse
should be activated when connecting the AQ-100 series units to the AQ-200 series arc protection card
to prevent the pulses from activating ArcBI1.

The next example is almost like the previous one: it is also a single-line diagram with AQ-2xx series
relays. However, this time each outgoing feeder has an AQ-2xx protection relay instead of an AQ-101
arc protection relay.

© Arcteq Relays Ltd 188

AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

Figure. 5.3.14. - 139. Scheme IA1 (with AQ-200 protection relays).

The settings for the relay supervising the incoming feeder are the same as in the first example. The
relays supervising the busbar and the outgoing feeder, however, have a different setting. Both Zones 2
and 3 need to be enabled as there are sensors connected to both Zone 2 and 3 starts. Sensors
connected to the channel S3 are in Zone 2. Then enable Light 3 of Zone 2. The sensor connected to
the channel S2 is in Zone 3. Then enable Light 2 of Zone 3.

If any of the channels have a pressure sensing sensor, enable it the same way as the regular light
sensors. If either phase overcurrent or residual overcurrent is needed for the tripping decision, they can
be enabled in the same way as light sensors in the zone. When a current channel is enabled, the
measured current needs to be above the set current limit in addition to light sensing.

Measured input
Arc protection uses samples based on current measurements. If the required number of samples is
found to be above the setting limit, the current condition activates. The arc protection can alternatively
use either phase currents or residual currents in the tripping decision.

189 © Arcteq Relays Ltd

 AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

Pick-up
The pick-up of each zone of the Iarc>/I0arc> function is controlled by one of the following: the phase
current pick-up setting, the residual current pick-up setting, or the sensor channels. The pick-up
setting depends on which of these are activated in the zone.

Table. 5.3.14. - 128. Enabled Zone pick-up settings.

Name Description

Phase current pick-up The phase current measurement's pick-up value (in p.u.).

I0 input selection Selects the residual current channel (I01 or I02).

Res.current pick-up The residual current measurement's pick-up value (in p.u.).

Zone Ph. curr. Enabled The phase overcurrent allows the zone to trip when light is detected.

Zone Res. curr. Enabled The residual overcurrent allows the zone to trip when light is detected.

Zone Light 1 Enabled Light detected in sensor channel 1 trips the zone.

Zone Light 2 Enabled Light detected in sensor channel 2 trips the zone.

Zone Light 3 Enabled Light detected in sensor channel 3 trips the zone.

Zone Light 4 Enabled Light detected in sensor channel 4 trips the zone.

Zone Pres. 1 Enabled Pressure detected in sensor channel 1 trips the zone.

Zone Pres. 2 Enabled Pressure detected in sensor channel 2 trips the zone.

Zone Pres. 3 Enabled Pressure detected in sensor channel 3 trips the zone.

Zone Pres. 4 Enabled Pressure detected in sensor channel 4 trips the zone.

The pick-up activation of the function is not directly equal to the TRIP signal generation of the function.
The TRIP signal is allowed if the blocking condition is not active.

Function blocking
The block signal is checked in the beginning of each program cycle. The blocking signal is received
from the blocking matrix in the function's dedicated input. If the blocking signal is not activated when
the pick-up element activates, a TRIP signal is generated.

If the blocking signal is active when the pick-up element activates, a BLOCKED signal is generated and
the function does not process the situation further.

The blocking of the function causes an HMI display event and a time-stamped blocking event with
information of the startup current values and its fault type to be issued.

The blocking signal can also be tested in the commissioning phase by a software switch signal when
the relay's testing mode "Enable stage forcing" is activated (General → Device).

The variables the user can set are binary signals from the system. The blocking signal needs to reach
the device minimum of 5 ms before the set operating delay has passed in order for the blocking to
activate in time.

Events and registers

The arc fault protection function (abbreviated "ARC" in event block names) generates events and
registers from the status changes in START, TRIP, and BLOCKED. The user can select which event
messages are stored in the main event buffer: ON, OFF, or both.

The events triggered by the function are recorded with a time stamp and with process data values.

© Arcteq Relays Ltd 190

AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

Table. 5.3.14. - 129. Event codes.

Event number Event channel Event block name Event code Description

4736 74 ARC1 0 Zone 1 Trip ON

4737 74 ARC1 1 Zone 1 Trip OFF

4738 74 ARC1 2 Zone 1 Block ON

4739 74 ARC1 3 Zone 1 Block OFF

4740 74 ARC1 4 Zone 2 Trip ON

4741 74 ARC1 5 Zone 2 Trip OFF

4742 74 ARC1 6 Zone 2 Block ON

4743 74 ARC1 7 Zone 2 Block OFF

4744 74 ARC1 8 Zone 3 Trip ON

4745 74 ARC1 9 Zone 3 Trip OFF

4746 74 ARC1 10 Zone 3 Block ON

4747 74 ARC1 11 Zone 3 Block OFF

4748 74 ARC1 12 Zone 4 Trip ON

4749 74 ARC1 13 Zone 4 Trip OFF

4750 74 ARC1 14 Zone 4 Block ON

4751 74 ARC1 15 Zone 4 Block OFF

4752 74 ARC1 16 Phase current Blocked ON

4753 74 ARC1 17 Phase current Blocked OFF

4754 74 ARC1 18 Phase current Start ON

4755 74 ARC1 19 Phase current Start OFF

4756 74 ARC1 20 Residual current Blocked ON

4757 74 ARC1 21 Residual current Blocked OFF

4758 74 ARC1 22 Residual current Start ON

4759 74 ARC1 23 Residual current Start OFF

4760 74 ARC1 24 Channel 1 Light ON

4761 74 ARC1 25 Channel 1 Light OFF

4762 74 ARC1 26 Channel 1 Pressure ON

4763 74 ARC1 27 Channel 1 Pressure OFF

4764 74 ARC1 28 Channel 2 Light ON

4765 74 ARC1 29 Channel 2 Light OFF

4766 74 ARC1 30 Channel 2 Pressure ON

4767 74 ARC1 31 Channel 2 Pressure OFF

4768 74 ARC1 32 Channel 3 Light ON

4769 74 ARC1 33 Channel 3 Light OFF

4770 74 ARC1 34 Channel 3 Pressure ON

4771 74 ARC1 35 Channel 3 Pressure OFF

4772 74 ARC1 36 Channel 4 Light ON

191 © Arcteq Relays Ltd

 AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

Event number Event channel Event block name Event code Description

4773 74 ARC1 37 Channel 4 Light OFF

4774 74 ARC1 38 Channel 4 Pressure ON

4775 74 ARC1 39 Channel 4 Pressure OFF

4776 74 ARC1 40 DI Signal ON

4777 74 ARC1 41 DI Signal OFF

4778 74 ARC1 42 I/I0 Arc> Sensor 1 Fault ON

4779 74 ARC1 43 I/I0 Arc> Sensor 1 Fault OFF

4780 74 ARC1 44 I/I0 Arc> Sensor 2 Fault ON

4781 74 ARC1 45 I/I0 Arc> Sensor 2 Fault OFF

4782 74 ARC1 46 I/I0 Arc> Sensor 3 Fault ON

4783 74 ARC1 47 I/I0 Arc> Sensor 3 Fault OFF

4784 74 ARC1 48 I/I0 Arc> Sensor 4 Fault ON

4785 74 ARC1 49 I/I0 Arc> Sensor 4 Fault OFF

4786 74 ARC1 50 I/I0 Arc> I/O-unit Fault ON

4787 74 ARC1 51 I/I0 Arc> I/O-unit Fault OFF

The function registers its operation into the last twelve (12) time-stamped registers. The table below
presents the structure of the function's register content.

Table. 5.3.14. - 130. Register content.

Event Phase A Phase B Phase C Residual Active

Date and time Used SG
code current current current current sensors

dd.mm.yyyy 4736-4787 Trip -20 ms Trip -20 ms Trip -20 ms Trip -20 ms Setting group
1...4
hh:mm:ss.mss Descr. averages averages averages averages 1...8 active

5.3.15. Programmable stage (PGx>/<; 99)

The programmable stage is a stage that the user can program to create more advanced applications,
either as an individual stage or together with programmable logic. The relay has ten programmable
stages, and each can be set to follow one to three analog measurements. The programmable stages
have three available pick up terms options: overX, underX and rate-of-change of the selected signal.
Each stage includes a definite time delay to trip after a pick-up has been triggered.

The programmable stage cycle time is 5 ms. The pick-up delay depends on which analog signal is
used as well as its refresh rate (typically under a cycle in a 50 Hz system).

The number of programmable stages to be used is set in the INFO tab. When this function has been
set as "Activated", the number of programmable stages can be set anywhere between one (1) and ten
(10) depending on how many the application needs. In the image below, the number of programmable
stages have been set to two which makes PS1 and PS2 to appear. Inactive stages are hidden until they
are activated.

© Arcteq Relays Ltd 192

AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

Please note that setting the number of available stages does not activate those stages, as they also
need to be enabled individually with the PSx >/< Enabled parameter. When enabled an active
stage shows its current state (condition), the expected operating time and the time remaining to trip
under the activation parameters. If a stage is not active the PSx>/< condition parameter will merely
display “Disabled”.

Setting up programmable stages

Programmable stages can be set to follow one, two or three analog measurements with the PSx >/<
Measurement setting parameter. The user must choose a measurement signal value to be compared
to the set value, and possibly also set a scaling for the signal. The image below is an example
of scaling: a primary neutral voltage has been scaled to a percentage value for easier handling when
setting up the comparator.

The scaling factor was calculated by taking the inverse value of a 20 kV system:

When this multiplier is in use, the full earth fault neutral voltage is 11 547 V primary which is
then multiplied with the above-calculated scaling factor, inversing the final result to 100%. This way a
pre-processed signal is easier to set, although it is also possible to just use the scaling factor of 1.0 and
set the desired pick-up limit as the primary voltage. Similaryly, any chosen measurement value can be
scaled to the desired form.

193 © Arcteq Relays Ltd

 AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

When two or three signals are chosen for comparison, an additional signal (PSx Magnitude handling)
setting appears. From its drop-down menu the user chooses how the signals are pre-processed for
comparison. The table below presents the available modes for a two-signal comparison.

Mode Description

0: Mag1 x Mag2 Multiplies Signal 1 by Signal 2. The comparison uses the product of this calculation.

1: Mag1 / Mag2 Divides Signal 1 by Signal 2. The comparison uses the product of this calculation.

2: Max (Mag1,
The bigger value of the chosen signals is used in the comparison.
Mag2)

3: Min (Mag1,
The smaller value of the chosen signals is used in the comparison.
Mag2)

Either of the chosen signals has to fulfill the pick-up condition. Both signals have their own pick-up
4: Mag1 OR Mag2
setting.

Both of the chosen signals have to fulfill the pick-up condition. Both signals have their own pick-up
5: Mag1 AND Mag2
setting.

6: Mag1 – Mag2 Subtracts Signal 2 from Signal 1. The comparison uses the product of this calculation.

The image below is an example of setting an analog comparison with two signals. The stage will trip if
either of the measured signals fulfills the comparison condition.

© Arcteq Relays Ltd 194

AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

Similarly, the user can set up a comparison of three values. The table below presents the available
modes for a three-signal comparison.

Mode Description

0: Mag1 x Mag2 x Mag3 Multiplies Signals 1, 2 and 3. The comparison uses the product of this calculation.

1: Max (Mag1, Mag2, Mag3); The biggest value of the chosen signals is used in the comparison.

2: Min (Mag1, Mag2, Mag3) The smallest value of the chosen signals is used in the comparison.

3: Mag1 OR Mag2 OR Mag3 Any of the signals fulfills the pick-up condition. Each signal has their own pick-up setting.

4: Mag1 AND Mag2 AND All of the signals need to fulfill the pick-up condition. Each signal has their own pick-up
Mag3 setting.

5: (Mag1 OR Mag2) AND Signals 1 OR 2 AND 3 need to fulfill the pick-up condition. Each signal has their own pick-up
Mag3 setting.

The image below is an example of setting an analog comparison with three signals. The stage will trip if
Signal 1 or Signal 2 as well as Signal 3 fulfill the pick-up condition.

195 © Arcteq Relays Ltd

 AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

The settings for different comparisons are in the setting groups. This means that each signal parameter
can be changed by changing the setting group.

When setting the comparators, the user must first choose a comparator mode. The following modes
are available:

Mode Description

0: Over
Grea
eatter than
than. If the measured signal is greater than the set pick-up level, the comparison condition is fulfilled.
>

1: Over Grea
eatter than ((absol
absolut
ute
e). If the absolute value of the measured signal is greater than the set pick-up level, the
(abs) > comparison condition is fulfilled.

© Arcteq Relays Ltd 196

AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

Mode Description

Less than
than. If the measured signal is less than the set pick-up level, the comparison condition is fulfilled. The user
2:
can also set a blocking limit: the comparison is not active when the measured value is less than the set blocking
Under <
limit.

3: Less than ((absol

absolut ute
e). If the absolute value of the measured signal is less than the set pick-up level, the comparison
Under condition is fulfilled. The user can also set a blocking limit: the comparison is not active when the measured value is
(abs) < less than the set blocking limit.

4: Delta
Rela
elativ
tive
e change o
ovver time
time. If the measured signal changes more than the set relative pick-up value in 20 ms, the
set (%)
comparison condition is fulfilled. The condition is dependent on direction.
+/- >

5: Delta
Rela
elativ
tive
e change oovver time ((absol
absolut
ute
e). If the measured signal changes more than the set relative pick-up value in 20
abs (%)
ms in either direction, the comparison condition is fulfilled. The condition is not dependent on direction.
>

6: Delta
Change o ovver time
time. If the measured signal changes more than the set pick-up value in 20 ms, the comparison
+/-
condition is fulfilled. The condition is dependent on direction.
measval

7: Delta
Change o ovver time ((absol
absolut
ute
e). If the measured signal changes more than the set pick-up value in 20 ms in either
abs
direction, the comparison condition is fulfilled. The condition is not dependent on direction.
measval

The pick-up level is set individually for each comparison. When setting up the pick-up level, the user
needs to take into account the modes in use as well as the desired action. The pick-up limit can be
set either as positive or as negative. Each pick-up level has a separate hysteresis setting which is 3 %
by default.

The user can set the operating and releasing time delays for each stage.

Analog signals
The numerous analog signals have been divided into categories to help the user find the desired value.

Curr
Currents
ents

IL1 Description

IL1 ff (p.u.) IL1 Fundamental frequency RMS value (in p.u.)

IL1 2nd h. IL1 2nd harmonic value (in p.u.)

IL1 3rd h. IL1 3rd harmonic value (in p.u.)

IL1 4th h. IL1 4th harmonic value (in p.u.)

IL1 5th h. IL1 5th harmonic value (in p.u.)

IL1 7th h. IL1 7th harmonic value (in p.u.)

IL1 9th h. IL1 9th harmonic value (in p.u.)

IL1 11th h. IL1 11th harmonic value (in p.u.)

IL1 13th h. IL1 13th harmonic value (in p.u.)

IL1 15th h. IL1 15th harmonic value (in p.u.)

IL1 17th h. IL1 17th harmonic value (in p.u.)

IL1 19th h. IL1 19th harmonic value (in p.u.)

IL2 Description

IL2 ff (p.u.) IL2 Fundamental frequency RMS value (in p.u.)

197 © Arcteq Relays Ltd

 AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

IL1 Description

IL2 2nd h. IL2 2nd harmonic value (in p.u.)

IL2 3rd h. IL2 3rd harmonic value (in p.u.)

IL2 4th h. IL2 4th harmonic value (in p.u.)

IL2 5th h. IL2 5th harmonic value (in p.u.)

IL2 7th h. IL2 7th harmonic value (in p.u.)

IL2 9th h. IL2 9th harmonic value (in p.u.)

IL2 11th h. IL2 11th harmonic value (in p.u.)

IL2 13th h. IL2 13th harmonic value (in p.u.)

IL2 15th h. IL2 15th harmonic value (in p.u.)

IL2 17th h. IL2 17th harmonic value (in p.u.)

IL2 19th h. IL2 19th harmonic value (in p.u.)

IL3 Description

IL3 ff (p.u.) IL3 Fundamental frequency RMS value (in p.u.)

IL3 2nd h. IL3 2nd harmonic value (in p.u.)

IL3 3rd h. IL3 3rd harmonic value (in p.u.)

IL3 4th h. IL3 4th harmonic value (in p.u.)

IL3 5th h. IL3 5th harmonic value (in p.u.)

IL3 7th h. IL3 7th harmonic value (in p.u.)

IL3 9th h. IL3 9th harmonic value (in p.u.)

IL3 11th h. IL3 11th harmonic value (in p.u.)

IL3 13th h. IL3 13th harmonic value (in p.u.)

IL3 15th h. IL3 15th harmonic value (in p.u.)

IL3 17th h. IL3 17th harmonic value (in p.u.)

IL3 19th h. IL3 19th harmonic value (in p.u.)

I01 Description

I01 ff (p.u.) I01 Fundamental frequency RMS value (in p.u.)

I01 2nd h. I01 2nd harmonic value (in p.u.)

I01 3rd h. I01 3rd harmonic value (in p.u.)

I01 4th h. I01 4th harmonic value (in p.u.)

I01 5th h. I01 5th harmonic value (in p.u.)

I01 7th h. I01 7th harmonic value (in p.u.)

I01 9th h. I01 9th harmonic value (in p.u.)

I01 11th h. I01 11th harmonic value (in p.u.)

I01 13th h. I01 13th harmonic value (in p.u.)

© Arcteq Relays Ltd 198

AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

IL1 Description

I01 15th h. I01 15th harmonic value (in p.u.)

I01 17th h. I01 17th harmonic value (in p.u.)

I01 19th h. I01 19th harmonic value (in p.u.)

IL02 Description

I02 ff (p.u.) I02 Fundamental frequency RMS value (in p.u.)

I02 2nd h. I02 2nd harmonic value (in p.u.)

I02 3rd h. I02 3rd harmonic value (in p.u.)

I02 4th h. I02 4th harmonic value (in p.u.)

I02 5th h. I02 5th harmonic value (in p.u.)

I02 7th h. I02 7th harmonic value (in p.u.)

I02 9th h. I02 9th harmonic value (in p.u.)

I02 11th h. I02 11th harmonic value (in p.u.)

I02 13th h. I02 13th harmonic value (in p.u.)

I02 15th h. I02 15th harmonic value (in p.u.)

I02 17th h. I02 17th harmonic value (in p.u.)

I02 19th h. I02 19th harmonic value (in p.u.)

TRMS Description

IL1 TRMS IL1 TRMS value (in p.u.)

IL2 TRMS IL2 TRMS value (in p.u.)

IL3 TRMS IL3 TRMS value (in p.u.)

I01 TRMS I01 TRMS value (in p.u.)

I02 TRMS I02 TRMS value (in p.u.)

Calculated Description

I0Z Mag Zero sequence current value (in p.u.)

I0CALC Mag Calculated I0 value (in p.u.)

I1 Mag Positive sequence current value (in p.u.)

I2 Mag Negative sequence current value (in p.u.)

IL1 Ang IL1 angle of current

IL2 Ang IL2 angle of current

IL3 Ang IL3 angle of current

I01 Ang I01 angle of current

I02 Ang I02 angle of current

I0CALC Ang Angle of calculated residual current

I1 Ang Angle of positive sequence current

I2 Ang Angle of negative sequence current

I01ResP I01 primary current of a current-resistive component

199 © Arcteq Relays Ltd

 AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

IL1 Description

I01CapP I01 primary current of a current-capacitive component

I01ResS I01 secondary current of a current-resistive component

I01CapS I01 secondary current of a current-capacitive component

I02ResP I02 primary current of a current-resistive component

I02CapP I02 primary current of a current-capacitive component

Volta
oltages
ges

Phase-to-phase voltages Description

UL12Mag UL12 Primary voltage V

UL23Mag UL23 Primary voltage V

UL31Mag UL31 Primary voltage V

Phase-to-neutral voltages Description

UL1Mag UL1 Primary voltage V

UL2Mag UL2 Primary voltage V

UL3Mag UL3 Primary voltage V

U0Mag U0 Primary voltage V

Angles Description

UL12Ang UL12 angle

UL23Ang UL23 angle

UL31Ang UL31 angle

UL1Ang UL1 angle

UL2Ang UL2 angle

UL3Ang UL3 angle

U0Ang U0 angle

Calculated Description

U0CalcMag Calculated residual voltage

U1 pos.seq.V Mag Positive sequence voltage

U2 neg.seq.V Mag Negative sequence voltage

U0CalcAng Calculated residual voltage angle

U1 pos.seq.V Ang Positive sequence voltage angle

U2 neg.seq.V Ang Negative sequence voltage angle

Powers

Name Description

S3PH Three-phase apparent power S (kVA)

P3PH Three-phase active power P (kW)

Q3PH Three-phase reactive power Q (kvar)

tanfi3PH Three-phase active power direction

© Arcteq Relays Ltd 200

AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

Name Description

cosfi3PH Three-phase reactive power direction

SL1 Apparent power L1 S (kVA)

PL1 Active power L1 P (kW)

QL1 Reactive power L1 Q (kVar)

tanfiL1 Phase active power direction L1

cosfiL1 Phase reactive power direction L1

SL2 Apparent power L2 S (kVA)

PL2 Active power L2 P (kW)

QL2 Reactive power L2 Q (kVar)

tanfiL2 Phase active power direction L2

cosfiL2 Phase reactive power direction L2

SL3 Apparent power L3 S (kVA)

PL3 Active power L3 P (kW)

QL3 Reactive power L3 Q (kVar)

tanfiL3 Phase active power direction L3

cosfiL3 Phase reactive power direction L3

Impedance and admit

admittance
tance (Z
(ZRRX & Y
YGB
GB))

Name Description

RL12Pri Resistance R L12 primary (Ω)

XL12Pri Reactance X L12 primary (Ω)

RL23Pri Resistance R L23 primary (Ω)

XL23Pri Reactance X L23 primary (Ω)

RL31Pri Resistance R L31 primary (Ω)

XL31Pri Reactance X L31 primary (Ω)

RL12Sec Resistance R L12 secondary (Ω)

XL12Sec Reactance X L12 secondary (Ω)

RL23Sec Resistance R L23 secondary (Ω)

XL23Sec Reactance X L23 secondary (Ω)

RL31Sec Resistance R L31 secondary (Ω)

XL31Sec Reactance X L31 secondary (Ω)

Z12Pri Impedance Z L12 primary (Ω)

Z23Pri Impedance Z L23 primary (Ω)

Z31Pri Impedance Z L31 primary (Ω)

Z12Sec Impedance Z L12 secondary (Ω)

Z23Sec Impedance Z L23 secondary (Ω)

Z31Sec Impedance Z L31 secondary (Ω)

Z12Angle Impedance Z L12 angle

201 © Arcteq Relays Ltd

 AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

Name Description

Z23Angle Impedance Z L23 angle

Z31Angle Impedance Z L31 angle

RL1Pri Resistance R L1 primary (Ω)

XL1Pri Reactance X L1 primary (Ω)

RL2Pri Resistance R L2 primary (Ω)

XL2Pri Reactance X L2 primary (Ω)

RL3Pri Resistance R L3 primary (Ω)

XL3Pri Reactance X L3 primary (Ω)

RL1Sec Resistance R L1 secondary (Ω)

XL1Sec Reactance X L1 secondary (Ω)

RL2Sec Resistance R L2 secondary (Ω)

XL2Sec Reactance X L2 secondary (Ω)

RL3Sec Resistance R L3 secondary (Ω)

XL3Sec Reactance X L3 secondary (Ω)

Z1Pri Impedance Z L1 primary (Ω)

Z2Pri Impedance Z L2 primary (Ω)

Z3Pri Impedance Z L3 primary (Ω)

Z1Sec Impedance Z L1 secondary (Ω)

Z2Sec Impedance Z L2 secondary (Ω)

Z3Sec Impedance Z L3 secondary (Ω)

Z1Angle Impedance Z L1 angle

Z2Angle Impedance Z L2 angle

Z3Angle Impedance Z L3 angle

RSeqPri Positive Resistance R primary (Ω)

XSeqPri Positive Reactance X primary (Ω)

RSeqSec Positive Resistance R secondary (Ω)

XSeqSec Positive Reactance X secondary (Ω)

ZSeqPri Positive Impedance Z primary (Ω)

ZSeqSec Positive Impedance Z secondary (Ω)

ZSeqAngle Positive Impedance Z angle

GL1Pri Conductance G L1 primary (mS)

BL1Pri Susceptance B L1 primary (mS)

GL2Pri Conductance G L2 primary (mS)

BL2Pri Susceptance B L2 primary (mS)

GL3Pri Conductance G L3 primary (mS)

BL3Pri Susceptance B L3 primary (mS)

GL1Sec Conductance G L1 secondary (mS)

BL1Sec Susceptance B L1 secondary (mS)

© Arcteq Relays Ltd 202

AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

Name Description

GL2Sec Conductance G L2 secondary (mS)

BL2Sec Susceptance B L2 secondary (mS)

GL3Sec Conductance G L3 secondary (mS)

BL3Sec Susceptance B L3 secondary (mS)

YL1PriMag Admittance Y L1 primary (mS)

YL2PriMag Admittance Y L2 primary (mS)

YL3PriMag Admittance Y L3 primary (mS)

YL1SecMag Admittance Y L1 secondary (mS)

YL2SecMag Admittance Y L2 secondary (mS)

YL3SecMag Admittance Y L3 secondary (mS)

YL1Angle Admittance Y L1 angle

YL2Angle Admittance Y L2 angle

YL3Angle Admittance Y L3 angle

G0Pri Conductance G0 primary (mS)

B0Pri Susceptance B0 primary (mS)

G0Sec Conductance G0 secondary (mS)

B0Sec Susceptance B0 secondary (mS)

Y0Pri Admittance Y0 primary (mS)

Y0Sec Admittance Y0 secondary (mS)

Y0Angle Admittance Y0 angle

Others

Name Description

System f. System frequency

Ref f1 Reference frequency 1

Ref f2 Reference frequency 2

M Thermal T Motor thermal temperature

F Thermal T Feeder thermal temperature

T Thermal T Transformer thermal temperature

RTD meas 1…16 RTD measurement channels 1…16

Ext RTD meas 1…8 External RTD measurement channels 1…8 (ADAM)

mA input 7,8,15,16 mA input channels 7, 8, 15, 16

ASC 1…4 Analog scaled curves 1…4

The outputs of the function are the START, TRIP and BLOCKED signals. The overvoltage function
uses a total of eight (8) separate setting groups which can be selected from one common source.

The function can operate on instant or time-delayed mode. Definite time (DT) delay can be selected in
the In time-delayed mode.

The inputs for the function are the following:

203 © Arcteq Relays Ltd

 AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

• operating mode selections

• setting parameters
• digital inputs and logic signals
• measured and pre-processed magnitudes.

The function outputs the START, TRIP and BLOCKED signals which can be used for direct I/O
controlling and user logic programming. The function generates general time-stamped ON/OFF events
to the common event buffer from each of the three (3) output signals. In the instant operating mode the
function outputs START and TRIP events simultaneously with an equivalent time stamp. The time stamp
resolution is 1 ms. The function also provides a resettable cumulative counter for the START, TRIP and
BLOCKED events.

Pick-up
The Pick-up setting Mag setting parameter controls the pick-up of the PGx>/< function. This defines
the maximum or minimum allowed measured magnitude before action from the function. The function
constantly calculates the ratio between the set and the measured magnitudes. The user can set the
reset hysteresis in the function (by default 3 %). It is always relative to the Pick-up setting Mag value.

Table. 5.3.15. - 131. Pick-up settings.

Name Description Range Step Default

PS# Pick-up setting Mag#/calc >/< Pick-up magnitude -5 000 000.0000…5 000 000.0000 0.0001 0.01

PS# Setting hysteresis Mag# Setting hysteresis 0.0000…50.0000 % 0.0001 % 3%

Definite operating time delay Delay setting 0.000…1800.000 s 0.005 s 0.04 s

Release time delays Pick-up release delay 0.000…1800.000 s 0.005 s 0.06 s

The pick-up activation of the function is not directly equal to the START signal generation of the
function. The START signal is allowed if the blocking condition is not active.

The user can reset characteristics through the application. The default setting is a 60 ms delay; the
time calculation is held during the release time.

In the release delay option the operating time counter calculates the operating time during the release.
When using this option the function does not trip if the input signal is not re-activated while the release
time count is on-going.

Function blocking
The block signal is checked in the beginning of each program cycle. The blocking signal is received
from the blocking matrix in the function's dedicated input. If the blocking signal is not activated when
the pick-up element activates, a START signal is generated and the function proceeds to the time
characteristics calculation.

If the blocking signal is active when the pick-up element activates, a BLOCKED signal is generated and
the function does not process the situation further. If the START function has been activated before the
blocking signal, it resets and the release time characteristics are processed similarly to when the pick-
up signal is reset.

The blocking of the function causes an HMI display event and a time-stamped blocking event with
information of the startup values of the selected signal and its fault type to be issued.

The blocking signal can also be tested in the commissioning phase by a software switch signal when
the relay's testing mode "Enable stage forcing" is activated (General → Device).

© Arcteq Relays Ltd 204

AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

The variables the user can set are binary signals from the system. The blocking signal needs to reach
the device minimum of 5 ms before the set operating delay has passed in order for the blocking to
activate in time.

Events and registers

The programmable stage function (abbreviated "PGS" in event block names) generates events and
registers from the status changes in START, TRIP, and BLOCKED. The user can select which event
messages are stored in the main event buffer: ON, OFF, or both.

The events triggered by the function are recorded with a time stamp and with process data values.

Table. 5.3.15. - 132. Event codes.

Event number Event channel Event block name Event code Description

8576 134 PGS1 0 PS1 >/< Start ON

8577 134 PGS1 1 PS1 >/< Start OFF

8578 134 PGS1 2 PS1 >/< Trip ON

8579 134 PGS1 3 PS1 >/< Trip OFF

8580 134 PGS1 4 PS1 >/< Block ON

8581 134 PGS1 5 PS1 >/< Block OFF

8582 134 PGS1 6 PS2 >/< Start ON

8583 134 PGS1 7 PS2 >/< Start OFF

8584 134 PGS1 8 PS2 >/< Trip ON

8585 134 PGS1 9 PS2 >/< Trip OFF

8586 134 PGS1 10 PS2 >/< Block ON

8587 134 PGS1 11 PS2 >/< Block OFF

8588 134 PGS1 12 PS3 >/< Start ON

8589 134 PGS1 13 PS3 >/< Start OFF

8590 134 PGS1 14 PS3 >/< Trip ON

8591 134 PGS1 15 PS3 >/< Trip OFF

8592 134 PGS1 16 PS3 >/< Block ON

8593 134 PGS1 17 PS3 >/< Block OFF

8594 134 PGS1 18 PS4 >/< Start ON

8595 134 PGS1 19 PS4 >/< Start OFF

8596 134 PGS1 20 PS4 >/< Trip ON

8597 134 PGS1 21 PS4 >/< Trip OFF

8598 134 PGS1 22 PS4 >/< Block ON

8599 134 PGS1 23 PS4 >/< Block OFF

8600 134 PGS1 24 PS5 >/< Start ON

8601 134 PGS1 25 PS5 >/< Start OFF

8602 134 PGS1 26 PS5 >/< Trip ON

8603 134 PGS1 27 PS5 >/< Trip OFF

8604 134 PGS1 28 PS5 >/< Block ON

205 © Arcteq Relays Ltd

 AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

Event number Event channel Event block name Event code Description

8605 134 PGS1 29 PS5 >/< Block OFF

8606 134 PGS1 30 reserved

8607 134 PGS1 31 reserved

8608 134 PGS1 32 PS6 >/< Start ON

8609 134 PGS1 33 PS6 >/< Start OFF

8610 134 PGS1 34 PS6 >/< Trip ON

8611 134 PGS1 35 PS6 >/< Trip OFF

8612 134 PGS1 36 PS6 >/< Block ON

8613 134 PGS1 37 PS6 >/< Block OFF

8614 134 PGS1 38 PS7 >/< Start ON

8615 134 PGS1 39 PS7 >/< Start OFF

8616 134 PGS1 40 PS7 >/< Trip ON

8617 134 PGS1 41 PS7 >/< Trip OFF

8618 134 PGS1 42 PS7 >/< Block ON

8619 134 PGS1 43 PS7 >/< Block OFF

8620 134 PGS1 44 PS8 >/< Start ON

8621 134 PGS1 45 PS8 >/< Start OFF

8622 134 PGS1 46 PS8 >/< Trip ON

8623 134 PGS1 47 PS8 >/< Trip OFF

8624 134 PGS1 48 PS8 >/< Block ON

8625 134 PGS1 49 PS8 >/< Block OFF

8626 134 PGS1 50 PS9 >/< Start ON

8627 134 PGS1 51 PS9 >/< Start OFF

8628 134 PGS1 52 PS9 >/< Trip ON

8629 134 PGS1 53 PS9 >/< Trip OFF

8630 134 PGS1 54 PS9 >/< Block ON

8631 134 PGS1 55 PS9 >/< Block OFF

8632 134 PGS1 56 PS10 >/< Start ON

8633 134 PGS1 57 PS10 >/< Start OFF

8634 134 PGS1 58 PS10 >/< Trip ON

8635 134 PGS1 59 PS10 >/< Trip OFF

8636 134 PGS1 60 PS10 >/< Block ON

8637 134 PGS1 61 PS10 >/< Block OFF

The function registers its operation into the last twelve (12) time-stamped registers. The register of the
function records the ON event process data for START, TRIP or BLOCKED. The table below
presents the structure of the function's register content.

© Arcteq Relays Ltd 206

AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

Table. 5.3.15. - 133. Register content.

Date Event Trip time

>/< Mag# Mag#/Set# Used SG
and time code remaining

dd.mm.yyyy 8576-8637 The numerical value Ratio between the measured 0 ms...1800 Setting group
hh:mm:ss.mss Descr. of the magnitude magnitude and the pick-up setting s 1...8 active

5.4. Control functions

5.4.1. Setting group selection

All relay types support up to eight (8) separate setting groups. The Setting group selection function
block controls the availability and selection of the setting groups. By default, only Setting group 1
(SG1) is active and therefore the selection logic is idle. When more than one setting group is enabled,
the setting group selector logic takes control of the setting group activations based on the logic and
conditions the user has programmed.

The following figure presents a simplified function block diagram of the setting group selection function.

Figure. 5.4.1. - 140. Simplified function block diagram of the setting group selection function.

Setting group selection can be applied to each of the setting groups individually by activating one
of the various internal logic inputs and connected digital inputs. The user can also force any of the
setting groups on when the "Force SG change" setting is enabled by giving the wanted quantity of
setting groups as a number in the communication bus or in the local HMI, or by selecting the wanted
setting group from Control → Setting groups. When the forcing parameter is enabled, the automatic
control of the local device is overridden and the full control of the setting groups is given to the user
until the "Force SG change" is disabled again.

Setting groups can be controlled either by pulses or by signal levels. The setting group controller block
gives setting groups priority values for situations when more than one setting group is controlled at the
same time: the request from a higher-priority setting group is taken into use.

Setting groups follow a hierarchy in which setting group 1 has the highest priority, setting group 2 has
second highest priority etc. If a static activation signal is given for two setting groups, the setting
group with higher priority will be active. If setting groups are controlled by pulses, the setting group
activated by pulse will stay active until another setting groups receives and activation signal.

207 © Arcteq Relays Ltd

 AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

Figure. 5.4.1. - 141. Example sequences of group changing (control with pulse only, or with both pulses and static signals).

Settings and signals

The settings of the setting group control function include the active setting group selection, the forced
setting group selection, the enabling (or disabling) of the forced change, the selection of the number of
active setting groups in the application, as well as the selection of the setting group changed remotely.
If the setting group is forced to change, the corresponding setting group must be enabled and the
force change must be enabled. Then, the setting group can be set from communications or from HMI
to any available group. If the setting group control is applied with static signals right after the "Force
SG" parameter is released, the application takes control of the setting group selection.

Table. 5.4.1. - 134. Settings of the setting group selection function.

Name Range Step Default Description

Active
setting SG1 Displays which setting group is active.
group

0: None
1: SG1
2: SG2 The selection of the overriding setting group. After "Force SG change" is enabled, any
3: SG3 of the configured setting groups in the relay can be overriden. This control is always
Force
4: SG4 - 0: None based on the pulse operating mode. It also requires that the selected setting group is
SG
5: SG5 specifically controlled to ON after "Force SG" is disabled. If there are no other
6: SG6 controls, the last set setting group remains active.
7: SG7
8: SG8

0: The selection of whether the setting group forcing is enabled or disabled. This setting
Force
Disabled 0: has to be active before the setting group can be changed remotely or from a local
SG -
1: Disabled HMI. This parameter overrides the local control of the setting groups and it remains
change
Enabled on until the user disables it.

0: SG1
1:
SG1...2
2:
SG1...3
3:
Used SG1...4
The selection of the activated setting groups in the application. Newly-enabled setting
setting 4: - 0: SG1
groups use default parameter values.
groups SG1...5
5:
SG1...6
6:
SG1...7
7:
SG1...8

© Arcteq Relays Ltd 208

AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

Name Range Step Default Description

0: None
1: SG1
2: SG2
Remote 3: SG3 This parameter can be controlled through SCADA to change the setting group
SG 4: SG4 - 0: None remotely. Please note that if a higher priority setting group is being controlled by a
change 5: SG5 signal, a lower priority setting group cannot be activated with this parameter.
6: SG6
7: SG7
8: SG8

Table. 5.4.1. - 135. Signals of the setting group selection function.

Name Range Step Default Description

0: Not
Setting The selection of Setting group 1 ("SG1"). Has the highest priority input in setting group
active 0: Not
group - control. Can be controlled with pulses or static signals. If static signal control is applied,
1: active
1 no other SG requests will be processed.
Active

0: Not
Setting The selection of Setting group 2 ("SG2"). Has the second highest priority input in setting
active 0: Not
group - group control. Can be controlled with pulses or static signals. If static signal
1: active
2 control is applied, no requests with a lower priority than SG1 will be processed.
Active

0: Not The selection of Setting group 3 ("SG3"). Has the third highest priority input in setting
Setting
active 0: Not group control. Can be controlled with pulses or static signals. If static signal
group -
1: active control is applied, no requests with a lower priority than SG1 and SG2 will be
3
Active processed.

0: Not The selection of Setting group 4 ("SG4"). Has the fourth highest priority input in setting
Setting
active 0: Not group control. Can be controlled with pulses or static signals. If static signal
group -
1: active control is applied, no requests with a lower priority than SG1, SG2 and SG3 will be
4
Active processed.

0: Not
Setting The selection of Setting group 5 ("SG5"). Has the fourth lowest priority input in setting
active 0: Not
group - group control. Can be controlled with pulses or static signals. If static signal
1: active
5 control is applied, SG6, SG7 and SG8 requests will not be processed.
Active

Setting 0:Not The selection of Setting group 6 ("SG6"). Has the third lowest priority input in setting
0:Not
group active - group control. Can be controlled with pulses or static signals. If static signal
active
6 1:Active control is applied, SG7 and SG8 requests will not be processed.

0: Not
Setting The selection of Setting group 7 ("SG7"). Has the second lowest priority input in setting
active 0: Not
group - group control. Can be controlled with pulses or static signals. If static signal
1: active
7 control is applied, only SG8 requests will not be processed.
Active

0: Not The selection of Setting group 8 ("SG8"). Has the lowest priority input in setting group
Setting
active 0: Not control. Can be controlled with pulses or static signals. If static signal control is applied,
group -
1: active all other SG requests will be processed regardless of the signal status of this setting
8
Active group.

Example applications for setting group control

This chapter presents some of the most common applications for setting group changing requirements.

A Petersen coil compensated network usually uses directional sensitive earth fault protection. The user
needs to control its characteristics between varmetric and wattmetric; the selection is based on
whether the Petersen coil is connected when the network is compensated, or whether it is open when
the network is unearthed.

209 © Arcteq Relays Ltd

 AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

Figure. 5.4.1. - 142. Setting group control – one-wire connection from Petersen coil status.

Depending on the application's requirements, the setting group control can be applied either with a
one-wire connection or with a two-wire connection by monitoring the state of the Petersen coil
connection.

When the connection is done with one wire, the setting group change logic can be applied as shown in
the figure above. The status of the Petersen coil controls whether Setting group 1 is active. If the coil is
disconnected, Setting group 2 is active. This way, if the wire is broken for some reason, the setting
group is always controlled to SG2.

© Arcteq Relays Ltd 210

AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

Figure. 5.4.1. - 143. Setting group control – two-wire connection from Petersen coil status.

211 © Arcteq Relays Ltd

 AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

The images above depict a two-wire connection from the Petersen coil: the two images at the top
show a direct connection, while the two images on the bottom include additional logic. With a two-wire
connection the state of the Petersen coil can be monitored more securely. The additional logic ensures
that a single wire loss will not affect the correct setting group selection.

The application-controlled setting group change can also be applied entirely from the relay's internal
logics. For example, the setting group change can be based on the cold load pick-up function (see the
image below).

Figure. 5.4.1. - 144. Entirely application-controlled setting group change with the cold load pick-up function.

In these examples the cold load pick-up function's output is used for the automatic setting group
change. Similarly to this application, any combination of the signals available in the relay's database
can be programmed to be used in the setting group selection logic.

As all these examples show, setting group selection with application control has to be built fully before
they can be used for setting group control. The setting group does not change back to SG1 unless it is
controlled back to SG1 by this application; this explains the inverted signal NOT as well as the use of
logics in setting group control. One could also have SG2 be the primary SG, while the ON signal would
be controlled by the higher priority SG1; this way the setting group would automatically return to SG2
after the automatic control is over.

Events
The setting group selection function block (abbreviated "SGS" in event block names) generates events
from its controlling status, its applied input signals, enabling and disabling of setting groups, as well as
unsuccessful control changes. The function does not have a register.

Table. 5.4.1. - 136. Event codes.

Event number Event channel Event block name Event code Description

4160 65 SGS 0 SG2 Enabled

4161 65 SGS 1 SG2 Disabled

© Arcteq Relays Ltd 212

AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

Event number Event channel Event block name Event code Description

4162 65 SGS 2 SG3 Enabled

4163 65 SGS 3 SG3 Disabled

4164 65 SGS 4 SG4 Enabled

4165 65 SGS 5 SG4 Disabled

4166 65 SGS 6 SG5 Enabled

4167 65 SGS 7 SG5 Disabled

4168 65 SGS 8 SG6 Enabled

4169 65 SGS 9 SG6 Disabled

4170 65 SGS 10 SG7 Enabled

4171 65 SGS 11 SG7 Disabled

4172 65 SGS 12 SG8 Enabled

4173 65 SGS 13 SG8 Disabled

4174 65 SGS 14 SG1 Request ON

4175 65 SGS 15 SG1 Request OFF

4176 65 SGS 16 SG2 Request ON

4177 65 SGS 17 SG2 Request OFF

4178 65 SGS 18 SG3 Request ON

4179 65 SGS 19 SG3 Request OFF

4180 65 SGS 20 SG4 Request ON

4181 65 SGS 21 SG4 Request OFF

4182 65 SGS 22 SG5 Request ON

4183 65 SGS 23 SG5 Request OFF

4184 65 SGS 24 SG6 Request ON

4185 65 SGS 25 SG6 Request OFF

4186 65 SGS 26 SG7 Request ON

4187 65 SGS 27 SG7 Request OFF

4188 65 SGS 28 SG8 Request ON

4189 65 SGS 29 SG8 Request OFF

4190 65 SGS 30 Remote Change SG Reqeuest ON

4191 65 SGS 31 Remote Change SG Request OFF

4192 65 SGS 32 Local Change SG Request ON

4193 65 SGS 33 Local Change SG Request OFF

4194 65 SGS 34 Force Change SG ON

4195 65 SGS 35 Force Change SG OFF

4196 65 SGS 36 SG Request Fail Not configured SG ON

4197 65 SGS 37 SG Request Fail Not configured SG OFF

4198 65 SGS 38 Force Request Fail Force ON

4199 65 SGS 39 Force Request Fail Force OFF

213 © Arcteq Relays Ltd

 AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

Event number Event channel Event block name Event code Description

4200 65 SGS 40 SG Req. Fail Lower priority Request ON

4201 65 SGS 41 SG Req. Fail Lower priority Request OFF

4202 65 SGS 42 SG1 Active ON

4203 65 SGS 43 SG1 Active OFF

4204 65 SGS 44 SG2 Active ON

4205 65 SGS 45 SG2 Active OFF

4206 65 SGS 46 SG3 Active ON

4207 65 SGS 47 SG3 Active OFF

4208 65 SGS 48 SG4 Active ON

4209 65 SGS 49 SG4 Active OFF

4210 65 SGS 50 SG5 Active ON

4211 65 SGS 51 SG5 Active OFF

4212 65 SGS 52 SG6 Active ON

4213 65 SGS 53 SG6 Active OFF

4214 65 SGS 54 SG7 Active ON

4215 65 SGS 55 SG7 Active OFF

4216 65 SGS 56 SG8 Active ON

4217 65 SGS 57 SG8 Active OFF

5.4.2. Object control and monitoring

The object control and monitoring function takes care of both for circuit breakers and disconnectors.
The monitoring and controlling are based on the statuses of the relay's configured digital inputs and
outputs. The number of controllable and monitored objects in each relay depends on the device type
and amount of digital inputs. One controllable object requires a minimum of two (2) output contacts.
The status monitoring of one monitored object usually requires two (2) digital inputs. Alternatively,
object status monitoring can be performed with a single digital input: the input's active state and its
zero state (switched to 1 with a NOT gate in the Logic editor).

An object can be controlled manually or automatically. Manual control can be done by local control, or
by remote control. Local manual control can be done by relays front panel (HMI) or by external push
buttons connected to relays digital inputs. Manual remote control can be done through one of the
various communication protocols available (Modbus, IEC101/103/104 etc.). The function supports the
modes "Direct control" and "Select before execute" while controlled remotely. Automatic controlling can
be done with functions like auto-reclosing function (ANSI 79).

Object control consists of the following:

• control logic
• control monitor
• output handler.

In addition to these main parts, the user can add object-related circuit breaker failure protection
(CBFP; 50BF) and object wear monitoring in the object control block. These additional functions are
not included in the basic version of the object control block.

© Arcteq Relays Ltd 214

AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

The main outputs of the function are the OBJECT OPEN and OBJECT CLOSE control signals.
Additionally, the function reports the monitored object's status and applied operations. The setting
parameters are static inputs for the function, which can only be changed by the user in the function's
setup phase.

The inputs for the function are the following:

• digital input status indications (the OPEN and CLOSE status signals)
• blockings (if applicable)
• the OBJECT READY and SYNCHROCHECK monitor signals (if applicable).
• Withdrawable cart IN and OUT status signals (if applicable).

The function generates general time stamped ON/OFF events to the common event buffer from each of
the two (2) output signals as well as several operational event signals. The time stamp resolution is 1
ms. The function also provides a resettable cumulative counter for OPEN, CLOSE, OPEN FAILED, and
CLOSE FAILED events.

The following figure presents a simplified function block diagram of the object control and monitoring
function.

Figure. 5.4.2. - 145. Simplified function block diagram of the object control and monitoring function.

Settings
The following parameters help the user to define the object. The operation of the function varies based
on these settings and the selected object type. The selected object type determines how much control
is needed and which setting parameters are required to meet those needs.

Table. 5.4.2. - 137. Object set and status.

Name Range Step Default Description

Displays the status of the relay's "local/remote" switch. Local controls

Local/Remote 0: Local 1: cannot override the open and close commands while device is in
-
status 1: Remote Remote "Remote" status. The remote controls cannot override the open
and close commands while device is in "Local" status.

Object name - - Objectx The user-set name of the object, at maximum 32 characters long.

215 © Arcteq Relays Ltd

 AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

Name Range Step Default Description

0: Withdrawable
circuit breaker The selection of the object type. This selection defines the number of
1: Circuit required digital inputs for the monitored object. This affects the symbol
1:
breaker displayed in the HMI and the monitoring of the circuit breaker. It also
Object type - Circuit
2: Disconnector affects whether the withdrawable cart is in/out status is monitored. See
breaker
(MC) the next table ("Object types") for a more detailed look at which
3: Disconnector functionalities each of the object types have.
(GND)

0: Intermediate
Objectx Displays the status of breaker. Intermediate is displayed when neither of
1: Open
Breaker - - the status signals (open or close) are active. Bad status is displayed
2: Closed
status when both status signals (open and close) are active.
3: Bad

0:
Displays the status of circuit breaker cart. WDIntermediate is displayed
WDIntermediate
Objectx when neither of the status signals (in or out) are active. WDBad status is
1: WDCartOut
Withdraw - - displayed when both status signals (in and out) are active. If the selected
2: WDCart In
status object type is not set to "Withdrawable circuit breaker", this setting
3: WDBad
displays the "No in use" option.
4: Not in use

0: Open
Blocked
1: Open
Allowed
2: Close
Additional Blocked
status 3: Close - - Displays additional information about the status of the object.
information Allowed
4: Object Ready
5: Object Not
Ready
6: Sync Ok
7: Sync Not Ok

0: Not in use Selects whether the "Synchrocheck" condition is in use for the circuit
Use 1: 0: Not breaker close command. If "In use" is selected the input chosen to
-
Synchrocheck Synchrocheck in use "Sync.check status in" has to be active to be able to close circuit
in use breaker.

Selects whether the "Object ready" condition is in use for the circuit
0: Ready High
Use Object 2: Not breaker close command. If in use the signal connected to "Object ready
1: Ready Low -
ready in use status In" has to be high or low to be able to close the breaker
2: Not in use
(depending on "Ready High or Low" selection).

Open
requests 0…232–1 1 - Displays the number of successful "Open" requests.

Close
requests 0…232–1 1 - Displays the number of successful "Close" requests.

Open
requests 0…232–1 1 - Displays the number of failed "Open" requests.
failed

Close
requests 0…232–1 1 - Displays the number of failed "Close" requests.
failed

Clear 0: - Clears the request statistics, setting them back to zero (0).
- 0: -
statistics 1: Clear Automatically returns to "-" after the clearing is finished.

© Arcteq Relays Ltd 216

AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

Table. 5.4.2. - 138. Object types.

Name Functionalities Description

Breaker cart position

Circuit breaker position
Circuit breaker control
Withdrawable circuit Object ready check before closing The monitor and control configuration of the withdrawable
breaker breaker circuit breaker.
Synchrochecking before closing
breaker
Interlocks

Position indication
Control
Object ready check before closing
Circuit breaker breaker The monitor and control configuration of the circuit breaker.
Synchrochecking before closing
breaker
Interlocks

Position indication
Disconnector (MC) The position monitoring and control of the disconnector.
Control

Disconnector (GND) Position indication The position indication of the earth switch.

Table. 5.4.2. - 139. I/O.

Signal Range Description

Digital input or
other logical
Objectx Open input A link to a physical digital input. The monitored object's OPEN status. "1" refers
signal selected
("Objectx Open Status to the active open state of the monitored object. If IEC 61850 is enabled,
by the user
In") GOOSE signals can be used for status indication.
(SWx)

Digital input or
other logical
Objectx Close input A link to a physical digital input. The monitored object's CLOSE status.
signal selected
("Objectx Close Status "1" refers to the active close state of the monitored object. If IEC 61850 is
by the user
In") enabled, GOOSE signals can be used for status indication.
(SWx)

Digital input or
other logical
WD Object In A link to a physical digital input. The monitored withdrawable object's position
signal selected
("Withdrw.CartIn.Status is IN. "1" means that the withdrawable object cart is in. If IEC 61850 is
by the user
In") enabled, GOOSE signals can be used for status indication.
(SWx)

Digital input or
other logical
WD Object Out A link to a physical digital input. The monitored withdrawable object's position
signal selected
("Withdrw.CartOut.Status is OUT. "1" means that the withdrawable object cart is pulled out. If IEC 61850
by the user
In") is enabled, GOOSE signals can be used for status indication.
(SWx)

Digital input or
other logical A link to a physical digital input. Indicates that status of the monitored object.
Object Ready
signal selected "1" means that the object is ready and the spring is charged for a close
(Objectx Ready status
by the user command. If IEC 61850 is enabled, GOOSE signals can be used for status
In")
indication.
(SWx)

Digital input or
other logical
A link to a physical digital input or a synchrocheck function. "1" means that the
Syncrocheck permission signal selected
synchrocheck conditions are met and the object can be closed. If IEC 61850 is
("Sync.Check status In") by the user
enabled, GOOSE signals can be used for status indication.
(SWx)

217 © Arcteq Relays Ltd

 AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

Signal Range Description

Objectx Open command

OUT1…OUTx
("Objectx Open The physical "Open" command pulse to the device's output relay.
Command")

Objectx Close command

("Objectx Close OUT1…OUTx The physical "Close" command pulse to the device's output relay.
Command")

Table. 5.4.2. - 140. Operation settings.

Name Range Step Default Description

Determines the maximum time between open and close statuses when the
Breaker breaker switches. If this set time is exceeded and both open and closed
0.02…500.00 0.02
traverse 0.2 s status inputs are active, the status "Bad" is activated in the "Objectx Breaker
s s
time status" setting. If neither of the status inputs are active after this delay, the
status "Intermediate" is activated.

Maximum
Close Determines the maximum length for a Close pulse from the output relay to the
0.02…500.00 0.02
command 0.2 s controlled object. If the object operates faster than this set time, the control
s s
pulse pulse is reset and a status change is detected.
length

Maximum
Open Determines the maximum length for a Open pulse from the output relay to the
0.02…500.00 0.02
command 0.2 s controlled object. If the object operates faster than this set time, the control
s s
pulse pulse is reset and a status change is detected.
length

Determines the control pulse termination timeout. If the object has not
Control
0.02…500.00 0.02 changed it status in this given time the function will issue error event and the
termination 10 s
s s control is ended. This parameter is common for both open and close
timeout
commands.

Determines the length of the final trip pulse length. When the object has
Final trip executed the final trip, this signal activates. If set to 0 s, the signal is
0.00…500.00 0.02
pulse 0.2 s continuous. If auto-recloser function controls the object, "final trip" signal is
s s
length activated only when there are no automatic reclosings expected after opening
the breaker.

Table. 5.4.2. - 141. Control settings (DI and Application).

Signal Range Description

0: User
Access level for MIMIC 1: Operator Defines what level of access is required for MIMIC control. The
control 2: Configurator default is the "Configurator" level.
3: Super user

Objectx LOCAL Digital input or other logical signal The local Close command from a physical digital input (e.g. a
Close control input selected by the user push button).

Objectx LOCAL Digital input or other logical signal The local Open command from a physical digital input (e.g. a
Open control input selected by the user push button).

Objectx
Digital input or other logical signal The remote Close command from a physical digital input (e.g.
REMOTE Close control
selected by the user RTU).
input

Objectx REMOTE Digital input or other logical signal The remote Open command from a physical digital input (e.g.
Open control input selected by the user RTU).

Objectx Application Digital input or other logical signal The Close command from the application. Can be any logical
Close selected by the user signal.

Objectx Application Digital input or other logical signal The Close command from the application. Can be any logical
Open selected by the user signal.

© Arcteq Relays Ltd 218

AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

Blocking and interlocking

The interlocking and blocking conditions can be set for each controllable object, with Open and Close
set separately. Blocking and interlocking can be based on any of the following: other object statuses, a
software function or a digital input.

The image below presents an example of an interlock application, where the closed earthing switch
interlocks the circuit breaker close command.

Figure. 5.4.2. - 146. Example of an interlock application.

In order for the blocking signal to be received on time, it has to reach the function 5 ms before the
control command.

Events and registers

The object control and monitoring function (abbreviated "OBJ" in event block names) generates events
and registers from the status changes in monitored signals as well as control command fails and
operations. The user can select which event messages are stored in the main event buffer: ON, OFF, or
both.

The function registers its operation into the last twelve (12) time-stamped registers. The events
triggered by the function are recorded with a time stamp and with process data values.

Table. 5.4.2. - 142. Event codes of the OBJ function instances 1 – 5.

Event Number Event channel Event block name Event Code Description

2944 46 OBJ1 0 Object Intermediate

2945 46 OBJ1 1 Object Open

2946 46 OBJ1 2 Object Close

219 © Arcteq Relays Ltd

 AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

Event Number Event channel Event block name Event Code Description

2947 46 OBJ1 3 Object Bad

2948 46 OBJ1 4 WD Intermediate

2949 46 OBJ1 5 WD Out

2950 46 OBJ1 6 WD In

2951 46 OBJ1 7 WD Bad

2952 46 OBJ1 8 Open Request ON

2953 46 OBJ1 9 Open Request OFF

2954 46 OBJ1 10 Open Command ON

2955 46 OBJ1 11 Open Command OFF

2956 46 OBJ1 12 Close Request ON

2957 46 OBJ1 13 Close Request OFF

2958 46 OBJ1 14 Close Command ON

2959 46 OBJ1 15 Close Command OFF

2960 46 OBJ1 16 Open Blocked ON

2961 46 OBJ1 17 Open Blocked OFF

2962 46 OBJ1 18 Close Blocked ON

2963 46 OBJ1 19 Close Blocked OFF

2964 46 OBJ1 20 Object Ready

2965 46 OBJ1 21 Object Not Ready

2966 46 OBJ1 22 Sync Ok

2967 46 OBJ1 23 Sync Not Ok

2968 46 OBJ1 24 Open Command Fail

2969 46 OBJ1 25 Close Command Fail

2970 46 OBJ1 26 Final trip ON

2971 46 OBJ1 27 Final trip OFF

3008 47 OBJ2 0 Object Intermediate

3009 47 OBJ2 1 Object Open

3010 47 OBJ2 2 Object Close

3011 47 OBJ2 3 Object Bad

3012 47 OBJ2 4 WD Intermediate

3013 47 OBJ2 5 WD Out

3014 47 OBJ2 6 WD In

3015 47 OBJ2 7 WD Bad

3016 47 OBJ2 8 Open Request ON

3017 47 OBJ2 9 Open Request OFF

3018 47 OBJ2 10 Open Command ON

3019 47 OBJ2 11 Open Command OFF

3020 47 OBJ2 12 Close Request ON

© Arcteq Relays Ltd 220

AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

Event Number Event channel Event block name Event Code Description

3021 47 OBJ2 13 Close Request OFF

3022 47 OBJ2 14 Close Command ON

3023 47 OBJ2 15 Close Command OFF

3024 47 OBJ2 16 Open Blocked ON

3025 47 OBJ2 17 Open Blocked OFF

3026 47 OBJ2 18 Close Blocked ON

3027 47 OBJ2 19 Close Blocked OFF

3028 47 OBJ2 20 Object Ready

3029 47 OBJ2 21 Object Not Ready

3030 47 OBJ2 22 Sync Ok

3031 47 OBJ2 23 Sync Not Ok

3032 47 OBJ2 24 Open Command Fail

3033 47 OBJ2 25 Close Command Fail

3034 47 OBJ2 26 Final trip ON

3035 47 OBJ2 27 Final trip OFF

3072 48 OBJ3 0 Object Intermediate

3073 48 OBJ3 1 Object Open

3074 48 OBJ3 2 Object Close

3075 48 OBJ3 3 Object Bad

3076 48 OBJ3 4 WD Intermediate

3077 48 OBJ3 5 WD Out

3078 48 OBJ3 6 WD In

3079 48 OBJ3 7 WD Bad

3080 48 OBJ3 8 Open Request ON

3081 48 OBJ3 9 Open Request OFF

3082 48 OBJ3 10 Open Command ON

3083 48 OBJ3 11 Open Command OFF

3084 48 OBJ3 12 Close Request ON

3085 48 OBJ3 13 Close Request OFF

3086 48 OBJ3 14 Close Command ON

3087 48 OBJ3 15 Close Command OFF

3088 48 OBJ3 16 Open Blocked ON

3089 48 OBJ3 17 Open Blocked OFF

3090 48 OBJ3 18 Close Blocked ON

3091 48 OBJ3 19 Close Blocked OFF

3092 48 OBJ3 20 Object Ready

3093 48 OBJ3 21 Object Not Ready

3094 48 OBJ3 22 Sync Ok

221 © Arcteq Relays Ltd

 AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

Event Number Event channel Event block name Event Code Description

3095 48 OBJ3 23 Sync Not Ok

3096 48 OBJ3 24 Open Command Fail

3097 48 OBJ3 25 Close Command Fail

3098 48 OBJ3 26 Final trip ON

3099 48 OBJ3 27 Final trip OFF

3136 49 OBJ4 0 Object Intermediate

3137 49 OBJ4 1 Object Open

3138 49 OBJ4 2 Object Close

3139 49 OBJ4 3 Object Bad

3140 49 OBJ4 4 WD Intermediate

3141 49 OBJ4 5 WD Out

3142 49 OBJ4 6 WD In

3143 49 OBJ4 7 WD Bad

3144 49 OBJ4 8 Open Request ON

3145 49 OBJ4 9 Open Request OFF

3146 49 OBJ4 10 Open Command ON

3147 49 OBJ4 11 Open Command OFF

3148 49 OBJ4 12 Close Request ON

3149 49 OBJ4 13 Close Request OFF

3150 49 OBJ4 14 Close Command ON

3151 49 OBJ4 15 Close Command OFF

3152 49 OBJ4 16 Open Blocked ON

3153 49 OBJ4 17 Open Blocked OFF

3154 49 OBJ4 18 Close Blocked ON

3155 49 OBJ4 19 Close Blocked OFF

3156 49 OBJ4 20 Object Ready

3157 49 OBJ4 21 Object Not Ready

3158 49 OBJ4 22 Sync Ok

3159 49 OBJ4 23 Sync Not Ok

3160 49 OBJ4 24 Open Command Fail

3161 49 OBJ4 25 Close Command Fail

3162 49 OBJ4 26 Final trip ON

3163 49 OBJ4 27 Final trip OFF

3200 50 OBJ5 0 Object Intermediate

3201 50 OBJ5 1 Object Open

3202 50 OBJ5 2 Object Close

3203 50 OBJ5 3 Object Bad

3204 50 OBJ5 4 WD Intermediate

© Arcteq Relays Ltd 222

AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

Event Number Event channel Event block name Event Code Description

3205 50 OBJ5 5 WD Out

3206 50 OBJ5 6 WD In

3207 50 OBJ5 7 WD Bad

3208 50 OBJ5 8 Open Request ON

3209 50 OBJ5 9 Open Request OFF

3210 50 OBJ5 10 Open Command ON

3211 50 OBJ5 11 Open Command OFF

3212 50 OBJ5 12 Close Request ON

3213 50 OBJ5 13 Close Request OFF

3214 50 OBJ5 14 Close Command ON

3215 50 OBJ5 15 Close Command OFF

3216 50 OBJ5 16 Open Blocked ON

3217 50 OBJ5 17 Open Blocked OFF

3218 50 OBJ5 18 Close Blocked ON

3219 50 OBJ5 19 Close Blocked OFF

3220 50 OBJ5 20 Object Ready

3221 50 OBJ5 21 Object Not Ready

3222 50 OBJ5 22 Sync Ok

3223 50 OBJ5 23 Sync Not Ok

3224 50 OBJ5 24 Open Command Fail

3225 50 OBJ5 25 Close Command Fail

3226 50 OBJ5 26 Final trip ON

3227 50 OBJ5 27 Final trip OFF

Table. 5.4.2. - 143. Register content.

Name Description

Date and time dd.mm.yyyy hh:mm:ss.mss

Event code 2944-9883 Descr.

Recorded Object opening Time difference between the object receiving an "Open" command and the object receiving the
time "Open" status.

Recorded Object closing Time difference between the object receiving a "Close" command and object receiving the
time "Closed" status.

Object status The status of the object.

WD status The status of the withdrawable circuit breaker.

Open fail The cause of an "Open" command's failure.

Close fail The cause of a "Close" command's failure.

Open command The source of an "Open" command.

Close command The source of an "Open" command.

General status The general status of the function.

223 © Arcteq Relays Ltd

 AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

5.4.3. Switch-on-to-fault (SOTF)

The switch-on-to-fault (SOTF) function is used for speeding up the tripping when the breaker is closed
towards a fault or forgotten earthing to reduce the damage in the fault location. The function can be
used to control protection functions, or it can be used to directly trip a breaker if any of the connected
protection functions starts during the set SOTF time. The operation of the function is instant after the
conditions are met and any one signal connected to the SOF1_FCN input activates.

The inputs of the function are the following:

• initiating
• blocking
• setting group selection
• function trigger inputs.

The function can be initiated by a digital input, or by a circuit breaker "Close" command connected to
the SOF1_INIT input. The duration of the SOTF-armed condition can be set by the "Release time for
SOTF" setting parameter; it can be changed if the application so requires through setting group
selection.

The outputs of the function are BLOCKED, ACTIVE and TRIP signals. Additionally, the function outputs
the corresponding events and registers when any of these mentioned signals activate.

The following figure presents a simplified function block diagram of the switch-on-to-fault function.

Figure. 5.4.3. - 147. Simplified function block diagram of the switch-on-to-fault function.

Input signals
The function block does not use analog measurement inputs. Instead, its operation is based entirely on
binary signal statuses.

Table. 5.4.3. - 144. Input signals.

Input Description

The digital input or logic signal for the function to arm and start calculating the SOTF time. Any binary signal can be
Activate
used to activate the function and start the calculation. The rising edge of the signal is considered as the start of the
input
function.

Block
The input for blocking the function. Any binary signal can be used to block the function from starting.
input

Function
The function input activates the function's instant trip if applied when the function is calculating the SOTF time.
input

© Arcteq Relays Ltd 224

AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

Settings
The switch-on-to-fault function has one setting and it determines how long the function remains active
after it has been triggered. If the inputs receive any of the set signals during this time, the function's trip
is activated.

Table. 5.4.3. - 145. Active settings.

Name Range Step Default Description

Release time for SOTF 0.000…1800.000 s 0.005 s 1.000 s The time the function is active after triggering.

Function blocking
The function can be blocked by activating the BLOCK input. This prevents the function's active time
from starting.

Events and registers

The switch-on-to-fault function (abbreviated "SOF" in event block names) generates events and
registers from the status changes in ACTIVATED, TRIP and BLOCKED. The user can select which
event messages are stored in the main event buffer: ON, OFF, or both.

The events triggered by the function are recorded with a time stamp and with process data values.

Table. 5.4.3. - 146. Event codes.

Event number Event channel Event block name Event code Description

3904 61 SOF1 0 SOTF Init ON

3905 61 SOF1 1 SOTF Init OFF

3906 61 SOF1 2 SOTF Block ON

3907 61 SOF1 3 SOTF Block OFF

3908 61 SOF1 4 SOTF Active ON

3909 61 SOF1 5 SOTF Active OFF

3910 61 SOF1 6 SOTF Trip ON

3911 61 SOF1 7 SOTF Trip OFF

The function registers its operation into the last twelve (12) time-stamped registers. The register of the
function records the ON process data of ACTIVATED events. The table below presents the structure of
the function's register content.

Table. 5.4.3. - 147. Register content.

Date and time Event code SOTF remaining time SOTF been active time

dd.mm.yyyy 3904...3911 The time remaining of the set release The time the function has been
hh:mm:ss.mss Descr. time. active.

5.4.4. Milliampere output control

The milliamp current loop is the prevailing process control signal in many industries. It is an ideal
method of transferring process information because a current does not change as it travels from a
transmitter to a receiver. It is also much more simple and cost-effective.

The benefits of 4...20 mA loops:

225 © Arcteq Relays Ltd
 AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

• the dominant standard in many industries

• the simplest option to connect and configure
• uses less wiring and connections than other signals, thus greatly reducing initial setup costs
• good for travelling long distances, as current does not degrade over long connections like
voltage does
• less sensitive to background electrical noise
• detects a fault in the system incredibly easily since 4 mA is equal to 0 % output.

Milliampere (mA) outputs

Relays support up to two (2) independent mA option cards. Each card has four (4) mA output channels
and one (1) mA input channel. If the device has an mA option card, enable mA outputs at Control
→ Device IO → mA outputs. The outputs are activated in groups of two: channels 1 and 2 are
activated together, as are channels 3 and 4 (see the image below).

Figure. 5.4.4. - 148. Activating mA output channels.

Table. 5.4.4. - 148. Main settings (output channels).

Name Range Default Description

Enable mA output channels 1

and 2 0:
mA option 0: Enables and disables the outputs of the mA output
Disabled
card 1 Disabled card 1.
Enable mA output channels 3 1: Enabled
and 4

Enable mA output channels 5

and 6 0:
mA option 0: Enables and disables the outputs of the mA output
Disabled
card 2 Disabled card 2.
Enable mA output channels 7 1: Enabled
and 8

Table. 5.4.4. - 149. Settings for mA output channels.

Name Range Step Default Description

Enable mA
0: Disabled Enables and disables the selected mA output channel. If
output - 0: Disabled
1: Enabled the channel is disabled, the channel settings are hidden.
channel

0: Currents
Magnitude 1: Voltages
selection for 2: Powers Defines the measurement category that is used for mA
- 0: Currents
mA output 3: Impedance and output control.
channel admittance
4: Other

(dependent on
Magnitude Defines the measurement magnitude used for mA output
(dependent on the the
of mA control. The available measurements depend on the
measurement - measurement
output selection of the "Magnitude selection for mA output
category selection) category
channel channel" parameter.
selection)

Input value
1 -107…107 0.001 0 The first input point in the mA output control curve.

© Arcteq Relays Ltd 226

AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

Name Range Step Default Description

Scaled mA
0.0001 The mA output value when the measured value is equal to
output value 0.0000…24.0000 mA 0 mA
mA or less than Input value 1.
1

Input value
2 -107…107 0.001 1 The second input point in the mA output control curve.

Scaled mA
0.0001 The mA output value when the measured value is equal to
output value 0.0000…24.0000 mA 0 mA
mA or greater than Input value 2.
2

Figure. 5.4.4. - 149. Example of the effects of mA output channel settings.

Table. 5.4.4. - 150. Hardware indications.

Name Range Step Description

Hardware in mA output 0: None

channels 1...4 1: Slot A
2: Slot B
3: Slot C
4: Slot D
5: Slot E
6: Slot F
7: Slot G
Indicates the option card slot where the mA output card
8: Slot H -
is located.
Hardware in mA output 9: Slot I
channels 5...8 10: Slot J
11: Slot K
12: Slot L
13: Slot M
14: Slot N
15: Too many cards
installed

Table. 5.4.4. - 151. Measurement values reported by mA output cards.

Name Range Step Description

mA in Channel 1
0.0000…24.0000 0.0001 Displays the measured mA value of the selected input
mA mA channel.
mA in Channel 2

Input magnitude of the mA output Displays the input value of the selected mA output channel
channel -107…107 0.001
at that moment.

Output magnitude of the mA 0.0000…24.0000 0.0001 Displays the output value of the selected mA output
output channel mA mA channel at that moment.

227 © Arcteq Relays Ltd

 AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

Milliampere input
Relays support up to two (2) independent mA option cards. Each card has four (4) mA output channels
and one (1) mA input channel. If the device has an mA option card, enable the mA input at
Measurement → AI (mA, DI volt) scaling. Activating "Analog input scaling" allows for the creation of a
scaling curve (see the image below).

Figure. 5.4.4. - 150. Activating analog input scaling to create a scaling curve.

Table. 5.4.4. - 152. Main settings (input channel).

Name Range Default Description

0: Disabled
Analog input scaling 0: Disabled Enables and disables the mA input.
1: Activated

0: Disabled Enables and disables the scaling curve and the mA input
Scaling curve 1...4 0: Disabled
1: Activated measurement.

0: RTD S1
resistance
…
15: RTD S16
Curve 1...4 input signal 0: RTD S1 Defines the measurement category used for mA input
resistance
select resistance control.
16: mA in 1 (I card
1)
17: mA in 2 (I card
2)

The input signal filter (see the image below) calculates the average of received mA signals according to
the set time constant. This is why rapid changes and disturbances (such as fast spikes) are smothered.

The Nyquist rate states that the filter time constant must be at least double the period time of the
disturbance process signal. For example, the value for the filter time constant is 2 seconds for a 1
second period time of a disturbance oscillation.

© Arcteq Relays Ltd 228

AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

When the curve signal is out of range, it activates the "Out of range" alarm, which can be used inside
logic or with other relay functions. The signal can be assigned directly to an output relay or to an LED in
the I/O matrix. The "Out of range" signal is activated, when the measured mA signal falls below the set
input minimum limit, or when it exceeds the input maximum limit. The "Out of range" signal is very
useful when e.g. a 4…20 mA input signal is used (see the image below).

If for some reason the mA input signal is lost, the value is fixed to the last actual measured cycle value.
The value does not go down to the minimum if it has been something else at the time of the signal
breaking.

Table. 5.4.4. - 153. Output settings and indications.

Name Range Step Default Description

Curve 1...4 5...10 000 Defines the length of the mA input measurement update cycle. If the user
5 ms 150 ms
update cycle ms wants a fast operation, this setting should be fairly low.

0: Floating
point
1: Integer
0:
Scaled value out (Floor)
- Floating Rounds the milliampere signal output as selected.
handling 2: Integer
point
(Ceiling)
3: Integer
(Nearest)

0.000
Input value 1 0...4000 0 The measured milliampere input value at Curve Point 1.
01

Scaled output 0.000

value 1 -107...107 01
0 Scales the measured milliampere signal at Point 1.

0.000
Input value 2 0...4000 1 The measured milliampere input value at Curve Point 2.
01

Scaled output 0.000

value 1 -107...107 01
0 Scales the measured milliampere signal at Point 2.

Add 0: Not
0: Not Allows the user to create their own curve with up to twenty (20) curve
curvepoint used -
used points, instead of using a linear curve between two points.
3...20 1: Used

229 © Arcteq Relays Ltd

 AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

5.4.5. Programmable control switch

The programmable control switch is a control function that controls its binary output signal. This output
signal can be controlled locally from the relay's mimic (displayed as a box in the mimic) or remotely
from the RTU. The main purpose of programmable control switches is to block or enable function and
to change function properties by changing the setting group. However, this binary signal can also be
used for any number of other purposes, just like all other binary signals. Once a programmable control
switch has been activated or disabled, it remains in that state until given a new command to switch to
the opposite state (see the image below). The switch cannot be controlled by an auxiliary input, such
as digital inputs or logic signals; it can only be controlled locally (mimic) or remotely (RTU).

Settings.
These settings can be accessed at Control → Device I/O → Programmable control switch.

Table. 5.4.5. - 154. Settings.

Name Range Default Description

The user-settable name of the selected switch. The name can be up to

Switch name - Switchx
32 characters long.

0: User
1: Operator
Access level for 2: 2: Determines which access level is required to be able to control the
Mimic control Configurator Configurator programmable control switch via the Mimic.
3: Super
user

Events
The programmable control switch function (abbreviated "PCS" in event block names) generates events
from status changes. The user can select which event messages are stored in the main event buffer:
ON, OFF, or both. The function offers five (5) independent switches.

Table. 5.4.5. - 155. Event codes.

Event number Event channel Event block name Event code Description

384 6 PCS 0 Switch 1 ON

385 6 PCS 1 Switch 1 OFF

386 6 PCS 2 Switch 2 ON

387 6 PCS 3 Switch 2 OFF

388 6 PCS 4 Switch 3 ON

389 6 PCS 5 Switch 3 OFF

390 6 PCS 6 Switch 4 ON

391 6 PCS 7 Switch 4 OFF

392 6 PCS 8 Switch 5 ON

393 6 PCS 9 Switch 5 OFF

© Arcteq Relays Ltd 230

AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

5.5. Monitoring functions

5.5.1. Current transformer supervision

The current transformer supervision function (abbreviated CTS in this document) is used for monitoring
the CTs as well as the wirings between the device and the CT inputs for malfunctions and wire breaks.
An open CT circuit can generate dangerously high voltages into the CT secondary side, and
cause unintended activations of current balance monitoring functions.

The function constantly monitors the instant values and the key calculated magnitudes of the phase
currents. Additionally, the residual current circuit can be monitored if the residual current is measured
from a dedicated residual current CT. The user can enable and disable the residual circuit monitoring at
will.

The blocking signal and the setting group selection control the operating characteristics of the function
during normal operation, i.e. the user or user-defined logic can change function parameters while the
function is running.

The outputs of the function are the CTS ALARM and BLOCKED signals. The function uses a total of
eight (8) separate setting groups which can be selected from one common source. Also, the operating
mode of the function can be changed via setting group selection.

The operational logic consists of the following:

• input magnitude processing

• threshold comparator
• block signal check
• time delay characteristics
• output processing.

The following conditions have to met simultaneously for the function alarm to activate:

• None of the three-phase currents exceeds the Iset high limit setting.
• At least one of the three-phase currents exceeds the Iset low limit setting.
• At least one of the three-phase currents are below the Iset low limit setting.
• The ratio between the calculated minum and maximum of the three-phase currents is below
the Iset ratio setting.
• The ratio between the negative sequence and the positive sequence exceeds the I2/I1
ratio setting.
• The calculated difference (IL1+IL2+IL3+I0) exceeds the Isum difference setting (optional).
• The above-mentioned condition is met until the set time delay for alarm.

The inputs of the function are the following:

• setting parameters
• measured and pre-processed current magnitudes.

The output signals can be used for direct I/O controlling and user logic programming. The
function generates general time-stamped ON/OFF events to the common event buffer from each of the
two (2) output signal. The time stamp resolution is 1 ms. The function also provides a resettable
cumulative counter for the CTS ALARM and BLOCKED events.

The following figure presents a simplified function block diagram of the current transformer supervision
function.

231 © Arcteq Relays Ltd

 AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

Figure. 5.5.1. - 151. Simplified function block diagram of the CTS function.

Measured input
The function block uses analog current measurement values, the RMS magnitude of the current
measurement inputs, and the calculated positive and negative sequence currents. The user can select
what is used for the residual current measurement: nothing, the I01 RMS measurement, or the I02
RMS measurement.

Table. 5.5.1. - 156. Measured inputs of the CTS function.

Signal Description Time base

IL1RMS RMS measurement of phase L1 (A) current 5 ms

IL2RMS RMS measurement of phase L2 (B) current 5 ms

IL3RMS RMS measurement of phase L3 (C) current 5 ms

I01RMS RMS measurement of residual input I01 5 ms

I02RMS RMS measurement of residual input I02 5 ms

I1 Phase current's positive sequence component 5 ms

I2 Phase current's negative sequence component 5 ms

IL1Ang Angle of phase L1 (A) current 5 ms

IL2 Ang Angle of phase L2 (B) current 5 ms

IL3 Ang Angle of phase L3 (C) current 5 ms

I01 Ang Angle of residual input I01 5 ms

I02 Ang Angle of residual input I02 5 ms

© Arcteq Relays Ltd 232

AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

The selection of the AI channel in use is made with a setting parameter. In all possible input channel
variations the pre-fault condition is presented with a 20 ms averaged history value from -20 ms from
START or TRIP event.

Table. 5.5.1. - 157. Residual current input signals.

Name Range Step Default Description

Selects the measurement input for the residual current. If the residual current is
0: Not
measured with a separate CT, the residual current circuit can be monitored with the
I0 input in use 0: Not
- CTS function as well. However, this does not apply to summing connections
selection 1: I01 in use
(Holmgren, etc.). If the phase current CT is summed with I01 or I02, this selection
2: I02
should be set to "Not in use".

Pick-up
The Iset and I0set setting parameters control the current-dependent pick-up and activation of the
current transformer supervision function. They define the minimum and maximum allowed measured
current before action from the function. The function constantly calculates the ratio between the setting
values and the measured magnitude (Im) for each of the three phases and for the selected residual
current input. The reset ratio of 97 % and 103% are built into the function and is always relative to the
Iset value. The setting value is common for all measured amplitudes, and when the Im exceeds the
Iset value (in single, dual or all currents) it triggers the pick-up operation of the function.

Table. 5.5.1. - 158. Pick-up settings.

Name Range Step Default Description

Determines the pick-up threshold for phase current measurement. This

setting limit defines the upper limit for the phase current's pick-up
Iset high 0.01 × 1.20 × element.
0.01…40.00 × In
limit In In
If this condition is met, it is considered as fault and the function is not
activated.

Determines the pick-up threshold for phase current measurement. This

Iset low 0.01 × 0.10 × setting limit defines the lower limit for the phase current's pick-up element.
0.01…40.00 × In
limit In In
This condition has to be met for the function to activate.

Determines the pick-up ratio threshold between the minimum and

0.01 10.00 maximum values of the phase current.
Iset ratio 0.01…100.00 %
% %
This condition has to be met for the function to activate.

Determines the pick-up ratio threshold for the negative and positive
sequence currents calculated from the phase currents.

0.01 49.00 This condition has to be met for the function to activate.
I2/I1 ratio 0.01…100.00 %
% %
The ratio is 50 % for a full single-phasing fault (i.e. when one of the
phases is lost entirely). Setting this at 49 % allows a current of 0.01 × In to
flow in one phase, wile the other two are at nominal current.

Determines the pick-up ratio threshold for the calculated residual phase
Isum 0.01 × 0.10 ×
0.01…40.00 × In current and the measured residual current. If the measurement circuit is
difference In In
healthy, the sum of these two currents should be 0.

Time
0.000…1800.000 0.005 Determines the delay between the activation of the function and the
delay for 0.5 s
s s alarm.
alarm

The pick-up activation of the function is not directly equal to the START signal generation of the
function. The START signal is allowed if the blocking condition is not active. When the activation of the
pick-up is based on binary signals, the activation happens immediately after the monitored signal is
activated.

233 © Arcteq Relays Ltd

 AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

Function blocking
The block signal is checked in the beginning of each program cycle. The blocking signal is received
from the blocking matrix in the function's dedicated input. If the blocking signal is not activated when
the pick-up element activates, a START signal is generated and the function proceeds to the time
characteristics calculation.

If the blocking signal is active when the pick-up element activates, a BLOCKED signal is generated and
the function does not process the situation further. If the START function has been activated before the
blocking signal, it resets and the release time characteristics are processed similarly to when the pick-
up signal is reset.

The blocking of the function causes an HMI display event and a time-stamped blocking event with
information of the startup current values and its fault type to be issued.

The blocking signal can also be tested in the commissioning phase by a software switch signal when
the relay's testing mode "Enable stage forcing" is activated (General → Device).

The variables the user can set are binary signals from the system. The blocking signal needs to reach
the device minimum of 5 ms before the set operating delay has passed in order for the blocking to
activate in time.

Operating time characteristics

This function supports definite time delay (DT). For detailed information on this delay type please refer
to the chapter "General properties of a protection function" and its section "Operating time
characteristics for trip and reset".

Typical cases of current transformer supervision

The following nine examples present some typical cases of the current transformer supervision and
their setting effects.

Figure. 5.5.1. - 152. All works properly, no faults.

© Arcteq Relays Ltd 234

AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

Figure. 5.5.1. - 153. Secondary circuit fault in phase L1 wiring.

When a fault is detected and all conditions are met, the CTS timer starts counting. If the situation
continues until the set time has passed, the function issues an alarm.

Figure. 5.5.1. - 154. Primary circuit fault in phase L1 wiring.

In this example, distinguishing between a primary fault and a secondary fault is impossible. However,
the situation meets the function's activation conditions, and if this state (secondary circuit fault)
continues until the set time has passed, the function issues an alarm. This means that the function
supervises both the primary and the secondary circuit.

235 © Arcteq Relays Ltd

 AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

Figure. 5.5.1. - 155. No wiring fault but heavy unbalance.

If any of the phases exceed the Iset high limit setting, the operation of the function is not activated. This
behavior is applied to short-circuits and earth faults even when the fault current exceeds the Iset high
limit setting.

Figure. 5.5.1. - 156. Low current and heavy unbalance.

If all of the measured phase magnitudes are below the Iset low limit setting, the function is not activated
even when the other conditions (inc. the unbalance condition) are met.

© Arcteq Relays Ltd 236

AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

If the Iset high limit and Iset low limit setting parameters are adjusted according to the application's
normal behavior, the operation of the function can be set to be very sensitive for broken circuit and
conductor faults.

Figure. 5.5.1. - 157. Normal situation, residual current also measured.

When the residual condition is added with the "I0 input selection", the sum of the current and the
residual current are compared against each other to verify the wiring condition.

Figure. 5.5.1. - 158. Broken secondary phase current wiring.

When phase current wire is broken all of the conditions are met in the CTS and alarm shall be issued in
case if the situation continues until the set alarming time is met.

237 © Arcteq Relays Ltd

 AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

Figure. 5.5.1. - 159. Broken primary phase current wiring.

In this example, all other condition are met except the residual difference. That is now 0 × In, which
indicates a primary side fault.

Figure. 5.5.1. - 160. Primary side high-impedance earth fault.

In this example there is a high-impedance earth fault. It does not activate the function, if the
measurement conditions are met, while the calculated and measured residual current difference does
not reach the limit. The Isum difference setting should be set according to the application in order to
reach maximum security and maximum sensitivity for the network earthing.

Events and registers

The current transformer supervision function (abbreviated "CTS" in event block names) generates
events and registers from the status changes in ALARM ACTIVATED and BLOCKED signals. The user
can select which event messages are stored in the main event buffer: ON, OFF, or both.

The events triggered by the function are recorded with a time stamp and with process data values.

© Arcteq Relays Ltd 238

AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

Table. 5.5.1. - 159. Event codes.

Event number Event channel Event block name Event code Description

3328 52 CTS1 0 Alarm ON

3329 52 CTS1 1 Alarm OFF

3330 52 CTS1 2 Block ON

3331 52 CTS1 3 Block OFF

The function registers its operation into the last twelve (12) time-stamped registers; this information is
available for all provided instances separately. The register of the function records the ON event
process data for ACTIVATED, BLOCKED, etc. The table below presents the structure of the function's
register content.

Table. 5.5.1. - 160. Register content.

Date Time to Used

Event code Trigger currents Ftype
and time CTSact SG

Time
The status Setting
The phase currents (L1, L2 & L3), the remaining
dd.mm.yyyy code of the group
3328-3459 Descr. residual currents (I01 & I02), and the before the
hh:mm:ss.mss monitored 1...8
sequence currents (I1 & I2) on trigger time. function is
current. active.
active.

5.5.2. Voltage transformer supervision (60)

Voltage transformer supervision is used to detect errors in the secondary circuit of the voltage
transformer during fuse failure. This signal is mostly used as an alarming function or to disable
functions that require adequate voltage measurement.

Measured input
The function block uses analog voltage measurement values. Function uses the RMS value of the
voltage measurement inputs and the calculated (positive, negative and zero) sequence currents.

Table. 5.5.2. - 161. Measurement inputs of the voltage transformer supervision function.

Signal Description Time base

UL12RMS RMS measurement of voltage UL12/V 5 ms

UL23RMS RMS measurement of voltage UL23/V 5 ms

UL31RMS RMS measurement of voltage UL31/V 5 ms

UL1RMS RMS measurement of voltage UL1/V 5 ms

UL2RMS RMS measurement of voltage UL2/V 5 ms

UL3RMS RMS measurement of voltage UL3/V 5 ms

U1P Positive sequence voltage 5 ms

U2N Negative sequence voltage 5 ms

UZ0 Zero sequence voltage 5 ms

UL12Ang Angle of UL12 voltage 5 ms

UL23Ang Angle of UL23 voltage 5 ms

UL31Ang Angle of UL31 voltage 5 ms

239 © Arcteq Relays Ltd

 AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

Signal Description Time base

UL1Ang Angle of UL1 voltage 5 ms

UL2Ang Angle of UL2 voltage 5 ms

UL3Ang Angle of UL3 voltage 5 ms

The selection of the AI channel in use is made with a setting parameter. In all possible input channel
variations the pre-fault condition is presented with a 20 ms averaged history value from -20 ms from
START or TRIP event.

Pick-up
The Voltage low pick-up and Voltage high detect setting parameters control the voltage-dependent
pick-up and activation of the voltage transformer supervision function. The function's pick-up activates,
if at least one of the three voltages is under the set Voltage low pick-up value, or if at least two of the
three voltages exceed the set Voltage high detect value. The function constantly calculates the ratio
between the setting values and the measured magnitude for each of the three phases.

Table. 5.5.2. - 162. Pick-up settings.

Name Range Step Default Description

Voltage
0.05…0.50 × 0.01 × 0.05 × If at least one of the measured voltages is below this set value, the function's
low
Un Un Un pick-up activates.
pickup

Voltage
0.01…1.10 × 0.01 × 0.80 × If at least two of the measured voltages exceed this set value, the
high
Un Un Un function's pick-up activates.
detect

Angle
2.00…90.00 0.10 5.00 If the difference between the present angle and the angle 40 ms before is below
shift
deg deg deg the set value, the function's pick-up activates.
limit

Bus
0: No Selects whether or not the state of the bus fuse is supervised. The supervised
fuse fail - 1: Yes
1: Yes signal is determined the "VTS MCB Trip bus" setting (I/O → Fuse failure inputs).
check

Line Selects whether or not the state of the line fuse is supervised. The supervised
0: No
fuse fail - 1: Yes signal is determined by the "VTS MCB Trip line" setting (I/O → Fuse failure
1: Yes
check inputs).

The pick-up activation of the function is not directly equal to the START signal generation of the
function. The START signal is allowed if the blocking condition is not active. When the activation of the
pick-up is based on binary signals, the activation happens immediately after the monitored signal is
activated.

The voltage transformer supervision can also report several different states of the measured voltage.
These can be seen in the function's INFO tab in the relay's HMI or in AQtivate.

Name Description

Bus dead No voltages.

Bus Live VTS Ok All of the voltages are within the set limits.

Bus Live VTS Ok SEQ Rev All of the voltages are within the set limits BUT the voltages are in a reversed sequence.

Bus Live VTS Ok SEQ Undef Voltages are within the set limits BUT the sequence cannot be defined.

Bus Live VTS problem Any of the VTS pick-up conditions are met.

© Arcteq Relays Ltd 240

AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

Function blocking
The block signal is checked in the beginning of each program cycle. The blocking signal is received
from the blocking matrix in the function's dedicated input. If the blocking signal is not activated when
the pick-up element activates, a START signal is generated and the function proceeds to the time
characteristics calculation.

If the blocking signal is active when the pick-up element activates, a BLOCKED signal is generated and
the function does not process the situation further. If the START function has been activated before the
blocking signal, it resets and the release time characteristics are processed similarly to when the pick-
up signal is reset.

The blocking of the function causes an HMI display event and a time-stamped blocking event with
information of the startup voltage values and its fault type to be issued.

The blocking signal can also be tested in the commissioning phase by a software switch signal when
the relay's testing mode "Enable stage forcing" is activated (General → Device).

The variables the user can set are binary signals from the system. The blocking signal needs to reach
the device minimum of 5 ms before the set operating delay has passed in order for the blocking to
activate in time.

Operating time characteristics for activation

This function supports definite time delay (DT). For detailed information on this delay type please refer
to the chapter "General properties of a protection function" and its section "Operating time
characteristics for trip and reset".

Events and registers

The voltage transformer supervision function (abbreviated "VTS" in event block names) generates
events and registers from the status changes in ALARM ACTIVATED and BLOCKED signals. The user
can select which event messages are stored in the main event buffer: ON, OFF, or both.

The events triggered by the function are recorded with a time stamp and with process data values.

Table. 5.5.2. - 163. Event codes.

Event number Event channel Event block name Event code Description

3392 53 VTS1 0 Bus VT fail Start ON

3393 53 VTS1 1 Bus VT fail Start OFF

3394 53 VTS1 2 Bus VT fail Trip ON

3395 53 VTS1 3 Bus VT fail Trip OFF

3396 53 VTS1 4 Bus VT fail Block ON

3397 53 VTS1 5 Bus VT fail Block OFF

3398 53 VTS1 6 Line VT fail ON

3399 53 VTS1 7 Line VT fail OFF

3400 53 VTS1 8 Bus Fuse fail ON

3401 53 VTS1 9 Bus Fuse fail OFF

3402 53 VTS1 10 Line Fuse fail ON

3403 53 VTS1 11 Line Fuse fail OFF

241 © Arcteq Relays Ltd

 AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

The function registers its operation into the last twelve (12) time-stamped registers. The register of the
function records the ON event process data for ACTIVATED, BLOCKED, etc. The table below
presents the structure of the function's register content.

Table. 5.5.2. - 164. Register content.

Event
Volt 1, 2, 3, Input A, B, C, D Trip time
Date and time System status Used SG
4 status angle diff remaining
code

0: Bus dead
1: Bus live, VTS
0: No voltage
OK, Seq. OK
1: Voltage
dd.mm.yyyy 3392-3403 2: Bus live, VTS Setting group
OK 0.00...360.00 deg 0...1800 s
hh:mm:ss.mss Descr. OK, Seq. reversed 1...8 active
2: Low
3: Bus live, VTS
voltage
OK, Seq. undefined
4: Bus live, VTS fault

5.5.3. Disturbance recorder (DR)

The disturbance recorder is a high-capacity (64 MB) and fully digital recorder integrated to the
protection relay. The maximum sample rate of the recorder's analog channels is 64 samples per cycle.
The recorder also supports 95 digital channels simultaneously with the twenty (20) measured analog
channels.

The recorder provides a great tool to analyze the performance of the power system during network
disturbance situations. The recorder's output is in general COMTRADE format and it is compatible with
most viewers and injection devices. The files are based on the IEEE standard C37.111-1999. Captured
recordings can be injected as playback with secondary testing tools that support the COMTRADE file
format. Playback of files might help to analyze the fault, or can be simply used for educational
purposes.

Analog and digital recording channels

Up to 20 analog recording channels and 95 digital channels are supported. The available analog
channels vary according to the device type.

Table. 5.5.3. - 165. Analog recording channels.

Signal Description

IL1 Phase current IL1

IL2 Phase current IL2

IL3 Phase current IL3

I01c Residual current I01 coarse*

I01f Residual current I01 fine*

I02c Residual current I02 coarse*

I02f Residual current I02 fine*

IL1” Phase current IL1 (CT card 2)

IL2” Phase current IL2 (CT card 2)

IL3” Phase current IL3 (CT card 2)

I01”c Residual current I01 coarse* (CT card 2)

I01”f Residual current I01 fine* (CT card 2)

© Arcteq Relays Ltd 242

AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

Signal Description

I02”c Residual current I02 coarse* (CT card 2)

I02”f Residual current I02 fine* (CT card 2)

U1(2)VT1 Line-to-neutral UL1 or line-to-line voltage U12 (VT card 1)

U2(3)VT1 Line-to-neutral UL2 or line-to-line voltage U23 (VT card 1)

U3(1)VT1 Line-to-neutral UL3 or line-to-line voltage U31 (VT card 1)

U0(ss)VT1 Zero sequence voltage U0 or synchrocheck voltage USS (VT card 1)

F tracked 1 Tracked frequency of reference 1

F tracked 2 Tracked frequency of reference 2

F tracked 3 Tracked frequency of reference 3

ISup Current measurement module voltage supply supervision (CT card 1)

ISup'' Current measurement module voltage supply supervision (CT card 2)

USup Voltage measurement module voltage supply supervision (VT card 2)

IL1''' Phase current IL1 (CT card 3)

IL2''' Phase current IL2 (CT card 3)

IL3''' Phase current IL3 (CT card 3)

I01'''c Residual current I01 coarse* (CT card 3)

I01'''f Residual current I01 fine* (CT card 3)

I02'''c Residual current I02 coarse* (CT card 3)

I02'''f Residual current I02 fine* (CT card 3)

ISup_3 Current measurement module voltage supply supervision (CT card 3)

UL1(2)VT2 Line-to-neutral UL1 or line-to-line voltage U12 (VT card 2)

UL2(3)VT2 Line-to-neutral UL2 or line-to-line voltage U23 (VT card 2)

UL3(1)VT2 Line-to-neutral UL3 or line-to-line voltage U31 (VT card 2)

U0(SS)VT2 Zero sequence voltage U0 or synchrocheck voltage USS (VT card 2)

USup_2 Voltage measurement module voltage supply supervision (VT card 2)

*NO
*NOTE
TE: There are two signals for each current channel in the disturbance recorder: coarse and fine. A
coarse signal is capable of sampling in the full range of the current channel but suffers a loss of
accuracy at very low currents (< 3 A). A fine signal is capable of sampling at very low currents and with
high accuracy but cuts off at higher currents (I01 peaks at 15 A, I02 peaks at 8 A).

Table. 5.5.3. - 166. Digital recording channels – Measurements.

Signal Description Signal Description

Currents

Primary phase current ILx Primary phase current TRMS (IL1, IL2,
Pri.Pha.curr.ILx Pha.curr.ILx TRMS Pri
(IL1, IL2, IL3) IL3)

Phase angle ILx (IL1, IL2,

Pha.angle ILx Pos./Neg./Zero seq.curr. Positive/Negative/Zero sequence current
IL3)

Phase current ILx (IL1, IL2, Secondary positive/negative/zero

Pha.curr.ILx Sec.Pos./Neg./Zero seq.curr.
IL3) sequence current

243 © Arcteq Relays Ltd

 AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

Signal Description Signal Description

Secondary phase current Primary positive/negative/zero sequence

Sec.Pha.curr.ILx Pri.Pos./Neg./Zero seq.curr.
ILx (IL1, IL2, IL3) current

Primary residual current I0x Pos./Neg./Zero Positive/Negative/Zero sequence current

Pri.Res.curr.I0x
(I01, I02) seq.curr.angle angle

Residual current angle I0x

Res.curr.angle I0x Res.curr.I0x TRMS Residual current TRMS I0x (I01, I02)
(I01, I02)

Residual current I0x (I01, Secondary residual current TRMS I0x (I01,
Res.curr.I0x Res.curr.I0x TRMS Sec
I02) I02)

Secondary residual current Primary residual current TRMS I0x (I01,

Sec.Res.curr.I0x Res.curr.I0x TRMS Pri
I0x (I01, I02) I02)

Pri.cal.I0 Primary calculated I0 Pha.Lx ampl. THD Phase Lx amplitude THD (L1, L2, L3)

Sec.calc.I0 Secondary calculated I0 Pha.Lx pow. THD Phase Lx power THD (L1, L2, L3)

calc.I0 Calculated I0 Res.I0x ampl. THD Residual I0x amplitude THD (I01, I02)

calc.I0 Pha.angle Calculated I0 phase angle Res.I0x pow. THD Residual I0x power THD (I01, I02)

Phase current TRMS

Pha.curr.ILx TRMS P-P curr.ILx Phase-to-phase current ILx (IL1, IL2, IL3)
ILx (IL1, IL2, IL3)

Pha.curr.ILx TRMS Secondary phase current

P-P curr.I0x Phase-to-phase current I0x (I01, I02)
Sec TRMS (IL1, IL2, IL3)

Voltages

Ux voltage in per-unit values Magnitude of the system voltage ULxx

Ux Volt p.u. System volt ULxx mag
(U1, U2, U3, U4) (UL12, UL23, UL31)

Primary Ux voltage (U1, U2, Magnitude of the system voltage ULxx in

Ux Volt pri System volt ULxx mag(kV)
U3, U4) kilovolts (UL12, UL23, UL31)

Secondary Ux voltage (U1, Angle of the system voltage ULxx (UL12,

Ux Volt sec System volt ULxx ang
U2, U3, U4) UL23, UL31)

Ux voltage TRMS in per-unit Magnitude of the system voltage ULx (U1,

Ux Volt TRMS p.u. System volt ULx mag
values (U1, U2, U3, U4) U2, U3, U4)

Primary Ux voltage Magnitude of the system voltage ULx in

Ux Volt TRMS pri System volt ULx mag(kV)
TRMS (U1, U2, U3, U4) kilovolts (U1, U2, U3, U4)

Secondary Ux voltage Angle of the system voltage ULx (U1, U2,

Ux Volt TRMS sec System volt ULx ang
TRMS (U1, U2, U3, U4) U3, U4)

Positive/Negative/
Pos/Neg./Zero
Zero sequence voltage in System volt U0 mag Magnitude of the system voltage U0
seq.Volt.p.u.
per-unit values

Pos./Neg./Zero Primary positive/negative/ Magnitude of the system voltage U0 in

System volt U0 mag(kV)
seq.Volt.pri zero sequence voltage kilovolts

Secondary positive/
Pos./Neg./Zero Magnitude of the system voltage U0 in
negative/zero sequence System volt U0 mag(%)
seq.Volt.sec percentages
voltage

Ux Angle Ux angle (U1, U2, U3, U4) System volt U0 ang Angle of the system voltage U0

Pos./Neg./Zero Positive/Negative/Zero
Ux Angle difference Ux angle difference (U1, U2, U3)
Seq volt.Angle sequence voltage angle

Resistive and
reactive currents

ILx resistive current in per-

ILx Resistive Pos.seq. Resistive Current Primary positive sequence resistive
unit values (IL1, IL2, IL3)
Current p.u. Pri. current

ILx Reactive ILx reactive current in per- Pos.seq. Reactive Current

Primary positive sequence reactive current
Current p.u. unit values (IL1, IL2, IL3) Pri.

© Arcteq Relays Ltd 244

AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

Signal Description Signal Description

Pos.Seq. Resistive Positive sequence resistive I0x Residual Resistive Primary residual resistive current I0x (I01,
Current p.u. current in per-unit values Current Pri. I02)

Pos.Seq. Reactive Positive sequence reactive I0x Residual Reactive Primary residual reactive current I0x (I01,
Current p.u. current in per-unit values Current Pri. I02)

I0x Residual
I0x residual resistive current Secondary resistive current ILx (IL1, IL2,
Resistive Current ILx Resistive Current Sec.
in per-unit values (I01, I02) IL3)
p.u.

I0x Residual
I0x residual ractive current Secondary reactive current ILx (IL1, IL2,
Reactive Current ILx Reactive Current Sec.
in per-unit values (I01, I02) IL3)
p.u.

ILx Resistive Primary resistive current ILx I0x Residual Resistive Secondary residual resistive current I0x
Current Pri. (IL1, IL2, IL3) Current Sec. (I01, I02)

ILx Reactive Primary reactive current ILx I0x Residual Reactive Secondary residual reactive current I0x
Current Pri. (IL1, IL2, IL3) Current Sec. (I01, I02)

Power, GYB,
frequency

Lx PF Lx power factor (L1, L2, L3) Curve x Input Input of Curve x (1, 2, 3, 4)

POW1 3PH
Three-phase apparent
Apparent power Curve x Output Output of Curve x (1, 2, 3, 4)
power
(S)

POW1 3PH
Three-phase apparent
Apparent power Enablefbasedfunctions(VT1) Enable frequency-based functions
power in megavolt-amperes
(S MVA)

POW1 3PH Active

Three-phase active power Track.sys.f. Tracked system frequency
power (P)

POW1 3PH Active Three-phase active power

Sampl.f. used Used sample frequency
power (P MW) in megawatts

POW1 3PH
Reactive power Three-phase reactive power Tr f CH x Tracked frequency (channels A, B, C)
(Q)

POW1 3PH
Three-phase reactive power
Reactive power (Q Alg f Fast Fast frequency algorithm
in megavars
MVar)

POW1 3PH
Three-phase tangent phi Alg f avg Average frequency algorithm
Tan(phi)

POW1 3PH Frequency based When true ("1"), all frequency-based

Three-phase cosine phi
Cos(phi) protections blocked protections are blocked.

f atm. Protections (when not Frequency at the moment. If the system

3PH PF Three-phase power factor measurable returns to nominal is set to 50 Hz, this will show "50
nominal) Hz".

Neutral
Primary neutral f atm. Display (when not Frequency at the moment. If the frequency
conductance G
conductance measurable is 0 Hz) is not measurable, this will show "0 Hz".
(Pri)

Neutral
Primary neutral
susceptance B f meas qlty Quality of tracked frequency
susceptance
(Pri)

Indicates which of the three voltage or

Neutral
Primary neutral admittance f meas from current channel frequencies is used by the
admittance Y (Pri)
relay.

Neutral Synchrocheck – the measured frequency

admittance Y Neutral admittace angle SS1.meas.frqs from voltage channel 1
(Ang)

245 © Arcteq Relays Ltd

 AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

Signal Description Signal Description

I01 Resistive Primary resistive Synchrocheck – the measured frequency

SS2.meas.frqs
component (Pri) component I01 from voltage channel 2

Status of this signal is active when

I01 Capacitive Primary capacitive
Enable f based functions frequency-based protection functions are
component (Pri) component I01
enabled.

Table. 5.5.3. - 167. Digital recording channels – Binary signals.

Signal Description Signal Description

DIx Digital input 1...11 Timer x Output Output of Timer 1...10

Open/close
Active if buttons I or 0 in the unit's If the unit has an internal fault, this signal
control Internal Relay Fault active
front panel are pressed. is active.
buttons

Status
(Protection, control and (see the individual function description for
PushButton x Status of Push Button 1...12 is ON
monitoring event signals) the specific outputs)
On

Status
Status of Push Button 1...12 is "Always false" is always "0". Always true is
PushButton x Always True/False
OFF always "1".
Off

Forced SG in
Stage forcing in use OUTx Output contact statuses
use

SGx Active Setting group 1...8 active GOOSE INx GOOSE input 1...64

Double
Double ethernet communication
Ethernet LinkA GOOSE INx quality Quality of GOOSE input 1...64
card link A connection is down.
down

Double
Double ethernet communication
Ethernet LinkB Logical Input x Logical input 1...32
card link B connection is down.
down

MBIO ModA Channel 1...8 of MBIO Mod A is

Logical Output x Logical output 1...64
Ch x Invalid invalid

MBIO ModB Channel 1...8 of MBIO Mod B is If NTP time synchronization is lost, this
NTP sync alarm
Ch x Invalid invalid signal will be active.

MBIO ModB Channel 1...8 of MBIO Mod C is Ph.Rotating Logic control Phase rotating order at the moment. If
Ch x Invalid invalid 0=A-B-C, 1=A-C-B true ("1") the phase order is reversed.

NO
NOTE!
TE!

Digital channels are measured every 5 ms.

Recording settings and triggering

Disturbance recorder can be triggered manually or automatically by using the dedicated triggers. Every
signal listed in "Digital recording channels" can be selected to trigger the recorder.

The device has a maximum limit of 100 for the number of recordings. Even when the recordings are
very small, their number cannot exceed 100. The number of analog and digital channels together with
the sample rate and the time setting affect the recording size. See calculation examples below in the
section titled "Estimating the maximum length of total recording time".

© Arcteq Relays Ltd 246

AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

Table. 5.5.3. - 168. Recorder control settings.

Name Range Step Default Description

Recorder 0: Enabled 0:
- Enables and disables the disturbance recorder function.
enabled 1: Disabled Enabled

0: Recorder
ready
1: Recording
triggered
0:
Recorder 2: Recording and
- Recorder Indicates the status of recorder.
status storing
ready
3: Storing
recording
4: Recorder full
5: Wrong config

Clears selected recording. If "1" is inserted, first recording will be

Clear 32 cleared from memory. If "10" is inserted, tenth (10th) recording will be
0…2 -1 1 -
record+ cleared from memory.

Manual 0: - Triggers disturbance recording manually. This parameter will return

- 0: -
trigger 1: Trig back to "-" automatically.

Clear all 0: -
- 0: - Clears all disturbance recordings.
records 1: Clear

Clear
0: -
newest - 0: - Clears the newest stored disturbance recording.
1: Clear
record

Clear
0: -
oldest - 0: - Clears the oldest stored disturbance recording.
1: Clear
record

Max. Displays the maximum number of recordings that can be stored in the
number of 0…100 1 - device's memory with settings currently in use. The maximum number
recordings of recordings can go up to 100.

Max. length
0.000...1800.000 0.001
of a - Displays the maximum length of a single recording.
s s
recording

Max.
location of 0.000...1800.000 0.001 Displays the highest pre-triggering time that can be set with the settings
-
the pre- s s currently in use.
trigger

Recordings
0…100 1 - Displays how many recordings are stored in the memory.
in memory

Table. 5.5.3. - 169. Recorder trigger setting.

Name Description

Recorder Selects the trigger input(s). Clicking the "Edit" button brings up a pop-up window, and checking the boxes
trigger enable the selected triggers.

Table. 5.5.3. - 170. Recorder settings.

Name Range Step Default Description

0.100...1800.000 0.01
Recording length 1s Sets the length of a recording.
s s

Selects what happens when the memory is full.

0: FIFO
Recording mode - 0: FIFO
1: Keep olds "FIFO" (= first in, first out) replaces the oldest stored recording with
the latest one. "Keep olds" does not accept new recordings.

247 © Arcteq Relays Ltd

 AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

Name Range Step Default Description

0: 64 s/c
Selects the sample rate of the disturbance recorder in samples per
Analog channel 1: 32 s/c
- 0: 64 s/c cycle. The samples are saved from the measured wave according
samples 2: 16 s/c
to this setting.
3: 8 s/c

Digital channel 5 ms
5 ms (fixed) - The fixed sample rate of the recorded digital channels.
samples (fixed)

Pre-triggering
0.1…15.0 s 0.1 s 0.5 s Sets the recording length before the trigger.
time

0…8 freely Selects the analog channel for recording. Please see the list of all
Analog recording
selectable - - available analog channels in the section titled "Analog and digital
CH1...CH20
channels recording channels".

Enables and disables the automatic transfer of recordings. The

recordings are taken from the relay's protection CPU and
transferred to the relay's FTP directory in the communication CPU;
the FTP client then automatically loads the recordings from the
relay and transfers them further to the SCADA system.

Please note that when this setting is enabled, all new disturbance
Automatically get 0: Disabled 0:
- recordings will be pushed to the FTP server of the relay. Up to six
recordings 1: Enabled Disabled
(6) recordings can be stored in the FTP at once. Once those six
recordings have been retrieved and removed, more recordings will
then be pushed to the FTP.

When a recording has been sent to the FTP server of the relay, it is
no longer accessible through setting tools Disturbance recorder →
Get DR files command.

0…32 freely Selects the digital channel for recording. Please see the list of all
Recorder digital
selectable - - available digital channels in the section titled "Analog and digital
channels
channels recording channels".

NO
NOTE!
TE!

The disturbance recorder is not ready unless the "Max. length of a recording" parameter is
showing some value other than zero. At least one trigger input has to be selected in the
"Recorder Trigger" setting to fulfill this term.

Estimating the maximum length of total recording time

Once the disturbance recorder's settings have been made and loaded to the relay, the device
automatically calculates and displays the total length of recordings. However, if the user wishes to
confirm this calculation, they can do so with the following formula. Please note that the formula
assumes there are no other files in the FTP that share the 64 MB space.

Where:

• total sample reserve = the number of samples available in the FTP when no other files are
saved; calculated by dividing the total number of available bytes by 4 bytes (=the size of one
sample); e.g. 64 306 588 bytes/4 bytes = 16 076 647 samples.
• fn = the nominal frequency (Hz).
• Chan = the number of analog channels recorded; "+ 1" stands for the time stamp for each
recorded sample.
• SR = the selected sample rate (s/c).
• 200 Hz = the rate at which digital channels are always recorded, i.e. 5 ms.
• Chdig = the number of digital channels recorded.
© Arcteq Relays Ltd 248
AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

For example, let us say the nominal frequency is 50 Hz, the selected sample rate is 64 s/c, nine (9)
analog channels and two (2) digital channels record. The calculation is as follows:

Therefore, the maximum recording length in our example is approximately 496 seconds.

Application example
This chapter presents an application example of how to set the disturbance recorder and analyze its
output. The recorder is configured by using the setting tool software or relay HMI, and the results are
analyzed with the AQviewer software (is automatically downloaded and installed with
AQtivate). Registered users can download the latest tools from the Arcteq website
(arcteq.fi./downloads/).

In this example, we want the recordings to be made according to the following specifications:

• the recording length is 6.0 s

• the sample rate is 64 s/c (therefore, with a 50 Hz system frequency a sample is taken every
312.5 µs)
• the analog channels 1...8 are used
• digital channels are tracked every 5 ms
• the first activation of the overcurrent stage trip (I> TRIP) triggers the recorder
• the pre-triggering time is 5 (ie. how long is recorded before the I> TRIP signal) and the post-
triggering time is 1 s

The image below shows how these settings are placed in the setting tool.

249 © Arcteq Relays Ltd

 AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

Figure. 5.5.3. - 161. Disturbance recorder settings.

Figure. 5.5.3. - 162. Effects of recording length and pre-triggering time signals. This example is based on the settings shown
above.

When there is at least one recording in the device's memory, that recording can be analyzed by using
the AQviewer software (see the image below). However, the recording must first be made accessible to
AQViewer. The user can read it from the device's memory (Disturbance recorder → Get DR-
files). Alternatively, the user can load the recordings individually (Disturbance recorder → DR List) from
a folder in the PC's hard disk drive; the exact location of the folder is described in Tools → Settings
→ DR path.

© Arcteq Relays Ltd 250

AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

The user can also launch the AQviewer software from the Disturbance recorder menu.

AQviewer
Opening ffolders
olders

Disturbance recordings can be opened by clicking on the "Open folder" icon or by going to File →
Open (see the image below). The recordings are packed COMTRADE files; a -zip file includes *.cfg
and *.dat files. AQviewer can open both original packed .zip files and COMTRADE files directly as they
are are located in same directory.

Adding signals tto

o plo
plottters

By default, the default plotter is empty. Choose the measured signals ("Analog channels") on the left to
move them to the plotter. In the image below (on the left) the phase currents IL1, IL2 and IL3 are
selected; AQViewer color-codes them automatically. If you want to add another plotter, choose the blue
"+" icon (in the main toolbar on the top). Please note that the "Add plotter" text appears when you move
the cursor on top of the icon. Once clicked, the "Add graph" pop-up window appears (see the image
below on the right). In the example the line-to-neutral voltages UL1, UL2 and UL3 are selected and
moved to the window on the right. Confirm the selection by clicking the "OK" button.

Figure. 5.5.3. - 163. Adding another plotter

General use and zooming

251 © Arcteq Relays Ltd
 AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

1. You can remove plotters individually by using the red "—" icon (numbered "1" in the image
below). Please note that the "Remove plotters" text appears when you move the cursor on top
of the icon.
2. You can add cursors to measure time by staying on top of any plotter and double-clicking the
left mouse button. You can add up to five (5) cursors simultaneously. You can remove cursors
by clicking on the icon (numbered "2" in the image below). Please note that the "Remove all
cursors" text appears when you move the cursor on top of the icon.
3. You can zoom in manually by placing the cursor on top of a plotter, holding down the left
mouse button and moving the cursor to create the area you want to zoom in. You can also
zoom in (and out) by using the horizontal and vertical magnifying glass "+" and "—"
icons (numbered "3" in the image below). If you want to reset the zooming, click on the middle
magnifying glass icon. You can also zoom in and out the amplitude of individual plotters by
holding down Shift and scrolling the mouse wheel up and down, respectively.
4. You can toggle between primary (P) and secondary (S) signals (numbered "4" in the image
below).

Events
The disturbance recorder function (abbreviated "DR" in event block names) generates events and
registers from the status changes of the function: the recorder generates an event each time it is
triggered (manually or by dedicated signals). Events cannot be masked off. The user can select which
event messages are stored in the main event buffer: ON, OFF, or both.

Table. 5.5.3. - 171. Event codes.

Event number Event channel Event block name Event code Description

4096 64 DR1 0 Recorder triggered ON

4097 64 DR1 1 Recorder triggered OFF

4098 64 DR1 2 Recorder memory cleared

4099 64 DR1 3 Oldest record cleared

4100 64 DR1 4 Recorder memory full ON

4101 64 DR1 5 Recorder memory full OFF

4102 64 DR1 6 Recording ON

4103 64 DR1 7 Recording OFF

4104 64 DR1 8 Storing recording ON

4105 64 DR1 9 Storing recording OFF

4106 64 DR1 10 Newest record cleared

© Arcteq Relays Ltd 252

AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

5.5.4. Measurement recorder

Measurements can be recorded to a file with the measurement recorder. The chosen measurements
are recorded at selected intervals. In the "Measurement recorder" window, the measurements the user
wants to be recorded can be selected by checking their respective check boxes. In order for the
measurement recorder to activate, a connection to a relay must be established via the setting tool
software and its Live Edit mode must be enabled (see the AQtivate 200 manual for more information).
Navigate to the measurement recorder through Tools → Miscellaneous tools → Measurement
recorder. The recording interval can be changed from the "Interval" drop-down menu. From the
"Record in" drop-down menu the user can also choose whether the measurements are recorded in the
setting tool or in the relay.

If the recording is done in the setting tool, both the setting tool software and its Live Edit mode have to
be activated. The user can change the recording file location by editing the "Path" field. File names can
also be changed with the "File name" field. Hitting the "Record" button (the big red circle) starts the
recorder. Please note that closing the "Measurement recorder" window does not stop the recording;
that can only be done by hitting the "Stop" button (the big blue circle).

If the recording is done in the relay, only the recording interval needs to be set before recording can be
started. The setting tool estimates the maximum recording time, which depends on the recording
interval. When the measurement recorder is running, the measurements can be viewed in graph form
with the AQtivate PRO software (see the image below).

253 © Arcteq Relays Ltd

 AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

Figure. 5.5.4. - 164. Measurement recorder values viewed with AQtivate PRO.

Table. 5.5.4. - 172. Available analog signals.

Curr
Current
ent mea
measur
surements
ements P-P Curr.I”L3 L1 Imp.React.Ind.E.Mvarh

Pri.Pha.Curr.IL1 P-P Curr.I”01 L1 Imp.React.Ind.E.kvarh

Pri.Pha.Curr.IL2 P-P Curr.I”02 L1 Exp/Imp React.Ind.E.bal.Mvarh

Pri.Pha.Curr.IL3 Pha.angle I”L1 L1 Exp/Imp React.Ind.E.bal.kvarh

Pri.Res.Curr.I01 Pha.angle I”L2 L2 Exp.Active Energy MWh

Pri.Res.Curr.I02 Pha.angle I”L3 L2 Exp.Active Energy kWh

Pri.Calc.I0 Res.Curr.angle I”01 L2 Imp.Active Energy MWh

Pha.Curr.IL1 TRMS Pri Res.Curr.angle I”02 L2 Imp.Active Energy kWh

Pha.Curr.IL2 TRMS Pri Calc.I”0.angle L2 Exp/Imp Act. E balance MWh

Pha.Curr.IL3 TRMS Pri I” Pos.Seq.Curr.angle L2 Exp/Imp Act. E balance kWh

Pri.Pos.Seq.Curr. I” Neg.Seq.Curr.angle L2 Exp.React.Cap.E.Mvarh

Pri.Neg.Seq.Curr. I” Zero.Seq.Curr.angle L2 Exp.React.Cap.E.kvarh

Pri.Zero.Seq.Curr. Volta
oltage
ge mea
measur
surements
ements L2 Imp.React.Cap.E.Mvarh

Res.Curr.I01 TRMS Pri U1Volt Pri L2 Imp.React.Cap.E.kvarh

Res.Curr.I02 TRMS Pri U2Volt Pri L2 Exp/Imp React.Cap.E.bal.Mvarh

Sec.Pha.Curr.IL1 U3Volt Pri L2 Exp/Imp React.Cap.E.bal.kvarh

Sec.Pha.Curr.IL2 U4Volt Pri L2 Exp.React.Ind.E.Mvarh

Sec.Pha.Curr.IL3 U1Volt Pri TRMS L2 Exp.React.Ind.E.kvarh

Sec.Res.Curr.I01 U2Volt Pri TRMS L2 Imp.React.Ind.E.Mvarh

Sec.Res.Curr.I02 U3Volt Pri TRMS L2 Imp.React.Ind.E.kvarh

Sec.Calc.I0 U4Volt Pri TRMS L2 Exp/Imp React.Ind.E.bal.Mvarh

Pha.Curr.IL1 TRMS Sec Pos.Seq.Volt.Pri L2 Exp/Imp React.Ind.E.bal.kvarh

© Arcteq Relays Ltd 254

AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

Pha.Curr.IL2 TRMS Sec Neg.Seq.Volt.Pri L3 Exp.Active Energy MWh

Pha.Curr.IL3 TRMS Sec Zero.Seq.Volt.Pri L3 Exp.Active Energy kWh

Sec.Pos.Seq.Curr. U1Volt Sec L3 Imp.Active Energy MWh

Sec.Neg.Seq.Curr. U2Volt Sec L3 Imp.Active Energy kWh

Sec.Zero.Seq.Curr. U3Volt Sec L3 Exp/Imp Act. E balance MWh

Res.Curr.I01 TRMS Sec U4Volt Sec L3 Exp/Imp Act. E balance kWh

Res.Curr.I02 TRMS Sec U1Volt Sec TRMS L3 Exp.React.Cap.E.Mvarh

Pha.Curr.IL1 U2Volt Sec TRMS L3 Exp.React.Cap.E.kvarh

Pha.Curr.IL2 U3Volt Sec TRMS L3 Imp.React.Cap.E.Mvarh

Pha.Curr.IL3 U4Volt Sec TRMS L3 Imp.React.Cap.E.kvarh

Res.Curr.I01 Pos.Seq.Volt.Sec L3 Exp/Imp React.Cap.E.bal.Mvarh

Res.Curr.I02 Neg.Seq.Volt.Sec L3 Exp/Imp React.Cap.E.bal.kvarh

Calc.I0 Zero.Seq.Volt.Sec L3 Exp.React.Ind.E.Mvarh

Pha.Curr.IL1 TRMS U1Volt p.u. L3 Exp.React.Ind.E.kvarh

Pha.Curr.IL2 TRMS U2Volt p.u. L3 Imp.React.Ind.E.Mvarh

Pha.Curr.IL3 TRMS U3Volt p.u. L3 Imp.React.Ind.E.kvarh

Pos.Seq.Curr. U4Volt p.u. L3 Exp/Imp React.Ind.E.bal.Mvarh

Neg.Seq.Curr. U1Volt TRMS p.u. L3 Exp/Imp React.Ind.E.bal.kvarh

Zero.Seq.Curr. U2Volt TRMS p.u. Exp.Active Energy MWh

Res.Curr.I01 TRMS U3Volt p.u. Exp.Active Energy kWh

Res.Curr.I02 TRMS U4Volt p.u. Imp.Active Energy MWh

Pha.L1 ampl. THD Pos.Seq.Volt. p.u. Imp.Active Energy kWh

Pha.L2 ampl. THD Neg.Seq.Volt. p.u. Exp/Imp Act. E balance MWh

Pha.L3 ampl. THD Zero.Seq.Volt. p.u. Exp/Imp Act. E balance kWh

Pha.L1 pow. THD U1Volt Angle Exp.React.Cap.E.Mvarh

Pha.L2 pow. THD U2Volt Angle Exp.React.Cap.E.kvarh

Pha.L3 pow. THD U3Volt Angle Imp.React.Cap.E.Mvarh

Res.I01 ampl. THD U4Volt Angle Imp.React.Cap.E.kvarh

Res.I01 pow. THD Pos.Seq.Volt. Angle Exp/Imp React.Cap.E.bal.Mvarh

Res.I02 ampl. THD Neg.Seq.Volt. Angle Exp/Imp React.Cap.E.bal.kvarh

Res.I02 pow. THD Zero.Seq.Volt. Angle Exp.React.Ind.E.Mvarh

P-P Curr.IL1 System Volt UL12 mag Exp.React.Ind.E.kvarh

P-P Curr.IL2 System Volt UL12 mag (kV) Imp.React.Ind.E.Mvarh

P-P Curr.IL3 System Volt UL23 mag Imp.React.Ind.E.kvarh

P-P Curr.I01 System Volt UL23 mag (kV) Exp/Imp React.Ind.E.bal.Mvarh

P-P Curr.I02 System Volt UL31 mag Exp/Imp React.Ind.E.bal.kvarh

Pha.angle IL1 System Volt UL31 mag (kV) Other mea

measur
surements
ements

Pha.angle IL2 System Volt UL1 mag TM> Trip expect mode

Pha.angle IL3 System Volt UL1 mag (kV) TM> Time to 100% T

255 © Arcteq Relays Ltd

 AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

Res.Curr.angle I01 System Volt UL2 mag TM> Reference T curr.

Res.Curr.angle I02 System Volt UL2 mag (kV) TM> Active meas curr.

Calc.I0.angle System Volt UL3 mag TM> T est.with act. curr.

Pos.Seq.Curr.angle System Volt UL3 mag (kV) TM> T at the moment

Neg.Seq.Curr.angle System Volt U0 mag TM> Max.Temp.Rise All.

Zero.Seq.Curr.angle System Volt U0 mag (kV) TM> Temp.Rise atm.

Pri.Pha.Curr.I”L1 System Volt U1 mag TM> Hot Spot estimate

Pri.Pha.Curr.I”L2 System Volt U1 mag (kV) TM> Hot Spot Max. All

Pri.Pha.Curr.I”L3 System Volt U2 mag TM> Used k for amb.temp

Pri.Res.Curr.I”01 System Volt U2 mag (kV) TM> Trip delay remaining

Pri.Res.Curr.I”02 System Volt U3 mag TM> Alarm 1 time to rel.

Pri.Calc.I”0 System Volt U3 mag (kV) TM> Alarm 2 time to rel.

Pha.Curr.I”L1 TRMS Pri System Volt U4 mag TM> Inhibit time to rel.

Pha.Curr.I”L2 TRMS Pri System Volt U4 mag (kV) TM> Trip time to rel.

Pha.Curr.I”L3 TRMS Pri System Volt UL12 ang S1 Measurement

I” Pri.Pos.Seq.Curr. System Volt UL23 ang S2 Measurement

I” Pri.Neg.Seq.Curr. System Volt UL31 ang S3 Measurement

I” Pri.Zero.Seq.Curr. System Volt UL1 ang S4 Measurement

Res.Curr.I”01 TRMS Pri System Volt UL2 ang S5 Measurement

Res.Curr.I”02 TRMS Pri System Volt UL3 ang S6 Measurement

Sec.Pha.Curr.I”L1 System Volt U0 ang S7 Measurement

Sec.Pha.Curr.I”L2 System Volt U1 ang S8 Measurement

Sec.Pha.Curr.I”L3 System Volt U2 ang S9 Measurement

Sec.Res.Curr.I”01 System Volt U3 ang S10 Measurement

Sec.Res.Curr.I”02 System Volt U4 ang S11 Measurement

Sec.Calc.I”0 Power mea

measur
surements
ements S12 Measurement

Pha.Curr.I”L1 TRMS Sec L1 Apparent Power (S) Sys.meas.frqs

Pha.Curr.I”L2 TRMS Sec L1 Active Power (P) f atm.

Pha.Curr.I”L3 TRMS Sec L1 Reactive Power (Q) f meas from

I” Sec.Pos.Seq.Curr. L1 Tan(phi) SS1.meas.frqs

I” Sec.Neg.Seq.Curr. L1 Cos(phi) SS1f meas from

I” Sec.Zero.Seq.Curr. L2 Apparent Power (S) SS2 meas.frqs

Res.Curr.I”01 TRMS Sec L2 Active Power (P) SS2f meas from

Res.Curr.I”02 TRMS Sec L2 Reactive Power (Q) L1 Bias current

Pha.Curr.I”L1 L2 Tan(phi) L1 Diff current

Pha.Curr.I”L2 L2 Cos(phi) L1 Char current

Pha.Curr.I”L3 L3 Apparent Power (S) L2 Bias current

Res.Curr.I”01 L3 Active Power (P) L2 Diff current

Res.Curr.I”02 L3 Reactive Power (Q) L2 Char current

© Arcteq Relays Ltd 256

AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

Calc.I”0 L3 Tan(phi) L3 Bias current

Pha.Curr.I”L1 TRMS L3 Cos(phi) L3 Diff current

Pha.Curr.I”L2 TRMS 3PH Apparent Power (S) L3 Char current

Pha.Curr.I”L3 TRMS 3PH Active Power (P) HV I0d> Bias current

I” Pos.Seq.Curr. 3PH Reactive Power (Q) HV I0d> Diff current

I” Neg.Seq.Curr. 3PH Tan(phi) HV I0d> Char current

I” Zero.Seq.Curr. 3PH Cos(phi) LV I0d> Bias current

Res.Curr.I”01 TRMS Ener

nerggy mea
measur
surements
ements LV I0d> Diff current

Res.Curr.I”02 TRMS L1 Exp.Active Energy MWh LV I0d> Char current

Pha.IL”1 ampl. THD L1 Exp.Active Energy kWh Curve1 Input

Pha.IL”2 ampl. THD L1 Imp.Active Energy MWh Curve1 Output

Pha.IL”3 ampl. THD L1 Imp.Active Energy kWh Curve2 Input

Pha.IL”1 pow. THD L1 Exp/Imp Act. E balance MWh Curve2 Output

Pha.IL”2 pow. THD L1 Exp/Imp Act. E balance kWh Curve3 Input

Pha.IL”3 pow. THD L1 Exp.React.Cap.E.Mvarh Curve3 Output

Res.I”01 ampl. THD L1 Exp.React.Cap.E.kvarh Curve4 Input

Res.I”01 pow. THD L1 Imp.React.Cap.E.Mvarh Curve4 Output

Res.I”02 ampl. THD L1 Imp.React.Cap.E.kvarh Control mode

Res.I”02 pow. THD L1 Exp/Imp React.Cap.E.bal.Mvarh Motor status

P-P Curr.I”L1 L1 Exp/Imp React.Cap.E.bal.kvarh Active setting group

P-P Curr.I”L2 L1 Exp.React.Ind.E.Mvarh

L1 Exp.React.Ind.E.kvarh

5.5.5. Total harmonic distortion (THD)

The total harmonic distortion (THD) function is used for monitoring the content of the current harmonic.
The THD is a measurement of the harmonic distortion present, and it is defined as the ratio between
the sum of all harmonic components' powers and the power of the fundamental frequency (RMS).

Harmonics can be caused by different sources in electric networks such as electric machine drives,
thyristor controls, etc. The function's monitoring of the currents can be used to alarm of the harmonic
content rising too high; this can occur when there is an electric quality requirement in the protected
unit, or when the harmonics generated by the process need to be monitored.

The function constantly measures the phase and residual current magnitudes as well as the harmonic
content of the monitored signals up to the 31st harmonic component. When the function is activated,
the measurements are also available for the mimic and the measurement views in the HMI carousel.
The user can also set the alarming limits for each measured channel if the application so requires.

The monitoring of the measured signals can be selected to be based either on an amplitude ratio or on
the above-mentioned power ratio. The difference is in the calculation formula (as shown below):

257 © Arcteq Relays Ltd

 AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

Figure. 5.5.5. - 165. THD calculation formulas.

While both of these formulas exist, the power ratio (THDP) is recognized by the IEEE, and the amplitude
ratio (THDA) is recognized by the IEC.

The blocking signal and the setting group selection control the operating characteristics of the function
during normal operation, i.e. the user or user-defined logic can change function parameters while the
function is running. This only applies if the alarming is activated.

The outputs of the function are the START and ALARM ACT signals for the phase current ("THDPH")
and the residual currents ("THDI01" and "THDI02") as well as BLOCKED signals. The function uses a
total of eight (8) separate setting groups which can be selected from one common source.

The operational logic consists of the following:

• input magnitude processing

• threshold comparator
• block signal chec
• time delay characteristics
• output processing.

The inputs of the function are the following:

• setting parameters
• digital inputs and logic signals
• measured and pre-processed current magnitudes

The function outputs can be used for direct I/O controlling and user logic programming. The function
generates general time-stamped ON/OFF events to the common event buffer from each of the seven
(7) output signals. The time stamp resolution is 1 ms. The function also provides a resettable
cumulative counter for the START, ALARM ACT and BLOCKED events.

The following figure presents a simplified function block diagram of the total harmonic distortion
monitor function.

© Arcteq Relays Ltd 258

AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

Figure. 5.5.5. - 166. Simplified function block diagram of the total harmonic distortion monitor function.

Measured input
The function block uses analog current measurement values. The function always uses FFT
measurement of the whole harmonic specter of 32 components from each measured current channel.
From these measurements the function calculates either the amplitude ratio or the power ratio. A -20
ms averaged value of the selected magnitude is used for pre-fault data registering.

Table. 5.5.5. - 173. Measurement inputs of the total harmonic distortion monitor function.

Signal Description Time base

IL1FFT FFT measurement of phase L1 (A) current 5 ms

IL2FFT FFT measurement of phase L2 (B) current 5 ms

IL3FFT FFT measurement of phase L3 (C) current 5 ms

I01FFT FFT measurement of residual I01 current 5 ms

I02FFT FFT measurement of residual I02 current 5 ms

The selection of the calculation method is made with a setting parameter (common for all measurement
channels).

General settings
The following general settings define the general behavior of the function. These settings are static i.e.
it is not possible to change them by editing the setting group.

Table. 5.5.5. - 174. General settings.

Name Range Step Default Description

1:
Measurement 1: Defines which available measured magnitude the function
Amplitude -
magnitude Amplitude uses.
2: Power

259 © Arcteq Relays Ltd

 AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

Pick-up
The PhaseTHD, I01THD andand I02THD setting parameters control the the pick-up and activation of the
function. They define the maximum allowed measured current before action from the function. Before
the function activates alarm signals, their corresponding pick-up elements need to be activated with
the setting parameters Enable phase THD alarm, Enable I01 THD alarm and Enable I02 THD alarm.
The function constantly calculates the ratio between the setting values and the measured magnitude
for each of the three phases. The reset ratio of 97 % is built into the function and is always relative to
the settingvalue. The setting value is common for all measured phases. When the Im exceeds the
Iset value (in single, dual or all phases), it triggers the pick-up operation of the function.

Table. 5.5.5. - 175. Pick-up settings.

Name Range Step Default Description

Enable
phase 0: Enabled 0:
- Enables and disables the THD alarm function from phase currents.
THD 1: Disabled Enabled
alarm

Enable
0: Enabled 0:
I01 THD - Enables and disables the THD alarm function from residual current input I01.
1: Disabled Enabled
alarm

Enable
0: Enabled 0:
I02 THD - Enables and disables the THD alarm function from residual current input I02.
1: Disabled Enabled
alarm

Phase The pick-up setting for the THD alarm element from the phase currents. At
0.10…100.00 0.01 10.00
THD least one of the phases' measured THD value has to exceed this setting in
% % %
pick-up order for the alarm signal to activate.

The pick-up setting for the THD alarm element from the residual current I01.
I01 THD 0.10…100.00 0.01 10.00
The measured THD value has to exceed this setting in order for the alarm
pick-up % % %
signal to activate.

The pick-up setting for the THD alarm element from the residual current I02.
I02 THD 0.10…100.00 0.01 10.00
The measured THD value has to exceed this setting in order for the alarm
pick-up % % %
signal to activate.

The pick-up activation of the function is not directly equal to the START signal generation of the
function. The START signal is allowed if the blocking condition is not active.

Function blocking
The block signal is checked in the beginning of each program cycle. The blocking signal is received
from the blocking matrix in the function's dedicated input. If the blocking signal is not activated when
the pick-up element activates, a START signal is generated and the function proceeds to the time
characteristics calculation.

If the blocking signal is active when the pick-up element activates, a BLOCKED signal is generated and
the function does not process the situation further. If the START function has been activated before the
blocking signal, it resets and the release time characteristics are processed similarly to when the pick-
up signal is reset.

The blocking of the function causes an HMI display event and a time-stamped blocking event with
information of the startup current values and its fault type to be issued.

The blocking signal can also be tested in the commissioning phase by a software switch signal when
the relay's testing mode "Enable stage forcing" is activated (General → Device).

The variables the user can set are binary signals from the system. The blocking signal needs to reach
the device minimum of 5 ms before the set operating delay has passed in order for the blocking to
activate in time.

© Arcteq Relays Ltd 260

AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

Operating time characteristics for activation and reset

This function supports definite time delay (DT). The following table presents the setting parameters for
the function's time characteristics.

Table. 5.5.5. - 176. Settings for operating time characteristics.

Name Range Step Default Description

Phase THD alarm 0.000…1800.000 0.005 10.000 Defines the delay for the alarm timer from the phase
delay s s s currents' measured THD.

I01 THD alarm 0.000…1800.000 0.005 10.000 Defines the delay for the alarm timer from the residual current
delay s s s I01's measured THD.

I02 THD alarm 0.000…1800.000 0.005 10.000 Defines the delay for the alarm timer from the residual current
delay s s s I02's measured THD.

Events and registers

The total harmonic distortion monitor function (abbreviated "THD" in event block names) generates
events and registers from the status changes in the alarm function when it is activated. The recorded
signals are START and ALARM signals for the monitoring elements as well as common BLOCKED
signals. The user can select which event messages are stored in the main event buffer: ON, OFF, or
both.

The events triggered by the function are recorded with a time stamp and with process data values.

Table. 5.5.5. - 177. Event codes.

Event number Event channel Event block name Event code Description

3520 55 THD1 0 THD Start Phase ON

3521 55 THD1 1 THD Start Phase OFF

3522 55 THD1 2 THD Start I01 ON

3523 55 THD1 3 THD Start I01 OFF

3524 55 THD1 4 THD Start I02 ON

3525 55 THD1 5 THD Start I02 OFF

3526 55 THD1 6 THD Alarm Phase ON

3527 55 THD1 7 THD Alarm Phase OFF

3528 55 THD1 8 THD Alarm I01 ON

3529 55 THD1 9 THD Alarm I01 OFF

3530 55 THD1 10 THD Alarm I02 ON

3531 55 THD1 11 THD Alarm I02 OFF

3532 55 THD1 12 Blocked ON

3533 55 THD1 13 Blocked OFF

The function registers its operation into the last twelve (12) time-stamped registers. The register of the
function records the ON event process data for ACTIVATED, BLOCKED, etc. The table below
presents the structure of the function's register content.

261 © Arcteq Relays Ltd

 AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

Table. 5.5.5. - 178. Register content.

Event
Date and L1h, L2h, L3h L1h, L2h, L3h Fault L1h, L2h, L3h
Used SG
time pretriggering current current Prefault current
code

Start -200 ms THD Trip -20 ms THD Trip -200 ms

dd.mm.yyyy Setting group
3520-3533 Descr. averages of each averages of each averages of each
hh:mm:ss.mss 1...8 active.
phase. phase. phase.

5.5.6. Measurement value recorder

The measurement value recorder function records the value of the selected magnitudes at the time of a
pre-defined trigger signal. An typical application is the recording of fault currents or voltages at the time
of the breaker trips; it can also be used to record the values from any trigger signal set by the user. The
user can select whether the function records per-unit values or primary values. Additionally, the user
can set the function to record overcurrent fault types or voltage fault types. The function operates
instantly from the trigger signal.

The measurement value recorder function has an integrated fault display which shows the current fault
values when the tripped by one of the following functions: I> (non-directional overcurrent), Idir>
(directional overcurrent), I0> (non-directional earth fault), I0dir> (directional earth fault), f<
(underfrequency), f> (overfrequency), U< (undervoltage) or U> (overvoltage). When any of these
functions trip, the fault values and the fault type are displayed in the Mimic view. The view can be
enabled by activating the "VREC Trigger on"setting (Tools → Events and logs → Set alarm events). The
resetting of the fault values is done by the input selected in the General menu.

Measured input
The function block uses analog current and voltage measurement values. Based on these values, the
relay calculates the primary and secondary values of currents, voltages, powers, and impedances as
well as other values.

The user can set up to eight (8) magnitudes to be recorded when the function is triggered. An
overcurrent fault type, a voltage fault type, and a tripped stage can be recorded and reported straight
to SCADA.

NO
NOTE!
TE!

The available measurement values depend on the relay type. If only current analog
measurements are available, the recorder can solely use signals which only use current. The
same applies, if only voltage analog measurements are available.

Currents Description

IL1 (ff), IL2 (ff), IL3 (ff), I01 (ff), I02 The fundamental frequency current measurement values (RMS) of phase currents and
(ff) of residual currents.

IL1TRMS, IL2TRMS, IL3TRMS,

The TRMS current measurement values of phase currents and of residual currents.
I01TRMS, I02TRMS

IL1,2,3 & I01/I02 2nd h., 3rd h., 4th The magnitudes of phase current components: Fundamental, 2nd harmonic, 3rd
h., 5th h., 7th h., 9th h., 11th h., 13th harmonic, 4th harmonic, 5th harmonic 7th, harmonic 9th, harmonic 11th, harmonic 13th,
th th th
h., 15 h., 17 h., 19 h. harmonic 15th, harmonic 17th, harmonic 19th harmonic current.

The positive sequence current, the negative sequence current and the zero sequence
I1, I2, I0Z
current.

I0CalcMag The residual current calculated from phase currents.

© Arcteq Relays Ltd 262

AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

Currents Description

IL1Ang, IL2Ang, IL3Ang,

I01Ang, I02Ang, I0CalcAng,
The angles of each measured current.
I1Ang, I2Ang

Volta
oltages
ges Descrip
Description
tion

UL1Mag, UL2Mag, UL3Mag,

UL12Mag, UL23Mag, UL31Mag The magnitudes of phase voltages, of phase-to-phase voltages, and of residual
voltages.
U0Mag, U0CalcMag

U1 Pos.seq V mag, U2 Neg.seq V

The positive sequence voltage and the negative sequence voltage.
mag

UL1Ang, UL2Ang, UL3Ang,

UL12Ang, UL23Ang, UL31Ang
The angles of phase voltages, of phase-to-phase voltages, and of residual voltages.
U0Ang, U0CalcAng

U1 Pos.seq V Ang, U2 Neg.seq V

The positive sequence angle and the negative sequence angle.
Ang

Powers Descrip
Description
tion

S3PH, P3PH, Q3PH The three-phase apparent, active and reactive powers.

SL1, SL2, SL3, PL1, PL2, PL3,

The phase apparent, active and reactive powers.
QL1, QL2, QL3

tanfi3PH, tanfiL1, tanfiL2, tanfiL3 The tan (φ) of three-phase powers and phase powers.

cosfi3PH, cosfiL1, cosfiL2, cosfiL3 The cos (φ) of three-phase powers and phase powers.

Impedances and admit

admittances
tances Descrip
Description
tion

RL12, RL23, RL31

XL12, XL23, XL31,
RL1, RL2, RL3
The phase-to-phase and phase-to-neutral resistances, reactances and impedances.
XL1, XL2, XL3
Z12, Z23, Z31
ZL1, ZL2, ZL3

Z12Ang, Z23Ang, Z31Ang,

The phase-to-phase and phase-to-neutral impedance angles.
ZL1Ang, ZL2Ang, ZL3Ang

Rseq, Xseq, Zseq

The positive sequence resistance, reactance and impedance values and angles.
RseqAng, XseqAng, ZseqAng

GL1, GL2, GL3, G0

BL1, BL2, BL3, B0 The conductances, susceptances and admittances.
YL1, YL2, YL3, Y0

YL1angle, YL2angle, YL3angle

The admittance angles.
Y0angle

Others Descrip
Description
tion

System f. The tracking frequency in use at that moment.

Ref f1 The reference frequency 1.

Ref f2 The reference frequency 2.

M thermal T The motor thermal temperature.

F thermal T The feeder thermal temperature.

T thermal T The transformer thermal temperature.

RTD meas 1…16 The RTD measurement channels 1…16.

Ext RTD meas 1…8 The external RTD measurement channels 1…8 (ADAM module).

263 © Arcteq Relays Ltd

 AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

Reported values
When triggered, the function holds the recorded values of up to eight channels, as set. In addition to
this tripped stage, the overcurrent fault type and the voltage fault types are reported to SCADA.

Table. 5.5.6. - 179. Reported values.

Name Range Step Description

0: -
1: I> Trip
2: I>> Trip
3: I>>> Trip
4: I>>>> Trip
5: IDir> Trip
6: IDir>> Trip
7: IDir>>> Trip
Tripped stage 8: IDir>>>> Trip - The tripped stage.
9: U> Trip
10: U>> Trip
11: U>>> Trip
12: U>>>> Trip
13: U< Trip
14: U<< Trip
15: U<<< Trip
16: U<<<< Trip

0: -
1: A-G
2: B-G
3: A-B
Overcurrent fault type - The overcurrent fault type.
4: C-G
5: A-C
6: B-C
7: A-B-C

0: -
1: A (AB)
2: B (BC)
3: A-B (AB-BC)
Voltage fault type - The voltage fault type.
4: C (CA)
5: A-C (AB-CA)
6: B-C (BC-CA)
7: A-B-C

Magnitude 1…8 0.000…1800.000 A/V/p.u. 0.001 A/V/p.u. The recorded value in one of the eight channels.

Events
The measurement value recorder function (abbreviated "VREC" in event block names) generates
events from the function triggers. The user can select which event messages are stored in the main
event buffer: ON, OFF, or both.

Table. 5.5.6. - 180. Event codes.

Event number Event channel Event block name Event code Description

9984 156 VREC1 0 Recorder triggered ON

9985 156 VREC1 1 Recorder triggered OFF

© Arcteq Relays Ltd 264

AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

6. System integration
6.1. Communication protocols

6.1.1. NTP
When enabled, the NTP (Network Time Protocol) service can use external time sources to synchronize
the device's system time. The NTP client service uses an Ethernet connection to connect to the NTP
time server. NTP can be enabled by setting the primary time server and the secondary time server
parameters to the address of the system's NTP time source(s).

Table. 6.1.1. - 181. Server settings.

Name Range Description

Primary time Defines the address of the primary NTP server. Setting this parameter at
0.0.0.0...255.255.255.255
server address "0.0.0.0" means that the server is not in use.

Secondary time Defines the address of the secondary (or backup) NTP server. Setting this
0.0.0.0...255.255.255.255
server address parameter at "0.0.0.0" means that the server is not in use.

Table. 6.1.1. - 182. Client settings.

Name Range Description

Defines the address of the NTP client.

IP address 0.0.0.0...255.255.255.255
NO
NOTE
TE:: This address must be different than the relay's IP address.

Netmask 0.0.0.0...255.255.255.255 Defines the client's netmask.

Gateway 0.0.0.0...255.255.255.255 Defines the client's gateway.

MAC address - Displays the MAC address of the client.

0: Running
1: IP error
Network status Displays the status or possible errors of the NTP (client) settings.
2: NM error
3: GW error

Table. 6.1.1. - 183. Status.

Name Range Description

0: No sync Displays the status of the NTP time synchronization at the moment.
NTP quality for events 1: NO
NOTE
TE:: This indication is not valid if another time synchronization method is used
Synchronized (external serial).

NTP-processed message
count 0...232–1 Displays the number of messages processed by the NTP protocol.

NO
NOTE!
TE!

A unique IP address must be reserved for the NTP client. The relay's IP address cannot be
used.

Additionally, the time zone of the relay can be set by connecting to the relay and the selecting the time
zone at Commands → Set time zone (AQtivate).

265 © Arcteq Relays Ltd

 AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

6.1.2. Modbus/TCP and Modbus/RTU

The device supports both Modbus/TCP and Modbus/RTU communication. Modbus/TCP uses the
Ethernet connection to communicate with Modbus/TCP clients. Modbus/RTU is a serial protocol that
can be selected for the available serial ports.

The following Modbus function types are supported:

• Read multiple holding registers (function code 3)

• Write single holding register (function code 6)
• Write multiple holding registers (function code 16)
• Read/Write multiple registers (function code 23)

The following data can be accessed using both Modbus/TCP and Modbus/RTU:

• Device measurements
• Device I/O
• Commands
• Events
• Time

Once the configuration file has been loaded, the user can access the Modbus map of the relay via the
AQtivate software (Tools → Communication → Modbusmap). Please note that holding registers start
from 1. Some masters might begin numbering holding register from 0 instead of 1; this will cause an
offset of 1 between the relay and the master.

Table. 6.1.2. - 184. Modbus/TCP settings.

Parameter Range Description

Modbus/TCP 0: Disabled
Enables and disables the Modbus/TCP on the Ethernet port.
Enable 1: Enabled

Defines the IP port used by Modbus/TCP. The standard port (and the default
IP port 0…65 535
setting) is 502.

0: Get oldest event possible (Default and current implementation)

0: Get oldest available
1: Continue previous
Event read mode 1: Continue with the event idx from previous connection
connection
2: New events only
2: Get only new events from connection time and forward

Table. 6.1.2. - 185. Modbus/RTU settings.

Parameter Range Description

Slave address 1…247 Defines the Modbus/RTU slave address for the unit.

Additionally, the user can adjust the measurement update interval with the following parameters (found
at Measurement → Measurement update). These parameters do not affect the operating times of
protection functions, only the frequency of measurement reporting to Modbus.

Table. 6.1.2. - 186. Settings for measurement update interval.

Name Range Step Default Description

Current measurement update 500…10 2 000 Defines the measurement update interval of all current-
5 ms
interval 000 ms ms related measurements.

Voltage measurement update 500…10 2 000 Defines the measurement update interval of all voltage-
5 ms
interval 000 ms ms related measurements.

© Arcteq Relays Ltd 266

AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

Name Range Step Default Description

Power measurement update 500…10 2 000 Defines the measurement update interval of all power-
5 ms
interval 000 ms ms related measurements.

Impedance 500…10 2 000 Defines the measurement update interval of all impedance-
5 ms
measurement update interval 000 ms ms related measurements.

6.1.3. Modbus I/O

The Modbus I/O protocol can be selected to communicate on the available serial ports. The Modbus I/
O is actually a Modbus/RTU master implementation that is dedicated to communicating with serial
Modbus/RTU slaves such as RTD input modules. Up to three (3) Modbus/RTU slaves can be
connected to the same bus polled by the Modbus I/O implementation. These are named I/O Module A,
I/O Module B and I/O Module C. Each of the modules can be configured using parameters in the
following two tables.

Table. 6.1.3. - 187. Module settings.

Name Range Description

I/O module X Defines the Modbus unit address for the selected I/O Module (A, B, or C). If this setting
0…247
address is set to "0", the selected module is not in use.

Module x 0: ADAM-4018+
Selects the module type.
type 1: ADAM-4015

Channel
Channels in
0…Channel 7 (or Selects the number of channels to be used by the module.
use
None)

Table. 6.1.3. - 188. Channel settings.

Name Range Step Default Description

0: +/- 20
mA
1: 4…20
mA Selects the thermocouple or the mA input connected to the I/O module.
1:
T.C. 2: Type J
- 4…20
type 3: Type K Types J, K, T and E are nickel-alloy thermocouples, while Types R and S are
mA
4: Type T platinum/rhodium-alloy thermocouples.
5: Type E
6: Type R
7: Type S

Input -101.0…2
0.1 - Displays the input value of the selected channel.
value 000.0

Input 0: Invalid
- - Displays the input status of the selected channel.
status 1: OK

6.1.4. IEC 61850

The user can enable the IEC 61850 protocol in device models that support this protocol. The AQ-200
series devices use Edition 1 of IEC 61850. The following services are supported by IEC 61850 in
Arcteq devices:

• Dataset (predefined data sets can be edited with the IEC 61850 tool in AQtivate)
• Report Control Blocks (both buffered and unbuffered reporting)
• Control ('direct operate with normal security’ control sequences)
• Disturbance recording file transfer
• GOOSE
• Time synchronization

267 © Arcteq Relays Ltd

 AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

The device's current IEC 61850 setup can be viewed with the IEC61850 tool (Tools → IEC 61850). By
browsing the 61850 tree one can see the full list of available logical nodes in the Arcteq
implementation.

IEC 61850 main toolbar

Figure. 6.1.4. - 167. Main toolbar.

The buttons available in the main toolbar of the IEC 61850 tool are (as per image):

1. Open .CID/.ICD file

Open an existing .CID or .ICD file from the PC's hard drive.
2. Save .CID/.ICD file
If a .CID file was opened from PC's hard drive, saves all changes to that .CID or .ICD file.
3. Save to .aqs
Saves the .CID or .ICD file into the .aqs currently open (remember to save the .aqs file as well
[File → Save] to keep the changes!).
4. Save .CID/.ICD as...
Saves the .CID or .ICD file on the PC's hard drive as a separate .CID or .ICD file.
5. Export dataset info
Exports the dataset information into a .txt file which can then be viewed in table format with
tools such as Excel.
6. Configurations
Opens the main configurations pop-up window.
7. Edit datasets
Opens the dataset editing window.
8. Send to relay
Sends the .CID/.ICD configurations to the relay (requires a connection to the relay).
9. Import GOOSE settings
Imports predefined GOOSE settings from another .CID/.ICD file.
10. Get default .CID/.ICD file from the relay
Retrieves the default .CID/.ICD file from the relay (requires a connection to the relay).

© Arcteq Relays Ltd 268

AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

Configurations
The main configurations dialog window is opened by pressing the sixth button ("Configurations") in the
main toolbar. The most Important parameters here are the "IED name" and the "IP" settings.
Additionally, if the intention is to use the GOOSE publisher service, the parameters for GCB1 and
GCB2 should also be set. See the following image of the main configuration window for the basic
settings and the settings for GOOSE publishing.

Figure. 6.1.4. - 168. Configurations window.

Data sets
The data set editing window is opened by pressing the seventh button on the main toolbar. Data sets
can be added and removed by using the "+" and "-" buttons, respectively. When a data set has been
added, it must be assigned to a Report Control Block with the "RCB" button. This opens a new pop-up
window. The assigning can be either to unbuffered reporting (URCBs) or to buffered reporting
(BRCBs).

If both of the GOOSE publisher data sets are un-checked, the GOOSE publisher service is disabled
(see the image below).

269 © Arcteq Relays Ltd

 AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

Figure. 6.1.4. - 169. Data set editing window.

All of these data sets can be edited. The data set editing dialog is opened by clicking on the selected
data set to be edited and then clicking the "Edit" button. The editing dialog shows all currently
configured entries of the data set. An entry can be removed from the data set by clicking the red "-"
button located at the end of the entry's row. New entries can be added and old ones edited by clicking
the green "+" button at the top right of the window. For URCB and BRCB data sets it is recommended
that the data is selected on the doName (data object) level (see the image below). This way all available
information (such as status, quality, and time) is always sent in the report. Data can also be selected on
daName (data attribute) level, which selects each individual piece of data. This approach may be
preferred for GOOSE data sets.

Figure. 6.1.4. - 170. Data selection on the data attribute level.

Settings.
The general setting parameters for the IEC 61850 protocol are visible both in AQtivate and in the local
HMI. The settings are described in the table below.

© Arcteq Relays Ltd 270

AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

Table. 6.1.4. - 189. General settings.

Name Range Step Default Description

0: Disabled 0:
IEC 61850 enable - Enables and disables the IEC 61850 communication protocol.
1: Enabled Disabled

Defines the IP port used by the IEC 61850 protocol.

IP port 0…65 535 1 102
The standard (and default) port is 102.

0.1
General deadband 0.1…10.0 % 2% Determines the general data reporting deadband settings.
%

0.1…1000.0 0.1 Determines the data reporting deadband settings for this
Active energy deadband 2 kWh
kWh kWh measurement.

Reactive 0.1…1000.0 0.1 Determines the data reporting deadband settings for this
2 kVar
energy deadband kVar kVar measurement.

0.1…1000.0 0.1 Determines the data reporting deadband settings for this
Active power deadband 2 kW
kW kW measurement.

Reactive 0.1…1000.0 0.1 Determines the data reporting deadband settings for this
2 kVar
power deadband kVar kVar measurement.

Apparent 0.1…1000.0 0.1 Determines the data reporting deadband settings for this
2 kVA
power deadband kVA kVA measurement.

Determines the data reporting deadband settings for this

Power factor deadband 0.01…0.99 0.01 0.05
measurement.

0.01 Determines the data reporting deadband settings for this

Frequency deadband 0.01…1.00 Hz 0.1 Hz
Hz measurement.

0.01 Determines the data reporting deadband settings for this

Current deadband 0.01…50.00 A 5A
A measurement.

Residual 0.01 Determines the data reporting deadband settings for this
0.01…50.00 A 0.2 A
current deadband A measurement.

0.01…5000.00 0.01 Determines the data reporting deadband settings for this
Voltage deadband 200 V
V V measurement.

Residual 0.01…5000.00 0.01 Determines the data reporting deadband settings for this
200 V
voltage deadband V V measurement.

Angle 0.1 Determines the data reporting deadband settings for this
0.1…5.0 deg 1 deg
measurement deadband deg measurement.

Defines the integration time of the protocol. If this parameter is

Integration time 0…10 000 ms 1 ms 0 ms
set to "0 ms", no integration time is in use.

0: -
GOOSE reconfigure - 0: - Reconfigures the GOOSE.
1: Reconfigure

GOOSE subscriber 0: Disabled 0:

- Enabled and disables the GOOSE subscriber.
enable 1: Enabled Disabled

For more information on the IEC 61850 communication protocol support, please refer to the
conformance statement documents (www.arcteq.fi/downloads/ → AQ-200 series → Resources).

6.1.5. GOOSE
Arcteq relays support both GOOSE publisher and GOOSE subscriber. GOOSE subscriber is enabled
with the "GOOSE subscriber enable" parameter at Communication → Protocols → IEC 61850/
GOOSE. The GOOSE inputs are configured using either the local HMI or the AQtivate software.

271 © Arcteq Relays Ltd

 AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

There are up to 64 GOOSE inputs available for use. Each of the GOOSE inputs also has a
corresponding input quality signal which can also be used in internal logic. The quality is good, when
the input quality is low (that is, when the quality is marked as "0"). The value of the input quality can
increase as a result of a GOOSE time-out or a configuration error, for example. The status and quality
of the various logical input signals can be viewed at the GOOSE IN status and GOOSE IN quality tabs
at Control → Device I/O → Logical signals.

GOOSE input settings

The table below presents the different settings available for all 64 GOOSE inputs.

Table. 6.1.5. - 190. GOOSE input settings.

Name Range Step Default Description

0: No
In use - 0: No Enables and disables the GOOSE input in question.
1: Yes

Application ID Defines the application ID that will be matched with the publisher's
0×0…0×3FFF 0×1 0×0
("AppID") GOOSE control block.

Configuration
Defines the configuration revision that will be matched with the publisher's
revision 1…232-1 1 1
GOOSE control block.
("ConfRev")

Data index Defines the data index of the value in the matched published frame. It is
0…99 1 -
("DataIdx") the status of the GOOSE input.

NextIdx is 0: No Selects whether or not the next received input is the quality bit of
- 0: No
quality 1: Yes the GOOSE input.

0: Boolean
1: Integer
0:
Data type 2: Unsigned - Selects the data type of the GOOSE input.
Boolean
3: Floating
point

Setting the publisher

The configuration of the GOOSE publisher is done using the IEC 61850 tool in AQtivate (Tools →
Communication → IEC 61850). In order for the GOOSE publishing service to be used, both of the
GCBs and the GOOSE data sets must be set.

The GOOSE control blocks are accessed by clicking the sixth icon on the main toolbar,
"Configurations" (see the image below).

The GOOSE control block settings are located on the right side of the Configurations pop-up window
(see the image below). Both GCB 1 and GCB 2 must be set. The important parameters are "App
ID" (should be unique for the system) and "ConfRev" (checked by the subscriber). If VLAN switches
have been used to build the sub-networks, both the "VLAN priority" and the "VLAN ID" parameters must
be set to match the system specifications.

© Arcteq Relays Ltd 272

AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

Figure. 6.1.5. - 171. Settings for both available GOOSE publishing data sets.

The GOOSE data sets define the data that is sent by the publisher. GOOSE publisher can only send
binary data and quality information of the binary signals. The binary signal and the quality information
for that binary singal are mapped together to the GOOSE input signals on the receiving side. In order
for the quality information of each GOOSE input to be used in the relay logic, both the quality
information and the GOOSE reception time-out supervision have to be of good quality, or else the
quality signal activates.

6.1.6. IEC 103

IEC 103 is shortened form of the international standard IEC 60870-5-103. The AQ-200 series units
are able to run as a secondary (slave) station. The IEC 103 protocol can be selected for the serial ports
that are available in the device. A primary (master) station can then communicate with the Arcteq
device and receive information by polling from the slave device. The transfer of disturbance recordings
is not supported.

NO
NOTE
TE: Once the configuration file has been loaded, the IEC 103 map of the relay can be found in the
AQtivate software (Tools → IEC 103 map).

The following table presents the setting parameters for the IEC 103 protocol.

Name Range Step Default Description

Slave address 1…254 1 1 Defines the IEC 103 slave address for the unit.

Measurement interval 0…60 000 ms 1 ms 2000 ms Defines the interval for the measurements update.

273 © Arcteq Relays Ltd

 AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

6.1.7. DNP3
DNP3 is a protocol standard which is controlled by the DNP Users Group (www.dnp.org). The
implementation of a DNP3 slave is compliant with the DNP3 subset (level) 2, but it also contains some
functionalities of the higher levels. For detailed information please refer to the DNP3 Device Profile
document (www.arcteq.fi/downloads/ → AQ-200 series → Resources).

Settings
The following table describes the DNP3 setting parameters.

Table. 6.1.7. - 191. Settings.

Name Range Step Default Description

0:
Enables and disables the DNP3 TCP communication protocol when the
DNP3 Disabled 0:
- Ethernet port is used for DNP3. If a serial port is used, the DNP3 protocol can
TCP enable 1: Disabled
be enabled from Communication → DNP3.
Enabled

0…65
IP port 1 20 000 Defines the IP port used by the protocol.
535

Slave 1…65
1 1 Defines the DNP3 slave address of the unit.
address 519

Master 1…65
1 2 Defines the address for the allowed master.
address 534

Link layer 0…60

1 ms 0 ms Defines the length of the time-out for the link layer.
time-out 000 ms

Link layer
1…20 1 1 Defines the number of retries for the link layer.
retries

Diagnostic -
Error counter 0…232-1 1 - Counts the total number of errors in received and sent messages.

Diagnostic -
Transmitted 0…232-1 1 - Counts the total number of transmitted messages.
messages

Diagnostic -
Received 0…232-1 1 - Counts the total number of received messages.
messages

Default variations
Table. 6.1.7. - 192. Default variations.

Name Range Default Description

0: Var 1
Group 1 variation (BI) 0: Var 1 Selects the variation of the binary signal.
1: Var 2

0: Var 1
Group 2 variation (BI change) 1: Var 2 Selects the variation of the binary signal change.
1: Var 2

0: Var 1
Group 3 variation (DBI) 0: Var 1 Selects the variation of the double point signal.
1: Var 2

0: Var 1
Group 4 variation (DBI change) 1: Var 2 Selects the variation of the double point signal.
1: Var 2

0: Var 1
1: Var 2
Group 20 variation (CNTR) 0: Var 1 Selects the variation of the control signal.
2: Var 5
3: Var 6

© Arcteq Relays Ltd 274

AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

Name Range Default Description

0: Var 1
1: Var 2
Group 22 variation (CNTR change) 2: Var 5 Selects the variation of the control signal change.
2: Var 5
3: Var 6

0: Var 1
1: Var 2
Group 30 variation (AI) 2: Var 3 4: Var 5 Selects the variation of the analog signal.
3: Var 4
4: Var 5

0: Var 1
1: Var 2
2: Var 3
Group 32 variation (AI change) 4: Var 5 Selects the variation of the analog signal change.
3: Var 4
4: Var 5
5: Var 7

Setting the analog change deadbands

Table. 6.1.7. - 193. Analog change deadband settings.

Name Range Step Default Description

General deadband 0.1…10.0 % 0.1 % 2% Determines the general data reporting deadband settings.

0.1…1000.0 0.1 Determines the data reporting deadband settings for this
Active energy deadband 2 kWh
kWh kWh measurement.

Reactive 0.1…1000.0 0.1 Determines the data reporting deadband settings for this
2 kVar
energy deadband kVar kVar measurement.

0.1…1000.0 0.1 Determines the data reporting deadband settings for this
Active power deadband 2 kW
kW kW measurement.

Reactive 0.1…1000.0 0.1 Determines the data reporting deadband settings for this
2 kVar
power deadband kVar kVar measurement.

Apparent 0.1…1000.0 0.1 Determines the data reporting deadband settings for this
2 kVA
power deadband kVA kVA measurement.

Determines the data reporting deadband settings for this

Power factor deadband 0.01…0.99 0.01 0.05
measurement.

0.01 Determines the data reporting deadband settings for this

Frequency deadband 0.01…1.00 Hz 0.1 Hz
Hz measurement.

Determines the data reporting deadband settings for this

Current deadband 0.01…50.00 A 0.01 A 5A
measurement.

Residual Determines the data reporting deadband settings for this

0.01…50.00 A 0.01 A 0.2 A
current deadband measurement.

0.01…5000.00 Determines the data reporting deadband settings for this

Voltage deadband 0.01 V 200 V
V measurement.

Residual 0.01…5000.00 Determines the data reporting deadband settings for this
0.01 V 200 V
voltage deadband V measurement.

Angle 0.1 Determines the data reporting deadband settings for this
0.1…5.0 deg 1 deg
measurement deadband deg measurement.

Integration time 0…10 000 ms 1 ms - Displays the integration time of the protocol.

275 © Arcteq Relays Ltd

 AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

6.1.8. IEC 101/104

The standards IEC 60870-5-101 and IEC 60870-5-104 are closely related. Both are derived from the
IEC 60870-5 standard. On the physical layer the IEC 101 protocol uses serial communication whereas
the IEC 104 protocol uses Ethernet communication. The IEC 101/104 implementation works as a slave
in the unbalanced mode.

For detailed information please refer to the IEC 101/104 interoperability document (www.arcteq.fi/
downloads/ → AQ-200 series → Resources → "AQ-200 IEC101 & IEC104 interoperability").

IEC 101 settings

Table. 6.1.8. - 194. IEC 101 settings.

Name Range Step Default Description

Common address 0…65 Defines the common address of the application service data unit (ASDU)
1 1
of ASDU 534 for the IEC 101 communication protocol.

Common address
1…2 1 2 Defines the size of the common address of ASDU.
of ASDU size

0…65
Link layer address 1 1 Defines the address for the link layer.
534

Link layer address

1…2 1 2 Defines the address size of the link layer.
size

Information object
2…3 1 3 Defines the address size of the information object.
address size

Cause of Defines the cause of transmission size

1…2 1 2
transmission size

IEC 104 settings

Table. 6.1.8. - 195. IEC 104 settings.

Range
Name Step Default Description

0:
Disabled 0:
IEC 104 enable - Enables and disables the IEC 104 communication protocol.
1: Disabled
Enabled

0…65
IP port 1 2404 Defines the IP port used by the protocol.
535

Common 0…65 Defines the common address of the application service data unit (ASDU) for
1 1
address of ASDU 534 the IEC 104 communication protocol.

Measurement scaling coefficients

The measurement scaling coefficients are available for the following measurements, in addition to the
general measurement scaling coefficient:

• Active energy
• Reactive energy
• Active power
• Reactive power
• Apparent power
• Power factor
• Frequency
© Arcteq Relays Ltd 276
AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

• Current
• Residual current
• Voltage
• Residual voltage
• Angle

The range is the same for all of the scaling coefficients. By default, there is no scaling.

• No scaling
• 1/10
• 1/100
• 1/1000
• 1/10 000
• 1/100 000
• 1/1 000 000
• 10
• 100
• 1000
• 10 000
• 100 000
• 1 000 000

Deadband settings.
Table. 6.1.8. - 196. Analog change deadband settings.

Name Range Step Default Description

General deadband 0.1…10.0 % 0.1 % 2% Determines the general data reporting deadband settings.

0.1…1000.0 0.1 Determines the data reporting deadband settings for this
Active energy deadband 2 kWh
kWh kWh measurement.

Reactive 0.1…1000.0 0.1 Determines the data reporting deadband settings for this
2 kVar
energy deadband kVar kVar measurement.

0.1…1000.0 0.1 Determines the data reporting deadband settings for this
Active power deadband 2 kW
kW kW measurement.

Reactive 0.1…1000.0 0.1 Determines the data reporting deadband settings for this
2 kVar
power deadband kVar kVar measurement.

Apparent 0.1…1000.0 0.1 Determines the data reporting deadband settings for this
2 kVA
power deadband kVA kVA measurement.

Determines the data reporting deadband settings for this

Power factor deadband 0.01…0.99 0.01 0.05
measurement.

0.01 Determines the data reporting deadband settings for this

Frequency deadband 0.01…1.00 Hz 0.1 Hz
Hz measurement.

Determines the data reporting deadband settings for this

Current deadband 0.01…50.00 A 0.01 A 5A
measurement.

Residual Determines the data reporting deadband settings for this

0.01…50.00 A 0.01 A 0.2 A
current deadband measurement.

0.01…5000.00 Determines the data reporting deadband settings for this

Voltage deadband 0.01 V 200 V
V measurement.

Residual 0.01…5000.00 Determines the data reporting deadband settings for this
0.01 V 200 V
voltage deadband V measurement.

Angle 0.1 Determines the data reporting deadband settings for this
0.1…5.0 deg 1 deg
measurement deadband deg measurement.

Integration time 0…10 000 ms 1 ms - Displays the integration time of the protocol.

277 © Arcteq Relays Ltd

 AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

6.1.9. SPA
The device can act as a SPA slave. SPA can be selected as the communication protocol for the COM
B port (RS-485 port in the CPU module). When the device includes a serial RS-232 card connector,
the SPA protocol can also be selected as the communication protocol for the COM E and COM F
ports. Please refer to the chapter "Construction and installation" in the device manual to see the
connections for these modules.

The data transfer rate of SPA is 9600 bps, but it can also be set to 19 200 bps or 38 400 bps. As a
slave the device sends data on demand or by sequenced polling. The available data can be
measurements, circuit breaker states, function starts, function trips, etc. The full SPA signal map can
be found in AQtivate (Tools → SPA map).

The SPA event addresses can be found at Tools → Events and logs → Event list.

NO
NOTE!
TE!

To access SPA map and event list, an .aqs configuration file should be downloaded from the
relay.

6.2. Analog fault registers

At Communication → General I/O → Analog fault registers the user can set up to twelve (12) channels
to record the measured value when a protection function starts or trips. These values can be read in
two ways: locally from this same menu, or through a communication protocol if one is in use.

The following table presents the setting parameters available for the 12 channels.

Table. 6.2. - 197. Fault register settings.

Name Range Step Default Description

0: Not in use
1…12: I>, I>>, I>>>, I>>>>
(IL1, IL2, IL3)
Selects the protection function and its stage to be used as the
13…24: Id>, Id>>, Id>>>,
source for the fault register recording.
Select Id>>>> (IL1, IL2, IL3)
0: Not
record 25…28: I0>, I0>>, I0>>>, -
in use The user can choose between non-directional overcurrent,
source I0>>>> (I0)
directional overcurrent, non-directional earth fault, directional
29…32:
earth fault, and fault locator functions.
I0d>, I0d>>, I0d>>>, I0d>>>>
(I0)
33: FLX

Select 0: TRIP signal

0: TRIP Selects what triggers the fault register recording: the selected
record 1: START signal -
signal function's TRIP signal, its START signal, or either one.
trigger 2: START and TRIP signals

Recorded
- 1000 000.00…1 000 Displays the recorded measurement value at the time of the
fault 0.01 -
000.00 selected fault register trigger.
value

6.3. Real time measurements to communication

With the Real-time signals to communication menu the user can report to SCADA measurements that
are not normally available in the communication protocols mapping. Up to eight (8) magnitudes can be
selected. The recorded value can be either a per-unit value or a primary value (set by the user).

© Arcteq Relays Ltd 278

AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

Measurable values
Function block uses analog current and voltage measurement values. The relay uses these values as
the basis when it calculates the primary and secondary values of currents, voltages, powers,
impedances and other values.

Table. 6.3. - 198. Available measured values.

Signals Description

Currents

Fundamental frequency (RMS) current measurement values of phase currents and

IL1 (ff), IL2 (ff), IL3 (ff), I01 (ff), I02 (ff)
residual currents.

IL1 (TRMS), IL2 (TRMS), IL3 (TRMS),

TRMS current measurement values of phase currents and residual currents.
I01 (TRMS), I02 (TRMS)

IL1, IL2, IL3, I01, I02 & 2nd h., 3rd h., Magnitudes of the phase current components: 2nd harmonic, 3rd harmonic, 4th
th th th th th th
4 h., 5 h., 7 h., 9 h., 11 h., 13 harmonic, 5th harmonic 7th, harmonic 9th, harmonic 11th, harmonic 13th, harmonic
th th th
h., 15 h., 17 h., 19 h. 15th, harmonic 17th, harmonic 19th harmonic current.

I1, I2, I0Z Positive sequence current, negative sequence current and zero sequence current.

I0CalcMag Residual current calculated from phase currents.

IL1Ang, IL2Ang, IL3Ang,

I01Ang, I02Ang, I0CalcAng Angles of each measured current.
I1Ang, I2Ang

Voltages

UL1Mag, UL2Mag, UL3Mag,

UL12Mag, UL23Mag, UL31Mag, Magnitudes of phase voltages, phase-to-phase voltages and residual voltages.
U0Mag, U0CalcMag

U1 Pos.seq V mag, U2 Neg.seq V mag Positive and negative sequence voltages.

UL1Ang, UL2Ang, UL3Ang,

UL12Ang, UL23Ang, UL31Ang, Angles of phase voltages, phase-to-phase voltages and residual voltages.
U0Ang, U0CalcAng

U1 Pos.seq V Ang, U2 Neg.seq V Ang Positive and negative sequence angles.

Powers

S3PH
P3PH Three-phase apparent, active and reactive power.
Q3PH

SL1, SL2, SL3,

PL1, PL2, PL3, Phase apparent, active and reactive powers.
QL1, QL2, QL3

tanfi3PH
tanfiL1
Tan (φ) of three-phase powers and phase powers.
tanfiL2
tanfiL3

cosfi3PH
cosfiL1
Cos (φ) of three-phase powers and phase powers.
cosfiL2
cosfiL3

Impedances and admittances

RL12, RL23, RL31

XL12, XL23, XL31
RL1, RL2, RL3
XL1, XL2, XL3 Phase-to-phase and phase-to-neutral resistances, reactances and impedances.
Z12, Z23, Z31
ZL1, ZL2, ZL3

279 © Arcteq Relays Ltd

 AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

Signals Description

Z12Ang, Z23Ang, Z31Ang,

Phase-to-phase and phase-to-neutral impedance angles.
ZL1Ang, ZL2Ang, ZL3Ang

Rseq, Xseq, Zseq

Positive sequence resistance, reactance and impedance values and angles.
RseqAng, XseqAng, ZseqAng

GL1, GL2, GL3, G0

BL1, BL2, BL3, B0
Conductances, susceptances and admittances.
YL1, YL2, YL3, Y0

YL1angle, YL2angle, YL3angle,

Admittance angles.
Y0angle

Others

System f. Used tracking frequency at the moment.

Ref f1 Reference frequency 1.

Ref f2 Reference frequency 2.

M thermal T Motor thermal temperature.

F thermal T Feeder thermal temperature.

T thermal T Transformer thermal temperature.

RTD meas 1…16 RTD measurement channels 1…16.

Ext RTD meas 1…8 External RTD measurement channels 1…8 (ADAM module).

Settings
Table. 6.3. - 199. Settings.

Name Range Step Default Description

Measurement value 0: Disabled 0: Activates and disables the real-time signals to

-
recorder mode 1: Activated Disabled communication.

Scale current 0: No Selects whether or not values are scaled to

- 0: No
values to primary 1: Yes primary.

0: Currents
1: Voltages
Slot X magnitude 2: Powers 0: Selects the measured magnitude catecory of the
-
selection 3: Impedance (ZRX) and Currents chosen slot.
admittance (YGB)
4: Others

Described in table above Selects the magnituge in the previously selected

Slot X magnitude - -
("Available measured values") category.

Displays the measured value of the selected

magnitude of the selected slot.
-10 000 000.000…10 000
Magnitude X 0.001 -
000.000
The unit depends on the selected magnitude
(either amperes, volts, or per-unit values).

© Arcteq Relays Ltd 280

AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

7. Connections and application examples

7.1. Connections of AQ-C215
Figure. 7.1. - 172. The AQ-C215 variant without add-on modules.

281 © Arcteq Relays Ltd

 AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

Figure. 7.1. - 173. The AQ-C215 variant with digital input and output modules.

© Arcteq Relays Ltd 282

AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

Figure. 7.1. - 174. AQ-C215 application example with function block diagram.

7.2. Application example and its connections

This chapter presents an application example for the capacitor bank protection IED.

Since three line-to-line voltages and the zero sequence voltage (U4) are connected, this application
uses the voltage measurement mode "3LN+U0" (see the image below). Additionally, the three phase
currents are also connected. The digital inputs are connected to indicate the breaker status, while the
digital outputs are used for breaker control.

283 © Arcteq Relays Ltd

 AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

Figure. 7.2. - 175. Application example and its connections.

7.3. Two-phase, three-wire ARON input connection

This chapter presents the two-phase, three-wire ARON input connection for any AQ-200 series IED
with a current transformer. The example is for applications with protection CTs for just two phases. The
connection is suitable for both motor and feeder applications.

© Arcteq Relays Ltd 284

AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

Figure. 7.3. - 176. ARON connection.

The ARON input connection can measure the load symmetrically despite the fact that one of the CTs is
missing from the installation. Normally, Phase 2 does not have a current transformer installed as an
external fault is much more likely to appear on Lines 1 or 3.

A fault between Line 2 and the earth cannot be detected when the ARON input connection is used. In
order to detect an earth fault in Phase 2, a cable core CT must be used.

7.4. Trip circuit supervision (95)

Trip circuit supervision is used to monitor the wiring from auxiliary power supply, through the IED's
digital output, and all the way to the open coil of the breaker. It is recommended to supervise the health
of the trip circuit when breaker is closed.

Trip circuit supervision with one digital input and one non-latched trip output
The figure below presents an application scheme for trip circuit supervision with one digital input and a
non-latched trip output. With this connection the current keeps flowing to the open coil of the breaker
via the breaker's closing auxiliary contacts (52b) even after the circuit breaker is opened. This requires
a resistor which reduces the current: this way the coil is not energized and the relay output does not
need to cut off the coil's inductive current.

285 © Arcteq Relays Ltd

 AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

Figure. 7.4. - 177. Trip circuit supervision with one DI and one non-latched trip output.

Note that the digital input that monitors the circuit is normally closed, and the same applies to the alarm
relay if one is used. For monitoring and especially trip circuit supervision purposes it is recommended
to use a normally closed contact to confirm the wiring's condition. An active digital input generates a
less than 2 mA current to the circuit, which is usually small enough not to make the breaker's open coil
operate.

When the trip relay is controlled and the circuit breaker is opening, the digital input is shorted by the
trip contact as long as the breaker opens. Normally, this takes about 100 ms if the relay is non-latched.
A one second activation delay should, therefore, be added to the digital input. An activation delay that
is slightly longer than the circuit breaker's operations time should be enough. When circuit breaker
failure protection (CBFP) is used, adding its operation time to the digital input activation time is useful.
The whole digital input activation time is, therefore, tDI = tCB + tIEDrelease + tCBFP.

The image below presents the necessary settings when using a digital input for trip circuit supervision.
The input's polarity must be NC (normally closed) and a one second delay is needed to avoid nuisance
alarm while the circuit breaker is controlled open.

Figure. 7.4. - 178. Settings for a digital input used for trip circuit supervision.

Non-latched outputs are seen as hollow circles in the output matrix, whereas latched contacts are
painted. See the image below of an output matrix where a non-latched trip contact is used to open the
circuit breaker.

© Arcteq Relays Ltd 286

AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

Figure. 7.4. - 179. Non-latched trip contact.

When the auto-reclosing function is used in feeder applications, the trip output contacts must be non-
latched. Trip circuit supervision is generally easier and more reliable to build with non-latched outputs.

The open coil remains energized only as long as the circuit breaker is opened and the IED output
releases. This takes approximately 100 ms depending on the size and type of the breaker. When the
breaker opens, the auxiliary contacts open the inductive circuit; however, the trip contact does
not open at the same time. The IED's output relay contact opens in under 50 ms or after a set release
delay that takes place after the breaker is opened. This means that the open coil is energized for a
while after the breaker has already opened. The coil could even be energized a moment longer if the
circuit breaker failure protection has to be used and the incomer performs the trip.

Trip circuit supervision with one digital input and one connected, non-latched trip
output
There is one main difference between non-latched and latched control in trip circuit supervision:
when using the latched control, the trip circuit (in an open state) cannot be monitored as the digital
input is shorted by the IED's trip output.

287 © Arcteq Relays Ltd

 AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

Figure. 7.4. - 180. Trip circuit supervision with one DI and one latched output contact.

The trip circuit with a latched output contact can be monitored, but only when the circuit breaker's
status is "Closed". Whenever the breaker is open, the supervision is blocked by an internal logic
scheme. Its disadvantage is that the user does not know whether or not the trip circuit is intact when
the breaker is closed again.

The following logic scheme (or similar) blocks the supervision alarm when the circuit breaker is open.
The alarm is issued whenever the breaker is closed and whenever the inverted digital input signal
("TCS") activates. A normally closed digital input activates only when there is something wrong with the
trip circuit and the auxiliary power goes off. Logical output can be used in the output matrix or in
SCADA as the user wants.

The image below presents a block scheme when a non-latched trip output is not used.

© Arcteq Relays Ltd 288

AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

Figure. 7.4. - 181. Example block scheme.

289 © Arcteq Relays Ltd

 AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

8. Construction and installation

8.1. Construction
AQ-X215 is a member of the modular and scalable AQ-200 series, and it includes three (3)
configurable and modular add-on card slots. As a standard configuration the device includes the CPU
module (which consists of the CPU, a number of inputs and outputs, and the power supply) as well as
one separate voltage measurement module and one separate current measurement module.

The images below present the modules of both the non-optioned model (AQ-X215-XXXXXXX-AAA
AAA, on
the left) and the fully optioned model (AQ-X215-XXXXXXX-BCD
BCD, on the right).

Figure. 8.1. - 182. Modular construction of AQ-X215.

The modular structure of AQ-X215 allows for scalable solutions for different application requirements.
In non-standard configurations Slots C, E and F accept all available add-on modules, such as digital I/O
modules, integrated arc protection or another special module.The only difference between the slots
affecting device scalability is that Slot F also supports communication options.

When an add-on module is inserted into the device, the start-up scan searches for modules according
to their type designation code. If the module location or content is not what the device expects, the IED
does not take additional modules into account and instead issues a configuration error message. In
field upgrades, therefore, the add-on module must be ordered from Arcteq Relays Ltd. or its
representative who can then provide the module with its corresponding unlocking code to allow the
device to operate correctly once the hardware configuration has been upgraded. This also means that
the module's location in the device cannot be changed without updating the device configuration data
which, again, requires the unlocking code.

© Arcteq Relays Ltd 290

AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

When an I/O module is inserted into the device, the module location affects the naming of the I/O. The
I/O scanning order in the start-up sequence is as follows: the CPU module I/O, Slot C, Slot E, and Slot
F. This means that the digital input channels DI1, DI2 and DI3 as well as the digital output channels
OUT1, OUT2, OUT3, OUT4 and OUT5 are always located in the CPU module. If additional I/O cards
are installed, their location and card type affect the I/O naming.

The figure below presents the start-up hardware scan order of the device as well as the I/O naming
principles.

Figure. 8.1. - 183. AQ-X215 hardware scanning and I/O naming principles.

1. Scan
The start-up system; detects and self-tests the CPU module, voltages, communication and
the I/O; finds and assigns "DI1", "DI2", "DI3", "OUT1", "OUT2", "OUT3", "OUT4" and "OUT5".
2. Scan
Scans Slot A and finds the four channels of the VT module (fixed for AQ-X215). If the VTM is
not found, the device issues an alarm.
3. Scan
Scans Slot B, which should always remain empty in AQ-X215 devices. If it is not empty, the
device issues an alarm.
4. Scan
Scans Slot C, and moves to the next slot if Slot C is empty. If the scan finds an 8DI module
(that is, a module with eight digital inputs), it reserves the designations "DI4", "DI5", "DI6",
"DI7", "DI8", "DI9", "DI10" and "DI11" to this slot. If the scan finds a DO5 module (that is, a
module with five digital outputs), it reserves the designations "OUT6", "OUT7", "OUT8",
"OUT9" and "OUT10" to this slot. The I/O is then added if the type designation code (e.g. AQ-
P215-PH0AAAA-BBC) matches with the existing modules in the device. If the code and the
modules do not match, the device issues and alarm. An alarm is also issued if the device
expects to find a module here but does not find one.

291 © Arcteq Relays Ltd

 AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

5. Scan
Scans Slot D and finds the five channels of the CT module (fixed for AQ-X215). If the CTM is
not found, the device issues an alarm.
6. Scan
Scans Slot E, and moves to the next slot if Slot E is empty. If the scan finds an 8DI module, it
reserves the designations "DI4", "DI5", "DI6", "DI7", "DI8", "DI9", "DI10" and "DI11" to this slot. If
Slot C also has an 8DI module (and therefore has already reserved these designations), the
device reserves the designations "DI12", "DI13", "DI14", "DI15", "DI16", "DI17", "DI18" and
"DI19" to this slot. If the scan finds a 5DO module, it reserves the designations "OUT6",
"OUT7", "OUT8", "OUT9" and "OUT10" to this slot. Again, if Slot C also has a 5DO and has
therefore already reserved these designations, the device reserves the designations
"OUT11", "OUT12", "OUT13", "OUT14" and "OUT15" to this slot. If the scan finds the arc
protection module, it reserves the sensor channels ("S1", "S2", "S3", "S4"), the high-speed
outputs ("HSO1", "HSO2"), and the digital input channel ("ArcBI") to this slot.
7. Scan
A similar operation to Scan 6 (checks which designations have been reserved by modules in
previous slots and numbers the new ones accordingly).

Thus far this document has only explained the installation of I/O add-on cards to the option module
slots. This is because all other module types are treated in a same way. For example, when an
additional communication port is installed into the upper port of the communication module, its
designation is Communication port 3 or higher, as Communication ports 1 and 2 already exist in the
CPU module (which is scanned, and thus designated, first). After a communication port is detected, it
is added into the device's communication space and its corresponding settings are enabled.

The fully optioned example case of AQ-X215-XXXXXXX-BCD BCD (the first image pair, on the right) has a
total of 11 digital input channels available: three (DI1…DI3) in the CPU module, and eight (DI4…DI11)
in Slot C. It also has a total of 10 digital output channels available: five (DO1…DO5) in the CPU
module, and five (DO6…DO10) in Slot E. These same principles apply to all non-standard
configurations in the AQ-X215 IED family.

© Arcteq Relays Ltd 292

AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

8.2. CPU module

Figure. 8.2. - 184. CPU module.

Module connectors
Table. 8.2. - 200. Module connector descriptions.

Connector Description

Communication port A, or the RJ-45 port. Used for the setting tool connection and for IEC 61850, Modbus/
COM A
TCP, IEC 104, DNP3 and station bus communications.

Communication port B, or the RS-485 port. Used for the SCADA communications for the following protocols:
COM B Modbus/RTU, Modbus I/O, SPA, DNP3, IEC 101 and IEC 103. The pins have the following designations: Pin 1 =
DATA +, Pin 2 = DATA –, Pin 3 = GND, Pins 4 & 5 = Terminator resistor enabled by shorting.

Model with 3 digital inputs Model with 2 digital inputs

Digital input 1, nominal threshold voltage 24 V, 110 V Digital input 1, nominal threshold voltage 24 V, 110 V
X1
or 220 V. or 220 V.

Digital input 2, nominal threshold voltage 24 V, 110 V

X2 GND for digital input 1.
or 220 V.

Digital input 3, nominal threshold voltage 24 V, 110 V Digital input 2, nominal threshold voltage 24 V, 110 V
X3
or 220 V. or 220 V.

X4 Common GND for digital inputs 1, 2 and 3. GND for digital input 2.

X 5:6 Output relay 1, with a normally open (NO) contact.

X 7:8 Output relay 2, with a normally open (NO) contact.

X 9:10 Output relay 3, with a normally open (NO) contact.

X 11:12 Output relay 4, with a normally open (NO) contact.

X 13:14:15 Output relay 5, with a changeover contact.

293 © Arcteq Relays Ltd

 AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

Connector Description

System fault's output relay, with a changeover contact. Pins 16 and 17 are closed when the unit has a system
X 16:17:18
fault or is powered OFF. Pins 16 and 18 are closed when the unit is powered ON and there is no system fault.

Power supply IN. Either 85…265 VAC/DC (model A; order code "H") or 18…75 DC (model B; order code
X 19:20
"L"). Positiv
ositivee side (+) to P
Pin
in 20.

GND The relay's earthing connector.

By default, the CPU module (combining the CPU, the I/O and the power supply) is included in all
AQ-2xx IEDs to provide two standard communication ports and the relay's basic digital I/O. The
module can be ordered to include 2 or 3 digital inputs.

The current consumption of the digital inputs is 2 mA when activated, while the range of the operating
voltage is 24 V/110 V/220 V depending on the ordered hardware. All digital inputs are scannced in 5
ms program cycles, and their pick-up and release delays as well as their NO/NC selection can be set
with software. The digital output controls are also set by the user with software. By default, the digital
outputs are controlled in 5 ms program cycles. All output contacts are mechanical. The rated voltage
of the NO/NC outputs is 250 VAC/DC.

The auxiliary voltage is defined in the ordering code: the available power supply models available are
A (85…265 VAC/DC) and B (18…75 DC). For further details, please refer to the "Auxiliary voltage"
chapter in the "Technical data" section of this document.

Digital input settings

The settings described in the table below can be found at Control → Device I/O → Digital input
settings in the relay settings.

Table. 8.2. - 201. Digital input settings.

Name Range Step Default Description

0: NO (Normally
open) Selects whether the status of the digital input is 1 or 0 when the input
DIx Polarity - 0: NO
1: NC (Normally is energized.
closed)

DIx Activation 0.000…1800.000 0.001

0.000 s Defines the delay for the status change from 0 to 1.
delay s s

DIx Drop-off 0.000…1800.000 0.001

0.000 s Defines the delay for the status change from 1 to 0.
time s s

0: Disabled - 0: Selects whether or not a 30-ms deactivation delay is added to

DIx AC mode
1: Enabled Disabled account for alternating current.

Scanning cycle
All digital inputs are scanned in a 5 ms cycle, meaning that the state of an input is updated every 0…5
milliseconds. When an input is used internally in the device (either in setting group change or logic), it
takes additional 0…5 milliseconds to operate. Theoretically, therefore, it takes 0…10 milliseconds to
change the group when a digital input is used for group control or a similar function. In practice,
however, the delay is between 2…8 milliseconds about 95 % of the time. When a digital input is
connected directly to a digital output (T1…Tx), it takes an additional 5 ms round. Therefore, when a
digital input controls a digital output internally, it takes 0…15 milliseconds in theory and 2…13
milliseconds in practice.

Please note that the mechanical delay of the relay is no

nott included in these approximations.

© Arcteq Relays Ltd 294

AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

8.3. Current measurement module

Figure. 8.3. - 185. Module connections with standard and ring lug terminals.

Connector Description

CTM 1-2 Phase current measurement for phase L1 (A).

CTM 3-4 Phase current measurement for phase L2 (B).

CTM 5-6 Phase current measurement for phase L3 (C).

CTM 7-8 Coarse residual current measurement I01.

CTM 9-10 Fine residual current measurement I02.

A basic current measurement module with five channels includes three-phase current measurement
inputs as well as coarse and fine residual current inputs. The CT module is available with either
standard or ring lug connectors.

The current measurement module is connected to the secondary side of conventional current
transformers (CTs). The nominal current for the phase current inputs is 5 A. The input nominal current
can be scaled for secondary currents of 1…10 A. The secondary currents are calibrated to nominal
currents of 1 A and 5 A, which provide ±0.5 % inaccuracy when the range is 0.005…4 × In.

The measurement ranges are as follows:

• Phase currents 25 mA…250 A (RMS)

• Coarse residual current 5 mA…150 A (RMS)
• Fine residual current 1 mA…75 A (RMS)

The characteristics of phase current inputs are as follows:

• The angle measurement inaccuracy is less than ± 0.2 degrees with nominal current.
• The frequency measurement range of the phase current inputs is 6…1800 Hz with standard
hardware.
• The quantization of the measurement signal is applied with 18-bit AD converters, and the
sample rate of the signal is 64 samples/cycle when the system frequency ranges from 6 Hz to
75 Hz.

For further details please refer to the "Current measurement" chapter in the “Technical data” section of
this document.

295 © Arcteq Relays Ltd

 AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

8.4. Voltage measurement module

Figure. 8.4. - 186. Voltage measurement module.

Connector Description

VTM 1-2 Configurable voltage measurement input U1.

VTM 3-4 Configurable voltage measurement input U2.

VTM 5-6 Configurable voltage measurement input U3.

VTM 7-8 Configurable voltage measurement input U4.

A basic voltage measurement module with four channels includes four voltage measurement inputs
that can be configured freely.

The voltage measurement module is connected to the secondary side of conventional

voltage transformers (VTs) or directly to low-voltage systems secured by fuses. The nominal voltage
can be set between 100…400 V. Voltages are calibrated in a range of 0…240 V, which provides ±
0.2 % inaccuracy in the same range.

The voltage input characteristics are as follows:

• The measurement range is 0.5…480.0 V per channel.

• The angle measurement inaccuracy is less than ± 0.5 degrees within the nominal range.
• The frequency measurement range of the voltage inputs is 6…1800 Hz with standard
hardware.
• The quantization of the measurement signal is applied with 18-bit AD converters, and the
sample rate of the signal is 64 samples/cycle when the system frequency ranges from 6 Hz to
75 Hz.

For further details please refer to the "Voltage measurement" chapter in the “Technical data” section of
this document.

© Arcteq Relays Ltd 296

AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

8.5. Digital input module (optional)

Figure. 8.5. - 187. Digital input module (DI8) with eight add-on digital inputs.

Description (x = the number of digital inputs in other modules that preceed this one in the
Connector
configuration)

X1 DIx + 1

X2 DIx + 2

X3 DIx + 3

X4 DIx + 4

X5 Common earthing for the first four digital inputs.

X6 DIx + 5

X7 DIx + 6

X8 DIx + 7

X9 DIx + 8

X 10 Common earthing for the other four digital inputs.

The DI8 module is an add-on module with eight (8) galvanically isolated digital inputs. This module can
be ordered directly to be installed into the device in the factory, or it can be upgraded in the field after
the device's original installation when required. The properties of the inputs in this module are the same
as those of the inputs in the main processor module. The current consumption of the digital inputs is 2
mA when activated, while the range of the operating voltage is from 0…265 VAC/DC. The activation
and release thresholds are set in the software and the resolution is 1 V. All digital inputs are scannced
in 5 ms program cycles, and their pick-up and release delays as well as their NO/NC selection can be
set with software.

For the naming convention of the digital inputs provided by this module please refer to the chapter titled
"Construction and installation".

For technical details please refer to the chapter titled "Digital input module" in the "Technical data"
section of this document.

297 © Arcteq Relays Ltd

 AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

Setting up the activation and release delays

The settings described in the table below can be found at Control → Device I/O → Digital input
settings in the relay settings.

Table. 8.5. - 202. Digital input settings of DI8 module.

Name Range Step Default Description

0: NO (Normally
DIx open) Selects whether the status of the digital input is 1 or 0 when the input is
- 0: NO
Polarity 1: NC (Normally energized.
closed)

Defines the activation threshold for the digital input.

DIx
Activation 16.0…200.0 V 0.1 V 88 V When "NO" is the selected polarity, the measured voltage exceeding this
threshold setting activates the input. When "NC" is the selected polarity,
the measured voltage exceeding this setting deactivates the input.

Defines the release threshold for the digital input.

DIx
Release 10.0…200.0 V 0.1 V 60V When "NO" is the selected polarity, the measured voltage below this
threshold setting deactivates the input. When "NC" is the selected polarity,
the measured voltage below this setting activates the input.

DIx
0.000…1800.000 0.001
Activation 0.000 s Defines the delay when the status changes from 0 to 1.
s s
delay

DIx Drop- 0.000…1800.000 0.001

0.000 s Defines the delay when the status changes from 1 to 0.
off time s s

Selects whether or not a 30-ms deactivation delay is added to take the

DIx AC 0: Disabled 0:
- alternating current into account. The "DIx Release threshold" parameter is
Mode 1: Enabled Disabled
hidden and forced to 10 % of the set "DIx Activation threshold" parameter.

DIx Displays the number of times the digital input has changed its status from
Counter 0…232–1 1 0
0 to 1.

DIx
0: -
Counter - 0: - Resets the DIx counter value to zero.
1: Clear
clear

The user can set the activation threshold individually for each digital input. When the activation and
release thresholds have been set properly, they will result in the digital input states to be activated and
released reliably. The selection of the normal state between normally open (NO) and normally closed
(NC) defines whether or not the digital input is considered activated when the digital input channel is
energized.

The diagram below depicts the digital input states when the input channels are energized and de-
energized.

© Arcteq Relays Ltd 298

AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

Figure. 8.5. - 188. Digital input state when energizing and de-energizing the digital input channels.

8.6. Digital output module (optional)

Figure. 8.6. - 189. Digital output module (DO5) with five add-on digital outputs.

Connector Description

X 1–2 OUTx + 1 (1st and 2nd pole NO)

X 3–4 OUTx + 2 (1st and 2nd pole NO)

X 5–6 OUTx + 3 (1st and 2nd pole NO)

X 7–8 OUTx + 4 (1st and 2nd pole NO)

299 © Arcteq Relays Ltd

 AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

Connector Description

X 9–10 OUTx + 5 (1st and 2nd pole NO)

The DO5 module is an add-on module with five (5) digital outputs. This module can be ordered directly
to be installed into the device in the factory, or it can be upgraded in the field after the device's original
installation when required. The properties of the outputs in this module are the same as those of the
outputs in the main processor module. The user can set the digital output controls with software. All
digital outputs are scanned in 5 ms program cycles, and their contacts are mechanical in type. The
rated voltage of the NO/NC outputs is 250 VAC/DC.

For the naming convention of the digital inputs provided by this module please refer to the chapter titled
"Construction and installation".

For technical details please refer to the chapter titled "Digital output module" in the "Technical data"
section of this document.

8.7. Arc protection module (optional)

Figure. 8.7. - 190. Arc protection module.

Table. 8.7. - 203. Module connections.

Connector Description

S1

S2
Light sensor channels 1…4 with positive ("+"), sensor ("S") and earth connectors.
S3

S4

X1 HSO1 (+, NO)

X2 Common battery positive terminal (+) for the HSOs.

X3 HSO2 (+, NO)

X4 Binary input 1 (+ pole)

X5 Binary input 1 ( – pole)

© Arcteq Relays Ltd 300

AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

The arc protection module is an add-on module with four (4) light sensor channels, two (2) high-speed
outputs and one (1) binary input. This module can be ordered directly to be installed into the device in
the factory, or it can be upgraded in the field after the device's original installation when required. If
even one of the sensor channels is connected incorrectly, the channel does not work. Each channel
can have up to three (3) light sensors serially connected to it. The user can choose how many of the
channels are in use.

The high-speed outputs (HSO1 and HSO2) operate only with a DC power supply. The battery's positive
terminal (+) must be wired according to the drawing. The NO side of the outputs 1 or 2 must be wired
through trip coil to the battery's negative terminal (–). The high-speed outputs can withstand voltages
up to 250 VDC. The operation time of the high-speed outputs is less than 1 ms. For further information
please refer to the chapter titled "Arc protection module" in the "Technical data" section of this manual.

The rated voltage of the binary input is 24 VDC. The threshold picks up at ≥16 VDC. The binary input
can be used for external light information or for similar applications. It can also be used as a part of
various ARC schemes. Please note that the binary input's delay is 5…10ms.

NO
NOTE!
TE!

BI1, HSO1 and HSO2 are not visible in the Binary inputs and Binary outputs menus
(Control → Device I/O), they can only be programmed in the arc matrix menu
(Protection → Arc protection → I/O → Direct output control and HSO control).

8.8. RTD & mA input module (optional)

Figure. 8.8. - 191. RTD & mA module connectors.

301 © Arcteq Relays Ltd

 AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

The RTD & mA module is an add-on module with eight (8) RTD input channels. Each input supports
2-wire, 3-wire and 4-wire RTD sensors as well as thermocouple (TC) sensors. The sensor type can be
selected with software for two groups, four channels each. The supported sensor types are as follows:

• Supported RTD sensors: Pt100, Pt1000

• Supported thermocouple sensors: type K (NiCh/NiAl), type J (Fe/constantan), type T (Cu/
constantan) and type S (Cu/CuNi compensating).

There are also two mA input channels available in the module. Please note that if the mA input
channels are in use, only the first four channels are available for RTD and TC measurements.

Figure. 8.8. - 192. Different sensor types and their connections.

© Arcteq Relays Ltd 302

AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

8.9. Serial RS-232 communication module (optional)

Figure. 8.9. - 193. Serial RS-232 module connectors.

Connector Name Description

• Serial-based communications
• Wavelength 660 nm
Serial fiber (GG/
COM E
PP/GP/PG)
• Compatible with 50/125 μm, 62.5/125 μm, 100/140 μm, and
200 μm Plastic-Clad Silica (PCS) fiber
• Compatible with ST connectors

COM F –
+24 V input Optional external auxiliary voltage for serial fiber
Pin 1

COM F –
GND Optional external auxiliary voltage for serial fiber
Pin 2

COM F –
- -
Pin 3

COM F –
- -
Pin 4

COM F –
RS-232 RTS Serial based communications
Pin 5

COM F –
RS-232 GND Serial based communications
Pin 6

COM F –
RS-232 TX Serial based communications
Pin 7

COM F –
RS-232 RX Serial based communications
Pin 8

COM F –
- -
Pin 9

COM F – +3.3 V output

Spare power source for external equipment (45 mA)
Pin 10 (spare)

COM F –
- -
Pin 11

303 © Arcteq Relays Ltd

 AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

Connector Name Description

COM F –
- -
Pin 12

The option card includes two serial communication interfaces: COM E is a serial fiber interface with
glass/plastic option, COM F is an RS-232 interface.

8.10. LC 100 Mbps Ethernet communication module (optional)

Figure. 8.10. - 194. LC 100 Mbps Ethernet module connectors.

Connector Description

• Communication port C, LC fiber connector.

COM C: • 62.5/125 μm or 50/125 μm multimode (glass).
• Wavelength 1300 nm.

• Communication port D, LC fiber connector.

COM D: • 62.5/125 μm or 50/125 μm multimode (glass).
• Wavelength 1300 nm.

The optional LC 100 Mbps Ethernet card supports both HSR and PRP protocols. The card has two
PRP/HSR ports, which are 100 Mbps fiber ports.

© Arcteq Relays Ltd 304

AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

8.11. Double ST 100 Mbps Ethernet communication module (optional)

Figure. 8.11. - 195. Double ST 100 Mbps Ethernet communication module connectors.

Connector Description

Two-pin connector • IRIG-B input

• Duplex ST connectors (IRIG-B input)

• 62.5/125 μm or 50/125 μm multimode fiber
• Transmitter wavelength: 1260…1360 nm (nominal: 1310 nm)
ST connectors
• Receiver wavelength: 1100…1600 nm
• 100BASE-FX
• Up to 2 km

This option cards supports redundant ring configuration and multidrop configurations. Redundant
communication can be implemented by Ethernet switches that support Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol
(RSTP). Please note that each ring can only contain AQ-200 series devices, and any third party
devices must be connected to a separate ring.

For other redundancy options, please refer to the option card "LC 100 Mbps Ethernet communication
module".

The images below present two example configurations: the first displays a ring configuration (note how
the third party devices are connected in a separate ring), while the second displays a multidrop
configuration.

305 © Arcteq Relays Ltd

 AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

Figure. 8.11. - 196. Example of a ring configuration.

Figure. 8.11. - 197. Example of a multidrop configuration.

© Arcteq Relays Ltd 306

AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

8.12. Double RJ-45 10/100 Mbps Ethernet communication module

(optional)
Figure. 8.12. - 198. Double RJ-45 10/100 Mbps Ethernet communication module.

Connector Description

Two-pin connector • IRIG-B input

• Two Ethernet ports

RJ-45 connectors • RJ-45 connectors
• 10BASE-T and 100BASE-TX

This option card supports redundant ring configuration and multidrop configurations. Redundant
communication can be implemented by Ethernet switches that support Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol
(RSTP). Please note that each ring can only contain AQ-200 series devices, and any third party
devices must be connected to a separate ring.

For other redundancy options, please refer to the option card "LC 100 Mbps Ethernet communication
module".

The images below present two example configurations: the first displays a ring configuration (note how
the third party devices are connected in a separate ring), while the second displays a multidrop
configuration.

307 © Arcteq Relays Ltd

 AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

Figure. 8.12. - 199. Example of a ring configuration.

Figure. 8.12. - 200. Example of a multidrop configuration.

© Arcteq Relays Ltd 308

AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

8.13. Milliampere (mA) I/O module (optional)

Figure. 8.13. - 201. Milliampere (mA) I/O module connections.

Connector Description

Pin 1 mA OUT 1 + connector (0…24 mA)

Pin 2 mA OUT 1 – connector (0…24 mA)

Pin 3 mA OUT 2 + connector (0…24 mA)

Pin 4 mA OUT 2 – connector (0…24 mA)

Pin 5 mA OUT 3 + connector (0…24 mA)

Pin 6 mA OUT 3 – connector (0…24 mA)

Pin 7 mA OUT 4 + connector (0…24 mA)

Pin 8 mA OUT 4 – connector (0…24 mA)

Pin 9 mA IN 1 + connector (0…33 mA)

Pin 10 mA IN 1 – connector (0…33 mA)

The milliampere (mA) I/O module is an add-on module with four (4) mA outputs and one (1) mA input.
Both the outputs and the input are in two galvanically isolated groups, with one pin for the positive (+)
connector and one pin for the negative (–) connector.

This module can be ordered directly to be installed into the device in the factory, or it can be upgraded
in the field after the device's original installation when required.

The user sets the mA I/O with the mA outputs control function. This can be done at Control → Device
I/O → mA outputs in the relay configuration settings.

8.14. Dimensions and installation

The device can be installed either to a standard 19” rack or to a switchgear panel with cutouts. The
desired installation type is defined in the order code. When installing to a rack, the device takes a
quarter (¼) of the rack's width, meaning that a total of four devices can be installed to the same rack
next to one another.

309 © Arcteq Relays Ltd

 AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

The figures below describe the device dimensions (first figure), the device installation (second), and the
panel cutout dimensions and device spacing (third).

Figure. 8.14. - 202. Device dimensions.

© Arcteq Relays Ltd 310

AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

Figure. 8.14. - 203. Device installation.

311 © Arcteq Relays Ltd

 AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

Figure. 8.14. - 204. Panel cutout dimensions and device spacing.

© Arcteq Relays Ltd 312

AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

9. Technical data
9.1. Hardware

9.1.1. Measurements

9.1.1.1. Current measurement

Table. 9.1.1.1. - 204. Technical data for the current measurement module.

Connections

Three phase current inputs: IL1 (A), IL2 (B), IL3 (C)
Measurement channels/CT
inputs Two residual current inputs: Coarse residual current input I01, Fine residual current input
I02

Phase current inputs (A, B, C)

Sample rate 64 samples per cycle in frequency range 6...75Hz

Rated current IN 5 A (configurable 0.2…10 A)

30 A (continuous)

100 A (for 10 s)
Thermal withstand
500 A (for 1 s)

1250 A (for 0.01 s)

Frequency measurement range From 6…75Hz fundamental, up to the 31st harmonic current

Current measurement range 25 mA…250 A (RMS)

0.005…4.000 × IN < ±0.5 % or < ±15 mA

Current measurement
4…20 × IN < ±0.5 %
inaccuracy
20…50 × IN < ±1.0 %

< ±0.2° (I> 0.1 A)

Angle measurement inaccuracy
< ±1.0° (I≤ 0.1 A)

Burden (50/60 Hz) <0.1 VA

Transient overreach <8 %

Coarse residual current input (I01)

Rated current IN 1 A (configurable 0.2…10 A)

25 A (continuous)

100 A (for 10 s)
Thermal withstand
500 A (for 1 s)

1250 A (for 0.01 s)

Frequency measurement range From 6…75 Hz fundamental, up to the 31st harmonic current

Current measurement range 5 mA…150 A (RMS)

0.002…10.000 × IN < ±0.5 % or < ±3 mA

Current measurement
inaccuracy
10…150 × IN < ±0.5 %

313 © Arcteq Relays Ltd

 AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

< ±0.2° (I> 0.05 A)

Angle measurement inaccuracy
< ±1.0° (I≤ 0.05 A)

Burden (50/60Hz) <0.1 VA

Transient overreach <5 %

Fine residual current input (I02)

Rated current IN 0.2 A (configurable 0.2…10 A)

25 A (continuous)

100 A (for 10 s)
Thermal withstand
500 A (for 1 s)

1250 A (for 0.01 s)

Frequency measurement range From 6…75 Hz fundamental, up to the 31st harmonic current

Current measurement range 1 mA…75 A (RMS)

0.002…25.000 × IN < ±0.5 % or < ±0.6 mA

Current measurement
inaccuracy
25…375 × IN < ±1.0 %

< ±0.2° (I> 0.01 A)

Angle measurement inaccuracy
< ±1.0° (I≤ 0.01 A)

Burden (50/60Hz) <0.1 VA

Transient overreach <5 %

Terminal block connection

Terminal block Phoenix Contact FRONT 4-H-6,35

Solid or stranded wire

Maximum wire diameter 4 mm2

NO
NOTE!
TE!

Current measurement accuracy has been verified with 50/60 Hz.

The amplitude difference is 0.2 % and the angle difference is 0.5 degrees higher at 16.67 Hz and other
frequencies.

9.1.1.2. Voltage measurement

Table. 9.1.1.2. - 205. Technical data for the voltage measurement module.

Connection

Measurement channels/VT inputs 4 independent VT inputs (U1, U2, U3 and U4)

Measurement

Sample rate 64 samples per cycle in frequency range 6...75Hz

Voltage measuring range 0.50…480.00 V (RMS)

1…2 V ±1.5 %

Voltage measurement inaccuracy 2…10 V ±0.5 %

10…480 V ±0.35 %

© Arcteq Relays Ltd 314

AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

±0.2 degrees (15…300 V)

Angle measurement inaccuracy
±1.5 degrees (1…15 V)

Voltage measurement bandwidth (freq.) 7…75 Hz fundamental, up to the 31st harmonic voltage

Terminal block connection

Terminal block Phoenix Contact PC 5/8-STCL1-7.62

Solid or stranded wire

Maximum wire diameter 6 mm2

Input impedance 24.5…24.6 MΩ

Burder (50/60 Hz) <0.02 VA

Thermal withstand 630 VRMS (continuous)

NO
NOTE!
TE!

Voltage measurement accuracy has been verified with 50/60 Hz.

The amplitude difference is 0.2 % and the angle difference is 0.5 degrees higher at 16.67 Hz and other
frequencies.

9.1.1.3. Power and energy measurement

Table. 9.1.1.3. - 206. Power and energy measurement accuracy

Power measurement P, Q, S Frequency range 6…75 Hz

0.3 % <1.2 × IN or 3 VA secondary

Inaccuracy
1.0 % >1.2 × IN or 3 VA secondary

Energy measurement Frequency range 6…75 Hz

IEC 62053-22 class 0.5 S (50/60Hz) as standard

Energy and power metering inaccuracy
IEC 62053-22 class 0.2 S (50/60Hz) option available (see the order code for details)

315 © Arcteq Relays Ltd

 AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

Figure. 9.1.1.3. - 205. Energy and power metering accuracy in the optional 0.2 S accuracy model.

9.1.1.4. Frequency measurement

Table. 9.1.1.4. - 207. Frequency measurement accuracy.

Frequency measurement performance

Frequency measuring range

6…75 Hz fundamental, up to the 31st harmonic current or voltage

Inaccuracy 10 mHz

9.1.2. CPU & Power supply

9.1.2.1. Auxiliary voltage

Table. 9.1.2.1. - 208. Power supply model A

Rated values

Rated auxiliary voltage 85…265 V (AC/DC)

<7W
Power consumption
< 15 W

Maximum permitted interrupt time < 60 ms with 110 VDC

DC ripple < 15 %

© Arcteq Relays Ltd 316

AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

Terminal block connection

Terminal block Phoenix Contact MSTB 2,5/5-ST-5,08

Solid or stranded wire

Maximum wire diameter 2.5 mm2

Table. 9.1.2.1. - 209. Power supply model B

Rated values

Rated auxiliary voltage 18…72 VDC

<7W
Power consumption
< 15 W

Maximum permitted interrupt time < 90 ms with 24 VDC

DC ripple < 15 %

Terminal block connection

Terminal block Phoenix Contact MSTB 2,5/5-ST-5,08

Solid or stranded wire

Maximum wire diameter 2.5 mm2

9.1.2.2. CPU communication ports

Table. 9.1.2.2. - 210. Front panel local communication port.

Port

Port media Copper Ethernet RJ-45

Number of ports 1

PC-protocols

Port protocols FTP

Telnet

Features

Data transfer rate 100 MB

System integration Cannot be used for system protocols, only for local programming

Table. 9.1.2.2. - 211. Rear panel system communication port A.

Port

Port media Copper Ethernet RJ-45

Number of ports 1

Features

IEC 61850

IEC 104

Modbus/TCP
Port protocols
DNP3

FTP

Telnet

317 © Arcteq Relays Ltd

 AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

Data transfer rate 100 MB

System integration Can be used for system protocols and for local programming

Table. 9.1.2.2. - 212. Rear panel system communication port B.

Port

Port media Copper RS-485

Number of ports 1

Features

Modbus/RTU

IEC 103

Port protocols IEC 101

DNP3

SPA

Data transfer rate 65 580 kB/s

System integration Can be used for system protocols

9.1.2.3. CPU digital inputs

Table. 9.1.2.3. - 213. CPU model-isolated digital inputs, with thresholds defined by order code.

Rated values

Rated auxiliary voltage 265 V (AC/DC)

Nominal voltage Order code defined: 24, 110, 220 V (AC/DC)

Pick-up threshold Order code defined: 19, 90,170 V

Release threshold Order code defined: 14, 65, 132 V

Scanning rate 5 ms

Settings

Pick-up delay Software settable: 0…1800 s

Polarity Software settable: Normally On/Normally Off

Current drain 2 mA

Terminal block connection

Terminal block Phoenix Contact MSTB 2,5/5-ST-5,08

Solid or stranded wire

Maximum wire diameter 2.5 mm2

9.1.2.4. CPU digital outputs

Table. 9.1.2.4. - 214. Digital outputs (Normally Open)

Rated values

Rated auxiliary voltage 265 V (AC/DC)

Continuous carry 5A

Make and carry 0.5 s 30 A

Make and carry 3 s 15 A

© Arcteq Relays Ltd 318

AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

Breaking capacity, DC (L/R = 40 ms)

at 48 VDC 1A
at 110 VDC 0.4 A
at 220 VDC 0.2 A

Control rate 5 ms

Settings

Polarity Software settable: Normally On/Normally Off

Terminal block connection

Terminal block Phoenix Contact MSTB 2,5/5-ST-5,08

Solid or stranded wire

Maximum wire diameter 2.5 mm2

Table. 9.1.2.4. - 215. Digital outputs (Change-Over)

Rated values

Rated auxiliary voltage 265 V (AC/DC)

Continuous carry 5A

Make and carry 0.5 s 30 A

Make and carry 3 s 15 A

Breaking capacity, DC (L/R = 40 ms)

at 48 VDC 1A
at 110 VDC 0.4 A
at 220 VDC 0.2 A

Control rate 5 ms

Settings

Polarity Software settable: Normally On/Normally Off

Terminal block connection

Terminal block Phoenix Contact MSTB 2,5/5-ST-5,08

Solid or stranded wire

Maximum wire diameter 2.5 mm2

9.1.3. Option cards

9.1.3.1. Digital input module

Table. 9.1.3.1. - 216. Technical data for the digital input module.

Rated values

Rated auxiliary voltage 5…265 V (AC/DC)

Current drain 2 mA

Scanning rate 5 ms
Activation/release delay 5...11 ms

Settings

Pick-up threshold Software settable: 16…200 V, setting step 1 V

Release threshold Software settable: 10…200 V, setting step 1 V

Pick-up delay Software settable: 0…1800 s

Drop-off delay Software settable: 0…1800 s

Polarity Software settable: Normally On/Normally Off

319 © Arcteq Relays Ltd

 AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

Terminal block connection

Terminal block Phoenix Contact MSTB 2,5/5-ST-5,08

Solid or stranded wire

Maximum wire diameter 2.5 mm2

9.1.3.2. Digital output module

Table. 9.1.3.2. - 217. Technical data for the digital output module.

Rated values

Rated auxiliary voltage 265 V (AC/DC)

Continuous carry 5A

Make and carry 0.5 s 30 A

Make and carry 3 s 15 A

Breaking capacity, DC (L/R = 40 ms)

at 48 VDC 1A
at 110 VDC 0.4 A
at 220 VDC 0.2 A

Control rate 5 ms

Settings

Polarity Software settable: Normally On/Normally Off

Terminal block connection

Terminal block Phoenix Contact MSTB 2,5/5-ST-5,08

Solid or stranded wire

Maximum wire diameter 2.5 mm2

9.1.3.3. Arc protection module

Table. 9.1.3.3. - 218. Technical data for the arc protection module.

Connections

Input arc point sensor channels S1, S2, S3, S4 (pressure and light, or light only)

Sensors per channel 3

Performance

Pick-up light intensity 8, 25 or 50 kLx (the sensor is selectable in the order code)

Inaccuracy:
- Point sensor detection radius 180 degrees

Typically <5 ms (dedicated semiconductor outputs)

Start and instant operating time (light only)
Typically <10 ms (regular output relays)

Table. 9.1.3.3. - 219. High-Speed Outputs (HSO1…2)

Rated values

Rated auxiliary voltage 250 VDC

Continuous carry 2A

Make and carry 0.5 s 15 A

Make and carry 3 s 6A

Breaking capacity, DC (L/R = 40 ms) 1 A/110 W

© Arcteq Relays Ltd 320

AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

Control rate 5 ms

Operation delay <1 ms

Polarity Normally Off

Contact material Semiconductor

Terminal block connection

Terminal block Phoenix Contact MSTB 2,5/5-ST-5,08

Solid or stranded wire

Maximum wire diameter 2.5 mm2

Table. 9.1.3.3. - 220. Binary input channel

Rated values

Voltage withstand 265 VDC

Rated auxiliary voltage 24 VDC

Pick-up threshold ≥16 VDC
Release threshold ≤15 VDC

Scanning rate 5 ms

Polarity Normally Off

Current drain 3 mA

Terminal block connection

Terminal block Phoenix Contact MSTB 2,5/5-ST-5,08

Solid or stranded wire

Maximum wire diameter 2.5 mm2

NO
NOTE!
TE! Polarity has to be correct.

9.1.3.4. Milliampere module (mA out & mA in)

Table. 9.1.3.4. - 221. Technical data for the milliampere module.

Signals

Output magnitudes 4 × mA output signal (DC)

Input magnitudes 1 × mA input signal (DC)

mA input

Range (hardware) 0...33 mA

Range (measurement) 0...24 mA

Inaccuracy ±0.1 mA

Update cycle 5...10 000 ms, setting step 5 ms

Response time @ 5 ms cycle ~ 15 ms (13...18 ms)

Update cycle time inaccuracy Max. +20 ms above the set cycle

mA input scaling range 0...4000 mA

Output scaling range -1 000 000.0000…1 000 000.0000, setting step 0.0001

mA output

Inaccuracy @ 0...24 mA ±0.01 mA

321 © Arcteq Relays Ltd

 AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

Response time @ 5 ms cycle [fixed] < 5 ms

mA output scaling range 0...24 mA, setting step 0.001 mA

Source signal scaling range -1 000 000.000…1 000 000.0000, setting step 0.0001

9.1.3.5. RTD & mA input module

Table. 9.1.3.5. - 222. Technical data for the RTD & mA input module.

Channels 1-8

2/3/4-wire RTD and thermocouple sensors

Pt100 or Pt1000

Type K, Type J, Type T and Type S

Channels 7 & 8 support mA measurement

Measurement range

mA input range 0…33 mA

9.1.3.6. RS-232 & serial fiber communication module

Table. 9.1.3.6. - 223. Technical data for the RS-232 & serial fiber communication module.

Ports

RS-232

Serial fiber (GG/PP/GP/PG)

Serial port wavelength

660 nm

Cable type

1 mm plastic fiber

9.1.3.7. Double LC 100 Mbps Ethernet communication module

Table. 9.1.3.7. - 224. Technical data for the double LC 100 Mbps Ethernet communication module.

Protocols

Protocols HSR and PRP

Ports

Quantity of fiber ports 2

LC fiber connector
Communication port C & D
Wavelength 1300 nm

Fiber cable 50/125 μm or 62.5/125 μm multimode (glass)

9.1.4. Display
Table. 9.1.4. - 225. Technical data for the HMI LCD display.

Dimensions and resolution

Number of dots/resolution 320 x 160

Size 84.78 × 49.90 mm (3.34 × 1.96 in)

© Arcteq Relays Ltd 322

AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

Display

Type of display LCD

Color Monochrome

9.2. Functions

9.2.1. Protection functions

9.2.1.1. Non-directional overcurrent protection (I>; 50/51)

Table. 9.2.1.1. - 226. Technical data for the non-directional overcurrent function.

Input signals

Phase current fundamental frequency RMS

Current input magnitudes Phase current TRMS
Phase current peak-to-peak

Pick-up

Pick-up current setting 0.10…50.00 × In, setting step 0.0001 × In

Inrush 2nd harmonic blocking 0.10…50.00 %Ifund, setting step 0.01 %Ifund

Inaccuracy:
- Current ±0.5 %Iset or ±15 mA (0.10…4.0 × Iset)
nd
-2 harmonic blocking ±1.0 %-unit of the 2nd harmonic setting

Operation time

Definite time function operating time setting 0.00…1800.00 s, setting step 0.005 s

Inaccuracy:
- Definite time: Im/Iset ratio > 3 ±1.0 % or ±20 ms
- Definite time: Im/Iset ratio = 1.05…3 ±1.0 % or ±30 ms

IDMT operating time setting (ANSI/IEC) 0.02…1800.00 s, setting step 0.001 × parameter

IDMT setting parameters:

- k Time dial setting for IDMT 0.01…25.00, step 0.01
- A IDMT constant 0…250.0000, step 0.0001
- B IDMT constant 0…5.0000, step 0.0001
- C IDMT constant 0…250.0000, step 0.0001

Inaccuracy:
- IDMT operating time ±1.5 % or ±20 ms
- IDMT minimum operating time ±20 ms

Retardation time (overshoot) <25 ms

Instant operation time

Start time and instant operation time (trip):

- Im/Iset ratio > 3 <35 ms (typically 25 ms)
- Im/Iset ratio = 1.05…3 <50 ms

Reset

Reset ratio 97 % of the pick-up current setting

Reset time setting 0.010…10.000 s, step 0.005 s

Inaccuracy: Reset time ±1.0 % or ±50 ms

Instant reset time and start-up reset <50 ms

No
Notte!

• The release delay does not apply to phase-specific tripping.

323 © Arcteq Relays Ltd

 AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

9.2.1.2. Non-directional earth fault protection (I0>; 50N/51N)

Table. 9.2.1.2. - 227. Technical data for the non-directional earth fault function.

Input signals

Residual current fundamental frequency RMS

Current input magnitudes (I01 and I02) Residual current TRMS
Residual current peak-to-peak

Current input magnitudes (I0 calculated) Phase current fundamental frequency RMS

Pick-up

Measured residual current I01 (1 A)

Used magnitude Measured residual current I02 (0.2 A)
Calculated residual current I0Calc (5 A)

Pick-up current setting 0.0001…40.00 × In, setting step 0.0001 × In

Inaccuracy:
- Starting I01 (1 A) ±0.5 %I0set or ±3 mA (0.005…10.0 × Iset)
- Starting I02 (0.2 A) ±1.5 %I0set or ±1.0 mA (0.005…25.0 × Iset)
- Starting I0Calc (5 A) ±1.0 %I0set or ±15 mA (0.005…4.0 × Iset)

Operating time

Definite time function operating time setting 0.00…1800.00 s, setting step 0.005 s

Inaccuracy:
- Definite time: Im/Iset ratio > 3 ±1.0 % or ±20 ms
- Definite time: Im/Iset ratio = 1.05…3 ±1.0 % or ±30 ms

IDMT operating time setting (ANSI/IEC) 0.02…1800.00 s, setting step 0.001 × parameter

IDMT setting parameters:

- k Time dial setting for IDMT 0.01…25.00, step 0.01
- A IDMT constant 0…250.0000, step 0.0001
- B IDMT constant 0…5.0000, step 0.0001
- C IDMT constant 0…250.0000, step 0.0001

Inaccuracy:
- IDMT operating time ±1.5 % or ±20 ms
- IDMT minimum operating time ±20 ms

Retardation time (overshoot) <25 ms

Instant operation time

Start time and instant operation time (trip):

- Im/Iset ratio > 3.5 <50 ms (typically 35 ms)
- Im/Iset ratio = 1.05…3.5 <55 ms

Reset

Reset ratio 97 % of the pick-up current setting

Reset time setting 0.010…10.000 s, step 0.005 s

Inaccuracy: Reset time ±1.0 % or ±50 ms

Instant reset time and start-up reset <50 ms

No
Notte!

• The operation and reset time accuracy does not apply when the measured secondary
current in I02 is 1…20 mA. The pick-up is tuned to be more sensitive and the operation times
vary because of this.

© Arcteq Relays Ltd 324

AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

9.2.1.3. Negative sequence overcurrent/ phase current reversal/ current unbalance

protection (I2>; 46/46R/46L)
Table. 9.2.1.3. - 228. Technical data for the current unbalance function.

Input signals

Current input magnitudes Phase current fundamental frequency RMS

Pick-up

Negative sequence component I2pu

Used magnitude
Relative unbalance I2/I1

0.01…40.00 × In, setting step 0.01 × In (I2pu)

Pick-up setting
1.00…200.00 %, setting step 0.01 % (I2/I1)

Minimum phase current (at least one phase above) 0.01…2.00 × In, setting step 0.01 × In

Inaccuracy:
- Starting I2pu ±1.0 %-unit or ±100 mA (0.10…4.0 × In)
- Starting I2/I1 ±1.0 %-unit or ±100 mA (0.10…4.0 × In)

Operating time

Definite time function operating time setting 0.00…1800.00 s, setting step 0.005 s

Inaccuracy:
- Definite time (Im/Iset ratio > 1.05) ±1.5 % or ±60 ms

IDMT operating time setting (ANSI/IEC) 0.02…1800.00 s, setting step 0.001 × parameter

IDMT setting parameters:

- k Time dial setting for IDMT 0.01…25.00, step 0.01
- A IDMT Constant 0…250.0000, step 0.0001
- B IDMT Constant 0…5.0000, step 0.0001
- C IDMT Constant 0…250.0000, step 0.0001

Inaccuracy:
- IDMT operating time ±1.5 % or ±20 ms
- IDMT minimum operating time ±20 ms

Retardation time (overshoot) <5 ms

Instant operation time

Start time and instant operation time (trip):

- Im/Iset ratio > 1.05 <70 ms

Reset

Reset ratio 97 % of the pick-up setting

Reset time setting 0.010…10.000 s, step 0.005 s

Inaccuracy: Reset time ±1.5 % or ±60 ms

Instant reset time and start-up reset <55 ms

9.2.1.4. Harmonic overcurrent protection (Ih>; 50H/51H/68H)

Table. 9.2.1.4. - 229. Technical data for the harmonic overcurrent function.

Input signals

Phase current IL1/IL2/IL3 TRMS

Current input magnitudes Residual current I01 TRMS
Residual current I02 TRMS

Pick-up

Harmonic selection 2nd, 3rd, 4th, 5th, 6th 7th, 9th, 11th, 13th, 15th, 17th or 19th

325 © Arcteq Relays Ltd

 AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

Harmonic per unit (× IN)

Used magnitude
Harmonic relative (Ih/IL)

0.05…2.00 × IN, setting step 0.01 × IN (× IN)

Pick-up setting
5.00…200.00 %, setting step 0.01 % (Ih/IL)

Inaccuracy:
- Starting × IN <0.03 × IN (2nd, 3rd, 5th)
- Starting × Ih/IL <0.03 × IN tolerance to Ih (2nd, 3rd, 5th)

Operation time

Definite time function operating time setting 0.00…1800.00 s, setting step 0.005 s

Inaccuracy:
- Definite time (IM/ISET ratio >1.05) ±1.0 % or ±35 ms

IDMT operating time setting (ANSI/IEC) 0.02…1800.00 s, setting step 0.001 × parameter

IDMT setting parameters:

k Time dial setting for IDMT 0.01…25.00, step 0.01
A IDMT constant 0…250.0000, step 0.0001
B IDMT constant 0…5.0000, step 0.0001
C IDMT constant 0…250.0000, step 0.0001

Inaccuracy:
- IDMT operating time ±1.5 % or ±20 ms
- IDMT minimum operating time ±20 ms

Instant operation time

Start time and instant operation time (trip):

IM/ISET ratio >1.05 <50 ms

Reset

Reset ratio 95 % of the pick-up setting

Reset time setting 0.010…10.000 s, step 0.005 s

Inaccuracy: Reset time ±1.0 % or ±35 ms

Instant reset time and start-up reset <50 ms

No
Notte!

• Harmonics generally: The amplitude of the harmonic content has to be least 0.02 × IN when
the relative mode (Ih/IL) is used.
• Blocking: To achieve fast activation for blocking purposes with the harmonic
overcurrent stage, note that the harmonic stage may be activated by a rapid load change or
fault situation. An intentional activation lasts for approximately 20 ms if a harmonic
component is not present. The harmonic stage stays active if the harmonic content is above
the pick-up limit.
• Tripping: When using the harmonic overcurrent stage for tripping, please ensure that the
operation time is set to 20 ms (DT) or longer to avoid nuisance tripping caused by the above-
mentioned reasons.

9.2.1.5. Overvoltage protection (U>; 59)

Table. 9.2.1.5. - 230. Technical data for the overvoltage function.

Input signals

P-P voltage fundamental frequency RMS

Voltage input magnitudes
P-E voltage fundamental frequency RMS

Pick-up

© Arcteq Relays Ltd 326

AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

1 voltage
Pick-up terms 2 voltages
3 voltages

Pick-up setting 50.00…150.00 %UN, setting step 0.01 %UN

Inaccuracy:
- Voltage ±1.5 %USET

Operating time

Definite time function operating time setting 0.00…1800.00 s, setting step 0.005 s

Inaccuracy:
- Definite time (UM/USET ratio 1.05→) ±1.0 % or ±35 ms

IDMT operating time setting (ANSI/IEC) 0.02…1800.00 s, setting step 0.001 × parameter

IDMT setting parameters:

k Time dial setting for IDMT 0.01…25.00, step 0.01
A IDMT constant 0…250.0000, step 0.0001
B IDMT constant 0…5.0000, step 0.0001
C IDMT constant 0…250.0000, step 0.0001

Inaccuracy:
- IDMT operating time ±1.5 % or ±20 ms
- IDMT minimum operating time ±20 ms

Instant operation time

Start time and instant operation time (trip):

- UM/USET ratio 1.05→ <50 ms

Reset

Reset ratio 97 % of the pick-up voltage setting

Reset time setting 0.010…10.000 s, step 0.005 s

Inaccuracy: Reset time ±1.0 % or ±45 ms

Instant reset time and start-up reset <50 ms

9.2.1.6. Undervoltage protection (U<; 27)

Table. 9.2.1.6. - 231. Technical data for the undervoltage function.

Input signals

P-P voltage fundamental frequency RMS

Voltage input magnitudes
P-E voltage fundamental frequency RMS

Pick-up

1 voltage
Pick-up terms 2 voltages
3 voltages

Pick-up setting 0.00…120.00 %UN, setting step 0.01 %UN

Inaccuracy:
- Voltage ±1.5 %USET or ±30 mV

Low voltage block

Pick-up setting 0.00…80.00 %UN, setting step 0.01 %UN

Inaccuracy:
- Voltage ±1.5 %USET or ±30 mV

Operation time

Definite time function operating time setting 0.00…1800.00 s, setting step 0.005 s

327 © Arcteq Relays Ltd

 AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

Inaccuracy:
- Definite time (UM/USET ratio 1.05→) ±1.0 % or ±35 ms

IDMT operating time setting (ANSI/IEC) 0.02…1800.00 s, setting step 0.001 × parameter

IDMT setting parameters:

k Time dial setting for IDMT 0.01…25.00, step 0.01
A IDMT constant 0…250.0000, step 0.0001
B IDMT constant 0…5.0000, step 0.0001
C IDMT constant 0…250.0000, step 0.0001

Inaccuracy:
- IDMT operating time ±1.5 % or ±20 ms
- IDMT minimum operating time ±20 ms

Instant operation time

Start time and instant operation time (trip):

- UM/USET ratio 1.05→ <65 ms

Retardation time (overshoot) <30 ms

Reset

Reset ratio 103 % of the pick-up voltage setting

Reset time setting 0.010…10.000 s, step 0.005 s

Inaccuracy: Reset time ±1.0 % or ±45 ms

Instant reset time and start-up reset <50 ms

No
Notte!

• The low-voltage block is not in use when its pick-up setting is set to 0 %. The undervoltage
function is in trip stage when the LV block is disabled and the device has no voltage injection.
• After the low voltage blocking condition, the undervoltage stage does not trip unless the
voltage exceeds the pick-up setting first.

9.2.1.7. Neutral overvoltage protection (U0>; 59N)

Table. 9.2.1.7. - 232. Technical data for the neutral overvoltage function.

Input signals

P-E voltage fundamental frequency RMS (U0Calc)

Voltage input magnitudes
U0 voltage fundamental frequency RMS

Pick-up

Pick-up voltage setting 1.00…50.00 % U0N, setting step 0.01 × IN

Inaccuracy:
- Voltage U0 ±1.5 %U0SET or ±30 mV
- Voltage U0Calc ±150 mV

Operation time

Definite time function operating time setting 0.00…1800.00 s, setting step 0.005 s

Inaccuracy:
- Definite time (U0M/U0SET ratio 1.05→) ±1.0 % or ±45 ms

IDMT operating time setting (ANSI/IEC) 0.02…1800.00 s, setting step 0.001 × parameter

IDMT setting parameters:

k Time dial setting for IDMT 0.01…25.00, step 0.01
A IDMT constant 0…250.0000, step 0.0001
B IDMT constant 0…5.0000, step 0.0001
C IDMT constant 0…250.0000, step 0.0001

© Arcteq Relays Ltd 328

AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

Inaccuracy:
- IDMT operating time ±1.5 % or ±20 ms
- IDMT minimum operating time ±20 ms

Instant operation time

Start time and instant operation time (trip):

- U0M/U0SET ratio 1.05→ <50 ms

Reset

Reset ratio 97 % of the pick-up voltage setting

Reset time setting 0.000 … 150.000 s, step 0.005 s

Inaccuracy: Reset time ±1.0 % or ±50 ms

Instant reset time and start-up reset <50 ms

9.2.1.8. Sequence voltage protection (U1/U2>/<; 47/27P/59NP)

Table. 9.2.1.8. - 233. Technical data for the sequence voltage function.

Input signals

P-E voltage fundamental frequency RMS

Voltage input magnitudes
P-P voltage fundamental frequency RMS + U0

Pick-up

Pick-up setting 5.00…150.00 %UN, setting step 0.01 %UN

Inaccuracy:
- Voltage ±1.5 %USET or ±30 mV

Low voltage block

Pick-up setting 1.00…80.00 %UN, setting step 0.01 %UN

Inaccuracy:
±1.5 %USET or ±30 mV
-Voltage

Operation time

Definite time function operating time setting 0.00…1800.00 s, setting step 0.005 s

Inaccuracy
-Definite Time (UM/USET ratio 1.05→) ±1.0 % or ±35 ms

IDMT operating time setting (ANSI/IEC) 0.02…1800.00 s, setting step 0.001 × parameter

IDMT setting parameters:

k Time dial setting for IDMT 0.01…25.00, step 0.01
A IDMT constant 0…250.0000, step 0.0001
B IDMT constant 0…5.0000, step 0.0001
C IDMT constant 0…250.0000, step 0.0001

Inaccuracy:
- IDMT operating time ±1.5 % or ±20 ms
- IDMT minimum operating time ±20 ms

Instant operation time

Start time and instant operation time (trip):

<65 ms
- UM/USET ratio <0.95/1.05→

Reset

Reset ratio 97 or 103 % of the pick-up voltage setting

Reset time setting 0.010…10.000 s, step 0.005 s

Inaccuracy: Reset time ±1.0 % or ±35 ms

Instant reset time and start-up reset <50 ms

329 © Arcteq Relays Ltd

 AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

9.2.1.9. Line thermal overload protection (TF>; 49F)

Table. 9.2.1.9. - 234. Technical data for the line thermal overload protection function.

Inputs

Current input magnitude Phase TRMS current (up to the 31st harmonic)

Settings

Time constants τ 1

Time constant value 0.0…500.00 min, step 0.1 min

Service factor (maximum overloading) 0.01…5.00 × IN, step 0.01 × IN

- Ambient temperature (Set –60.0…500.0 deg, step 0.1 deg and RTD)
Thermal model biasing
- Negative sequence current

Thermal replica temperature estimates Selectable between °C and °F

Outputs

- Alarm 1 0…150 %, step 1 %

- Alarm 2 0…150 %, step 1 %
- Thermal trip 0…150 %, step 1 %
- Trip delay 0.000…3600.000 s, step 0.005 s
- Restart inhibit 0…150 %, step 1 %

Inaccuracy

- Starting ±0.5 % of the set pick-up value

- Operating time ±5 % or ± 500 ms

9.2.1.10. Non-directional undercurrent protection (I<; 37)

Table. 9.2.1.10. - 235. Technical data for the undercurrent function.

Input signals

Current input magnitudes Phase current fundamental frequency RMS

Pick-up

Pick-up current setting 0.10…40.00 × IN, setting step 0.10 × IN

Inaccuracy:
- Current ±0.5 %ISET or ±15 mA (0.10…4.0 × ISET)

Operation time

Definite time function operating time setting 0.00…150.00 s, setting step 0.005 s

Inaccuracy:
- Definite time (IM/ISET ratio 0.95) ±1.0 % or ±30 ms

Instant operation time

Start time and instant operation time (trip):

- IM/ISET ratio <0.95 <50 ms

Reset

Reset ratio 103 % of the pick-up current setting

Reset time setting 0.010…150.000 s, step 0.005 s

Inaccuracy: Reset time ±1.0 % or ±35 ms

Instant reset time and start-up reset <50 ms

© Arcteq Relays Ltd 330

AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

9.2.1.11. Arc fault protection (IArc>/I0Arc>; 50Arc/50NArc) (optional)

Table. 9.2.1.11. - 236. Technical data for the arc fault protection function.

Input signals

Sample-based phase current measurement

Current input magnitudes
Sample-based residual current measurement

Channels S1, S2, S3, S4 (pressure and light sensor, or light-only sensor)
Arc point sensor inputs
Up to four (4) sensors per channel

System frequency operating range 6.00…75.00 Hz

Pick-up

Pick-up current setting (phase current) 0.50…40.00 × IN, setting step 0.01 × IN
Pick-up current setting (residual current) 0.10…40.00 × IN, setting step 0.01 × IN
Pick-up light intensity 8, 25 or 50 kLx (the sensor is selected in the order code)

Starting inaccuracy (IArc> and I0Arc>) ±3 % of the set pick-up value > 0.5 × IN setting. 5 mA < 0.5 × IN setting.

Point sensor detection radius 180 degrees

Operation time

Light only:
- Semiconductor outputs HSO1 and HSO2 Typically 7 ms (3…12 ms)
- Regular relay outputs Typically 10 ms (6.5…15 ms)

Light + current criteria (zone 1…4):

- Semiconductor outputs HSO1 and HSO2 Typically 10 ms (6.5…14 ms)
- Regular relay outputs Typically 14 ms (10…18 ms)

Arc BI only:
- Semiconductor outputs HSO1 and HSO2 Typically 7 ms (2…12 ms)
- Regular relay outputs Typically 10 ms (6.5…15 ms)

Reset

Reset ratio for current 97 % of the pick-up setting

Reset time <35 ms

No
Notte!

• The maximum length of the arc sensor cable is 200 meters.

9.2.2. Control functions

9.2.2.1. Setting group selection

Table. 9.2.2.1. - 237. Technical data for the setting group selection function.

Settings and control modes

Setting groups 8 independent, control-prioritized setting groups

Control scale Common for all installed functions which support setting groups

Control mode

Local Any digital signal available in the device

Remote Force change overrule of local controls either from the setting tool, HMI or SCADA

Operation time

Reaction time <5 ms from receiving the control signal

331 © Arcteq Relays Ltd

 AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

9.2.2.2. Object control and monitoring

Table. 9.2.2.2. - 238. Technical data for the object control and monitoring function.

Signals

Digital inputs
Input signals
Software signals

Close command output

Output signals
Open command output

Operation time

Breaker traverse time setting 0.02…500.00 s, setting step 0.02 s

Max. close/open command pulse length 0.02…500.00 s, setting step 0.02 s

Control termination time out setting 0.02…500.00 s, setting step 0.02 s

Inaccuracy:
- Definite time operating time ±0.5 % or ±10 ms

Breaker control operation time

External object control time <75 ms

Object control during auto-reclosing See the technical sheet for the auto-reclosing function.

9.2.2.3. Switch-on-to-fault (SOTF)

Table. 9.2.2.3. - 239. Technical data for the switch-on-to-fault function.

Initialization signals

SOTF activate input Any IED blocking input signal (Object closed signal, etc.)

Pick-up

SOTF function input Any IED blocking input signal (I> or similar)

SOTF activation time

Activation time <40 ms (measured from the trip contact)

SOTF release time

Release time setting 0.000…1800.000 s, setting step 0.005 s

Inaccuracy:
- Definite time ±1.0 % or ±30 ms

SOTF instant release time <40 ms (measured from the trip contact)

9.2.3. Monitoring functions

9.2.3.1. Current transformer supervision

Table. 9.2.3.1. - 240. Technical data for the current transformer supervision function.

Input signals

Phase current fundamental frequency RMS

Current input magnitudes
Residual current fundamental frequency RMS (optional)

Pick-up

© Arcteq Relays Ltd 332

AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

Pick-up current settings:

- ISET high limit 0.10…40.00 × IN, setting step 0.01 × IN
- ISET low limit 0.10…40.00 × IN, setting step 0.01 × IN
- ISUM difference 0.10…40.00 × IN, setting step 0.01 × IN
- ISET ratio 0.01…100.00 %, setting step 0.01 %
- I2/I1 ratio 0.01…100.00 %, setting step 0.01 %

Inaccuracy:
- Starting IL1, IL2, IL3 ±0.5 %ISET or ±15 mA (0.10…4.0 × ISET)
- Starting I2/I1 ±1.0 %I2SET / I1SET or ±100 mA (0.10…4.0 × IN)
- Starting I01 (1 A) ±0.5 %I0SET or ±3 mA (0.005…10.0 × ISET)
- Starting I02 (0.2 A) ±1.5 %I0SET or ±1.0 mA (0.005…25.0 × ISET)

Time delay for alarm

Definite time function operating time setting 0.00…1800.00 s, setting step 0.005 s

Inaccuracy_
- Definite time (IM/ISET ratio > 1.05) ±2.0 % or ±80 ms

Instant operation time (alarm):

- IM/ISET ratio > 1.05 <80 ms (<50 ms in differential protection relays)

Reset

Reset ratio 97/103 % of the pick-up current setting

Instant reset time and start-up reset <80 ms (<50 ms in differential protection relays)

9.2.3.2. Voltage transformer supervision (60)

Table. 9.2.3.2. - 241. Technical data for the voltage transformer supervision function.

Input signals

P-P voltage fundamental frequency RMS

Voltage input magnitudes
P-E voltage fundamental frequency RMS

Pick-up

Pick-up settings:
- Voltage (low pick-up) 0.05…0.50 × UN, setting step 0.01 × UN
- Voltage (high pick-up) 0.50…1.10 × UN, setting step 0.01 × UN
- Angle shift limit 2.00…90.00 deg, setting step 0.10 deg

Inaccuracy:
- Voltage ±1.5 %USET
- U angle (U> 1 V) ±1.5°

External line/bus side pick-up (optional) 0→1

Time delay for alarm

Definite time function operating time setting 0.00…1800.00 s, setting step 0.005 s

Inaccuracy:
- Definite time (UM/USET ratio > 1.05/0.95) ±1.0 % or ±35 ms

Instant operation time (alarm):

- UM/USET ratio > 1.05/0.95 <80 ms

VTS MCB trip bus/line (external input) <50 ms

Reset

Reset ratio 97/103 % of the pick-up voltage setting

Reset time setting 0.010…10.000 s, step 0.005 s

Inaccuracy: Reset time ±2.0 % or ±80 ms

Instant reset time and start-up reset <50 ms

VTS MCB trip bus/line (external input) <50 ms

333 © Arcteq Relays Ltd

 AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

No
Notte!

• When turning on the auxiliary power of an IED, the normal condition of a stage has to be
fulfilled before tripping.

9.2.3.3. Disturbance recorder

Table. 9.2.3.3. - 242. Technical data for the disturbance recorder function.

Recorded values

Recorder 0…20 channels

analog channels Freely selectable

0…95 channels
Recorder digital
Freely selectable analog and binary signals
channels
5 ms sample rate (FFT)

Performance

Sample rate 8, 16, 32 or 64 samples/cycle

0.000…1800.000 s, setting step 0.001 s

Recording length
The maximum length is determined by the chosen signals.

0…100, 60 MB of shared flash memory reserved

Number of recordings The maximum number of recordings according to the chosen signals and operation time setting
combined

9.2.3.4. Circuit breaker wear monitoring

Table. 9.2.3.4. - 243. Technical data for the circuit breaker wear monitoring function.

Pick-up

Breaker characteristics settings:

- Nominal breaking current 0.00…100.00 kA, setting step 0.001 kA
- Maximum breaking current 0.00…100.00 kA, setting step 0.001 kA
- Operations with nominal current 0…200 000 operations, setting step 1 operation
- Operations with maximum breaking current 0…200 000 operations, setting step 1 operation

Pick-up setting for Alarm 1 and Alarm 2 0…200 000 operations, setting step 1 operation

Inaccuracy

Inaccuracy for current/operations counter:

- Current measurement element 0.1× IN > I < 2 × IN ±0.2 % of the measured current, rest 0.5 %
- Operation counter ±0.5 % of operations deducted

9.2.3.5. Total harmonic distortion

Table. 9.2.3.5. - 244. Technical data for the total harmonic distortion function.

Input signals

Current input magnitudes Current measurement channels (FFT result) up to the 31st harmonic
component.

Pick-up

Power THD
Operating modes
Amplitude THD

Pick-up setting for all comparators 0.10…200.00 % , setting step 0.01 %

±3 % of the set pick-up value > 0.5 × IN setting; 5 mA < 0.5

Inaccuracy
× IN setting.

Time delay

© Arcteq Relays Ltd 334

AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

Definite time function operating time setting for all

0.00…1800.00 s, setting step 0.005 s
timers

Inaccuracy:
- Definite time operating time
- Instant operating time, when IM/ISET ratio > 3 ±0.5 % or ±10 ms
Typically <20ms
- Instant operating time, when IM/ISET ratio 1.05 <
Typically <25 ms
IM/ISET < 3

Reset

Reset time Typically <10 ms

Reset ratio 97 %

9.2.3.6. Voltage memory

Table. 9.2.3.6. - 245. Technical data for the voltage memory function.

Input signals

P-P voltage fundamental frequency RMS

Input magnitudes P-E voltage fundamental frequency RMS
Phase current fundamental frequency RMS (back-up frequency)

Pick-up

Pick-up voltage setting 2.00…50.00 %UN, setting step 0.01 x %UN

Pick-up current setting (optional) 0.01…50.00 × IN, setting step 0.01 × IN

Inaccuracy:
- Voltage ±1.5 %USET or ±30 mV
- Current ±0.5 %ISET or ±15 mA (0.10…4.0 × ISET)

Operation time

Angle memory activation delay <20 ms (typically 5 ms)

Maximum active time 0.020…50.000 s, setting step 0.005 s

Inaccuracy:
- Definite time (UM/USET ratio >1.05) ±1.0 % or ±35 ms

Angle memory

Angle drift while voltage is absent ±1.0° per 1 second

Reset

Reset ratio:
- Voltage memory (voltage) 103 % of the pick-up voltage setting
- Voltage memory (current) 97 % of the pick-up current setting

Reset time <50 ms

Note!

• This function is integrated into the directional overcurrent (ANSI: 67) and distance
protection (ANSI: 21G) functions.

9.3. Tests and environmental

Electrical environment compatibility

Table. 9.3. - 246. Disturbance tests.

All tests CE-approved and tested according to EN 60255-26

Emissions

335 © Arcteq Relays Ltd

 AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

Conducted emissions:
150 kHz…30 MHz
EN 60255-26 Ch. 5.2, CISPR 22

Radiated emissions:
30…1 000 MHz
EN 60255-26 Ch. 5.1, CISPR 11

Immunity

Electrostatic discharge (ESD): Air discharge 15 kV

EN 60255-26, IEC 61000-4-2 Contact discharge 8 kV

Electrical fast transients (EFT):

Power supply input 4 kV, 5/50 ns, 5 kHz
EN 60255-26, IEC 61000-4-4
Other inputs and outputs 4 kV, 5/50 ns, 5 kHz

Surge: Between wires 2 kV, 1.2/50 µs

EN 60255-26, IEC 61000-4-5 Between wire and earth 4 kV, 1.2/50 µs

Radiated RF electromagnetic field:

f = 80….1 000 MHz, 10 V/m
EN 60255-26, IEC 61000-4-3

Conducted RF field:
f = 150 kHz….80 MHz, 10 V (RMS)
EN 60255-26, IEC 61000-4-6

Table. 9.3. - 247. Voltage tests.

Dielectric voltage test

EN 60255-27, IEC 60255-5, EN 60255-1 2 kV (AC), 50 Hz, 1 min

Impulse voltage test

EN 60255-27, IEC 60255-5 5 kV, 1.2/50 µs, 0.5 J

Physical environment compatibility

Table. 9.3. - 248. Mechanical tests.

Vibration test

2…13.2 Hz, ± 3.5 mm

EN 60255-1, EN 60255-27, IEC 60255-21-1 Class 1
13.2…100 Hz, ± 1.0 g

Shock and bump test

EN 60255-1,EN 60255-27, IEC 60255-21-2 Class 1 20 g, 1 000 bumps/direction.

Table. 9.3. - 249. Environmental tests.

Damp heat (cyclic)

EN 60255-1, IEC 60068-2-30 Operational: +25…+55 °C, 93…97 % (RH), 12+12h

Dry heat

Storage: +70 °C, 16 h

EN 60255-1, IEC 60068-2-2
Operational: +55 °C, 16 h

Cold test

Storage: –40 °C, 16 h

EN 60255-1, IEC 60068-2-1
Operational: –20 °C, 16 h

© Arcteq Relays Ltd 336

AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

Table. 9.3. - 250. Environmental conditions.

IP classes

IP54 (front)
Casing protection class
IP21 (rear)

Temperature ranges

Ambient service temperature range –35…+70 °C

Transport and storage temperature range –40…+70 °C

Other

Altitude <2000 m

Overvoltage category III

Pollution degree 2

Casing and package

Table. 9.3. - 251. Dimensions and weight.

Without packaging (net)

Height: 117 mm (4U)

Dimensions Width: 127 mm (¼ rack)
Depth: 174 mm (no cards & connectors)

Weight 1.5 kg

With packaging (gross)

Height: 170 mm
Dimensions Width: 242 mm
Depth: 219 mm

Weight 2 kg

337 © Arcteq Relays Ltd

 AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

10. Ordering information

© Arcteq Relays Ltd 338

AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

Accessories

Or
Order
der code Descrip
Description
tion No
Notte Manufact
Manufactur
urer
er

External 6-channel 2 or 3 wires RTD Input module, pre- Requires an external power Advanced Co.
ADAM-4015-CE
configured module Ltd.

ADAM-4018+- External 8-ch Thermocouple mA Input module, pre- Requires an external power Advanced Co.
BE configured module Ltd.

AQX033 Raising frame 87 mm Arcteq Ltd.

AQX070 Raising frame 40 mm Arcteq Ltd.

AQX069 Combiflex frame Arcteq Ltd.

AQX097 Wall mounting bracket Arcteq Ltd.

AQ-01B Light point sensor unit (25,000 lux threshold) Max. cable length 200 m Arcteq Ltd.

AQ-01C Light point sensor unit (50,000 lux threshold) Max. cable length 200 m Arcteq Ltd.

Pressure and light point sensor unit (8,000 lux

AQ-02A Max. cable length 200 m Arcteq Ltd.
threshold)

Pressure and light point sensor unit (25,000 lux

AQ-02B Max. cable length 200 m Arcteq Ltd.
threshold)

Pressure and light point sensor unit (50,000 lux

AQ-02C Max. cable length 200 m Arcteq Ltd.
threshold)

339 © Arcteq Relays Ltd

 AQ -C215
Instruction manual

Version: 2.03

11. Contact and reference information

Manufacturer
Arcteq Relays Ltd.

Visiting and postal address

Kvartsikatu 2 A 1

65300 Vaasa, Finland

Contacts

Phone: +358 10 3221 370

Fax: +358 10 3221 389

Website (general): arcteq.fi

Website (technical support): support.arcteq.fi

E-mail (sales): sales@arcteq.fi

© Arcteq Relays Ltd 340